AN 


EXPOSITION 


REVELATION    OF   JOHI, 


THE    FOURTH    CHAPTER, 


REV.  JOEL^IANN. 


NEW   YORK: 

E.    FRENCH,  335   NASSAU   STREET. 

1851. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1851,  by 

JOEL   MANN, 

In  the  Clerk's  office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  UniteJ  States  for  the  District 
of  Rhode  Island. 


S.  W.  BENEDICT, 
Printer,  16  Spruce-Street. 


TO 
JAMES  B.  M.  POTTER,  ESQ., 

BY    WHOSE    LIBERALITY    THE    AUTHOR    HAS     BEEN     ENCOUR- 
AGED    TO     GIVE     THIS     VOLUME     TO    THE    PUBLIC  ; 
AND  TO  THE  PEOPLE  OF  KINGSTON,  R.   I., 
IN  WHOSE  KINDNESS  AND  SYMPATHY  WE  HAVE  SHARED, 
AND  FOR  WHOSE    BENEFIT    THIS    EXPOSITION  WAS    PREPARED 

AND  DELIVERED  IN   THE    FORM  OF    LECTURES, 
IT    IS   NOW    GRATEFULLY    AND    AFFECTIONATELY    INSCRIBED. 

J.   M. 


PKEFACE. 


It  is  well  known  that  a  great  variety  of  opinions  have 
been  expressed  by  distinguished  theological  writers  on  the 
Apocalyptic  visions  which  compose  the  prophetic  part  of 
this  truly  wonderful  book.  This  will  not  appear  surprising 
when  we  consider  the  nature  of  symbolical  language,  and 
the  difficulty  of  ascertaining  its  verification  in  the  events 
of  the  past  and  the  future.  It  has  seemed  to  me  a  safe 
course  to  make  the  sacred  scriptures  interpret  themselves 
as  far  as  practicable ;  and,  as  John  has  written  on  many  of 
the  same  topics,  and  employed  many  of  the  same  figures 
and  emblems  as  did  the  ancient  prophets,  his  language 
may,  to  a  large  extent,  be  interpreted  by  theirs. 

Though  I  have  been  assisted  by  the  valuable  commen- 
taries on  the  Apocalypse  in  common  use,  I  have  not  taken 
them  for  my  guides  ;  but  have  endeavored  to  examine 
these  recorded  visions  for  myself.  In  doing  this,  I  have  felt 
constrained  to  differ  from  them  in  some  respects,  which  may 
be  deemed  important.     And  I  have  only  to  ask  of  those 


vi  PREFACE. 

who  may  dissent  from  the  views  I  have  expressed,  that  they 
will  give  the  whole  matter  a  thorough  examination. 

That  the  effect  of  these  exegetical  notes  may  be  to  cause 
people  of  all  classes  to  study  more  critically  the  figurative 
language  of  the  Bible,  and  to  confirm  all  readers  in  a  sin- 
cere belief  of  what  God  has  revealed,  is  the  fervent  wish 
of  the  author. 


INTRODUCTOHY  REMARKS. 


At  the  commencement  of  a  critical  and  thorough  examination 
of  this  most  difficult  of  all  the  books  in  the  sacred  volume,  it  is 
important  to  fix  in  our  minds  certain  principles  of  interpretation 
to  guide  us  in  our  investigations.  To  these  we  should  adhere  as 
safeguards  against  the  suggestions  of  imagination  and  the  vagaries 
of  ingenious  speculation.  We  should  adhere  to  them,  though 
they  should  carry  us  wide  from  the  track  of  those  who  have  given 
interpretations  of  these  prophetic  teachings. 

One  of  these  principles  is,  that  in  order  to  ascertain  the  mean- 
ing of  the  revelator  in  a  particular  instance,  the  symbols,  or  em- 
blems, must  be  explained.  These  are  objects  cognizable  by  the 
senses,  designed  to  convey  ideas  of  events  civil  or  religious. 
Though  there  may  be  coincidences  between  the  symbols  and 
the  things  signified  by  them ;  yet,  in  their  nature  they  are  entirely 
different.  Thus,  a  beast  is  the  emblem  of  an  empire, — thunderings, 
lightnings,  and  earthquakes,  represent  civil  commotions,  and  revolu- 
tions,— and  the  woman  sitting  on  a  scarlet  colored  beast  is  "  that 
great  city  which  reigneth  over  the  kings  of  the  earth."  To  pro- 
ceed to  give  an  interpretation  without  first  ascei'taining  the  mean- 
ing of  the  symbol,  is  not  explaining,  but  guessing. 

Another  principle  is,  that  when  the  symbol  or  figure  is  adopted 
from  the  writings  of  the  ancient  prophets,  or  is  the  same  as  used 
by  them,  it  should  be  interpreted  as  having  a  similar  signification, 
80  that,  as  far  as  practicable,  one  portion  of  divine  revelation  may 
explain  another. 

One  other  principle  I  give  in  the  words  of  Woodhouse: — 
"  Unless  the  language  and  symbols  of  Revelation  should  in  par- 
ticular passages  direct,  or  evidently  require  another  mode  of  inter- 


viii  INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 

pretation,  the  predictions  are  to  be  applied  to  events  occurring  in  the 
kingdom  of  Christ.  For,"  he  remarks,  "  wiienever  sacred  prophecy 
is  seen  to  deviate  from  its  peculiar  object,  it  is  in  such  instances 
only,  wherein  the  fortunes  of  God's  people  have  become  necessa- 
rily involved  with  those  of  the  heathen  nations ;  and  thus  we  find 
in  the  boundless  mass  of  history  to  what  kind  of  history  prophecy 
is  to  be  applied.  When  the  people  of  God  were  to  become  sub- 
ject to  the  four  monarchies,  the  character,  and  succession,  and  fates 
of  those  monarchies  were  predicted ;  but  the  main  object  contin- 
ually kept  in  view  in  the  sacred  history  was  their  deliverance  from 
those  successive  yokes  by  the  superseding  dominion  of  the  Mes- 
siah. This  supreme  and  universal  dominion,  gradually,  and  finally 
to  prevail,  appears  to  be  the  grand  object  of  all  sacred  prophecy  : 
and  revolutions  of  worldly  power  among  the  Gentiles,  seem 
noticed  only  at  those  times  when  they  impede  or  promote  it." 

This  book  was  doubtless  written  to  be  understood,  for  John  was 
commanded  not  to  seal  up  the  sayings  it  contains,  but  to  leave 
them  open  for  the  instruction  and  consolation  of  believers  in  every 
age.  It  is  no  presumption  therefore,  to  assert  that  it  can  be  under- 
stood, and  he  is  pronounced  "  blessed  or  happy  who  keepeth  the 
sayings  of  this  prophecy."  To  keep  them  implies  an  understand- 
ing of  them,  and  a  belief  of  them.  Indeed,  a  revelation  which 
cannot  be  understood  is  no  revelation  at  all. 

A  fact  to  be  kept  in  view  is,  that  these  are  visions, — represen- 
tations made  to  the  mind,  not  things  actually  beheld  by  the  organs 
of  sight.  They  were  seen  only  in  the  sense  in  which  we  see  things 
in  a  dream.  They  had  no  more  real  existence  than  the  sheet  filled 
with  all  manner  of  beasts,  which  Peter  in  a  sleep  saw  let  do\Tn 
from  heaven.  Blany  of  the  emblems  never  had  a  real  existence 
anywhere;  such  as  the  monsters  with  unnatural  members, — the 
locusts  having  shapes  like  horses,  vvith  crowns  like  gold  on  their 
heads,  and  faces  similar  to  those  of  men, — and  the  woman  clothed 
with  the  sun,  and  the  moon  under  her  feet.  Much  of  the  imagery 
is  the  same  as  was  used  by  the  ancient  prophets,  and  much  of  it 
has  its  prototypes  in  the  Levitic.il  economy. 

Another  fact  is,  that  the  prophetic  part  of  this  book  is  loholly  sym- 
bolic. All  its  disclosures  are  made  under  emblematic  representa- 
tions, not  unlike  the  hieroglyphics  of  Egypt.     The  first  business, 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS.  ix 

and  that  too  the  most  difficult,  is  to  decipher  the  emblems,  show 
their  meaning,  and  their  verification  in  the  events  of  the  past,  or 
those  which  are  to  come  in  the  future.  A  great  error  has  been 
committed  by  understanding  parts  of  these  visions  literally,  and 
other  parts  figuratively  in  the  same  connection,  where  all  is  mani- 
festly figurative.  This  throws  confusion  over  the  whole,  and 
necessarily  leads  to  an  incorrect  interpretation. 

In  numerous  instances  also,  even  professed  expounders  of  the 
Apocalypse  have  given  no  explanation  of  the  emblems,  as  if  they 
deemed  them  unimportant,  or  because  they  knew  not  what  inter- 
pretation to  give.  I  regard  it  as  a  fact  by  no  means  to  be  over- 
looked, that  John  never  introduces  a  figure  or  a  symbol  unmean- 
ingly, or  as  mere  ornamental  costume.  And  he  who  would  give 
a  full  and  correct  explanation  of  his  language  must  pay  particular 
attention  to  that  foct.  Much  learning  may  be  displayed  in  a  philo- 
logical and  grammatical  exegesis  of  this  book,  and  very  little  light 
be  imparted.  Tiie  fatigued  and  discouraged  reader  may  rise  up 
just  about  as  ignorant  of  the  true  meaning  of  these  hierophantic 
visions  as  when  he  began. 

The  prophetic  portion  of  this  book,  which  it  is  my  design  to 
elucidate,  commences  with  the  fourth  chapter.  With  a  few  gen- 
eral remarks  on  the  introduction  contained  in  the  first  chapter,  I 
pass  over  the  specific  messages  addressed  to  tlie  seven  churches 
which  make  up  the  two  following  chapters. 

The  source  of  these  apocalyptic  \'isions  is  declared  to  be  God 
himself;  and  as  Christ  has  ever  been  the  Teacher  of  men,  they 
were  by  him  communicated  to  John  by  the  instrumentality  of  an 
angel.  The  record  of  them  was  made  in  obedience  to  the  com- 
mand of  Christ,  and  was  sent  to  the  seven  churches  in  Asia  Minor. 
The  writer  makes  himself  knoAvii  as  John  the  apostle  and  evr.n- 
gelist,  by  declaring  that  he  was  a  cotemporary,  and  brother,  and 
fellow-sufierer  in  tribulation  with  the  members  of  those  churches, 
and  also  by  the  fact  that  he  was  banished  to  the  Isle  of  Patmos  for 
his  maintenance  of  God's  truth,  and  his  testimony  concerning 
Christ. 

It  was  on  the  Lord's  day  tJiat  the  first  of  these  visions  wrs 
given  to  him,  which  was  significant  of  the  nature  of  tlie  wliole  £s 
pertaining  to  Christ  and  his  church.  He  saw  seven  golden  candle- 
1* 


X  INTRODUCTORY   REMARKS. 

sticks  or  lamps,  which,  as  he  was  immediately  informed,  were  em- 
blems of  the  seven  churches ;  and  in  the  midst  of  thera  one  like  a 
S071  of  man, — not  Christ  himself,  but  an  emblematic  representation 
of  him, — one  having  a  human  form.  Daniel  also  had  a  Aisionary 
sight  of  one  like  a  son  of  man,  who  came  in  the  clouds  of  heaven, 
— to  whom  was  given  dominion  and  glory,  and  a  kingdom,  that  all 
nations  should  serve  him.  In  both  cases  it  is  Blessiah  who  is 
meant. 

The  ancient  Hebrew  prophet  discoursed  of  the  four  great  mon- 
archies which  were  to  have  supremacy  in  the  eastern  portion  of  the 
world,  the  first  of  which,  viz.,  the  Chaldean,  was  then  in  the  zenith 
of  its  glory.  As  three  of  those  monarchies  had  existed  their  des- 
tined period,  and  had  passed  away,  leaving  only  their  broken  frag- 
ments, John  discourses  of  the  fourth,  which  is  the  Roman,  in  which 
the  destinies  of  the  Christian  church  and  kingdom  of  Christ  were 
involved.  And  the  attentive  biblical  reader  will  not  fail  to  obsei-ve 
that  the  emblems  and  symbols  which  John  employs  are  chiefly 
those  which  are  found  in  the  writings  of  Daniel,  Ezekiel,  and 
Isaiah. 

This  emblematic  man  standing  among  the  lamps,  is  described,  as 
having  the  garb  of  a  Jewish  priest,  his  head  surrounded  with  a 
glory, — his  eyes  like  "  a  consuming  fire,"  denoting  his  mental  pene- 
tration, and  his  power  to  destroy; — his  feet  like  pure  brass,  re- 
garded as  the  most  durable  metal,  and  polished  to  the  utmost 
brightness,  indicating,  perhaps,  the  permanency  of  his  government 
and  the  holiness  of  his  ways,  even  in  his  most  terrible  judgments 
on  mankind; — and  his  voice  like  the  deep  roar  of  cataracts,  or  that 
of  the  mighty  ocean,  which  is  heard  afar  off,  showed  that  His  word 
should  be  published  by  myriads  of  tongues,  and  command  the  at- 
tention and  awe  of  mankind.  The  whole  of  this  introductory 
vision,  us  it  seems  to  me,  was  intended  to  show  what  Christ  would 
be  to  his  churches,  and  what  he  would  do  for  them.  Another 
symbolic  representation  of  Christ  is  given  in  the  nineteenth  chap- 
ter dificring  from  this,  but  equally  adapted  to  set  forth  the  great 
thino-s  he  will  do  for  liis  cause  in  the  world. 

1  remark  also,  that  this  book  was  probably  written  previous  to 
the  destruction   of  Jerusalem   and   the  Jewish  commonwealth. 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS.  xi 

Whatever  may  be  thought  of  the  expressions, —  Things  which 
must  shortly  come  to  pass,  and  The  time  is  at  hand,  the  seventh 
verse  seems  to  be  a  palpable  intimation  of  that  great  catastrophe. 
With  some  variation,  it  is  a  repetition  of  the  language  which  the 
Saviour  used  in  his  impressive  description  of  that  event  as  re- 
corded in  the  twenty-fourth  chapter  of  Matthew's  gospel.  An 
abrupt  call  is  made  for  attention  to  something  which  is  declared 
as  if  even  then  commencing.  Behold  He  cometh  with  clouds,  that 
is,  v/ith  a  great  host, — clouds  being  a  symbol  of  a  multitude.  He 
will  be  so  manifested  by  remarkable  events  at  that  period,  that  in 
the  figurative  language  of  the  writer,  "  every  eye  will  see  him,'^  and 
particularly  "  those  tcho  pierced  him.'''  This  last  phrase  is  an  evi- 
dent designation  of  the  Jews,  and  an  intimation  that  this  will  take 
place  in  the  lifetime  of  the  crucifiers  of  the  Lord.  The  sentiment 
is  that  the  divine  visitations  upon  them  will  be  so  peculiar  and 
distressing,  that  they  will  clearly  recognize  liim  as  an  almighty 
avenger. 

And  all  the  tribes  of  the  land  will  wail  because  of  him.  The  in- 
correctness of  our  common  translation  has  led  most  persons  into 
the  erroneous  belief  that  this  is  the  second  personal  coming  of 
Christ ;  and  so  it  has  been  quoted  thousands  of  times.  The  read- 
ing which  I  have  given  makes  the  whole  plain.  The  land  is  Pales- 
tine, and  the  tribes  of  it  are  the  Jews,  and  his  coming  is  providen- 
tial or  circumstantial,  such  as  is  expressed  in  numerous  other 
passages  of  the  sacred  scriptures. 


EXPOSITION. 

CHAPTER    IV. 

God''s  Presence  with  His  Church. 

This  and  the  succeeding  chapter  may  be  regarded  as  pre- 
paratory to  the  visions  which  follow,  and  was  intended  to 
show  that  those  visions  relate  to  the  Christian  church,  and 
that  they  were  given  by  Christ,  who  takes  the  book,  and 
opens  the  seals.  In  the  first  place,  we  are  taught  emblem- 
atically the  important  and  encouraging  fact,  that  the  pres- 
ence of  God  is  with  his  church,  that  he  governs  it  by  his 
authority,  and  protects  it  by  his  power  ;  and  that  the  church 
renders  to  him  a  pure  and  spiritual  worship.  This  will  ap- 
pear as  we  come  to  speak  of  the  throne  and  its  glorious 
occupant  in  the  midst  of  the  adoring  elders,  and  of  those 
who  lead  their  devotions. 

Verse  1.  After  this  I  looked^  and,  behold,  a  door  ivas 
opened  in  heaven  :  and  the  first  voice  which  I  heard  was  as  it 
were  of  a .  trumpet  talking  with  me ;  which  said,  Come  up 
hither,  and  I  will  show  thee  things  lohich  must  he  hereafter. 
After  the  things  detailed  in  the  preceding  chapters,  the  en- 
tranced  apostle  perceived  a  door  opened  in  heaven.  This  ex- 
pression is  plainly  symbolic,  as  there  is  no  door  in  heaven. 
Something  different  in  kind,  as  in  all  similar  cases,  is  in- 
tended. Our  first  business  should  be  to  ascertain  what 
that  is.     To  say  with  Dr.  Clark,  that  "  this  appears  to  have 


14  CHAPTER  IV, 

been  a  visible  aperture  in  the  sky,"  or  with  others  that  it  is 
"  an  opening  of  the  heavens,"  is  not  to  give  an  explanation, 
but  only  to  assert  the  same  thing  in  other  words.  Taking 
it  thus  literally,  as  meaning  only  that  there  was  an  aperture 
in  the  empyrean,  is  to  pass  unnoticed  the  true  signification. 

A  door  literalhj  is  an  entrance  into  a  building  or  an 
apartment.  Metaphorically,  an  open  door  signifies  liber- 
ty, and  opportunity  to  see  or  do  particular  things, — to  take 
a  new  view, — or  to  enter  a  new  sphere  of  action.  Tlius 
Paul  says,  1  Cor.  16:  9,  "^4  r/rcat  door  and  effectual  is 
opened  to  me  ;"  that  is,  a  favorable  opportunity  is  afforded 
to  me.  So  also,  2  Cor.  2:  12,  At  Troas  a  door  was  opened 
to  me  hy  the  Lord  to  preach  the  gosp>el.  Col.  4  :  3,  ^  door  of 
utterance.  Christ  said,  /  am  the  door, — that  is,  by  him  only 
can  any  come  to  God,  and  obtain  salvation.  Or,  take  the 
writer's  own  use  of  the  term,  3  :  8,  Behold,  I  have  set  before 
thee  an  open  door,  that  is,  abundant  opportunity  to  do  good 
by  diffusing  the  light  and  privileges  of  the  gospel.  Again, 
3  :  20,  Behold,  I  stand  at  the  door  and  knock,  signifying  that 
Christ  seeks  admission  to  the  hearts  of  men.  In  none  of 
these  instances  is  the  word  door  used  in  a  literal  sense. 

The  term  heaven  in  the  Apocalypse,  commonly  signifies 
the  visible  church,  or  the  civil  government,  or  both  united. 
Thus,  when  the  third  angel  sounded,  there  fell  a  great  star 
from  heaven  ;  which  is  admitted  to  mean  the  defection  of  a 
distinguished  teacher  in  the  church  from  sound  doctrine, 
followed  with  baleful  consequences.  At  the  opening  of  the 
seventh  seal,  there  was  siloice  in  heaven  for  half  an  hour ; 
which  is  interpreted  to  signify  "  that  there  would  be  peace 
in  the  church  and  the  empire  for  a  short  period."  In 
the  verse  under  consideration,  the  term  heaven  is  proba- 
bly used  in  the  same  sense ;  and  thus,  "  a  door  opened  in 
heaven,"  signifies  that  a  prospective  view  was  given  to  John 
of  the  coming  events  concerning  the  Christian  church.     An 


CHAPTER  IV.  15 

opportunity  was  afforded  him  of  looking  at  things  which  lay- 
in  futurity,  pertaining  to  the  kingdom  of  Christ.  This  ex- 
plaruition  is  immediately  subjoined  in  the  words  addressed 
to  him, — Come  up  hither,  and  I  ivill  show  thee  things  ivhich 
must  be  hereafter.  No  one  doubts  that  the  disclosures 
which  were  subsequently  made  relate  to  the  Christian 
church.  The  opportunity  and  privilege  of  looking  at  those 
things  which  stretched  far  onward  in  futurity,  viz. — the 
events  of  divine  providence  relating  to  the  kingdom  of 
Christ,  was  represented  by  a  door  opened  in  heaven. 

A  voice  resembling  the  loud  sound  of  a  trumphet,  called 
to  the  apostle  to  come  as  it  were  into  the  chamber  of 
vision,  and  receive  the  disclosures  which  are  recorded  in  this 
book.  Under  the  Jewish  economy  the  trumpet  was  an  in- 
strument used  to  announce  something  important  to  be  done, 
and  also  to  assemble  the  people  to  the  feasts,  &c.  Such  a 
voice  in  the  instance  before  us,  seems  designed  to  impress 
the  mind  with  the  great  importance  of  the  things  to  be 
made  known. 

2.  And  immediately  I  was  in  the  Spirit :  and.,  behold.,  a 
throne  was  set  in  heaven.^  and  one  sat  on  the  throne. — This 
may  be  considered  as  an  explanation  of  what  is  meant  by 
the  command,  Come  itp  hither.  He  was  put  into  a  trance, — 
a  state  of  insensibility  to  surrounding  objects,  so  that  the 
mind  was  wholly  occupied  with  things  supernaturally  pre- 
sented to  it.  The  senses  were  for  the  time  rendered  inac- 
tive, and  objects  and  ideas  were  presented  to  the  mind  by 
direct  revelation.  I  perceive  no  reason  for  supposing  that 
the  apostle  was  ti'ansported  bodily  or  spiritually  to  heaven, 
for  none  of  the  things  shown  him  transpired  in  heaven, — 
none  of  the  objects  were  located  in  heaven. 

And,  behold,  a  throne  was  set  in  heaven.  Is  not  this  a 
direct   contradiction   of  the  remark  just   made?     It   un- 


16  CHAPTER  IV. 

doubtedly  is  so,  if  these  representations  are  to  be  under- 
stood literally.  Dr.  Scott  says  with  great  propriety,  "  We 
ought  not  to  suppose  that  the  objects  afterwards  mentioned 
have  a  real  existence  in  heaven  ;  but  they  were  visionary 
emblems,  suited  to  give  proper  instructions  to  the  apostle 
and  his  readers  ;  and  our  chief  business  is  to  develop  their 
meaning."  This  is  the  true  statement  of  the  matter,  and 
it  would  have  been  happy  indeed  if  he  and  other  writers 
had  invariably,  from  this  verse  to  the  end  of  the  book,  ad- 
hered to  that  principle.  To  awaken  a  common-sense  train 
of  thought,  let  me  ask.  Is  there  a  real  material  throne  in 
heaven,  and  is  He,  who  in  the  eighth  verse,  is  called  the 
Lord  God  Almighty,  seated  upon  it,  like  an  earthly  king  1 
Is  he  not  a  pure  Spirit,  filling  immensity,  "  whom  no  man 
hath  seen,  or  can  see  1"  Is  it  a  real  fact,  that  to  look  vpon^ 
he  is  like  a  jasper,  and  a  sardine  stone,  and  that  there  is  a 
rainbow  about  his  throne  in  appearance  like  an  emerald? 
Such  literalizing  is  in  the  highest  degree  absurd. 

I  understand  this  chapter  to  be  a  symbolic  description 
of  the  Christian  church,  blessed  with  the  abiding  presence 
of  God.  The  direct  allusion  undoubtedly  is  to  the  taber- 
nacle and  temple  of  the  Jews,  in  each  of  which  was  a  super- 
natural light  over  the  mercy-seat,  manifesting  the  divine 
presence  as  being  ever  with  his  people.  John  beheld  men- 
tally a  throne,  which  is  an  emblem  of  governmental  author- 
ity, and  protection, — of  ruling  power.  It  was  set  in  heaven, 
i.  c.,  placed,  established  among  his  people  in  the  Christian 
dispensation,  as  really,  though  not  visibly,  as  in  the  former 
dispensation,  agreeably  to  the  promise,  "  I  will  be  in  the 
midst  of  them,  and  walk  with  them,"  or  as  Christ  said,  "  I 
in  them,  and  thou  in  me."  The  idea  expressed  is,  that 
God's  presence  would  be  with  his  church  permanently  in 
all  coming  time,  and  that  his  authority  and  protection 
would  be  exercised  over  it  and  for  its  behoof.     The  being 


CHAPTER  IV.  17 

who  occupied  the  visionary  throne  is  not  named  in  this 
place,  but  is  named  in  the  adoration  and  praise  subsequently 
given. 

3.  And  he  that  sat  ivas  to  look  upon  like  a  jasper  and  a 
sardine  stone :  and  there  was  a  rainboiu  round  about  the 
throne^  in  sight  like  unto  an  emerald. — The  jasper  stone  was 
pellucid  or  clear,  emblematic  of  rectitude,  purity,  holiness. 
The  sardine  stone  was  of  a  red  color,  emblematic  of  his  just- 
ice, particularly  as  exercised  in  the  punishment  of  his  ene- 
mies. In  this  respect  he  is  spoken  of  as  a  flame  of  fire,  and 
"  a  consuming  fire."  A  rainhoio  surrounding  the  throne  of  a 
green  color  like  that  of  the  emerald,  was  a  symbol  of  the  co- 
venant of  mercy,  and  indicated  that  divine  benevolence  is 
ever  exercised  in  conducting,  guiding,  and  controlling  the 
afl[airs  of  the  church.  See  Ezek.  8:  1,  4.  The  sentiment 
of  the  verse  is,  that  God  exercises  his  perfections,  and  man- 
ifests them  to  intelligent  beings  in  administering  his  gov- 
ernment for  the  good  of  his  church. 

4.  And  round  about  the  throne  were  four  and  twenty 
seats:  and  uioon  the  seats  I  saiv  four  and  twenty  elders  sit- 
ting, clothed  in  white  raiment ;  and  they  had  on  their  heads 
crowns  of  gold. — Around  the  throne  were  twenty-four  other 
thrones,  (thronoi)  on  which  were  as  many  elders  sitting, 
clad  in  white,  indicative  of  their  moral  excellence,  and 
wearing  croivns  of  gold,  indicative  of  their  authority,  or 
rather  of  the  supremacy  and  dominion  of  the  church.  The 
allusion  probably  is  to  the  twenty-four  courses  of  the 
priests  who  presided  over  and  performed  the  rights  of 
the  ancient  dispensation.  Or,  the  allusion  may  be  to  the 
twelve  patriarchs  and  the  twelve  apostles,  as  representative 
heads  of  the  church  under  both  dispensations.  The  church 
is  built  on  the  foundation  of  the  apostles  and  prophets ;  and 


18  CHAPTER  IV. 

believers  are  represented  as  being  made  both  kings  and 
priests  to  God.  Under  his  government  the  church  is  to  be 
made  triumphant ;  as  Daniel  says,  The  saints  shall  take  the 
kingdom  and  possess  the  kingdom  forever  and  ever. 

5.  And  out  of  the  throne  proceeded  lightnings,  and  thicn- 
derinffs,  and  voices. — Lightnings  and  thunders  are  sym- 
bols of  war  and  civil  commotions, — voices  of  royal  edicts 
and  proclamations.  The  imagery  is  probably  taken  from 
what  transpired  at  the  giving  of  the  law  on  Mount  Sinai. 
The  idea  seems  to  be  that  God  will  shake  and  convulse 
nations,  and  execute  upon  them  signal  judgments  in  sub- 
serviency to  the  welfare  of  his  church.  His  purposes,  his 
law,  his  threatenings,  shall  be  carried  into  effect  whatever 
may  oppose. 

And  there  tvere  seven  lamps  of  fire  burning  before  the 
throne,  which  are  the  seven  Spirits  of  God. — The  seven 
lamps  burning  before  the  throne  are  explained  to  be  the 
seven  Spirits  of  God.  As  seven  is  a  number  of  perfection, 
the  Holy  Spirit  may  be  that  which  is  meant.  If  so,  their 
shining  before  the  throne,  and  in  the  midst  of  the  elders, 
signifies  that  it  is  the  Spirit  which  illuminates,  guides, 
and  comforts  the  church,  and  that  his  cheering  influences 
would  ever  be  continued  in  it.  The  Spirit,  by  the  truth, 
and  by  his  operations  in  the  soul,  is  the  great  illuminator, 
— the  author  of  all  Christian  graces,  and  holy  joys.  The 
seven  lamps  in  this  instance  probably  refer  to  the  golden 
candlestick  with  its  seven  lamps,  placed  both  in  the  taber- 
nacle and  temple  in  the  first  apartment,  called  the  holy 
place,  and  before  the  holy  of  holies,  in  which  was  the  sym- 
bol of  the  divine  presence.  Into  this  apartment  the  priests 
entered  daily  performing  their  ministrations;  and  the 
lamps  were  kept  burning  day  and  night  without  intermis- 
sion.    These  imparted   all  the  light,  which  made  things 


CHAPTER  IV.  19 

visible  in  the  holy  place.  A  beautiful  emblem  of  the  illu- 
mination given  by  the  Holy  Spirit.  This  interpretation  I 
prefer  to  that  which  makes  these  seven  spirits  to  be  seven 
ministering  angels,  wliich  seems  to  be  inapposite,  and 
wanting  in  analogy. 

6.  Aiid  before  the  throne  there  loas  a  sea  of  glass  like  unto 
crystal :  and  in  the  midst  of  the  throne,  and  round  about  the 
throne,  ^vere  four  beasts  full  of  eyes  before  and  behind. — Be- 
fore the  throne  there  was  a  crystalline  sea,  ^.  e.,  a  sea  perfect- 
ly clear  and  transparent.  Our  common  translation  conveys 
the  idea  that  the  sea  was  made  of  glass,  which  is  incorrect. 
This  is  another  Jewish  symbol,  the  allusion  being  to  the  bra- 
zen sea  made  by  Solomon,  ten  cubits  in  diameter,  and  five 
cubits  deep,  placed  in  front  of  the  entrance  of  the  temple, 
and  filled  with  water.  The  priests  used  the  water  to  wash 
themselves,  and  the  sacrifices,  and  the  implements  used.  It 
is  commonly  considered  as  typical  of  the  holy  nature  of  the 
sacrifice  which  Christ  offered,  himself  being  innocent  and 
holy.  The  location  of  this  font  before  the  entrance  to  the 
sanctuary,  and  before  the  throne,  may  teach,  that  it  is 
through  the  washing  of  regeneration,  and  sanctificatiou  of 
the  Spirit,  that  we  are  fitted  to  come  into  the  divine 
presence  to  offer  praises  and  supplications. 

In  the  midst  of  the  throne,  or  seat  of  authority,  and 
around  it,  were  four  living  creatures,  improperly  styled 
'  beasts,'  full  of  eyes  before  and  behind.  Isaiah  and  Eze- 
kiel  describe  similar  living  creatures.  In  this  vision  of 
John  they  are  probably  intended  to  represent  the  minis- 
ters of  the  gospel,  and  being  in  the  midst  of  the  throne 
implies  that  they  participate  with  Christ  in  the  work  of 
governing,  watching  over,  and  guiding  the  church,  as  he 
said  to  his  disciples,  '  Ye  shall  sit  on  twelve  thrones,  judg- 
ing the  twelve  tribes  of  Israel.'     This  they  would  do  in 


20  CHAPTER   IV. 

their  official  capacity  as  teachers  and  rulers  of  the  Christian 
church.  Their  position  nearest  the  throne  is  probably  an 
allusion  to  the  privileges  and  duties  of  the  priests  of  old, 
who  only  were  permitted  to  enter  the  holy  place,  the  sanc- 
tuary, and  shows  also  that  Christ's  ministers  are  meant 
by  the  four  living  creatures.  Tlieir  numerous  eyes  before 
and  behind,  looking  every  way,  are  emblematic  of  their 
discernment,  watchfulness,  and  carefulness  in  regard  to  all 
things  affecting  the  interests  of  the  church. 

7.  And  the  first  beast  icas  like  a  lion,  and  the  second 
beast  like  a  calf,  and  the  third  beast  had  a  face  as  a  man,  and 
the  fourth  beast  was  like  a  flying  eagle. — The  first  living 
creature  was  like  a  lion.  Evidently  all  this  is  symbolic ; 
moral  qualities  in  men  being  represented  by  the  peculiar 
qualities  of  these  animals.  The  lion  expresses  courage  and 
strength  ;  the  second  creature,  like  a  young  bullock,  express- 
es patience,  docility,  and  endurance  of  hardship ;  the  third, 
with  a  face  as  a  man,  expresses  intelligence,  wisdom  and 
benevolence ;  the  fourth,  like  a  flying  eagle,  expresses  dis- 
cernment, elevation  of  purpose,  and  speed  in  the  perform- 
ance of  duty. 

8.  And  the  four  beasts  had.  each  of  them  six  wings  about 
him,  d'c. — Furthermore,  each  of  these  creatures  had  six 
wings,  concerning  Avhich,  Isaiah  says,  6  :  1-3,  "  with  two 
he  covered  his  face,  with  two  he  covered  his  feet,  and  with 
two  he  flew,"  expressing  reverence,  humility,  and  alacrity. 

They  rest  not  dag  and  night,  saging.  Holy,  holy,  holy, 
Lord  God  Almighty,  which  lous,  and  is,  and  is  to  come. — 
Tlieir  employment  is  adoration  and  praise, — their  lives  are 
devoted  to  serving  and  glorifying  God.  It  is  evident,  there- 
fore, that  these  creatures  represent  intelligent,  religious 
beings.     They  have  a  true  perception  of  God  as  holy,  om- 


CHAPTER  IV.  21 

nipotent,  and  eternal.     For  these  glorious  attributes  they 
adore  him. 

9,  10,  11.  yind  token  those  beasts  give  glory ^  and  honor, 
and  thanks,  to  him  that  sat  on  the  throne,  who  liveth  for- 
ever and  ever,  the  four  and  twenty  elders  fall  down  before  him 
that  sat  on  the  throne,  and  worship  him  that  liveth  forever 
and  ever,  and  cast  their  crowns  before  the  throne,  saying,  thou 
art  worthy,  0  Lord,  to  receive  glory,  arid  honor,  and  power  : 
for  thou  hast  created  all  things,  and  for  thy  j^leasicre  they  are 
and  were  created. — The  eternal  existence  of  Him  who  sat 
upon  the  throne  is  distinctly  affirmed,  and  the  four  crea- 
tures devoutly  ascribe  to  him  glory,  honor,  and  praise. 
Then  the  elders  prostrate  themselves  in  token  of  their  deep 
reverence  and  unworthiness,  and  join  in  the  worship.  They 
also  take  the  crowns  from  their  heads,  and  cast  them  be- 
fore the  throne,  signifying  by  that  act,  that  their  privileges 
and  honors,  as  believers,  are  all  given  by  God,  and  are  to 
be  held  in  subjection  to  his  authority.  They  declare  his 
worthiness  to  take  and  to  have  glory,  honor,  and  power, 
as  He  who  hath  created  all  things,  and  according  to  whose 
will  they  have  been  made. 

The  fact  that  the  four  living  creatures  lead  in  this  wor- 
ship, and  that  the  elders  follow  and  join  in  it,  shows,  that 
the  ministers  of  Christ  and  the  church  are  represented  by 
them  ;  and,  if  I  mistake  not,  we  are  also  taught,  that  the 
true  ministry  and  true  church  will  ever  practice  a  pure 
worship.  They  will  not  corrupt  it  by  introducing  other 
objects  than  the  Supreme  Being  for  worship,  but  to  him 
they  will  render  the  glory  which  is  his  due.  The  refer- 
ence throughout  the  chapter  evidently  is  to  the  Christian 
church  in  this  world,  and  that  here,  not  in  heaven,  are  the 
things  to  be  enacted,  which  are  thus  emblematically  dis- 
played.    The  main  sentiment,  as  I  regard  it,  may  be  thus 


22  CHAPTER  IV. 

stated: — John  had  mentally  a  prospective  view  of  the 
Christian  church  extending  far  into  futurity,  and  was  taught 
that  God  would  ever  be  with  it,  and  protect  it,  and  would 
govern  the  world  in  subserviency  to  it.  Thus  his  throne 
is  spoken  of  as  being  in  it.  As  the  church  under  the  an- 
cient dispensation  was  designed  to  preserve  and  propagate 
the  knowledge  and  the  worship  of  the  true  God,  in  a  world 
filled  with  ignorance  and  idolatry  ;  as  it  was,  like  its  own 
Shekinah,  a  source  of  light  in  the  midst  of  surrounding 
darkness  ;  so,  according  to  this  prophetic  vision,  the  Chris- 
tian church  was  designed  to  be  the  "  light  of  the  world," 
the  depository  of  divine  truth,  the  great  instrumentality 
for  sustaining  and  diffusing  the  worship  of  God  in  its  ap- 
propriate simplicity  and  spirituality  ;  and  though  there 
have  been  many  and  great  corruptions  and  defections  in 
doctrine  and  practice,  the  true  church  which  is  composed 
of  renovated  believers,  will  accomplish  all  for  which  it  was 
designed,  for  "  God  is  in  the  midst  of  her,  and  will  help 
her  right  early." 

A  confirmation  of  this  interpretation  is  given  in  the  con- 
struction of  the  language  employed.  All  four  of  the  verbs 
in  the  ninth  and  tenth  verses,  are  in  the  future,  and  not  in 
the  present  tense,  according  to  our  translation.  Thus 
"  when  the  living  creatures  shall  give  glory ^  <£*c.,  the  twenty- 
four  ciders  will  fall  doivn,  and  will  toorship,  and  will  cast 
their  croivns  before  the  throne."  Now,  if  John  intended  to 
describe  the  worship  then  actually  occurring  in  heaven,  the 
present  tense  would  have  been  the  proper  mode  of  ex- 
pressing it.  And  as  a  narrative  of  what  he  had  seen, 
though  its  signification  referred  to  the  future,  he  should 
have  used  the  past  tense,  as  he  does  in  numerous  other 
cases.  The  future  form  of  the  above  named  verbs  seems 
to  me  designed  to  express,  not  the  worship  which  was,  or 
is  now  paid  to  God  in  heaven  ;  but  to  be  prophetic  of  the 


CHAPTER  V.  23 

pure  worship  which  the  church  of  believers  will  uphold  and 
practice  on  earth  to  the  end  of  time. 


CHAPTER    V. 

The  Book  with  Seven  Seals. 

This  chapter  is  a  further  recital  of  the  same  vision. 

1,  And  I  saiv  on  the  right  hand  of  Him  that  sat  on  the 
throne  a  book  loritten  luilhin  and  on  the  back  side,  sealed  with 
seven  seals. — The  disclosure  of  other  things  in  the  future  is 
symbolically  represented  by  a  sealed  book,  to  be  opened  by 
the  Son  of  God.  To  the  mind  of  the  apostle,  this  book  ap- 
peared held  in  the  right  hand  of  the  glorious  occupant  of  the 
throne.  It  probably  consisted  of  seven  pieces  of  parchment, 
connected  together,  and  rolled  upon  each  other ;  each  piece 
having  its  seal  upon  the  outer  edge.  How  this  was  done, 
is  not  easy  to  determine :  hence  the  many  conjectures  con- 
cerning it.  The  book  contained  predictions,  as  we  may 
suppose,  of  events  to  transpire  in  successive  periods  of 
time  designated  by  the  seven  seals ;  that  is,  there  were  to 
be  a  series  of  events,  of  such. signal  importance  and  pecu- 
liarity as  to  constitute  so  many  epochs.  Being  in  the  right 
hand  of  Him  who  sat  on  the  throne,  indicates  that  the 
events  to  be  disclosed  were  wholly  under  His  control  and 
direction.  Being  sealed,  indicates  that  those  events  had 
not  then  been  made  known.  God  reveals  his  purposes  at 
such  times,  and  in  such  proportions,  as  he  pleases.  The 
same  emblem  is  found  in  Ezek.  2:9,  10. 

2  and  3.  And  I  saw  a  strong  angel  proclaiming  with  a 
loud  voicCy  Who  is  worthy  to  open  the  book,  and  to  loose  the 


24  CHAPTER  V. 

seals  thereof  f  And  no  man  in  heaven,  nor  in  earth,  neither 
under  the  earth,  luas  able  to  open  the  book,  neither  to  look 
thereon. — The  inquiry  by  the  mighty  heraldic  angel, 
plainly  shows  that  he  was  not  worthy  to  loose  the  seals, 
and  make  known  the  contents  of  the  book.  No  created 
being  in  the  universe  was  of  sufficient  rank  and  dignity  to 
perform  that  work  ;  or  no  person  in  the  church,  nor  in  any 
condition  of  life,  was  competent  to  remove  the  seals,  and 
reveal  what  was  to  come.  No  one  knoweth  the  will  of 
God  except  the  Son,  and  those  to  whom  He  reveals  it. 
He  only  who  was  in  the  bosom  of  the  Father  knoweth  the 
purposes  of  the  Father  intrinsically.  Plainly,  then,  John 
was  divinely  taught,  otherwise  he  could  never  have  made 
this  revelation  of  future  things. 

4  and  5.  And  I  tvept  much,  because  no  man  was  found 
worthy  to  op)en  and  to  read  the  book,  neither  to  look  thereon. 
And  one  of  the  elders  saith  unto  me,  Weep  not :  behold,  the 
Lion  of  the  tribe  of  Juda,  the  Root  of  David,  hath  prevailed 
to  open  the  book,  and  to  loose  the  seven  seals  thereof. — John's 
anxiety  to  know  what  was  contained  in  the  book,  was  like 
that  of  Daniel  to  understand-  what  had  been  communicated 
to  him  concerning  things  to  come.  He  is  consoled  with  the 
assurance,  that  Christ  had  prevailed  to  do  what  he  so  much 
desired.  Chvist  was  descended  from  the  tribe  of  Judah,  and 
the  lion  was  the  emblem  of  that  tribe,  in  reference  to  what 
Jacob  said  in  blessing  his  sons — "Judah  is  a  lion's  whelp  : 
he  stooped  down,  he  couched  as  a  lion,  and  as  an  old  lion. 
Who  shall  rouse  him  up?"  (Gen.  49  :  9.)  In  chapter  22  : 
16,  Christ  says — I  am  the  root  and  the  offspring  of  David. 
He  was  the  root  of  David,  as  being  his  Creator  and  the 
Giver  of  all  his  wisdom  and  greatness ;  and  his  offspring, 
as  being  lineally  descended  from  him.  The  expression,  hath 
jirevailed,  is  from  a  word  which  signifies  also,  to  conquer,  to 


CHAPTER  V.  25 

gain  a  victory,  and  implies  the  putting  forth  of  great  efforts. 
The  history  of  our  redemption  sliows  what  the  conflict  and 
what  the  victory  was. 

6.  And  I  beheld,  and,  lo,  in  the  midst  of  the  throne  and 
of  the  four  beasts,  and  in  the  midst  of  the  elders,  stood  a 
Lamb  as  it  had  bee7i  slain,  having  seven  horns  and  seven  eyes, 
which  are  the  seven  Spirits  of  God  sent  forth  into  all  the 
earth. — There  appeared  in  the  midst  of  the  throne,  indicat- 
ing a  participation  in  governmental  authority  and  power, 
and  in  the  midst  of  the  four  living  creatures  and  the  elders, 
indicating  His  relation  to  the  church  as  Prophet,  Priest 
and  King,  as  Teacher,  Redeemer  and  Ruler,  a  Lamb,  bear- 
ing upon  him  the  marks  of  slaughter,  yet  alive.  (1  :  IS.) 
I  am  he  ivho  liveth,  and  ivas  dead. 

A  horn  is  the  emblem  of  power,  and  seven  is  probably, 
in  this  instance,  a  number  of  perfection.  The  seven  horns 
of  the  Lamb,  then,  express  the  idea  of  the  possession  of 
great  power.  "  He  is  mighty  to  save,  even  to  the  utter 
most,"  "  all  power  in  heaven  and  in  earth  being  vested  in 
Him."  His  seven  eyes  are  interpreted  to  be  the  seven 
Spirits  of  God ;  meaning,  as  in  chapter  1  :  4,  the  Holy 
Spirit,  from  whom  proceeds  "grace"  and  "peace."  Being 
sent  into  all  the  earth,  probably  signifies  the  shedding  forth 
of  the  Spirit  by  Christ,  for  the  conversion  of  men,  and  for 
the  perfection  of  His  people.  By  these  symbols  the  whole 
work  of  Christ  is  disclosed  ;  his  revelation  of  the  purposes 
and  will  of  the  Father,  his  atoning  sacrifice,  his  exaltation 
to  the  throne  of  dominion,  his  ability  to  rule  and  to  save, 
and  liis  bestowment  of  the  Spirit  upon  mankind. 

7.     And  he  came  and  took  the  book  out  of  the  right  hand 
of  him  that  sat  upon  the  throne.— The  disposition,  even  in 
the  learned,  to  view  all  these  things  literally,  shows  itself 
2 


26  CHAPTER  V. 

in  the  useless  discussions  of  tlie  question,  How  could  a 
lamh  take  and  hold  a  book  ?  The  whole  is  symbolic ;  and 
John  was  not  troubled  about  the  congruity  of  what  was 
presented  to  his  mind  in  vision,  and  v;e  need  not  be.  The 
Lamb  itself  was  a  symbol,  and  his  act  was  a  symbolic 
act,  having  no  real  existence  anyvrhere,  except  in  the  mind 
of  the  apostle.  Tiie  signification  of  the  act,  as  I  apprehend, 
is,  that  Christ  reveals  to  men  what  the  Father  hath  given 
to  Him  to  reveal,  according  with  His  own  declaration, 
"  The  words  which  I  speak  are  not  mine,  but  the  Father's 
who  sent  me." 

S.  And  lohcn  he  had  taken  the  bool-^  the  four  boasts  and 
four  and  tiventj/  elders  fell  down  before  the  Lamb^  having 
every  one  of  them  harjos,  and  golden  vials  full  of  odors, 
ivhich  are  the  prayers  of  saints. — ^The  prostration  of  the  re- 
presentatives of  the  church  before  the  Lamb,  was  an  expres- 
sion of  their  profound  reverence  of  Christ  as  their  Teacher, 
and  of  their  devout  gratitude  for  his  instructions.  Viewed 
as  prospective  and  prophetic,  it  showed  that  the  true  church 
would  hold  in  the  highest  estimation,  and  cherish  the  utmost 
respect  for,  the  revelation  which  he  has  given. 

Having  harps,  emblematic  of  the  offering  of  praise. 
Golden  vials  full  of  odors,  were  cups  or  broad  dishes  for 
the  offering  of  incense,  entirely  unlike  what  we  term  vials. 
These  are  explained  to  be  the  prayers  of  saints.  The  pro- 
totype is  the  daily  offering  of  incense  on  the  golden  altar, 
under  the  former  dispensation,  at  which  time  the  people 
oflered  prayer  and  thanksgiving.  We  have  here  conclusive 
evidence  that  it  is  the  church,  and  its  worship  on  earth,  that 
is  the  subject  of  this  vision.  Prayer  does  not  belong  to 
the  heavenly  state.  The  golden  censers  full  of  incense 
were  in  the  hands  of  the  twenty-four  elders  and  represen- 
tatives of  the  Christian  cliurch ;  and  as  John  explains  these 


CHAPTER  V.  27 

to  be  symbols  of  the  praijers  of  saints^  we  are  surprised  to 
find  it  affirmed,  that  this  is  the  worship  of  the  glorified  in 
heaven.  But  we  shall  have  further  evidence  of  the  cor- 
rectness of  the  interpretation  given  above  on  this  point  as 
we  proceed. 

9.  And  they  sung  a  new  song^  saying^  Thou  art  xvorthy 
to  take  the  hook^  and  to  open  the  seals  thereof :  for  thou  ivast 
dain,  and  hast  redeemed  us  to  God  by  thy  blood  out  of  every 
kindred,  and  tongue,  and  people,  and  nation. — Why  is  this 
a  neio  song  ?  Because  it  commemorates  the  finished  work 
of  Christ;  being  thus  in  contrast  with  the  songs  of  the 
ancient  economy.  The  96th  Psalm  is  prophetic  of  the 
coming  and  reign  of  Messiah ;  and  therefore  it  opens  with 
the  exhortation  to  '•''sing  unto  the  Lord  a  neiv  song."  So 
the  first  part  of  the  42d  chap,  of  Isaiah  is  descriptive  of  the 
ministry  of  Christ  on  earth  ;  and  in  view  of  this,  the  call  is 
given,  "  Sing  unto  the  Lord  a  neio  song."  Who  were  to 
perform  this  duty,  and  where  was  it  to  be  performed? 
The  answer  is  given  in  the  clause  which  is  subjoined,  And 
sing  his  praise  from  the  end  of  the  earth. 

The  special  subjects  of  that  song  are  the  worthiness  of 
Christ  to  reveal  to  us  the  will  of  the  Father,  his  sacrificial 
death,  the  redemption  he  has  wrought  for  his  people,  and 
the  consequent  privileges  and  mercies  they  have  obtained. 
The  living  creatures  and  the  elders  declare,  that  they  were 
redeemed  to  God  out  of  every  people  and  nation,  which  is 
a  positive  proof  that  they  represent  the  church  of  believers  ; 
and  the  extent  of  this  work,  being  performed  in  every  na- 
tion and  tribe  of  men,  shows  that  this  is  prophetic  of  the 
church  to  the  end  of  time,  the  universality  of  its  triumphs, 
and  the  feelings  of  love  and  gratitude  which  its  members 
will  ever  have  toward  their  glorious  Head. 


28  CHAPTER  V. 

10.  And  hast  made  us  unto  our  God  kings  and  priests : 
and  we  shall  reign  on  the  earth. — Being  made  kings  and 
priests,  explains  what  is  meant  by  having  on  their  heads 
crowns  of  gold,  as  stated  in  the  previous  chapter.  As 
kings,  the  governing  authority  will  be  exercised  by  them  ; 
and  as  priests,  they  will  draw  near  to  God  and  offer  spiri- 
tual saci'ifices  unto  Him.  The  commonly  received  Greek 
text  requires  a  somewhat  different  translation,  thus  :  Thou 
hast  made  the7n  priests  and  kings,  and  thcg  shall  reign ;  in 
which  them  and  thefj  are  used  instead  of  us  and  tve.  But 
the  Greek  texts  of  Stephens  and  Beza  and  Elzevir  require 
the  translation  which  we  have  in  our  Bibles,  and  which 
should  be  regarded  as  the  true  reading. 

The  declaration,  ^ve  shall  reign  on  the  earth,  proves  deci- 
sively what  we  have  repeatedly  said,  that  the  ivhole  refer- 
ence is  to  the  church  in  this  world  ;  and  it  must  be  seen, 
that  the  interpretation  which  makes  these  tilings  to  trans- 
pire in  heaven,  involves  the  whole  in  inconsistency  and 
confusion.  That  declaration  in  the  song  of  the  church,  is 
prophetical,  and  re-echoes  the  predictions  of  Daniel : 
"  The  saints  of  the  Most  High  shall  take  the  kingdom  and 
possess  the  kingdom  forever,  even  forever  and  ever.  And 
the  kingdom  and  dominion,  and  the  greatness  of  the  kingdom, 
under  the  ivhole  heaven,  shall  he  given  to  the  people  of  the 
saints  of  the  Most  High,  whose  kingdom  is  an  everlasting 
kingdom,  and  all  dominions  shall  serve  and  obey  him." 
Dan.  7:  18  and  27.  Tlie  universality  and  blessedness  of 
this  reign  is  fully  and  glowingly  described  by  John  in  the 
two  closing  chapters  of  this  book.  Peter  says,  in  his  gen- 
eral epistle  to  believers,  "  Ye  are  a  chosen  generation,  a 
royal  or  kingly  priesthood,  a  holy  nation,  ajjeculiar  2JCople.'^ 

11.  And  I  beheld,  and  I  heard  the  voice  of  many  angels 
round  about  the  throne,  and  the  beasts,  and  the  elders  ;    and 


CHAPTER  V.  29 

the  number  of  them  was  ten  thousand  times  ten  thousand,  and 
thoumnds  of  thousands. — We  have  had  the  ministers  and 
members  of  the  church  represented  by  the  living  ones  and  the 
elders,  and  now  a  new  class  of  worshipers  is  introduced  with 
the  name  of  angels.  At  the  first  occurrence  of  this  word 
in  this  vision,  it  is  important  to  note  its  signification.  Be- 
side designating  an  order  of  beings  superior  to  ourselves, 
the  term  is  used  in  the  Old  and  New  Testaments  to  signify 
any  agent  or  instrumentality,  good  or  bad,  animate  or 
inanimate,  which  God  employs  to  accomplish  his  pur- 
poses. It  is  defined  to  be  "  one  who  performs  the  office 
of  an  envoy  or  messenger,"  from  a  word  which  signifies 
io  lead.  In  the  Apocalypse  it  is  used  to  designate  those 
who  succeeded  the  apostles  in  the  care  of  the  churches, 
denominated  also  stars.  1 :  20  ;  2:  1.  It  is  applied 
also  to  civil  officers,  as  in  chap.  9  :  14,  15,  where  the 
four  angels  who  were  bound  by  the  river  Euphrates, 
mean  the  four  leaders,  or  sultans  of  the  Seljukian  Turks, 
who  in  the  tenth  century  crossed  that  river  with  an  im- 
mense army,  and  overturned  the  Saracen  dominion  in 
western  Asia.  In  the  preceding  chapter,  the  king  of  the 
locusts,  i.e.  the  Saracens,  is  called  the  angel  of  the  bottom- 
less pit.  This  angel  was  Mahomet.  So  the  seven  angels 
with  the  vials  of  the  last  seven  plagues,  and  others  in  other 
instances,  mean  haman  agents  and  instrumentalities  by 
which  God  executes  his  judgments  and  performs  his  will. 

The  angel  worshipers,  in  the  case  before  us,  I  would 
consider  to  be  civil  rulers  and  officers  of  government,  and 
their  position  in  the  rear  of  the  elders,  and  encompassing 
them,  as  foreshowing  the  important  fact,  that  civil  rulers 
and  governments  would  protect  the  church  in  the  enjoy- 
ment of  Christian  privileges,  join  in  its  worship,  and  par- 
ticipate in  its  blessings.  It  is,  in  fact,  a  symbolic  rejjre- 
sentation  of  what  the  ancient  prophets  so  often  and  so  rap- 


30  CHAPTER  V. 

turously  foretold,  that  "  Kings  shall  be  thy  nursing  fathers, 
and  queens  thy  nursing  mothers ;"  "  The  Lord  will  arise 
upon  thee,  and  his  glory  will  be  seen  upon  thee  ;  and  the 
Gentiles  shall  come  to  thy  light,  and  kings  to  the  bright, 
ness  of  thy  rising."  "  The  abundance  of  the  sea  shall  be 
converted  to  thee,  and  the  forces  of  the  Gentiles  shall  come 
to  thee."  "Their  kings  shall  minister  unto  thee."  In  the  de- 
scription which  John  gives  of  the  last  and  most  perfect  state 
of  the  church  on  earth,  he  says  :  "  The  kings  of  the  earth 
do  bring  their  glory  and  honor  into  it."  The  design  of  this 
introductory  vision  appears  to  be,  to  show  v,'hat  the  church 
in  this  world  would  be;  and  as  the  worship  and  praise 
here  described  is  that  of  believers  in  this  life,  it  is  most 
congruous,  and  most  in  harmony  with  the  scope  of  the 
vision  to  consider  the  term  angels  as  designating  civil 
rulers  and  distinguished  officers  of  government.  This 
company  of  the  redeemed,  who  render  devout  ascription 
of  praise,  was  a  vast,  an  innumerable  multitude. 

12.  Saying  ivith  a  loud  voice,  Worthy  is  the  Lamb  that 
was  slain  to  receive  j^oiver,  and  riches,  and  wisdom,  and 
strength,  and  honor,  and  glory,  and  blessing. — They  de- 
clare that  Jesus  Christ,  the  Lamb  who  was  slain,  is 
worthy  to  receive,  to  have  and  possess,  or  to  have  as- 
cribed to  him,  the  jtower  to  reign  as  Icing,  the  riches,  all 
that  is  necessary  for  supplying  the  wants  of  his  people, 
the  zoisdom  to  guide  all  the  affairs  of  the  church  and  the 
world,  the  strength  to  uphold  his  friends  and  subdue  his 
enemies,  and  the  honor,  such  as  is  due  to  him,  and  the 
glory  or  renown,  and  the  blessing  or  praise. 

13.  And  every  creature  which  is  in  heaven,  and  on  the 
earth,  and  under  the  earth,  and  such  as  are  in  the  sea,  and  all 
that  are  in  them,  heard  I  saying.  Blessing,  and  honor,  and 


CHAPTER  V.  31 

glory ^  and  power ^  he  unto  him  that  sitteth  upon  the  throne, 
and  unto  the  Lamh,  forever  and  ever. — Li  this  ascription, 
according  to  commentators,  "  they  were  joined  by  all 
the  inhabitants  of  heaven  and  earth,  and  the  souls  of 
those  who  were  in  the  separate  state,  whose  bodies  were 
under  the  earth,  or  in  the  sea,  or  by  all  creatures  in  the 
universe,  with  the  exception  of  none  but  the  determined 
enemies  of  God."  This,  of  course,  is  a  literal  under- 
standing and  a  literal  interpretation,  and  an  assumption 
that  these  things  really  occurred  before  the  eyes  of 
the  apostolic  seer,  all  of  which  are  erroneous.  The  whole 
is  symbolic  and  prophetic,  showing  that  Christ,  ac- 
cording to  the  promise  of  the  Father,  and  the  utterances  of 
the  prophets,  would,  in  due  time,  have  the  heathen  for  his 
inheritance,  and  the  uttermost  parts  of  the  earth  for  his 
possession ;  that  all  enemies  shall  be  put  under  liis  feet ; 
that  his  name  shall  be  praised  from  the  rising  to  the  setting 
sun — in  a  word,  that  he  shall  receive  the  homage  of  all 
mankind.  Furthermore,  these  were  visionary  representa- 
tions, divinely  produced  phantasms,  not  real  transactions, 
and  their  fulfillment  is  to  be  in  the  church  in  this  world. 

Heaven  is  the  symbol  of  government,  and  every  crea- 
ture, or  as  in  the  original,  every  created  thing,  are  those 
who  administer  the  government,  called  in  a  preceding  verse 
angels.  Those  on  earth  are  the  mass  of  the  people  who 
are  subject  to  the  ruling  authority.  Those  under  the  earth 
are  those  who  are  in  a  state  of  bondage ;  and  those  who 
are  in  the  sea  are  those  who  inhabit  the  islands  of  the 
sea.  Thus,  the  persons  meant  in  this  passage  are  people 
of  all  classes,  rulers  and  subjects,  bond  and  free.  We 
find  a  similar  classification  in  the  fifteenth  verse  of  the 
next  chapter,  thus  :  The  kings  of  the  earth,  and  the  great  men, 
and  the  rich  men,  and  the  chief  captains  and  the  mighty 
men,  and  every  bond  man,  and  every  free  man  hid  them- 


32  CHAPTER  V. 

selves.  Also,  in  19  :  18.  These  all  unite  in  devoutly  as- 
cribing praise,  honor,  glory,  and  power  to  Ilini  who  sitteth 
on  the  throne,  and  to  the  Lamb,  forever.  The  church  is 
to  advance  until  it  has  universal  dominion,  and  the  people 
of  all  nations  and  conditions  sliall  know  and  adore  Jeho- 
vah and  his  Christ. 

This  metaphorical  use  of  the  terms  heaven,  and  earth, 
and  sea,  is  common,  not  only  in  this  book,  but  throughout 
the  sacred  scri2:)tures.  The  reference  is  not  to  the  material 
universe,  but  to  people  in  different  civil  and  social  condi- 
tions. For  instance,  Ps.  96  :  1,  Singi  unto  the  Lord  all 
the  earth,  meaning  all  the  people  of  the  land.  Isa.  49  : 
13,  Sinff,  0  heavens,  and  be  joi/ful,  0  earth; — civil  rulers 
and  the  people  were  to  rejoice.  Isa.  65  :  16,  18,  The 
former  troubles  are  forgotten  ;  for  behold,  I  create  neiu  hea- 
vens and  a  neio  earth — for  I  create  Jerusalem  a  rejoicing, 
and  herjpeople  a  joy.  The  last  clause  is  explanatory,  and 
shows  clearly  that  a  happy  change  was  to  be  made  in  the 
civil,  social  and  religious  state  of  the  people.  Things  were 
to  be  made  new  in  the  government  and  in  the  church,  and, 
of  course,  in  the  condition  of  those  who  were  concerned. 
Jer.  22  :  29,  0  earth,  earth,  earth,  hear  the  loord  of  the 
Lord, — which  is  a  call  made  to  the  people.  In  chapter  7  : 
3,  the  command  is  given ;  Hurt  not  the  earth,  nor  the  sea, 
nor  the  trees, — where  the  people  of  different  conditions  are 
meant.  Instances  of  this  kind  are  too  numerous  to  be 
cited  here.     They  will  appear  in  the  course  of  our  exegesis. 

14.  And  the  four  beasts  said,  Amen. — The  four  liv 
ing  creatures,  representing  Christ's  ministers,  gave  a 
hearty  response,  expressive  of  their  desire  that  so  it  may 
be.  The  elders  prostrated  themselves  and  worshiped 
Him  who  liveth  forever  and  ever.  Such  is  the  true  church, 
and   such  is  its  worship.     Such  is  its  love  of  revealed 


CHAPTER  VI.  33 

truth — such  is  and  ever  will  be  its  gratitude  for  the  dis- 
closures -which  Christ  has  made  of  the  will  and  purposes 
of  God,  and  such  is  the  shadowing  forth  of  its  future  tri- 
umphs and  glory. 

It  is  manifest,  that  Christ  is  joined  with  the  Father 
in  all  these  adorations  of  the  true  church.  He  who  gave 
the  revelation  of  these  things  has  thus  sanctioned  such 
worship.  He  has  shown  us,  prospectively,  that  the  saints 
will  thus  worship  forever  and  ever.  Does,  then,  this  book 
teach  the  practice  of  idolatry,  or  is  Christ  a  proper  object 
of  adoration  and  praise  1 

In  these  sublime  ascriptions  it  is  declared,  that 
Christ  hath  redeemed  us  to  God  with  his  blood,  which  is  a 
direct  affirmation  of  the  doctrine  of  the  atonement.  The 
foundation  of  all  the  excellencies,  privileges,  and  hopes  of 
believers  is,  that  Christ  died  for  them,  and  this  will  fur- 
nish the  chief  burden  of  their  songs,  in  their  earthly  pil- 
grimage and  in  their  eternal  home. 


CHAPTER   VI. 

The  Opening  of  the  Seals. 

1.  And  I  saio  when  the  Lamh  opened  one  of  the  seals ; 
and  I  heard,  as  it  were  the  noise  of  thunder,  one  of  the  four 
beasts  saying,  Come  and  see. — The  contents  of  the  book  or 
the  roll,  are  now  to  be  made  known.  The  first  seal  is 
broken ;  and  the  attention  of  the  apostle  is  called  to  the 
disclosure  by  a  voice  like  the  noise  of  thunder,  saying. 
Come  and  see.  This  voice  was  uttered  by  the  first  of  the 
foiu'  living  creatures,  whose  characteristics  were  those  of  a 
lion,  showing  perhaps,  that  the  preachers  of  the  gospel  in 
2* 


34  CHAPTER  VI. 

the  first  period  of  Christianity,    designated   by   this  seal, 
were  very  powerful,  bold,  and  magnanimous. 

2,  And  J  scnv^  and  behold  a  ivhile  horse  ;  and  he  that  sat 
on  him  had  a  bozo  ;  and  a  croiun  loas  given  unto  him  :  and 
he  went  forth  conquerinr/^  and  to  conquer. — The  opening  of  the 
first  roll  disclosed  a  white  horse,  with  a  rider  having  a  bow', 
and  a  crown  ivas  f/iven  to  him.  His  appearance  was  that  of 
a  conqueror,  achieving  conquest  after  conquest.  As  I  under- 
stand it,  this  emblem  w^as  drawn  on  the  inside  of  the  roll, 
and  was  all  that  was  exhibited  on  the  opening  of  it.  No 
writing  was  seen, — the  emblem  contained  in  itself  the 
whole  prediction  intended  to  be  expressed.  What  this  was, 
is  the  thing  to  be  ascertained.  Similar  emblems  were 
shown  in  a  vision  to  Zcchariah,  and  describe  events  which 
preceded  the  incarnation  of  Christ.  There  were  four  cha- 
riots ;  the  first  was  drawn  by  red  horses,  the  second  by 
black  horses,  the  third  by  white,  the  fourth  by  grizzled  and 
bay  horses.  Zech.  6  :  1,3.  The  white  horse  is  the  emblem 
of  a  bloodless  joyous  victory,  19  :  11, 14.  The  rider  is  Christ, 
or  emblematically  Christianity  itself.  A  bow  is  an  instru- 
ment used  for  shooting  arrows,  and  these  together  were  chief 
implements  of  ancient  v>'arfiire.  The  meaning  is  that  the 
victories  of  Christianity  arc  won  by  the  instrumentality  of 
truth,  the  arrow  which  pierces  the  heart,  as  on  the  day  of 
Pentecost  when  multitudes  were  pricked  in  their  hearts,  and 
exclaimed.  What  shall  we  do  ? — A  crown  given  to  the  rider, 
signifies,  that  Christ,  or  Christianity  Avould  be  victorious 
and  have  ruling  authority.  This  is  explained,  as  is  usual 
with  John,  in  an  additional  clause.  He  went  forth  conquer- 
ing and  to  conquer.  Many  were  to  be  the  conflicts — cer- 
tain and  joyous  the  victories.  Throu^  the  labors  of  the 
apostles  and  their  coadjutors,  the  Christian  religion  spread 
over  a  large  portion  of  the  known  world,  so  that,  as  Paul 


CHAPTER  VI.  35 

said,  "the  gospel  was  preached  in  all  the  world."  The 
period  of  this  seal  may  be  considered  as  extending  from  the 
day  of  Pentecost  to  about  the  year  67  or  68,  when  the 
"  wars  and  rumors  of  wars"  began  Avhich  preceded  the  de- 
struction of  Jerusalem. 

3  and  4.  And  token  he  had  o^yened  the  second  seal,  I  heard 
the  second  heast  say,  Come  and  see.  And  there  'went  out 
another  horse  that  loas  red  ;  cmd'power  was  given  to  Mm  that 
sat  thereon  to  take  i^eace  from  the  earth,  and  that  they  should 
Mil  one  another :  and  there  loas  given  unto  him  a  great  sivord. — 
At  the  opening  of  the  second  seal,  the  second  living  crea- 
ture, whose  appearance  was  that  of  a  young  ox,  indicating, 
perhaps,  that  at  this  period  the  faith  and  patience  of  minis- 
ters would  be  greatly  tried,  gave  the  same  call  to  attention. 
The  emblem  disclosed  was  a  red  horse,  by  which  is  signified 
a  time  of  war  and  bloodshed  in  an  eminent  degree.  This 
is  shown  to  be  its  meaning  by  what  follows.  Poiver  was 
given  to  the  rider  to  take  ^;eace  from  the  land,  and  that 
they  should  kill  one  another,  and  there  -was  given  to 
him  a  great  sioord.  These  expressions  and  this  symbolic 
act,  predict  uncommon  slaughter.  This  seal  had  its  fulfill- 
ment in  the  incessant  civil  wars  in  the  short  reigns  of 
Galba,  Otho,  and  Vitellius,  and  especially  in  the  destruction 
of  Jerusalem,  and  of  more  than  a  million  of  the  Jews.  This 
capture  of  the  holy  city,  and  immense  sacrifice  of  human 
life,  was  attended  with  the  demolition  of  the  temple,  and 
the  overthrow  of  the  Jewish  commonwealth.  In  the  lan- 
guage of  the  Saviour,  it  was  such  a  time  of  tribulation,  as 
never  had  been,  and  never  should  be  again.  In  addition 
to  these,  were  the  wars  of  Domitian  in  repelling  the  inva- 
sions of  the  surrounding  barbarous  nations,  and  the  for- 
midable insurrection  in  Germany.  This  was  a  peiiod, 
which  fully  justified  the  expression,  that  men  should  kill 


36  CHAPTER  VI. 

one  another,  and  gave  a  terrible  illustration  of  the  emblems 
employed.  Domitian  was  slain  in  the  year  96,  and  this 
may  be  considered  as  the  termination  of  this  seal. 

5  and  6.  And  tvhen  he  had  oj^ened  the  third  seed,  I  heard 
the  third  beast  say.  Come  and  see.  And  I  beheld,  and  lo  a 
black  horse  ;  and  he  that  sat  on  him  had  a  2)air  of  balances 
in  his  hand.  And  I  heard  a  voice  in  the  midst  of  the  four 
beasts  say,  A  measure  of  xoheal  for  a  jyennij,  and  three  mea- 
sures of  barley  for  a,  penny  ;  and  see  thott  hurt  not  the  oil 
and  the  wine. — ^The  third  seal  introduced  a  different  state  of 
things ;  and  the  third  living  creature  which  had  a  face  like 
a  man,  indicating  perhaps,  that  intelligence  and  wisdom 
would  characterize  this  period,  said.  Come  and  see.  A  black 
horse  is   emblematic   of  calamities   and   mournincr.     The 

o 

rider  with  balances  signifies,  that  the  ruling  power  would  be 
marked  with  justice  and  equity.  Seemingly  contradictory 
as  is  the  import  of  these  symbols,  we  find,  that  the  history 
of  the  time  fully  sustains  their  appropriateness. 

Nerva,  who  succeeded  Domitian,  Mas  a  prince  of  great 
moderation  and  generosity.  Goldsmith  informs  us,  that 
"  the  people,  being  accustomed  to  tyranny,  regarded  his  gen- 
tle reign  with  rapture."  It  Nvas,  however,  very  brief. 
Ti'ajan  succeeded  to  the  throne  and  was  distinguished  for 
his  diligence,  his  moderation  to  his  enemies,  his  modest 
bearing,  his  liberality  to  the  deserving,  and  economy  in  his 
expenses."  lie  was  induced,  however,  to  look  with  sus- 
picion upon  Christians,  and  great  numbers  of  them  were 
put  to  death.  These  cruelties  were  suspended  by  order 
of  the  emperor,  when  he  was  informed  by  Pliny  of  the  in- 
nocence and  harmlcssness  of  their  lives. 

After  his  death  Adrian  was  elected  emperor  in  A.D. 
117.  He  was  distinguished  lor  personal  and  mental  ac- 
complishments,  and    equally    so,    for   his   moral    virtues. 


CHAPTER  VT.  37 

"  He  was  aftlible  to  his  friends,  and  gentle  toward  those  of 
inferior  stations ;  he  relieved  their  wants,  and  visited  them 
in  sickness,  it  being  his  constant  maxim,  that  he  was  an 
emperor,  not  elected  for  his  own  good,  but  for  the  benefit 
of  mankind."  Yet  with  these  virtues  there  was  a  strange 
mingling  of  vices. 

He  made  a  tour  through  France,  Germany,  and  Holland, 
to  Great  Britain,  and  thence  through  Spain  to  Eome,  "  re- 
forming many  abuses,  and  doing  much  for  the  public  wel- 
fare." He  traveled  through  the  eastern  part  of  the  empire, 
and  mitigated  the  severity  of  the  persecution  of  the  Chris- 
tians. He  went  twice  into  Africa,  corrected  disor- 
ders, reformed  the  governments  there,  erected  magnificent 
edifices,  and  ordered  the  rebuilding  of  Carthage  and  Jeru- 
salem. "  He  forbade  masters  to  kill  their  slaves,  as 
had  been  before  allowed ;  but  ordained  that  they  should 
be  tried  by  laws  enacted  against  capital  offenses."  All 
these  things  show  the  truthfulness  of  the  emblem  of  the 
balances  in  the  hand  of  the  imperial  rider. 

Equally  true  to  fact  is  the  emblem  of  the  black  horse  on 
which  he  rode.  For  when  Adrian  was  in  Athens,  another 
insurrection  was  made  by  the  Jews,  who  massacred  Ro- 
mans and  Christians  throughout  Judea.  A  powerful  army 
was  sent  to  subdue  them,  and  in  the  course  of  two  years 
more  than  a  thousand  of  their  best  towns  were  destroyed, 
and  nearly  six  hundred  thousand  men  were  slain  in  battle. 
Adrian  reigned  about  twenty-two  years. 

Antoninus  succeeded  him  in  the  year  138.  His  morals 
were  so  correct,  he  was  surnamed  the  Pius.  His  reign  for 
a  period  of  nearly  twenty- three  years,  was  distinguished  for 
the  encouragement  of  learning,  and  efforts  for  the  welfare 
and  happiness  of  the  people.  Some  earthquakes  having  oc- 
curred, the  Christians  were  accused  by  their  inveterate 
enemies,  the  heathen,  of  being  the  cause  of  those  calamities, 


38  CHAPTER  VI. 

and  were  subjected  to  injurious  and  cruel  treatment  accord- 
ingly. ]\Iosheim  states,  that  "  the  emperor,  being  inform- 
ed of  these  unjust  and  barbarous  proceedings,  addressed  an 
edict  to  the  whole  province  of  Asia,  in  which  he  denounced 
capital  punishment  against  such  as  should  accuse  the 
Christians  without  being  able  to  prove  them  guilty  of  any 
crime."  Tluis,  in  this  reign  was  the  emblem  of  the  bal- 
ances verified.  I  cannot  agree  with  those  writers  who 
make  that  emblem  to  signify  a  yoke  of  oppression,  or  of 
burdensome  ordinances,  and  superstitious  observances. 
Such  fancies  are  unworthy  of  the  subject. 

The  other  part  of  this  seal  seems  to  refer  to  events  re- 
lating more  particularly  to  the  church.  A  measure  of 
wheat  for  a  penny ^  &c.  Wheat  and  barley  being  chief  ar- 
ticles of  food,  are  emblems  of  Christian  privileges  which 
nourish  piety  in  the  soul.  Being  carefully  measured  out 
for  a  definite  sum  indicates,  that  there  would  be  a  great 
diminution  of  these  privileges,  and  the  enjoyment  of  them 
would  be  attended  with  great  difficulties.  The  witie  and 
the  oil  signify  spiritual  comforts  and  refreshings  which  re- 
sult fi'om  those  privileges ;  and  the  command  not  to  hurt 
these,  is  prophetic  of  the  protection  which  the  emperors  en- 
deavored to  extend  to  the  Christians,  assailed  and  maltreated 
by  their  enemies. 

Trajan,  whose  reign  is  included  under  this  seal,  issued  an 
edict  to  this  effect,  "  That  the  Christians  were  not  to  be 
officiously  sought  after,  but  that  such  as  tvere  acctised  and 
convicted  of  an  adherence  to  Christianity,  were  to  be  put  to 
death  as  wicked  citizens,  if  they  did  not  return  to  the  re- 
ligion of  their  ancestors."  This  made  an  adherence  to 
Christianity  a  capital  crime.  The  only  alternati\e  for  the 
accused  was  apostasy  or  death.  None,  therefore,  could  be 
known  openly  as  Christians,  and  as  a  consequence,  public 
worship  could  not  be  enjoyed  without  incurring  the  peril 


CHAPTER  VI.  39 

of  death.  It  became  indispensable  then  for  Christians  to 
conceal  their  sentiments  and  to  give  up  in  a  great  measure 
their  privileges.  This,  in  my  view,  is  what  is  signified  by 
the  careful  measuring  of  the  wheat  and  barle}\ 

On  a  representation  being  made  to  Adrian  by  Granianus, 
pro-consul  of  Asia,  of  the  cruelty  and  injustice  of  allowing 
a  lawless  rable  to  sacrifice  persons  accused  of  no  crime,  that 
emperor  prohibited  the  putting  of  Christians  to  death  with- 
out a  regular  conviction  of  crimes  against  the  civil  laws. 

Another  fact  illustrative  of  the  text  was,  that  under  the 
reign  of  Trajan  there  Avas  a  great  revival  of  learning,  which 
had  languished  under  the  tyrannical  reigns  of  his  predeces- 
sors. Protected  and  encouraged  by  that  worthy  prince, 
philosophy  and  letters  advanced  to  a  degree  of  eminence 
nearly  equal  to  that  of  former  times.  It  was  at  this  period, 
that  the  famous  apologies  and  vindications  of  Christians 
and  Christianity,  were  published  by  Justin  Martyr,  Athe- 
nagoras,  Tatian,  and  others.  Thus  the  prophetic  injunction 
not  to  injure  the  wine  and  the  oil,  probably  received  its 
fulfillment  in  these  favoring  circumstances.  These,  how- 
ever, were  preceded,  and  intermingled  with  circumstances 
of  a  very  different  nature,  as  the  other  emblems  of  this  seal 
indicate.  The  time  of  this  seal  may  be  considered  as  ex- 
tending to  the  death  of  Antoninus  Pius,  which  occurred  in 
A.D.  161. 

The  Fourth  Seal,  verses  7  and  8.  And  when  he  had 
opened  the  fourth  seal,  I  heard  the  voice  of  the  fourth  beast 
say,  Come  and  see.  And  I  looked,  and  behold  a  pale 
horse  ;  and  his  name  that  sat  on  him  was  Death,  and  hell 
followed  with  him  ;  and  power  was  given  unto  them  over  the 
fourth  part  of  the  earth,  to  kill  with  sioord,  and  with  hunger, 
and  with  death,  and  with  the  beasts  of  the  earth. — The  fourth 


40  CHAPTER  VI. 

of  the  living  creatures  was  lilie  an  eagle  with  his  wings 
extended,  as  if  in  the  act  of  flying. 

The  emblem  is  a  pale  horse,  whose  rider  is  death,  with 
hell  following.  Its  meaning  is,  that  there  will  be  great 
destruction  of  human  life,  by  war,  pestilence,  famine,  and 
the  rapid  invasions  of  barbarous  nations.  This  interpreta- 
tion is  subjoined  by  the  revelator.  Power  was  given  to 
them  over  a  fourth  part  of  the  earth,  that  is,  the  Roman 
empire,  to  kill  tviih  the  sword,  i.  e.  war,  2vith  hunger,  i.  e. 
famine,  with  death,  i.  e.  pestilence,  and  with  beasts,  i.  e. 
barbarians. 

In  A.D.  161,  Marcus  Aurelius  succeeded  to  the  impe- 
rial throne,  and  though  distinguished  for  his  literary  ac- 
complishments, he  was  hostile  to  Christians.  lie  asso- 
ciated with  him  in  the  government,  Licius  Verus,  a  man 
passionate  and  vile.  Goldsmith  states,  that  immediately 
"  the  Catti  invaded  Germany  and  Ivhetia,  ravaging  all  with 
fire  and  sword."  The  Rhetians  revolted,  but  were  sub- 
dued. The  Parthians,  under  Vologeses  their  king,  made 
a  terrible  invasion,  destroyed  the  Roman  legions  in  Arme- 
nia, entered  Syria,  and  filled  the  whole  country  with 
terror.  The  Romans  were  victorious  over  the  Partliians, 
took  Selucia,  plundered  and  burned  Babylon  and  Ctesi- 
phon.  On  their  return  more  than  half  their  army  was 
wasted  by  famine  and  pestilence.  Not  only  so,  but  the 
army  brought  the  pestilence  to  Rome,  and  spread  it  in  the 
provinces  through  which  it  passed.  Its  ravages  in  the 
western  portion  of  the  empire  were  indeed  terrible.  In 
the  language  of  Goldsmith,  there  were  "earthquakes, 
famines,  and  inundations,  such  as  had  never  before  hap- 
pened ;  the  products  of  the  earth,  throughout  all  Italy,  were 
devoured  by  locusts  ;  all  the  barbarous  nations  surround- 
ing the  empire  made  their  irruptions  even  into  Italy  itself" 
To  crown  the  whole,  these   calamities    were      "ribcd  to 


CHAPTER  VI.  41 

the  Christians,  and  a  merciless  persecution  was  waged 
against  them,  and  vast  numbers  were  put  to  death,  among 
whom  were  those  distinguished  ministers,  Justin  Martyr, 
and  Polycarp.  These  calamities  fell  chiefly  on  the  west- 
ern quarter  of  the  empire,  designated  by  the  fourth  part 
of  the  earth.  After  a  short  interval  the  northern  barba- 
rians renewed  the  war  of  invasion,  and  were  again  over- 
come and  driven  back.  This  state  of  warfare  and  commo- 
tion, joined  with  the  infernal  hatred,  persecution,  and  mas- 
sacre of  Christians,  is  doubtless  what  is  meant  by  the 
phrase,  hell  followed  toith  death.  Wa  should  think,  that 
there  could  be  no  doubt  whether  these  events  should  be 
referred  to  this  seal.  In  addition  to  these,  and  foreshown 
by  the  same  emblems,  was  the  terrible  state  of  things  under 
the  short  reigns  of  Commodus,  Pertinax,  Didius,  Severus, 
Caracalla,  Macrinus,  Heliogabalus,  Alexander,  Maximin, 
Pupienus,  and  Balbinus,  and  Philip,  all  of  whom,  except 
Severus,  were  assassinated,  some  of  whom  reigned  only  a 
few  months,  and  the  entire  period  of  all  their  tyrannical 
and  disastrous  reigns  being  only  eighty-six  years.  This 
seal  may  be  considered  as  extending  to  the  year  248  when 
Philip  was  slain. 

The  Fifth  Seal,  verses  9,  10,  11.  And  when  he  had 
opened  the  fifth  seal,  I  saw  under  the  altar  the  souls  of  them 
that  were  slain  for  the  word  of  God,  and  for  the  testimoni/ 
which  they  held :  And  they  cried  ivith  a  loud  voice,  saying, 
Ho'w  lony,  0  Lord,  holy  and  true,  dost  thou  not  judge  and 
avenge  our  blood  .on  them  that  dwell  on  the  earth?  And 
white  robes  were  given  unto  every  one  of  them  ;  and  it  was 
said  unto  them  that  they  should  rest  yet  for  a  Utile  season, 
until  their  fellow-servants  also,  and  their  brethren,  that 
should  be  killed  as  they  tvere,  should  be  fulfilled. — This  roll 
disclosed  the  picture  of  an  altar,  at  the  base  of  which  were 


42  CHAPTER  VI. 

lyi-ig  the  persons  of  those  who  were  slain  for  their  adher- 
ence to  the  word  of  God,  and  the  fjiithful  testimony 
which  they  bore  to  his  truth.  Reference  to  a  concordance 
"will  show  at  once,  that  the  term  souls,  is  used  throughout 
the  Bible  for  persons.  Though  they  are  represented  as 
slain,  they  inquire  with  great  earnestness  how  long  judg- 
ment and  retribution  will  be  delayed  against  their  mur- 
derers? This  emblem  foretells  a  period  of  great  per- 
secution and  slaughter  of  Christians.  Let  us  see  if  his- 
tory furnishes  the  record  of  its  fufillment. 

Mosheim,  (Cent.  3,  chap.  2,)  says:  "The  accession  of 
Deoius  Trajan  to  the  imperial  throne,  in  the  year  249, 
raised  a  new  tempest,  in  which  the  fury  of  persecution  fell 
in  a  dreadful  manner  on  the  church  of  Christ.  For  this 
emperor  published  most  terrible  and  cruel  edicts,  by  which 
the  praetors  were  ordered,  upon  pain  of  death,  either  to 
extirpate  the  whole  body  of  Christians  without  exception, 
or  to  force  them,  by  torments  of  various  kinds,  to  return 
to  Pagan  worship.  Hence,  in  all  the  provinces  of  the  em- 
pire, multitudes  of  Christians  were  during  the  space  of  two 
years  put  to  death,  by  the  most  horrid  punishments  which 
an  ingenious  barbarity  could  invent." 

Under  Gallus  and  Volusianus  his  son,  the  flame  of  perse- 
cution which  had  somewhat  subsided,  was  reanimated. 
Besides  suffering  in  common  with  others,  the  calamities  of 
a  terrible  pestilence,  they  were  subjected  to  the  renewed, 
rage  of  persecution,  by  the  heathen  priests  persuading  the 
people  that  the  pestilence  was  sent  by  the  gods  on  account 
of  the  lenity  shown  to  the  Christians. 

"Valerian  was  made  emperor  in  A.D.  254,  and  caused 
the  persecution  to  cease ;  but  soon  Macrianus,  his  chief 
counselor,  and  a  bigoted  pagan,  prevailed  on  the  emperor 
to  prohibit  the  assemblages  of  the  Christians,  and  to  banish 
their  bishops  and  doctors.     This  edict,  published   in   257, 


CHAPTER  VI.  43 

was  followed  by  one  still  more  severe,  in  consequence  of 
which,  Christians  in  all  the  provinces  were  put  to  death  by 
most  terrible  methods  of  execution."  His  son  and  suc- 
cessor in  the  year  260,  restored  peace  to  the  church,  which 
continued  in  a  tolerable  degree  through  the  succeeding 
short  reigns  of  Flavius  Claudius,  Aurelian,  and  Tacitus. 

But  in  the  reign  of  Diocletian  which  began  in  284,  in 
partnership  with  three  others,  viz.,  Maximian  Herculus, 
Constantius  Chlorus,  and  Maximinus  Galerius,  the  scene 
changed.  Galerius  importunately  solicited  Diocletian  for 
an  edict  against  Christians,  and  "  an  order  was  obtained  for 
him  to  pull  down  their  churches,  to  burn  their  books  and 
writings,  and  to  take  from  them  all  civil  rights  and  privi- 
leges." A  fire  broke  out  in  the  palace  of  Nicomedia, 
which  was  attributed  to  Christians,  and  Diocletian  "  caused 
vast  numbers  of  them  to  be  tormented  in  a  most  inhuman 
manner."  Certain  seditions  in  Armenia  and  Syria  were 
charged  on  them,  and  Diocletian  issued  a  second  edict,  or- 
dering all  pastors  and  ministers  to  be  cast  into  prison.  '  A 
third  edict  was  soon  issued  by  him,  ordering  all  sorts  of 
torments  to  be  employed,  to  force  those  venerable  captives 
to  renounce  their  profession,  by  sacrificing  to  the  gods. 
An  immense  number  of  persons  illustrious  for  their  piety 
and  learning  became  victims  throughout  the  empire,  ex- 
cepting France,  which  was  under  the  mild  and  equitable 
reign  of  Constantius  Chlorus.  Some  were  punished  in  a 
manner  too  shameful  to  relate,  some  were  put  to  death 
after  having  their  constancy  ti'ied  by  tedious  and  inexpres- 
sible tortures,  and  some  were  sent  to  the  mines  to  drag 
out  the  remainder  of  life  in  poverty  and  bondage.'* 

'  In  the  second  year  of  this  horrible  persecution  (A.D. 
394)  a  fourth  edict  was  published  by  Diocletian,  at  the  in- 
stigation of  Galerius  and  others,  by  which  the  magistrates 

*Mosheim,  cent.  4,  part  1,  chap.  1. 


44  CHAPTER  VI. 

were  ordered  and  commissioned  to  f(jrce  all  Christians, 
without  distinction  of  rank  or  sex,  to  sacrifice  to  the  gods, 
and  were  authorised  to  employ  all  sorts  of  torments  to 
drive  them  to  this  act  of  apostasy.  The  diligence  and 
zeal  of  the  Roman  magistrates  in  the  execution  of  this 
inhuman  edict,  had  like  to  have  proved  fatal  to  the  Chris- 
tian cause.'  Galerius  finally  obliged  Diocletian  and  Max- 
imian  to  resign  the  imperial  dignity,  and  proclaimed  him- 
self emperor  of  the  east,  leaving  the  west  to  Constantius. 
Having  done  this,  "  he  augmented  the  sufferings  of  Chris- 
tians under  his  tyrannic  rule  to  a  dreadful  degree."  How 
appropriate  to  these  bloody  scenes  was  the  emblem  of 
human  bodies  strown  round  an  altar,  slain  for  the  word 
of  God. 

To  these  martyrs  white  robes  ivere  given  as  a  token 
of  their  innocence  and  their  future  recompense ;  and  for 
their  consolation  they  were  told  that  yet  a  little  season 
and  they  should  rest  when  others  of  their  brethren  should 
be  slain  as  they  had  been.  This,  I  regard  as  an  answer  to 
their  question,  How  long,  0  Lord,  in  the  preceding  verse ; 
and,  if  I  mistake  not,  the  idea  is,  that  in  a  short  time,  these 
persecutions  from  heathen  rulers,  heathen  priests  and 
magistrates  would  cease,  which  was  the  fact  in  a  few  years 
after,  under  Constantine,  the  first  Christian  emperor.  As 
we  shall  presently  see,  he  not  only  caused  persecution 
against  the  Christians  to  cease ;  but  he  put  down  heathen 
priests  and  idolatrous  sacrifices,  and  prohibited  the  whole 
system  of  paganism.  There  was  a  long  period  of  comparar 
tive  tranquillity  and  prosperity  to  the  church  ;  vast  acces- 
sions were  made  to  it  all  over  the  empire,  and  its  suprema- 
cy was  everywhere  acknowledged. 

12,  13,  and  14.  And  I  beheld  tvhen  he  had  opened  the 
sixth  seal,  and,  lo,  there  ivas  a  great  earthquake  ;  and  the  sun 


CHAPTER  VI.  45 

became  black  as  sackcloth  of  hair,  and  the  moon  became  as 
blood ;  and  the  stars  of  heaven  fell  unto  the  earth,  even  as  a 
fig-tree  casteth  her  nntimely  ff/s,  tohen  she  is  shaken  of  a 
mighty  wind :  and  the  heaven  departed  as  a  scroll  tohen  it  is 
rolled  together  ;  and  every  mountain  and  island  xvere  moved 
out  of  their  2)laces. — The  convulsions  of  the  earth,  the  ob- 
scuration of  the  sun,  the  sanguinary  aspect  of  the  moon,  the 
falling  of  stars,  the  passing  away  of  the  firmament,  and 
the  removal  of  mountains  and  islands,  are  great  prodigies 
in  nature,  employed  as  symbols  to  express  violent  changes 
in  the  civil  and  religious  affairs  of  a  kingdom  or  state. 
Here,  and  in  succeeding  chapters,  the  things  predicted  were 
to  transpire  within  the  Roman  empire,  which,  at  the  time 
of  these  visions,  embraced  nearly  all  the  known  world. 

An  earthquake  is  a  symbol  of  a  civil  commotion  and 
revolution ;  or,  as  Cruden  says,  "  An  extraordinary  and 
unexpected  alteration  in  the  state  of  affairs,  civil  or  eccle- 
siastical." The  siin  being  a  ruling  orb  in  the  natural 
world,  is  the  symbol  of  the  ruling  power  in  the  state  or 
the  church.  Being  deprived  of  its  brightness,  and  made 
black  as  sackcloth,  signifies  the  cessation  of  that  power — 
the  overthrow  of  the  ruling  authority.  The  moon  is  an 
emblem  of  inferior  official  stations,  and  sometimes  of  reli- 
gious ordinances.  Its  becoming  like  blood,  signifies  that 
the  things  represented  by  it  are  to  undergo  a  sanguinary 
change.  Stars  represent  distinguished  persons.  Christian 
pastors  and  teachers,  as  in  chapter  1  :  20 ;  and  in  this 
place,  heathen  philosophers,  statesmen  and  priests.  The 
falling  of  these,  means  their  deposition  from  office,  the  ter- 
mination of  their  functions,  and  the  ruin  of  their  influence. 
Heaven  is  the  symbol  of  government,  either  civil  or  reli- 
gious, under  a  particular  form;  and  its  departure  means 
the  cessation  of  that  form,  a  change  in  the  political  system. 
Mountains  and  islands  are  states  and  sovereio-nties  included 


46  CHAPTER  VI. 

within  an  empire ;  and  their  removal  out  of  their  places 
indicates  a  transition  from  one  political  and  moral  condi- 
tion to  another.  It  is  important  that  these  definitions 
should  be  particularly  noticed,  because  these  emblems  fre- 
quently occur  in  the  subsequent  visions.  The  manner  in 
which  they  are  used  in  the  Old  Testament,  fully  substan- 
tiates the  interpretation  now  given  of  them. 

The  overthrow  of  the  Chaldean  government,  the  cap- 
ture of  Babylon  by  the  army  of  Darius,  and  the  slaying 
of  the  king  and  nobles,  is  thus  described  in  the  13th  chap- 
ter of  Isaiah :  "  Behold,  the  day  of  the  Lord  cometh,  cruel 
both  with  wrath  and  fierce  anger,  to  lay  the  land  desolate ; 
and  he  will  destroy  the  sinners  out  of  it.  For  the  stars 
of  heaven  and  its  constellations  shall  not  give  their  light ; 
the  sun  shall  be  darkened  in  his  going  forth,  and  the  moon 
shall  not  cause  her  light  to  shine.  I  will  shake  the  heavens, 
and  the  earth  shall  remove  out  of  her  place,  in  the  wrath 
of  the  Lord  of  hosts."  Ezekiel,  in  chap.  32  :  7,  8,  describes 
the  destruction  of  Egypt  in  a  similar  manner,  expressly 
comparing  the  extinction  of  her  glory  to  the  extinguish- 
ment of  the  lights  of  heaven  :  "  When  I  shall  extinguish 
thee,  I  will  cover  the  heaven,  and  make  the  stars  thereof 
dark ;  I  will  cover  the  sun  with  a  cloud,  and  the  moon 
shall  not  give  her  light.  All  the  bright  lights  of  heaven 
will  I  make  dark  over  thee,  and  set  darkness  upon  thy 
land,  saith  the  Lord."  In  the  hieroglyphics  of  that  coun- 
try, the  sun  is  always  the  emblem  of  the  king.  (See  also 
Jer.  4  :  22,  24.)  In  the  same  metaphorical  language  Christ 
foretold  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  and  of  the  Jewish 
commonwealth.  "  Immediately  after  the  tribulation  of 
those  days  shall  the  sun  be  darkened,  and  the  moon  shall 
not  give  her  light,  and  the  stars  shall  fall  from  heaven,  and 
the  powers  of  the  heavens  shall  be  shaken.  And  then 
shall  appear  the  sign  of  the  Son  of  man  in  heaven,  and 


CHAPTER  VI.  47 

then  shall  all  the  tribes  of  the  land  mourn,"  &c.  It  was 
declared  by  the  patriarch  Jacob,  in  his  prophetic  blessing 
of  Judah,  that  the  sceptre  should  not  depart  from  Judah, 
nor  a  lawgiver  between  his  feet,  iintil  Shiloh  shall  come. 
At  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem,  the  sceptre  did  depart, 
the  Jewish  commonwealth  was  overthrown ;  and  this  was 
the  sign  that  Messiah  had  come.  This  sign  appeared  in 
heaven ;  the  Saviour  using  that  term  just  as  the  old  pro- 
phets did,  and  as  John  afterward  did,  as  signifying  the 
goveniment,  both  civil  and  ecclesiastical ;  which  govern- 
ment was  then  utterly  destroyed.  The  passing  away  of 
the  heaven  of  government,  was  the  infallible  sign  that 
Messiah  had  come. 

Having  thus  explained  the  symbols,  let  us  turn  to  the 
records  of  history  for  the  fulfillment  in  the  case  before  us. 
The  victories  of  Constantine ;  the  entire  subversion  of  the 
Pagan  dominion  in  the  empire,  which  had  continued  for 
more  than  a  thousand  years  ;  the  eradication  of  heathenism, 
and  the  establishment  of  Christianity  and  a  Christian  gov- 
ernment, are  the  events  thus  predicted. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  fourth  century,  the  Eoman  em- 
pire consisted  of  four  great  divisions,  each  having  a  governor 
or  emperor  over  it.  Galerius  and  Dioclesian  ruled  over 
the  central  and  eastern  portions.  Upon  the  death  of 
Galerius,  his  son-in-law,  Maxentius,  a  firm  supporter  of 
paganism,  became  a  competitor  for  the  imperial  throne. 
Constantine  succeeded  his  father  in  the  government  of  the 
western  portion  of  the  empire.  Ascertaining  the  state  of 
things,  he  left  France,  and  entered  Italy  with  an  army  of 
90,000  foot  and  8,000  horse,  and  advanced  almost  to  the 
gates  of  Rome.  Maxentius  came  out  with  an  army  of 
175,000  foot  and  1,800  horse.  The  engagement  was  fierce 
and  bloody,  till  the  pagan  usurper's  cavalry  was  routed,  and 
Maxentius  was  drowned  in  his  flight  by  the  breaking  doNvn 


48  CHAPTER  VI. 

of  a  bridge,  which  precipitated  him  into  the  Tiber.     This 
victory  was  achieved  in  the  year  312. 

Edicts  were  soon  after  issued  by  Constantine,  declaring 
that  Cln-istians  should  be  relieved  of  all  their  oppressions, 
and  be  admitted  into  places  of  civil  trust  and  authority. 

Maximin,  who  governed  the  eastern  part  of  the  empire, 
desirous  of  obtaining  the  whole  imperial  authority,  with  a 
powerful  army,  marched  against  Licinius,  who  participated 
with  Constantine  in  the  government ;  but,  after  many  en- 
gagements, was  defeated,  and  his  troops  cut  to  pieces. 
Licinius  then  turned  against  Constantine,  and  with  Maxi- 
min, at  the  head  of  formidable  armies,  fought  a  desperate 
battle  in  Pannonia,  Before  engaging,  Constantine,  with 
his  Christian  ministers,  implored  divine  assistance ;  and 
Licinius  called  upon  the  heathen  priests  to  beg  assistance 
of  the  gods.  Here  the  friends  of  Christianity  and  the 
abettors  of  heathenism  were  arrayed  against  each  other. 
The  issue  of  that  battle  was  of  the  highest  moment.  Con- 
stantine was  victorious,  and  Licinius  sued  for  a  truce. 
Soon,  however,  instigated  by  the  heathen  priests,  he  raised 
another  army  of  those  who  were  attached  to  the  heathen 
superstitions ;  and,  having  fought  several  battles  without 
success,  he  threw  himself  at  the  feet  of  the  Christian  victor 
a  prisoner  of  war,  in  the  year  325. 

The  imperial  authority  being  wholly  in  the  hands  of 
Constantine,  he  resolved  to  establish  Christianity  on  a 
basis  which  no  revolution  could  shake.  He  commanded, 
that  in  all  the  empire  the  orders  of  the  bishops  should 
everywhere  be  obeyed.  "  He  employed  all  the  resources 
of  his  genius,  all  the  authority  of  laws,  and  all  the  engaging 
charms  of  his  munificence  and  liberality,  to  efiace  the 
superstitions  of  paganism,  and  to  propagate  Christianity  in 
every  corner  of  the  Roman  empire.  He  had  learned,  no 
doubt,  from  the  disturbances  continually  excited  by  Lici- 


CHAPTER  VI.  49 

nius,  that  neither  himself  nor  tlie  empire  could  enjoy  a 
fixed  state  of  tranquillity  and  safety  so  long  as  the  ancient 
superstitions  subsisted ;  and  therefore,  from  this  period,  he 
openly  opposed  the  sacred  rites  of  paganism,  as  a  religion 
detrimental  to  the  interests  of  the  state."  *  As  islands  and 
mountains  are  emblems  of  states  and  small  kingdoms,  the 
removal  of  these  from  their  places  signifies  a  change  in 
their  government,  or  civil  position  in  relation  to  the  empire. 
This  was  done  in  part  by  the  formation  of  the  four  prtefec- 
tures,  and  in  part  by  the  abolition  of  heathen  laws  and 
forms  of  government.  Says  Mosheim,  "  Constantine  the 
Great,  in  order  to  prevent  civil  commotions,  and  to  fix  his 
authority  upon  solid  and  stable  foundations,  made  several 
changes,  not  only  in  the  laws  of  the  empire,  but  also  in  the 
form  of  the  Eoman  government."  Other  changes  were 
made  by  the  Christian  emperors  who  succeeded  him  in  this 
century,  particularly  by  Theodosius  the  Great,  who  died 
A.D.  395.  Thus  was  there  a  mighty  revolution,  which, 
like  a  great  earthquake,  broke  up  the  ancient  foundations 
of  heathenism,  and  changed  the  whole  aspect  of  things. 
The  sun  of  that  long-established  system  of  superstition  and 
idolatry  was  shrouded  with  blackness ;  its  deceptive  and 
degrading  rites,  after  many  bloody  struggles,  were  abol- 
ished; the  priests,  officers  and  eminent  men,  who  were 
stars  in  the  pagan  firmament,  were  deposed  and  cast  aside, 
and  its  temples  either  demolished  or  used  for  Christian 
worship. 

15,  16,  and  17.  And  the  kings  of  the  earth,  and  the  great 
men,  and  the  rich  men,  and  the  chief  captains,  and  the  mighty 
men,  and  every  bondman,  and  every  free  man,  hid  themselves 

*  Mosheim,  Cent.  4,  page  1,  chapter  1;  also,  Goldsmith's  His. 
Rom.  Em. 

3 


50  CHAPTER  VI. 

in  the  dens,  and  in  the  rods  of  the  mountains  ;  and  said  to 
the  mountains  and  rocks,  Fall  on  tis,  and  hide  us  from  the 
face  of  him  that  sitteth  on  the  throne,  and  from  the  wrath  of 
the  Lamb  :  for  the  great  day  of  his  -wrath  is  come  ;  and  who 
shall  be  able  to  stand? — Tlio  efTccts  of  these  changes  on  the 
enemies  of  Christianity  are  depicted  in  strong  language  in 
these  verses.     Men  of  all  classes,  from  the  highest  to  the 
lowest,  are  represented  as  hiding  themselves  in  the  caves 
and  among  the  rocks  of  the  mountains,  and  beseeching  that 
these  may  be  a  cover  to  them  from  the  exhibitions  of 
Divine  power  and  wrath.     Most  deeply  did  they  realize 
that  the  day  of  His  terrible  anger  was  come.     To  under- 
stand the  full  force  of  this,  we  must  look  to  the  facts  which 
were  the  fulfillment  of  it.     We  have  seen  how  the  pagan 
portion  of  the  people  in  the  states  and  provinces  of  the 
empire,  excited  by  the  priests  to  oppose  the  progress  of 
Christianity,  and  led  on  by  Maximin  and  Licinius,  made 
desperate  sti-uggles  to  maintain  heathenism,  and  were  de- 
feated in  successive  battles,  with  great  slaughter,  though 
their  force  was  far  the  greatest.     Universal  consternation 
filled  the  hearts  of  these  enemies  of  the  Christian  religion. 
Seeing  the  success  of  that  cause  which  they  had  opposed 
with  unmitigated  hate,  and  knowing  what  horrid  barbarities 
they  had  practiced  on  the  Christians,  putting  them  to  death 
wherever  they  could,  though  guilty  of  no  crime,  they  feared 
the  worst  consequences  in  regard  to  themselves.      They 
were  sensible  that  the  Christians'  God  had  arisen  to  vindi- 
cate his  cause,  and  to  avenge  the  blood  of  his  martyred 
people.     They  sought  protection  from  the  anger  of  Him 
against  whom  resistance  was  vain.     It  was  the  deep  con- 
viction of  their  souls,  that  the  great  day  of  his  ivrath,  in 
which  he  would  inflict  a  righteous  retribution,  had  arrived, 
and  none  would  be  able  to  stand  against  it.     Knowing 
what  they  did  of  the  triumphs  of  Christianity  in  the  three 


CHAPTER  VII.  51 

hundred  years  of  its  existence ;  seeing  it  ascend  the  throne 
of  the  ernjiire,  and  perceiving  that  it  would  become  pre- 
dominant, it  was  natural  that  they  should  be  filled  with 
alarm,  and  with  overwhelming  convictions  of  guilt. 


CHAPTER   VII. 

The  events  detailed  in  this  chapter  are  included  under 
the  sixth  seal.  In  connection  with  the  overthrow  of  hea- 
thenism, and  the  suppression  of  its  worship  and  sacrifices 
by  Constantine,  converts  to  Christianity  became  very  nu- 
merous, and  the  church  had  a  season  of  great  prosperity. 
The  prediction  of  this  constitutes  the  subject  of  this 
chapter. 

Verse  1.  And  after  these  things  I  saw  four  angels  stand- 
ing on  the  four  corners  of  the  earth,  holding  the  four  winds 
of  the  earth,  that  the  wind  should  not  bloio  on  the  earth,  nor 
on  any  tree. — After  a  discomfiture  of  the  advocates  of  pa- 
ganism, a  different  scene  was  presented  to  the  mind  of  the 
Christian  seer.  Angels  are  any  agents  or  instrumentalities 
which  God  employs  to  effect  his  purposes.  By  the/owr 
angels,  mentioned  here,  I  understand  the  four  prsefects 
which  Constantine  appointed  and  placed  over  the  four  great 
divisions  of  the  empire,  to  regulate  and  control  everything 
agreeably  to  his  instructions.  The  earth,  or  as  it  should 
be  read,  the  land,  is  the  Roman  empire,  and  the  four  cor- 
ners are  the  four  prsefectures  into  which  it  was  divided  by 
Constantine.  The  four  angels  standing  on  the  four  corners, 
holding  the  winds,  &c.,  are  the  prsefects  acting  in  their 
several  stations  for  the  suppression  of  injurious  excite- 
ments, insurrections,  and  tumults  among  all  classes  of  the 
people,  and  the  preservation  of  order  and  peace.     The  ful- 


52  CHAPTER  VII. 

fillment  was  exact,  for  Constantine  exerted  all  his  authority, 
and  took  much  care  to  prevent  the  tumults  which  the  hea- 
then priests  and  their  adherents  endeavored  to  make  in 
their  hostility  to  Christianity.  He  made  assiduous  efforts 
to  secure  to  all  parts  of  that  vast  empire  the  enjoyment  of 
tranquillity  and  of  religious  privileges. 

2.  And  I  smv  another  angel  ascending  from  the  east, 
having  the  seal  of  the  living  God :  and  he  cried  with  a  loud 
voice  to  the  four  angels,  to  'whom  it  was  given  to  hurt  the 
earth  and  the  sea. — The  angel  advancing  from  the  east  was 
also  a  symbolic  angel,  which  signifies  the  ministry  of  the 
gospel,  or  those  who  perform  it.  The  seal  of  the  living  God 
is  the  word  and  the  ordinances  made  effectual  by  the  Holy 
Spirit.  The  powerful  preaching  of  the  truth  is  the  loud 
voice  of  the  angel,  and  the  immediate  effect  of  this  was  to 
restrain  men  from  sedition  and  violence — to  repress  those 
evil  passions  which  do  great  hurt  to  the  high  and  the  low. 
Let  there  be  peace  and  tranquillity  in  the  empire,  that  the 
work  of  conversion  may  go  on,  and  the  servants  of  God 
may  be  sealed  and  become  established  in  knowledge  and 
grace.  I  understand  the  former  verse  as  a  prophecy,  that 
at  this  period  the  civil  authority  should  be  exerted  to  pre- 
serve general  peace  ;  and  this  second  verse  a  prophecy,  that 
the  ministry,  or  ecclesiastical  authority,  should  do  the  same. 
The  fact  was,  that  vast  numbers  embraced  Christianity,  pro- 
fessed themselves  believers,  and  were  baptized  during  this 
period  of  tranquillity  imder  Constantine.  The  pastors  and 
spiritual  teachers  manifested  "  indefatigable  zeal ;"  transla- 
tions were  made  of  the  Holy  Scriptures,  and  Christians 
were  eminent  for  their  piety.  All  this  obtained  for  reli- 
gion a  strong  and  extensive  influence,  and  powerful  friends. 

3.  SoT/ing,   hurt  not  the  earth,   neither  the  sea,  nor  the 


CHAPTER  VII.  53 

trees,  till  we  have  sealed  the  servants  of  our  Oocl  in  their 
foreheads. — By  the  earth,  the  sea,  and  the  trees,  are  meant 
the  people  who  occupy  the  country,  and  those  who  inhabit 
the  islands,  and  persons  of  all  ages  and  classes.  Trees, 
see  Ps.  1  :  3  .     Matt.  3  :  10.     Isa.  61  :  3. 

4.-8.  And  I  heard  the  mimber  of  them  which  tvere 
sealed,  <£"c.  Of  the  tribe  of  Zabulon  tvere  sealed  twelve  thou- 
sand, (&c. — These  verses  may  refer  to  the  conversion  of 
Jews,  a  definite  number  being  used  for  an  indefinite. 
Being  sealed  with  the  truth  and  with  Christian  ordinances 
shows  what  is  the  thing  meant. 

9  and  10.  After  this  I  beheld,  and,  lo,  a  great  multitude, 
which  no  man  could  number,  of  all  nations,  and  kindreds, 
and  people,  and  tongues,  stood  before  the  throne,  and  before 
the  Lamb,  clothed  ivith  lohite  robes,  and  palms  in  their  hands ; 
and  cried  with  a  loud  voice,  saying,  Salvatioti  to  our 
God  which  sitteth  upon  the  throne,  and  unto  the  Lamb. — 
Another  part  of  this  great  ingathering  to  the  church,  in 
this  tranquil  period,  consisted  of  the  Gentiles  in  all  the 
kingdoms  and  provinces  of  the  empire.  They  stood  be- 
fore the  throne,  previously  spoken  of,  and  before  the 
Lamb,  as  enjoying  the  protection  and  favor  of  the  gov- 
ernment and  of  Christ,  clothed  in  white  robes,  showing 
that  they  were  forgiven  and  sanctified,  and  with  palms  in 
their  hands,  indicating  that  their  cause  had  become  tri 
umphant.  With  hearty  earnestness  they  ascribe  their 
salvation  from  their  enemies  and  persecutors  to  their  God 
and  Redeemer.  The  article  has  been  improperly  omitted 
by  the  translators,  and  should  be  supplied  so  as  to  read, 
The  salvation  ;  and  then  the  sentence  is  eliptical,  which, 
being  filled  up  so  as  to  express  the  idea,  would  be,  The 


54  CHAPTER  VII. 

salvation  be  ascribed  to  our  God,  &c. — salvation  from  hea- 
then rule,  oppression  and  persecution. 

11  and  12,  And  all  the  angels  stood  round  about  the 
throne,  d^c.  Saying,  Amen  ;  blessing,  and  glory,  and  wis- 
dom, and  thanksgiving,  and  honor,  and  2>ower,  and  might, 
be  unto  our  God  forever  and  ever.  Amen. — The  officers  of 
government,  the  ministers  of  the  gospel,  and  the  whole 
church  reverently  adored  God,  saying,  Amen  ;  so  let  it  be. 
The  praise,  and  the  glory,  &c.  of  the  church  be  ascribed 
to  God,  forever  and  ever.  All  that  the  church  has  of  wis- 
dom, honor,  fame,  power,  and  strength,  and  all  its  devout 
praise,  be  attributed  and  rendered  to  Ilim  who  is  the 
author  of  it  all. 

13  and  14.  And  one  of  the  elders  answered,  saying  unto 
me,  What  are  these  xvhicli  ai-e  arrayed  in  vjhite  robes  ?  and 
whence  came  they  ?  And  I  said  unto  him,  Sir,  thou  knowest. 
And  he  said  to  me,  These  are  they  tvhich  came  out  of  great 
tribulation,  and  have  washed  their  robes,  and  made  them 
white  in  the  blood  of  the  Lamb. — John  is  asked  by  one  of 
the  elders,  apparently  for  the  purpose  of  directing  his 
attention  to  the  matter,  who  those  converted  persons  were 
who  uttered  the  foregoing  ascription  of  praise,  and  whence 
had  they  come?  The  questioner  gave  the  answer,  that 
they  were  those  who  had  passed  through  great  tribulation, 
and  had  acquired  their  moral  purity  in  consequence  of  the 
blood  of  Christ.  By  his  mediation  and  atonement  the  means 
of  salvation  are  bestowed,  and  the  Spirit  is  sent  to  reno- 
vate and  sanctify.  Thus  are  their  characters  made  pure 
through  the  blood  of  the  Lamb. 

15.  Therefore  are  they  before  the  throne  of  Ood,  and 
serve  him  day  and  night  in  his  temjile  :  and  he  that  sitteth 


CHAPTER  VII.  55 

on  the  throne  shall  dwell  among  them. — Because  their  sins 
have  been  forgiven,  and  they  have  been  thus  purified,  and 
have  borne  well  their  trials,  they  are  before  the  seat  of  Di- 
vine sovereignty  as  accepted  worshipers,  and  have  the 
honor  to  serve  Him  in  his  church,  which  is  his  spiritual 
temple.  Another  of  their  privileges  is,  that  he,  according 
to  his  promise  by  the  ancient  prophets,  will  dwell  with 
them,  will  favor  them  with  his  gracious  presence,  his  protec- 
tion and  care.  These  are  the  greatest  blessings  which  his 
people  enjoy  this  side  of  heaven. 

16.  They  shall  hunger  no  7nore,  neither  thirst  any  more  ; 
neither  shall  the  sun  light  on  them,  nor  any  heat. — This  has 
usually  been  interpreted  to  mean  the  happy  condition  of- 
saints  in  heaven.  Scott  says,  "  Nothing  on  earth  can 
fully  answer  to  such  language  as  this."  But,  it  should 
be  remembered,  that  this  whole  chapter  refers  to  the  period 
of  the  sixth  seal,  and  predicts  events  to  transpire  in  that  pe- 
riod. The  exemption  from  hunger,  thirst,  and  burning 
heat,  is  here,  as  in  other  passages,  symbolic.  It  is  as  if  it 
had  been  said,  The  days  of  heathen  domination  and  perse- 
cution, in  which  it  was  a  capital  crime  for  any  to  be  Chris- 
tians and  practice  Christian  rites,  are  ended.  Now,  they 
will  hunger  and  thirst  no  more,  because  they  will  no  more 
be  deprived  of  the  bread  and  water  of  life  by  heathen 
persecutors.  Christian  privileges  shall  now  be  securely 
enjoyed ;  Christian  assemblies  may  now  be  held  without 
molestation,  and  ministers  may  labor  for  the  good  of  their 
flocks  without  being  subjected  to  torture,  imprisonment, 
banishment,  and  death.  The  sanctuaries  of  the  Lord  shall 
not  be  demolished  as  they  have  been  by  the  ruthless  hands 
of  the  violent,  but  shall  be  the  places  where  the  hungry 
shall  be  fed.  That  the  whole  is  figurative,  and  that  the 
reference  is  to  believers  in  those  times  of  religious  quiet- 


56  CHAPTER  VII. 

ness  and  prosperity,  may  be  inferred  from  what  follows  in 
this  and  the  succeeding  verse. 

Language  similar  to  that  used  in  this  verse,  Ave  find  in 
Isa.  49  :  9,  10.  "They  shall  feed  in  the  ways,  and  their 
pastures  shall  be  in  all  high  places.  They  shall  not  hunger 
nor  thirst,  neither  shall  the  heat  nor  the  sun  smite  them  ; 
for  He  who  hath  mercy  upon  them  shall  lead  them,  even  by 
the  springs  of  water  shall  he  guide  them."  This  is  a  pro- 
phecy of  the  bestowment  of  blessings  on  the  Jews  under 
the  reign  of  Messiah.  Its  import  is,  that  they  shall  be 
favored  with  great  spiritual  mercies,  and  be  exempt  from 
oppression  and  persecution.  So,  in  the  verse  before  us  it 
is  declared,  that  there  shall  be  an  exemption  from  injustice 
and  tyrannical  oppression,  and  the  peaceful  enjoyment  of 
Christian  privileges. 

17.  For  the  Lamb,  which  is  in  the  midst  of  the  throne, 
shall  feed  them,  and  shall  lead  them  unto  living  fountains 
of  waters  ;  and  God  shall  ivipe  awai/  all  tears  from  their 
eyes. — At  this  period  Christ  will  occupy  the  seat  of  civil 
and  ecclesiastical  power  in  the  person  of  a  Christian  Em- 
peror, and  will  feed  his  people  with  knowledge,  and  open 
to  them  fountains  of  spiritual  refreshing,  and  incline  them 
to  repair  to  them,  expressed  by  leading  them.  And  God 
will  wipe  away  all  tears  from  their  eyes  :  i.e.,  the  afflic- 
tions and  sorrows  of  former  times  shall  not  be  re- 
newed in  this  period.  History  certifies  the  fulfillment : 
For  when  Julian,  the  apostate,  at  the  close  of  the  fourth 
century,  and  about  forty-three  years  after  the  death 
of  Constantine,  attempted  to  restore  the  ancient  hea- 
then religion,  with  all  its  accompanying  horrors  of  persecu- 
tion, he  was  killed  in  a  war  with  the  Persians  before  he 
could  effect  his  abominable  purpose.  Five  emperors,  all 
favorable  to  Christianity,  succeeded  him. 


CHAPTER  VIII.  57 

Mosheim  informs  us,  that  Constantine  and  his  successors 
established  schools  as  well  as  churches,  "  and  left  no  means 
unemployed  to  excite  and  maintain  a  spirit  of  literary 
emulation  among  the  professors  of  Christianity.  For  this 
purpose  schools  were  established  in  many  cities.  Libraries 
were  also  erected,  and  men  of  learning  and  genius  were 
nobly  recompensed  by  the  honors  and  advantages  attached 
to  the  culture  of  the  sciences  and  arts."  Cent.  4.  p.  2  :  c. 
I.  The  clergy  were  no  longer,  as  they  had  been,  profoundly 
ignorant,  when  these  means  of  acquiring  knowledge  were 
afforded.  The  people,  as  in  all  similar  cases,  reaped  the 
benefit.  Tliey  were  instructed,  enlightened,  refreshed. 
Thus  did  the  Lamb,  who  was  in  the  midst  of  the  throne  of 
government,  feed  his  people,  and  lead  them  to  living  foun- 
tains of  waters  ;  and  thus  did  God  wipe  away  their  tears, 
by  relieving  them  from  those  bitter  afflictions  to  which 
they  had  been  subject,  and  by  making  their  religious  con- 
dition comfortable  and  happy. 

Constantine  died  in  A.D.  337. 


CHAPTER    VIII. 

The  Seven  Trumpets. 

The  seventh  seal  introduces  the  seven  trumpets,  which 
are  a  new  set  of  symbols  used  for  foreshowing  another  se- 
ries of  events.  At  the  opening  of  this  seal  there  was  pre- 
sented to  the  mind  of  John  a  scene  of  symbolic  action  like 
a  pantomime,  the  place  of  this  visionary  exhibition  being 
the  court  of  the  temple  at  Jerusalem. 

1.  And  ivhen  he  had  opened  the  seventh  seal^  there  ivas 
silence  in  heaven  about  the  space  of  half  an  hour.— The  si- 


58  CHAPTER  VIII. 

lence  in  heaven  for  a  short  time  is  that  state  of  quietness  and 
peace  which  the  church  enjoyed  for  ahout  thirteen  years 
after  Constantine  had  put  do^yn  civil  insurrections  and 
made  Christianity  the  religion  of  the  empire. 

2.  And  I  saw  the  seven  angels  ivhich  stood  before  God, 
and  to  them  ivere  given  seven  trumints. — The  angels  in  this 
instance  may  be  regarded  merely  as  actors  to  carry  on  the 
scenic  representation,  whose  part  was  to  sound  the  trumpets, 
i.e.,  announce  the  series  of  events  predicted. 

3  and  4.  And  another  angel  came  and  stood  at  the  altar, 
having  a  golden  censer  ;  and  there  was  given  unto  him  much 
incense,  that  he  should  offer  it  loith  the  2)ragers  of  all  saints 
upon  the  golden  altar  lohich  teas  before  the  throne,  dx. — The 
golden  altar  was  in  the  holy  place  in  front  of  the  holy  of 
holies,  and  was  used  for  the  offering  of  incense.  The  angel 
with  a  golden  censer  personated  a  Jewish  priest  in  the  act 
of  officiating,  and  his  offering  of  much  incense  indicates  that 
the  prayers  and  praises  of  the  very  numerous  believers, 
were  abundant  and  acceptable.  The  allusion  is,  to  the 
offering  of  the  evening  sacrifice,  when  the  priest  went  into 
the  sanctuary  with  his  censer  of  incense,  and  the  people 
stood  without  engaged  in  silent  devotion. 

5.  And  the  angel  took  the  censer,  and  filled  it  with  fire 
of  the  altar,  and  cast  it  into  the  earth  ;  and  there  were  voices, 
and  thunderings,  and  lightnings,  and  an  earthquake. — The 
angel  returned  to  the  brazen  altar  of  burnt  sacrifice, 
filled  his  censer  with  fire  from  it,  and  cast  it  to  the  ground, 
which  was  a  symbolic  act,  signifying,  as  it  seems  to 
me,  that  there  would  be  a  great  depreciation  and  declen- 
sion in  the  spirit  of  prayer,  so  that  it  would  not  be  fit 
to  offer  to  an  holy  God.     The  great  external  prosperity  of 


CHAPTER  VIII.  59 

the  chuvcb, — its  increase  in  numbers,  influence,  and  wealth, 
had  a  most  injurious  effect  on  its  spirituality  and  the  purity 
of  its  worship  at  this  time.  Mosheim  states,  that  "an 
enormous  train  of  different  superstitions  were  gradually 
substituted  in  the  place  of  true  religion  and  genuine  piety." 
'  The  pagan  rites  began  to  be  imitated  and  blended  with 
Christian  worship, — ministers  and  people  became  pleased 
with  religious  ostentation  and  show ; — pilgrimages  were 
made  to  Palestine,  and  the  tombs  of  martyrs ; — vast  quan- 
tities of  dust  and  earth  were  brought  from  places  held  sa- 
cred, and  sold  at  enormous  prices ; — public  processions  and 
supplications  like  those  of  the  pagans  were  conducted  with 
great  pomp ; — water  consecrated  by  prayer  was  used ; 
and  the  worship  of  martyrs,  in  imitation  of  that  offered 
to  heathen  gods,  came  into  practice.'  In  a  word,  the  glory 
of  the  church  began  to  be  obscured  by  odious  superstitions ; 
and  that  enormous  corruption  of  Christianity  which  resulted 
in  the  papal  hierarchy  commenced  openly  its  destructive 
work. 

Observe  what  followed.  There  ivere  voices,  t^c.  Voices 
signify  imperial  edicts  and  proclamations,  and  also  oppos- 
ing counsels  and  distracting  influences  in  the  government. 
Thunderings  and  lightnings  signify  wars  and  tumults ;  and 
an  earthquake,  a  civil  revolution. 

Now  for  the  fulfillment.  Constantine,  a  little  previous  to 
his  death,  divided  the  empire  among  his  three  sons,  so  that 
Constantine  II.  had  Britain,  France,  and  Spain,  and  what  else 
belonged  to  the  western  provinces.  Constantius  had  Egypt 
and  Asia ;  and  Constans,  the  youngest,  had  Italy,  Illyricum 
and  Africa.  A  war  soon  broke  out  between  the  eldest  and 
the  youngest  of  these  brothers,  in  which  the  former  lost  his 
life.  Constans  took  possession  of  all  his  brother's  part, 
and  thus  became  emperor  of  all  the  western  provinces. 
Constans  was  soon  assassinated  by  one  of  his  officers,  and  the 


60  CHAPTER  VIII. 

whole  empire  came  under  the  govermnent  of  Constantius 
in  the  year  353.  The  dissensions,  tumults,  wars,  and 
change  in  the  government  were  the  voices,  thunderirigs,  &c. 
Constantius  reigned  thirty-eight  years. 

6  and  7.  Atid  the  seven  angels,  tvhich  had  the  seven 
trumpets,  prejKired  themselves  to  sound.  The  Jirst  angel 
sounded,  and  there  followed  hail  and  fire  mingled  with  blood, 
and  they  were  cast  tfpon  the  earth ;  and  the  third  part  of 
trees  was  bwnt  up,  and  all  green  grass  was  burnt  tip. — The 
first  trumpet  may  he  considered  as  beginning  the  fall  of  the 
Roman  empire.  Hail  and  fire  are  each  in  its  way  destructive 
to  all  vegetation.  These  mingled  with  blood,  show  that  the 
calamity  was  to  fall  on  men.  The  earth  means  the  empire 
upon  which  the  hail  and  the  fire  were  to  fall.  Trees  are 
emblems  of  men  of  distinction,  and  grass  of  the  common 
people.  The  third  part  of  these  refers,  as  I  think,  to  a  third 
part  of  the  empire  as  it  had  been  divided  by  Constantine. 
Being  burnt  up  signifies,  that  the  desolating  calamity  would 
spread  devastation  among  them  like  hailstones  and  fire 
among  the  trees  and  productions  of  the  earth. 

Now,  what  does  history  disclose  concerning  this  period  ? 
Barbarous  hordes  of  Goths,  under  Alarie  their  king,  came 
down  from  the  north,  with  resistless  power,  and  in  numbers 
like  hail  into  the  western  part  of  the  empire.  Tliey  ravaged 
and  took  possession  as  they  went.  The  empire  was  so 
enervated  by  luxury  and  vice,  that  no  effectual  resistance 
was  made  to  their  destructive  progress,  and  in  a  few  years 
they  had  France,  Spain,  and  Italy  in  their  power. 

8  and  9.  And  the  second  angel  sounded,  and  as  it  were 
a  great  mountain  burning  with  fire  was  cast  into  the  sea; 
and  the  third  part  of  the  sea  became  blood :  A)id  the  third 
pjart  of  the  creatures  tvhich  were  in  the  sea,  and  had  life, 


CHAPTER  VIII.  61 

died ;  and  the  third  part  of  the  ships  ivere  destroyed. — 
A  mountain  is  the  emblem  of  a  nation  or  kingdom. 
Dan.  2  :  44,  45.  Burning  with  fire  signifies,  that  it  had 
within  itself  the  elements  for  great  devastation.  A  sea  re- 
presents a  nation  in  a  state  of  commotion,  or  parts  of  the 
empire  which  are  almost  surrounded  with  the  sea,  as  Spain 
and  Italy.  By  a  third  part  of  the  sea  being  turned  into 
blood,  it  is  shown,  that  in  a  third  part  of  the  empire,  there 
would  be  a  sanguinary  change  in  its  affairs ;  and  by  the 
dying  of  a  third  part  of  the  creatures  in  the  sea,  is  meant 
the  extinction  of  the  political  life  of  that  portion  of  the  em- 
pire as  it  had  existed  ;  and  by  the  destruction  of  the  ships 
is  signified  the  ruin  of  commercial  interests. 

Alaric  at  his  first  invasion  was  induced  to  retire  from  his 
siege  of  Rome,  by  a  donation  to  him  of  an  immense  trea- 
sure. But,  soon  afterward  he  returned  with  his  army,  rav- 
aged the  country,  besieged  the  city  and  took  it.  "  The 
soldiers  had  permission  to  pillage  all  places  except  the  Chris- 
tian churches.  This  dreadful  devastation  continued  three 
days,  and  most  valuable  monuments  of  art  and  learning, 
sunk  under  the  fury  of  the  conquerors."  This  was  in  the 
year  410. 

Not  long  after,  Genseric,  king  of  the  Vandals,  with  an 
army  of  300,000  men  entered  Italy,  and  spent  fourteen  days 
in  plundering  Rome.  He  spared  neither  private  nor  public 
buildings, — neither  sex,  nor  age,  nor  religion  were  any  pro- 
tection from  the  lust  and  avarice  of  his  merciless  soldiers. 
The  Huns  also,  with  Attila  at  their  head,  ravaged  Italy  and 
other  provinces  about  the  same  time.  This  burning  moun- 
tain settled  down  into  the  maritime  poi'tions  of  the  empire, 
symbolized  by  the  sea ; — the  Goths  and  Burgundiaus  in 
France,  the  Alani,  Suevi,  and  Vandals  in  Spain,  the  Goths 
also  in  Italy,  and  the  Huns  in  Pannonia. 


62  CHAPTER  VIII. 

10  and  11.  Atid  the  third  angel  sounded,  and  there  fella 
great  star  from  heaven,  burning  as  it  ivere  a  lamp,  and  it 
fell  upon  the  third  part  of  the  rivers,  and  i(2)on  the  fountains 
of  waters ;  And  the  name  of  the  star  is  called  Wor7n- 
wood :  and  the  third  part  of  the  ivaters  became  wormwood- ; 
and  many  men  died  of  the  ivaters,  because  they  were 
made  bitter. — As  the  former  trumpet  refers  to  the  civil 
affairs  of  the  empire,  this  api^ears  to  refer  to  the  religious 
affairs.  A  star  denotes  a  ruler  or  a  religious  teacher.  Ch. 
1:14,  20.  A  great  star  denotes  a  person  or  succession  of 
persons  in  the  same  office,  of  high  distinction.  Its  falling 
from  heaven  indicates  that  the  individual  was  in  the  church 
and  had  embraced  some  great  error  in  doctrine.  Burning  as 
a  lamp,  or  rather  as  a  torch,  or  meteor,  shows  that  it  was 
alarming  and  baleful  in  its  effects. 

Rivers  and  fountains  represent  the  sources  of  knowledge, 
of  comfort,  and  spiritual  refreshing,  or  the  means  of  pro- 
ducing and  sustaining  these,  such  as  schools  and  Christian 
institutions.  The  third  part  of  these  designates  a  particular 
portion  of  the  empire.  The  star  was  called  wormwood  to 
show  its  effects  in  poisoning  and  embittering  the  rivers  and 
fountains  on  which  it  fell,  essentially  changing  its  qualities. 
As  a  consequence  many  men  died  by  means  of  those  wa- 
ters. Death  may  be  political,  moral,  or  influential,  and  in 
this  figurative  sense,  it  is  used  in  this  book.  Many  sunk 
from  the  standing  they  held  in  the  church  and  the  state, 
and  were  lost  as  to  the  good  they  might  have  done. 

I  disagree  with  Fleming,  who  says,  that  this  "  trumpet 
doth  plainly  represent  the  destruction  of  the  western  em- 
pire by  a  star  falling  from  heaven."  For  neither  in  this 
book,  nor  elsewhere  in  prophetical  writings,  is  a  star  used 
as  an  emblem  of  a  kingdom  or  nation ;  but  it  is  used  to 
signify  a  prince,  a  leader,  a  minister,  or  an  eminent  man. 


CHAPTER  VIII.  63 

Thus,  in  chap.  9:1.  Dan.  8  :  10.  Matt.  24  :  29.  Rev. 
1  :  20. 

Any  one  who  reads  the  history  of  the  fourth,  and  tlie  first 
half  of  the  fifth  century  in  reference  to  the  effects  produced 
by  the  Arian  controversy,  need  be  in  no  doubt  in  conclud- 
ing that  Arius  was  this  "  great  star."  As  dissensions  and 
commotions  of  a  most  serious  nature  were  spreading  through 
the  empire  in  reference  to  his  sentiments,  Constantine  as- 
sembled the  famous  council  of  Nice  for  the  settlement  of 
the  points  in  this  controversy.  That  council  condemned 
the  sentiments  of  Arius,  and  he  was  banished.  Not  long 
afterward  he  was  recalled  by  Constantine  ;  but  this  did  not 
mitigate  the  bitterness  of  the  contention.  Succeeding  em- 
perors espoused  this  religious  warfare,  some  on  one  side  and 
some  on  the  other,  and  the  empire  for  a  long  period  present- 
ed a  scene  of  tumult  and  violence.  "  Council  was  assembled 
against  council,  and  their  jarring  and  contradictory  decrees 
spread  perplexity  and  confusion  through  the  Christian 
world."  Finally,  about  the  beginning  of  the  fifth  century, 
Theodosius,  the  great,  "  raised  the  secular  arm  against  the 
Arians  in  a  terrible  manner, — drove  them  from  their 
churches,  enacted  laws,  whose  severity  exposed  them  to  the 
greatest  calamities,  and  made  the  decrees  of  the  council  of 
Nice  triumphant  over  all  opposition." 

All  this  was  but  a  part  of  the  ti'ouble.  Mosheim  informs 
us,  that  "  the  Arians,  oppressed  and  persecuted  by  the  im- 
perial edicts,  took  refuge  among  those  fierce  and  savage 
nations,  who  were  gradually  overturning  the  western  em- 
pire." So  situated,  they  treated  the  orthodox  with  great 
severity.  Both  Alaric,  king  of  the  Goths,  and  Genseric, 
king  of  the  Vandals,  "  were  bigoted  Arians."  That  portion 
of  the  Vandals  who  overrun  the  African  provinces,  and  reign- 
ed there,  were  peculiar  for  their  injustice  and  barbarities  to 
the  orthodox  Chiistians.     Genseric  and  his  son,  Huneric, 


64  CHAPTER  VIII. 

"  pulled  down  the  churches  of  those  Christians  who  acknowl- 
edged the  divinity  of  Christ,  sent  their  bishops  into  exile,  and 
maimed  and  tormented  in  various  ways,  such  as  were  nobly 
firm  and  inflexible  in  the  profession  of  their  faith."  This 
very  brief  statement  will  suffice  to  show,  that  the  period  of 
the  third  trumpet  was  of  great  importance,  and  deserved  a 
special  notice  in  the  prophecy  "  of  things  to  come,"  and  that 
the  symbols  employed  were  highly  appropriate. 

12.  And  the  fourth  angel  sounded,  and  the  third  ixirt  of 
the  sun  was  smitten,  and  the  third  part  of  the  moon,  and  the 
third  part  of  the  stars;  so  as  the  third  part  of  them  was 
darkened,  and  the  day  shone  7iot  for  a  third  part  of  it,  and 
the  night  likewise. — This  trumpet  does  unquestionably  fore- 
show the  overthrow  of  the  western  portion  of  the  Eoman 
empire.  The  preceding  trumpets  announced  calamitous 
events,  all  tending  to  this  result,  hi  a  former  chapter,  the 
sun  becoming  black  as  sackcloth  of  hair,  was  interpreted  to 
mean  the  extinction  of  the  pagan  dominion  over  the  em- 
pire. The  moon  becoming  as  blood,  was  the  sanguinary 
extirpation  of  the  idolatrous  rites  of  paganism ;  and  the 
fall  of  the  stars,  was  the  casting  down  from  office  and  influ- 
ence the  pagan  magistrates,  priests  and  distinguished  men. 

Adhering  to  the  same  rule  of  interpretation,  we  iind  that 
the  darkening  of  one-third  part  of  these  luminaries,  means, 
that  in  the  same  portion  of  the  empire,  the  government  will 
be  overthrown,  the  influence  of  religious  ordinances  will  be 
diminished,  and  men  of  distinction  will  be  thrown  into  ob- 
scurity. Neither  the  day  nor  the  night,  for  the  third  part 
of  it,  shone ;  that  is,  the  long-enjoyed  light  of  imperial 
government  and  of  religious  privileges  will,  in  that  part  of 
the  empire,  become  extinct. 

As  Rome  had  been  besieged  and  taken  again  and  again 
by  the  northern  barbarous  nations,  the  Emperor  Honorius 


CHAPTER  VIII.  65 

removed  the  seat  of  government  to  Eavenna,  a  place  more 
easily  defended ;  and  he  lived  to  see  himself  deprived  of 
the  richest,  most  beautiful  portions  of  his  dominions.  The 
Huns  had  possession  of  Pannonia ;  the  Alani,  Suevi  and 
Vandals  established  themselves  in  Spain,  the  Burgundians 
in  France,  and  the  Goths  in  Italy.  At  length  Odoacer, 
king  of  the  Heruli,  having  conquered  Augustulus,  the  last 
of  the  Eoman  emperors,  took  possession  of  all  Italy,  and 
put  an  end  to  the  western  empire,  in  the  year  476.  About 
sixteen  years  after  this,  Theodoric,  king  of  the  Ostrogoths, 
made  war  upon  these  barbarian  invaders,  conquered  Odo- 
acer after  several  battles,  and  established  the  kingdom  of 
the  Ostrogoths  in  Italy,  which  continued  from  the  year 
493  to  552. 

13.  A)id  I  beheld,  and  heard  an  angel  flying  through 
the  midst  of  heaven,  saying  with  a  loud  voice,  Woe,  woe,  woe 
to  the  inhabiters  of  the  earth,  by  reason  of  the  other  voices  of 
the  trumpet  of  the  three  angels,  which  are  yet  to  sound! — 
Having  thus  shown  in  what  manner  the  western  part  of  the 
empire  would  be  overthrown,  we  have  in  this  verse  an  in- 
troductory announcement  of  the  great  calamities  which 
would  be  inflicted  on  the  eastern  part.  These  are  detailed 
under  the  three  remaining  trumpets,  called  the  woe-trum- 
pets. Another  set  of  ruthless  invaders,  from  another  part 
of  the  world,  viz.,  Arabia,  were  to  make  terrible  devasta- 
tion in  that  poi'tion  of  the  empire  included  in  Asia.  With 
peculiar  emphasis,  therefore,  the  angel  reiterates  the  de- 
nunciation of  woe  upon  the  inhabitants  of  the  land.  The 
empire  at  this  time  consisted  of  two  general  divisions — the 
western,  in  which  the  imperial  government  had  been  sub- 
verted ;  and  the  eastern,  in  which  it  was  greatly  enfeebled. 


66  CHAPTER  IX". 

CHAPTER    IX. 

The  Saracen  and  Turkish  Invasion. 

Verse  1.  And  the  fifth  angel  sounded.,  and  I  saiv  a  star 
fall  from  heaven  unto  the  earth :  and  to  him  ivas  given  the 
hey  of  the  bottomless  2'>it. — A  star,  as  already  explained,  is  a 
prince,  a  leader,  or  distinguished  person.  Heaven,  is  the 
Christian  church,  or  civil  government.  The  fall  of  a  star 
from  heaven  to  earth,  may  signify  deposition  from  official 
station,  or  a  perversion  and  degradation  of  office  to  that 
which  is  inappropriate,  sordid,  and  evil.  Some  suppose 
that  Mahomet  is  meant  by  this  emblem.  But  he  had 
never  been  connected  with  the  Christian  church,  nor  with 
civil  government.  When,  in  the  year  612,  he  began  to 
make  ^pretensions  to  divine  revelations,  he  was  an  obscure 
and  ignorant  man.  Instead  of  falling  from  an  elevated 
position,  he  rose  from  a  low  condition  to  one  of  singular 
eminence.  That  a,  2yerson  is  meant  by  the  star,  is  evident 
from  the  fact,  that  the  personal  pronoun  he  is  used  in  refer- 
ence to  it,  and  personal  acts  are  attrilmted  to  it.  iThis 
star  may  be  regarded  as  the  Roman  pontiff,  or  a  succession 
of  individuals  in  that  official  station. 

In  the  sixth  century,  Gregory  I.,  called  also,  the  Great, 
filled  the  western  churches  with  superstitious  rites  and  ob- 
servances. He  inculcated,  in  his  epistles  and  other  writings, 
the  worship  of  images  and  saints;  purification  in  the  fire  of 
purgatory  ;  the  efficacy  of  the  performance  of  religious  cere- 
monies in  procuring  salvation ;  the  power  of  relics  to  heal 
diseases,  both  of  body  and  mind ;  and  these  relics  he  dis- 
tributed in  great  profusion.  The  amazing  superstitions 
fostered  by  that  ambitious  and  bigoted  prelate  may  be 
imagined  in  view  of  the  fact  stated  by  Moshcim,  that  the 


CHAPTER  IX.  67 

people  were  made  to  believe,  that  "  fetid  oil,  taken  from 
the  lamps  which  burned  at  the  tombs  of  the  martyrs,  had 
a  supernatural  efficacy  to  sanctify  its  possessors,  and  to 
defend  them  from  all  dangers,  both  of  a  temporal  and 
spiritual  nature."  "  He  prescribed  a  new  method  of  ad- 
ministering the  Lord's  Supper,  with  a  magnificent  assem- 
blage of  pompous  ceremonies,  called  Canon  of  the  mass^ 
"  A  vast  many  festivals  were  also  instituted,  similar  to 
those  of  the  heathen,  among  which  was  the  festival  of  the 
purification  of  the  blessed  Virgin." 

Beside  all  this,  in  the  year  606,  Boniface  III.  obtained 
from  the  Emperor  Phocas,  a  detestable  tyrant,  the  title  of 
universal  bishoj),  which  introduced  the  papal  supremacy. 
This  established  a  hierarchy,  which  is  subsequently  de- 
scribed as  the  mother  of  abominations,  drunk  with  the 
blood  of  the  saints.  This  made  the  Pope  ;  and  some  time 
after,  Pepin  made  the  Pope  a  temporal  prince,  thus  secu- 
larizing and  degrading  the  sacred  office.  A  fallen  star 
indeed !  To  him  was  given  the  key  of  the  bottomless  pit,  a 
cavity  in  the  earth,  of  great  depth  or  extent.  A  key  is  an 
instrument  used  for  fastening  or  unfastening  a  door,  and  is 
an  emblem  of  authority,  as  in  ch.  1  :  18;  Isa.  22  :  22; 
Matt.  16  :  19.  Giving  the  key  to  this  person,  signifies  the 
granting  to  him  of  power  or  permission  to  do  what  is  spe- 
cified. The  phrase,  bottomless  pit,  occurs  seven  times  in 
this  book,  and,  like  almost  all  other  objects  presented  in 
these  visions,  has  a  figurative  meaning,  which  is,  an  im- 
mense region  covered  with  pagan  darkness,  where  society 
is  in  a  barbarous,  unorganized,  and  disorderly  state. 

2.  And  he  opened  the  bottomless  pit,  (&c. — With  his  key 
he  opened  the  great  deep  cavern,  [phrear  tes  abussou,  the 
well  of  the  pit ;)  i.e.,  by  his  authority  and  influence,  he 
prepared  the  way  for  the  calamities  which  followed  as  the 


68  CHAPTER  IX. 

merited  chastisement  of  the  Lord.  A  smoke  arose  which 
darkened  the  sun  and  the  whole  atmosphere.  In  Isaiah 
14  :  31,  smoke  signifies  the  desolating  calamity  of  an  army 
of  invaders,  thus :  "  There  shall  come  from  the  north  a 
smoke."  The  smoke  from  the  pit  may  be  taken  as  the 
emblem  of  destructive  errors,  false  doctrines,  and  corrup- 
tion of  Christian  worship.  As  Christ  is  the  sun  of  righte^ 
ousness,  and  the  gospel  is  the  spiritual  light  of  the  world, 
any  gross  and  wide-spread  errors  may  be  appropriately 
represented  as  a  murky  vapor,  spreading  gloom  wherever 
it  prevails.  There  was  a  vast  volume  of  this  smoke,  as  if 
from  a  great  furnace. 

3.  And  there  came  out  of  the  smoke  locusts  upon  the  earth, 
d'c. — Out  of  the  smoke  came  locusts  upon  the  Roman 
earth ;  by  which  are  meant  the  Saracens.  The  facts  con- 
stituting the  fulfillment  are  these : — The  dissensions  between 
the  eastern  and  western  portions  of  the  empire  concerning 
the  errors,  the  superstitious  rites,  the  worship  of  images, 
relics,  &c.,  which  were  introduced  by  the  Bishop  of  Rome, 
became  the  source  of  innumerable  calamities  and  troubles, 
and  weakened  almost  incredibly  the  force  of  the  empire. 
The  Saracens,  or  Arabians,  improved  the  opportunity 
aftbrded  by  this  state  of  things,  to  overrun  all  the  Asiatic 
and  African  portion  of  the  empire.  "  They  extended  their 
conquests  even  to  Constantmople,  opposed  the  progress  of 
Christianity  everywhere,  and  in  some  of  the  eastern  coun- 
tries extirpated  it  entirely."  Gross  errors  and  corruptions 
of  religion  obscured  the  light,  and  produced  contention  and 
civil  discord ;  and  these  prepared  the  way  for  the  invasion 
and  rapid  conquests  of  the  Saracens.  Thus  from  the  smoke 
came  the  locusts.  The  appropriateness  of  the  figure  will 
be  more  apparent  by  considering,  that  the  Saracens  came 
from  the  extensive  regions  of  Arabia,  the  very  country 


CHAPTER  IX.  69 

from  which  prodigious  swarms  of  locusts  originated,  and 
spread  themselves  over  the  surrounding  countries. 

To  them  was  given  power  like  that  of  scorpions,  which 
consists  in  inflicting  poisonous  and  fatal  wounds.  A  fit 
emblem  truly  of  the  destructive  eifects  of  the  sentiments  of 
Mahomet,  which  the  Saracens  diffused  wherever  they  went. 

4.  And  it  ivas  commanded  them  that  they  should  not  hurt 
the  grass  of  the  earth,  dc. — They  were  commanded  not  to 
hurt  the  grass,  &c.,  but  only  the  men  who  were  evidently 
not  the  servants  of  God.  The  fact  is  stated  by  Calmet, 
that  when  Abu  Bekr  was  directing  his  march  against  Jeru- 
salem,  he  addressed  his  chief  commander  thus  : — "  If  you 
conquer,  spare  the  aged,  the  infirm,  the  women  and  the 
children ;  cut  down  no  palm  trees  ;  destroy  not  the  fields 
of  corn ;  spare  all  fruit  trees ;  slay  no  cattle,  but  such  as 
are  absolutely  necessary  for  food.  Always  preserve  your 
engagements  inviolate ;  spare  the  religious  persons  who 
dwell  in  monasteries,  and  injure  not  the  places  in  which 
they  worship  God.  As  for  those  members  of  the  congre- 
gation of  Satan  who  shave  their  crowns,  cleave  their  skulls, 
unless  they  embrace  Islamism,  or  pay  tribute."  The  grass, 
the  green  things  and  the  trees  are  doubtless  to  be  under- 
stood metaphorically,  as  meaning  people  of  different  ages 
and  classes.  Isa.  40  :  6,  7,  All  flesh  is  grass;  surely  the 
peo2)le  is  grass.     61:3,  They  who  mourn  in  Zion  are  called, 

Trees  of  righteousness,  the  planting  of  the  Lord.  This  inter- 
pretation is  supported  also  by  the  fact,  that  in  contrast 
with  these,  a  class  of  men  are  excepted  from  the  prohibition 
to  hurt,  viz.,  those  who  have  not  the  seal  of  God  in  their 
forehead.  Further  still,  their  power  for  evil  was  restricted 
to  tormenting  the  people  five  months. 

5.  And  to  them  it  was  given  that  they  should  not  kill 


70  CHAPTER  IX. 

them,  c6c. — To  kill  and  to  slay,  signifies  to  destroy  moral 
or  political  existence.  The  Saracens  had  not  permission 
to  inflict  political  death  on  the  eastern  portion  of  the  em- 
pire, but  to  inflict  great  evils  and  distresses  upon  it.  They 
did  destroy  the  natural  lives  of  very  many ;  but  still  the 
countries  which  they  overran  continued  nominally  under  the 
imperial  government.  These  invaders  seemed  to  aim 
chiefly  at  plundering  and  obtaining  possession,  so  far  as 
they  thought  desirable. 

The  length  of  time  for  which  the  Saracens  were  to  inflict 
torments,  was  five  months,  which  make  one  hundred  and 
fifty  days ;  and  as  a  day,  in  prophetic  account,  stands  for  a 
year,  the  period  designated  is  one  hundred  and  fifty  years. 
There  is  an  allusion  here  to  the  natural  life  of  the  locust, 
which  continues  five  months.  They  are  hatched  in  the 
spring,  and  die  in  the  autumn.  As  applied  to  the  Saracens, 
it  perfectly  coincided  with  fact ;  for  Mahomet  began  to 
make  known  his  pretended  revelations  as  a  prophet  in  the 
year  612;  and  in  762,  just  one  hundred  and  fifty  years 
after,  Almanzor,  the  Saracen  king,  built  Bagdad,  calling  it 
the  City  of  Peace.  The  Saracens  made  no  more  conquests, 
ceased  from  their  ravages,  and  soon  declined  in  power. 

6.  And  in  those  days  shall  men  seek  death  and  shall  not 
find  it ;  &c. — This  verse  gives  an  impressive  representa- 
tion of  the  distresses  to  which  Christians  would  be  subject- 
ed under  these  invaders.  Though  at  first  they  were  treat- 
ed with  moderation,  yet,  after  a  little  while,  they  were 
loaded  with  insupportable  taxes,  and  subjected  to  a  variety 
of  vexatious  and  oppressive  measures.  Mosheim  states 
that  "the  bitter  dissensions,  and  cruel  animosities,  that 
reigned  among  the  Chi-istian  sects,  particularly  the  Greeks, 
Nestorians,  Eutichians,  and  Monophysites,  filled  the  great 
part  of  the  east  with  carnage,  assassinations,  and  such  de- 


CHAPTER  IX.  71 

testable  enormities,  as  rendered  the  very  name  of  Christian- 
ity odious  to  many.  Not  only  so,  but  the  Monophysites 
and  Nestorians,  full  of  resentment  against  the  Greeks,  as- 
sisted the  Saracens  in  the  conquest  of  several  provinces, 
into  which  as  a  consequence,  the  Mahometan  religion  was 
introduced."  Thus  did  these  mutually  contending  Chris- 
tian sects  seek  death,  that  is,  the  extinction  of  their  ecclesi- 
astical and  political  existence,  and  yet,  they  were  held  by 
their  victorious  enemies  as  Christians  still,  and  were  op- 
pressed and  despised  by  them  as  such. 

7.  A)id  the  shcqjes  of  the  locusts  tvere  like  tmto  horses 
prepared  unto  battle  ;  dx. — We  have  now  a  symbolical  de- 
scription of  the  locusts,  which  shows  on  the  face  of  it,  that 
something  is  meant  very  different  from  those  insects.  No 
such  creatures  as  are  here  described  ever  existed  anywhere. 
Their  shapes  were  like  those  of  horses  accoutered  for  battle. 
The  Arabians  were  noted  for  their  horses,  and  their  princi- 
pal force  in  war  consisted  of  cavalry.  On  their  heads  were 
what  seemed  to  be  crowns  of  gold,  denoting  their  subjuga- 
tion of  valuable  countries  to  their  authority,  or  referring  to 
the  turbans  which  they  wore.  Their  faces  like  those  of 
men,  symbolizes  their  wisdom,  skill,  and  resolution  in 
conducting  their  conquests. 

8.  And  they  had  hair  as  the  hair  of  womeri,  and  their 
teeth  were  as  the  teeth  of  lions. — They  had  hair  like  that  of 
women.  It  is  well  known  that  the  men  wore  their  hair 
braided  or  flo^ving  down  their  backs  ;  but  as  the  whole  de- 
scription relates  to  the  characters  and  actions  of  this  people, 
we  must  understand  by  their  long  hair,  an  effeminacy  and 
fondness  of  the  other  sex,  for  which  they  were  remarkable. 
Teeth  like  those  of  lions  expresses  their  rapacity  and  power 
to  destroy. 


72  CHAPTER  IX. 

9.  And  theij  had  breastplates,  as  it  were  breastplates  of 
iron;  d'c. — Their  breastplates  as  if  of  iron,  indicate  their 
care  in  protecting  themselves  ;  and  the  sound  of  their  wings 
resembling  that  of  chariots  with  many  horses  rushing  to 
battle,  represents  the  impetuosity  of  their  attacks,  and  the 
rapidity  of  their  conquests. 

10.  And  they  had  tails  like  unto  scorpions  ;  d'C.  Their 
tails  like  those  of  scorpions,  armed  with  stings,  are  symbolic 
of  the  poisonous  sentiments  which  they  infused  into  the 
minds  of  men  wherever  they  went.  They  spread  the  re- 
ligion of  Mahomet  by  artifice  and  violence ;  and  it  has  re- 
mained Avorking  its  destructive  effects  to  this  day.  As  the 
period  of  five  months  in  which  they  were  to  hurt  men,  is 
mentioned  the  second  time,  it  has  been  thought,  that  the 
first  named  five  months  extend  to  the  time  of  their  greatest 
prosperity;  and  that  these  last  five  months,  or  150  years, 
extend  to  their  final  overthrow  and  subjugation,  making 
300  years  in  all.  This  was  the  extent  of  the  Saracen  do- 
minion, for,  in  the  early  part  of  the  eleventh  century  they 
were  overcome  by  the  Turks  after  long  and  bloody  con- 
flicts. This  description  is  true  to  the  life ;  the  Saracens 
were  at  first  mild  and  Avinning,  and  seemed  inclined  to  bring 
Christians  and  others  to  embrace  Mahometanism  by  mode- 
rate means,  but  at  length  their  cruelties  and  enormities  in 
plundering  and  murdermg  Christians,  were  terrible  as  the 
teeth  of  lions. 

11.  And  they  had  a  king  over  them,  which  is  the  angel 
of  the  bottomless  pit,  dx. — This  king  was  the  angel  of  the 
bottomless  pit ;  then  surely,  that  pit  is  not  what  it  has  gen- 
erally been  understood  to  be  ;  for  this  king  and  angel  is  un- 
doubtedly Mahomet,  Avho  himself  set  the  example  of  spread- 
ing his  religion  among  the  Arabians  at  the  head  of  an  army. 


CHAPTER  IX.  73 

His  name  in  Hebrew  is  Abaddon,  and  in  Greek,  Apollyon, 
both  signifying  a  Destroyer.  Of  this  ferocious  and  destruct- 
ive people  he  was  the  great  prophet,  and  to  his  authority 
they  yielded  implicit  obedience.  Says  a  historian,  "  elated 
with  his  rapid  and  unexpected  success,  he  extended  yet  fur- 
ther his  ambitious  views,  and  formed  the  vast  and  arduous 
project  of  foundmg  an  empire."  His  plan  was  executed 
with  such  inti'epidity  and  impudence,  that  he  died  master 
of  all  Arabia,  and  of  several  adjacent  countries. 

Here  we  have  confirmation  of  the  interjjretation  I  have 
given.  The  star  mentioned  at  the  beginning  of  this  chap- 
ter is  not  Mahomet, — the  bottomless  pit  is  not  the  infer- 
nal world,  or  place  of  future  punishment,  and  the  king  of 
the  locusts  is  not  the  Caliph,  nor  succession  of  Caliphs. 

12.  One  woe  is  past ;  and^  behold,  there  come  two  looes 
more  hereafter. — The  Saracen  woe  trumpet  extended  to 
about  A.D.  1060.     The  Turkish  woe  trumpet  comes  next. 

13,  14.  And  the  sixth  angel  sounded,  and  I  heard  a  voice 
from  the  four  horns  of  the  golden  altar  ivhich  is  hefore  God. 
— The  golden  altar,  on  which  incense  was  offered,  stood  be- 
fore the  mercy  seat  outside  of  the  vail  in  the  sanctuary. 
The  incense  offered  there  Avas  emblematic  of  the  prayers  of 
God's  people.  The  voice  proceeding  from  the  four  elevat- 
ed corners  of  the  altar,  calling  for  the  infliction  of  this  judg- 
ment, shows,  that  the  cause  of  it  was  the  amazing  and  uni- 
versal corruption  of  Christian  worship,  in  the  respects  wliich 
have  already  been  noticed. 

The  four  angels  to  be  loosed  were  the  chiefs  of  the  four 
Turlvish  sultanies  or  governments,  by  whose  instrumen- 
tality these  calamities  would  be  inflicted.  The  Turks,  who 
are  the  people  meant,  lived  north  and  east  of  the  Caspian 
Sea  ;  and  their  being  bound  by  the  river  Euphrates,  signi- 
4 


74  CHAPTER  IX. 

fies,  that  they  had  been  restrauied  from  making  invasions 
■west  of  that  river.  Now  they  were  to  be  loosed  from  that 
restraint. 

15.  A7id  the  four  angels  tvere  loosed,  which  were  pre- 
pared for  an  hour,  d'c. — This  was  accordingly  done  ;  and 
the  time  for  making  their  conquests  and  arriving  at  the 
height  of  their  power,  is  definitely  stated.  It  was  a  year, 
which,  in  prophetic  reckoning,  is  360  days,  and  a  month, 
which  is  30  days,  which  with  the  1  day,  make  391  days,  by 
which  years  are  meant.  The  one  hour  is  Ijy  the  same  com- 
putation fifteen  days  more.  History  shows  that  the  fulfill- 
ment has  been  exact  as  to  the  years,  and  doubtless  it  has 
been  the  same  in  regard  to  the  fifteen  days.  About  the 
year  1067  or  '62  in  prophetic  time,  Tangrolipix  put  an 
end  to  the  Saracen  dominion  by  conquering  the  Caliph  of 
Persia,  and  established  the  Turkish  empire  on  its  ruins. 
In  1453,  the  Turks  took  Constantinople,  and  thus  attained 
the  height  of  then-  power  in  the  Roman  empire.  The 
period  between  the  two  dates  is  391  years.  As  John  inti- 
mates, they  were  prepared  in  this  period  for  a  long  exercise 
of  civil  rule  ;  and  thus  it  contmucs  to  the  present  day. 

16.  And  the  mimber  of  the  army  of  the  horsemen  were 
two  hu)idred  thousand  thoxisand :  d'c. — It  is  probable,  that  a 
definite  number  is  used  in  this  verse  for  an  indefinite,  signi- 
fying that  their  armies  consisted  of  a  vast  number,  which 
was  a  fivct. 

17.  And  thus  I  saw  the  horses  i»  the  vision,  and  them 
that  sat  on  them,  d-c. — This  description  of  the  horses  and 
the  riders,  shows  plainly  who  are  meant.  Breastplates,  of 
course,  could  not  be  made  of  fire,  but  were  of  fiery  ap- 
pearance, and  of  a  deep  purple   and  yellow   color   com- 


CHAPTER  IX.  75 

bined  expressed  by  hyacinth  and  brimstone — that  is, 
their  breastplates  Avere  of  polished  brass.  The  heads  of 
the  horses  resembled  those  of  lions,  indicating  fierceness 
and  disregard  of  danger.  The  fire,  smoke  and  brimstone 
proceeding  out  of  their  mouths  constitute  a  remarkable 
part  of  this  description.  In  this  century  gunpowder  was 
invented,  and  was  used  by  the  Turks  in  their  wars.  Their 
armies  were  composed  chiefly  of  horsemen,  and  discharging 
their  firearms  over  their  horses'  heads  as  they  rode,  gave 
the  appearance  of  fire  and  smoke  proceeding  out  of  their 
mouths. 

18.  By  these  three  ivas  the  third  part  of  men  killed,  <&c. — 
By  these  three  means  a  third  part  of  men  were  reduced 
to  political  and  religious  subjection.  The  third  part  refers 
to  the  eastern  portion  of  the  empire,  that  being  one  of  the 
three  general  divisions.  When  the  Turks  became  masters 
of  Constantinople  they  had  possession  of  all  the  Asiatic 
portion  of  the  empire. 

19.  Jf^or  their  poioer  is  in  their  mouth,  and  in  their  tails  : 
dc. — ^This  verse  is  an  explanation  of  the  preceding,  as  the 
particle  for  implies ;  and  here  it  may  be  perceived,  that 
the  killing  of  men  is  not  a  literal  putting  of  them  to 
death.  The  power  in  their  mouth  signifies  their  means 
of  successful  warfare  just  described ; — that  in  their  tails 
refers  to  the  principles  of  Islamism  which  they  enforced. 
Their  conquests  were  obtained  by  their  firearms  and  by  the 
doctrines  they  propagated.  Multitudes  of  Christians  con- 
sented to  receive  the  religion  of  their  Mahometan  conquer- 
ors, rather  than  suffer  what  they  must  have  done,  if  they 
had  continued  steadfast. 

The  Saracen  locusts  are  compared  to  Scorpions,  inflicting 
torment  with  their  stings ;  and  the  same  figure  is  adopted 


76  CHAPTER  IX. 

in  this  description  of  the  Turks,  the  religion  of  both  being 
the  same.  A  similar  figure  is  employed  in  chap.  12  :  4. 
The  body  of  a  scorpion  resembles  that  of  a  lobster,  made 
up  of  comiected  parts  or  rings.  The  tail  is  long,  and  com- 
posed also  of  successive  rings,  the  last  of  which  is  larger 
than  the  others,  and  is  divided  into  seven  little  heads. 
The  central,  and  prominent  one,  has  a  sting,  which  injects 
a  deadly  poison  into  the  wound  it  makes.  An  appropriate 
emblem,  truly  !  The  result  was,  that  Christianity  was  al- 
most wholly  extinguished  in  Asia. 

20  and  21.  And  the  rest  of  the  men,  tohich  tvere  not 
killed  by  these  plagues,  c&c.  Neither  repented  they  of  their 
murders,  dtc. — The  rest  of  the  men,  who  were  not  brought 
under  this  subjection,  were  those  who  lived  in  the  western 
or  European  part  of  the  empire.  Though  they  knew  of 
the  calamities  which  had  fallen  upon  the  eastern  portion  of 
the  church,  they  repented  not  of  their  idolatry,  and  of  their 
gross  corruptions  of  Christian  worship  and  doctrines.  They 
persisted  in  paying  homage  to  demons,  i.e.,  deified  men, 
saints,  images,  and  crucifixes.  When  Mahomet  began  his 
conquests,  he  avowed  his  design  to  be,  to  destroy  idolatry, 
both  among  the  heathen,  and  among  Christians,  and  his 
followers  were  true  to  this  design.  To  this  day  they  are 
opposed  to  all  worship  which  is  not  paid  to  the  Supreme 
Being.  Yet  those  who  were  not  subdued  by  them  con- 
tinued on  in  their  superstitious  and  idolatrous  practices. 

Neither  did  they  cease  from  their  persecutions,  their  de- 
ceptions and  feigned  miracles,  their  lewdness,  and  their 
fraudulent  methods  of  obtaining  money  from  the  })eople. 
What  immense  sums  have  been  received  by  the  sale  of  in- 
dulgences, and  for  the  absolution  of  sins,  for  relics,  charms, 
and  amulets,  and  numerous  other  worthless  things  !  The 
various  methods  of  oljtaining  money   from  all  classes  of 


CHAPTER  X.  77 

people  under  false  pretenses,  is  fitly  termed  theft.  Of  these 
things  they  did  not  repent,  and  the  practice  of  them  is  con- 
tinued to  this  day. 


CHAPTER  X. 

The  Crusades. 


The  events  predicted  in  this  chapter  are  included  under 
the  sixth  trumpet,  which  relates  to  the  rise  and  progress  of 
the  Ottoman  or  Tui'kish  empire,  and  are  embraced  in  the 
eleventh,  twelfth  and  thirteenth  centuries.  No  interpreta- 
tion wliich  I  have  seen  of  this  chapter,  is  at  all  satisflictory 
to  my  mind.  Indeed,  if  my  views  are  correct,  commen- 
tators have  not  even  touched  the  real  subject  of  it.  Much 
has  been  written  about  the  contents  of  the  little  book,  and 
the  events  to  which  they  are  supposed  to  refer.  But 
John  says  not  one  word  about  its  contents,  except,  that 
when  he  ate  it,  his  mouth  was  made  sweet  and  his  stomach 
bitter. 

The  questions,  which  it  is  the  business  of  an  interpreter  to 
answer,  are  these  : — Who,  or  what  is  the  mighty  angel  ar- 
rayed in  a  cloud,  having  a  svm-like  countenance,  and  feet  of 
brass  so  polished,  that  they  appeared  like  fire  1  What  is 
the  little  open  book  1  What  means  the  significant  act  of 
planting  one  foot  on  the  land,  and  the  other  on  the  sea?  A 
mighty  stride  indeed  !  And  what  is  the  great  thing  signified 
by  the  roaring  of  those  seven  thunders  ?  This  sublime 
imagery  is  not  designed  as  mere  costume,  but  doubtless 
had  its  verification  in  very  important  events.  If  the  sym- 
bols are  not  first  explained,  we  are  left  entirely  to  fanciful 
conjecture. 


78  CHAPTER  X. 

1.  And  I  saio  another  mighty  angel  come  down  from 
heave}!,  clothed  with  a  cloud,  dtc. — Heaven  is  the  usual  em- 
blem of  civil  or  ecclesiastical  government,  or  both  united.  An 
angel  is  any  agent  or  instrumentality  by  -wluch  the  events 
spoken  of  are  brought  to  pass.  The  mighty  angel  which 
came  down  from  heaven,  and  which  John  is  careful  to  say 
is  another,  that  is,  different  from  any  of  the  preceding,  can- 
not of  course  be  Christ,  as  some  have  thought.  I  consider 
him  a  personification  of  the  combined  power  of  popes,  em- 
perors, kings,  and  princes,  to  carry  forward  those  amazing 
expeditions  for  driving  out  the  Mahometans  from  the  holy 
land,  and  to  rescue  Jerusalem  from  their  possession,  and  to 
deliver  the  imploring  Christians  there  from  their  oppressors. 
The  description  of  that  mighty  angel  is  to  my  mind  sufficient 
proof  of  the  correctness  of  this  opinion.  He  was  clothed 
with  a  cloud,  and  clouds  are  emblems  of  great  bodies  of 
people.  A  rainbow  was  upon  his  head,  signifying  faithful- 
ness to  covenant  engagements ;  and  these  vast  and  expen- 
sive expeditions,  which  exhausted  the  treasures  of  Europe, 
were  gotten  up  with  a  professed  regard  to  fidelity  to  Christ 
and  his  cause ;  and  with  a  sense  of  obligation  to  relieve  Chris- 
tians from  the  intolerable  oppression  of  their  inverate  ene- 
mies, the  Turks. 

His  face  was  as  it  were  the  sun.  Now,  it  is  well  known 
that  the  sun  is  an  emblem  of  supreme  authority,  exercised 
by  one  or  by  many.  There  is  then,  in  this  case,  a  predic- 
tion of  the  concentration  of  the  wisdom,  power,  and  ener- 
gies of  sovereigns.  His  feet  like  pillars  of  fire,  indicate  a 
glowing  zeal,  and  steadfast  purpose  to  tread  down  and  sub- 
due enemies,  and  to  surmount  all  difficulties. 

What  now  do  the  records  of  history  show  in  regard  to 
remarkable  events  at  this  period?  They  present  to  us 
those  stupendous  enterprises,  the  crusades,  or  holy  wars,  in 
which  most  of  the  nations  of  Europe  engaged  with  great 


CHAPTER  X.  79 

enthusiasm .  The  famous  Hildebrand,  afterward  Pope  G  reg- 
ory  VII, ,  first  formed  the  resolution  to  prosecute  a  holy  war 
for  the  deliverance  of  the  Asiatic  Christians  and  the  city  of 
Jerusalem  from  the  mfidel  Turks.  An  army  of  fifty  thousand 
men  was  mustered  to  follow  him  in  this  enterprise ;  but 
owing  to  some  difficulty  with  Henry  IV.  king  of  France,  it 
was  relinquished.  Some  time  after,  Peter  the  hermit,  as- 
sisted by  Pope  Urban  II.,  aroused  all  Europe  to  this  great 
expedition  ;  and  "  eight  hundred  thousand  men,  in  separate 
bodies,  and  under  different  commanders,  set  out  for  Constan- 
tinople in  the  year  1096."  Thence  they  proceeded  through 
Asia  Minor  and  Syria,  capturing  Nice,  Antioch,  and  Edessa  on 
their  way.  Jerusalem  was  besieged  and  taken  by  that  di- 
vision of  the  army  which  was  commanded  by  Godfrey 
and  his  brother  Baldwin,  in  1099.  These  crusades  were 
renewed  several  times  after  the  Turks  obtained  again  pos- 
session of  the  holy  land  in  the  eleventh,  twelfth,  and  thir- 
teenth centuries,  and  chiefly  through  the  influence  of  suc- 
cessive popes.  The  kings  of  England  and  France,  and 
other  European  sovereigns,  went  in  person  in  these  expedi- 
tions, at  the  head  of  immense  armies.  Here  we  have  the 
verification  of  the  mighty  angel^  clothed  with  a  cloud,  ivith  a 
face  like  the  sun,  and  feet  like  pillars  of  fire.  To  me  it  does 
not  seem  probable,  that  the  Holy  Spirit  would  have  made 
known  to  Jolm  the  conquest  of  those  countries  by  the  Sar- 
acens and  Turks,  and  yet  omit  entirely  to  foretell  those 
prodigious  and  long  continued  efforts  of  Christians  to  wrest 
them  out  of  their  possession.  And  yet  expositors,  with 
whose  writings  I  am  acquainted,  seem  never  to  have 
thought  of  the  crusades  in  this  connection. 

2.  And  he  had  in  his  hand  a  little  book  open  :  and  he 
set  his  right  foot  upon  the  sea,  d'C. — What  this  little  book 
is,  cannot  easily  be  determined,  and  conjectures  are  nume- 


80  CHAPTER  X. 

rous  as  to  its  contents.  Passing  them  all  bj^,  I  would  re- 
mark, that  as  it  was  in  the  hand  of  the  symbolic  angel,  it 
probably  had  reference  to  the  events  to  which  allusion  has 
just  been  made.  It  may  represent  the  system  of  Chris- 
tianity, for  which  these  holy  wars  were  carried  on  at  a  great 
sacrifice  of  treasure  and  life.  To  show,  that  they  were  con- 
tending for  that  cause,  each  man  wore  upon  his  right  shoul- 
der a  figure  of  the  cross. 

We  have  next  a  significant  action  of  the  angel,  viz.,  set- 
ting his  right  foot  on  the  sea,  and  his  left  on  the  land.  If, 
by  the  sea  be  meant  the  Mediterranean,  and  by  the  land, 
the  European  portion  of  the  empire,  the  angel  would  ap- 
pear with  his  face  and  front  toward  the  holy  land,  as  though 
he  were  going  thither.  This  extended  position  shows  plain- 
ly, that  it  was  not  a  real  angel,  as  writers  have  supposed. 
The  whole  is  symbolic,  and  as  I  think,  foreshows  the  fact, 
that  all  the  maritime  nations  of  Europe  would  combine 
their  power,  and  be  of  one  mind,  as  if  they  were  but  one 
person,  to  prosecute  those  wars  against  the  infidel  Turks  in 
the  east.  Whatever  were  their  disagreements  in  other 
things,  in  this  they  were  united  and  astonishingly  zeal- 
ous. Of  this,  the  one  mighty  angel  was  an  appropriate 
symbol. 

3.  And  cried  with  a  loud  voice,  as  wJi.en  a  lion  roareth  : 
a»d  tohen  he  had  cried,  seven  thunders  uilered  their  voices. — 
Standing  thus  upon  the  sea  and  the  land,  he  cried  with  a 
loud  voice,  as  when  a  lion  roareth,  as  if  to  rouse  up  the  na- 
tions;  which,  as  I  think,  refers  to  the  thrilling  appeals, 
which  rung  through  Europe,  exciting  people  of  all  classes 
to  engage  in  these  expeditions. 

And  when  he  had  cried,  seven  thunders  uttered  their 
voices.  Thunders  are  well  known  emblems  of  wars.  There 
were,  then,  seven  periods  for  the  renewal  of  these  wars.' 


CHAPTER  X.  81 

Now,  I  find,  that  such  was  their  number,  reckoning  the  two 
expeditions  of  Louis  IX.,  liing  of  France,  as  the  continua- 
tion of  the  same  war ;  and  this  was  the  last.  The  first 
was  in  the  eleventh  century, — the  second  and  third  were 
in  the  twelfth  century,  and  the  others  were  in  the  thirteenth 
century, 

4.  And  token  the  seven  thimders  had  uttered  their  voices, 
I  xoas  about  to  write,  (kc. — John  was  commanded  to  seal  up 
the  things  intended  hy  the  seven  thunders,  as  things  not 
then  to  be  made  known.  Had  they  been  understood,  who 
can  imagine  what  an  additional  stimulus  would  have  been 
given  to  those  disastrous  and  useless  wars. 

5,  6  and  7.  And  the  angel  lohich  I  satv  stand  ujyon  the 
sea  and  upon  the  earth  lifted  tip  his  hand  to  heaven,  And 
sware  hy  him  that  liveth  forever  and  ever,  (&c. — Another 
symbolic  action  of  the  angel  was  his  solemn  asseveration, 
that  time  should  be  no  longer ;  or,  as  probably  it  should  be 
read.  The  time  shall  not  be  yet.  To  suppose,  that  this  re- 
fers to  the  end  of  the  world  is  a  groundless  conjecture.  It 
undoubtedly  refers  to  the  events  which  the  writer  is  here 
foretelling;  and  it  seems  to  me,  that  the  signification  is 
this; — the  entire  failure  of  all  these  vast,  expensive,  and 
long  continued  expeditions  to  accomplish  their  object,  pro- 
claimed to  the  world  in  a  solemn  manner,  that  the  time 
had  not  come  to  dispossess  the  Mahometans  of  the  holy 
land,  and  the  neighboring  countries.  So  it  has  proved, 
and  they  are  the  possessors  of  them  to  this  day.  Though 
important  cities  were  at  different  times  taken  by  the  cru- 
saders, such  as  Jerusalem,  Constantinople,  Damietta,  and 
Ptolemais  ;  yet  they  were  soon  retaken  by  the  Turks.  The 
affirmation  given  with  such  peculiar  solemnity,  has  been 
fully  verified  in  the  lapse  of  six  centuries.     In  the  year 

4* 


82  CHAPTER  X. 

1291,  the  Miihometans  captured  Ptolcmais,  now  called 
Acra,  and  entirely  overthrew  the  Roman  empire  in  the 
east. 

We  are  then  informed  when  that  power  will  be  destroy- 
ed ;  and  it  will  be  when  the  seventh  angel  shall  begin  to 
sound.  Then  the  mystery  of  God,  as  declared  by  the  pro- 
phets, will  be  finished.  Then  an  end  will  be  put  to  the 
Turkish  power,  the  Mahometan  delusion,  and  the  oppres- 
sion of  the  church.  The  seventh  trumpet  will  introduce 
the  millennium. 

8,  9,  and  10.  And  the  voice  tvhich  I  heard  fro7n  heaven 
spake  unto  me  again,  and  said,  Go  and  take  the  little  book 
which  is  open  in  the  hand  of  the  angel  tvhich  standeth  npon 
the  sea  and  upon  the  earth,  d;c. — The  voice  from  heaven, 
which  bade  John  seal  up  the  things  signified  by  the  thun- 
ders, commanded  him  to  take  the  little  book  and  eat  it  up, 
informing  him  that  it  would  be  sweet  in  his  mouth,  but 
bitter  in  his  stomach.     So  it  proved. 

I  understand  all  this  as  a  visionary  representation ; 
— the  subject  of  them  being  in  a  trance.  The  idea  in- 
tended to  be  conveyed  by  eating  the  book,  and  by  the  efl'cct 
produced,  I  suppose  to  be,  that  the  events  to  which  the 
book  refers,  would  at  the  first  be  pleasing  and  promise 
inuch  good,  but  that  afterwards  they  would  prove  very 
disastrous  and  mortifying.  If  the  crusades  be  meant, 
they  very  happily  illustrate  the  emblem.  For  those 
enterprises  were  luidcrtakcn  with  uncommon  enthusiasm 
and  confident  expectations  of  great  good ;  but  the  results 
were  in  all  respects  injurious  and  humiliating.  Most  of 
the  sovereigns  of  Europe  engaged  in  these  wars,  and  the 
resources  of  Christendom  were  employed  to  wrest  from  the 
Mahometans  their  usur])cd  possessions  in  and  about  the 
holv  land;  but  it  was  all  m  vain.     Places  which  were  res- 


CHAPTER  X.  83 

cued  from  the  infidels  at  a  vast  expense  of  treasure  and 
blood,  were  soon  brought  in  subjection  to  them  again. 

11.  And  he  said  unto  me,  Thou  must  prophesy  again 
before  many  peoples,  and  natioyis,  and  tongues,  and  kings. — 
The  apostle  was  informed,  that  he  had  yet  to  prophesy 
concerning  many  nations  and  kings.  The  term  again  seems 
to  imply,  that  what  he  would  foretell  would  relate  to  the 
same  nations  and  kingdoms,  as  those  of  whom  he  had  writ- 
ten. The  succeeding  chapters  show  this  to  be  the  fact. 
The  translation  should  not  have  been,  Thou  shalt  pro- 
phesy again  before  many  peoples ;  as  if  it  were  to  be  in  the 
presence  of  them  all,  which  was  not  the  case,  but  concern- 
ing many  people,  nations,  &c.  Had  this  been  observed,  it 
would  have  prevented  the  unnatural  and  irrelevant  inter- 
pretation thus  given — "  The  apostle  is  domg  this  to  the  pre- 
sent day,  in  all  the  languages  into  which  the  Scriptures 
have  been  translated." 

The  next  chapter  is  a  continuation  of  the  same  chain  of 
events  in  reference,  as  I  conceive,  to  the  Mahometan  power, 
the  final  overthrow  of  which  is  announced  by  the  words, 
"  The  second  woe  is  past."  The  writer's  method  is  this  : 
— With  the  sounding  of  the  sixth  trumpet,  he  takes  up 
the  prophecy  of  the  Turkish  persecuting  power,  and  con- 
tinues it  to  the  extinction  of  that  power.  Then  in  the 
twelfth  chapter  he  commences  his  prophecy  of  the  Roman 
persecuting  power,  and  carries  it  on  to  the  ultimate  de- 
struction of  that  power,  as  set  forth  in  the  eighteenth  and 
nineteenth  chapters.  As  each  of  these  powers  arose  about 
the  same  time,  and  both  are  to  continue  1260  years;  it 
was  necessary,  when  he  had  finished  the  prophecy  of  one, 
that  he  should  go  back,  as  to  the  order  of  time,  and  com- 
mence with  the  other.  This  synchronism  and  arrangement 
should  be  carefully  observed.     A  failure  in  this  particular, 


84  CHAPTER  X. 

or  a  misconception  of  the  apostle's  design,  is  the  cause, 
perhaps,  of  the  erroneous  interpretation  which  has  been 
given  of  this,  and  the  following  chapter.  Confusion  and 
obscurity  are  thus  thrown  over  this  portion  of  the  book. 

Furthermore,  the  apostle  is  incorrectly  represented  as 
going  back  at  the  commencement  of  the  twelfth  chapter, 
to  the  early  days  of  Christianity,  and  instituting  a  new 
prophetic  series  in  reference  to  the  same  countries  and  the 
same  ci\'il  powers  of  which  he  had  previously  spoken. 
Thus  Dr.  Scott  remarks,  "The  prophet  must,  therefore, 
somewhere  go  back  to  take  a  more  particular  view  of  his 
subject,  than  he  at  first  gave :  but  no  place  can  be  assigned 
for  this,  so  rationally  as  the  close  of  the  eleventh  chapter." 
Other  distinguished  writers  have  adopted  the  same  idea. 

Then,  also,  in  violation  of  the  regular  chronological 
arrangement  of  the  book,  they  have  applied  what  is  said 
of  the  two  witnesses  in  the  next  chapter  to  the  papal  per- 
secution of  the  refoi'mers  in  Europe ;  whereas  the  apostle 
does  not  take  up  the  subject  of  the  Roman  hierarchy  until 
he  comes  to  the  twelfth  chapter.  The  following,  as  I 
think,  is  the  true  order  of  events.  The  ninth  chapter  is 
wholly  occupied  with  the  rise,  and  the  conquests  of  the 
Saracens  first,  and  then  of  tlie  Turks.  The  tenth  is  oc- 
cupied with  the  efforts  of  Christendom  during  three  cen- 
turies, to  expel  the  infidel  Turks  from  the  Holy  Land, 
viz. :  the  crusades.  The  eleventh  is  a  continuation  of 
the  prophecy  concerning  the  Turkish  power,  which  is  the 
eastern  Antichrist,  to  its  final  overthrow  and  extinction 
near  the  millennium.  Then,  in  the  twelfth  chapter,  the 
writer  commences  his  prediction  of  the  western  Antichrist, 
which  is  the  papal  hierarchy;  and  traces  that  onward  also 
to  the  millennium.  Nowhere  does  he  go  back,  and  pass 
over  the  ground  again,  except,  that  wlien  he  takes  up  the 
subject  of  the  western  Antichrist,  he  commences  with  its 


CHAPTER  XI.  85 

origin,  Just  as  the  writer  of  a  history  of  two  countries 
would  begin  with  the  early  periods  of  one  of  them ;  and, 
having  given  the  record  of  events  up  to  a  certain  time, 
would  then  do  the  same  with  the  other.  The  prophetic 
portion  of  the  book  should  be  regarded  as  presenting  a  re- 
gular series  of  important  events  pertaining  to  the  Christian 
church,  ending  with  its  final  triumphs  over  all  its  enemies. 


CHAPTER    XI. 

The  State  of  the  Church  under  the  Turkish  dominion  ; 
and  its  Ultimate  Deliverance  from  Opjiression. 

The  e-pents  predicted  in  the  first  thirteen  verses  of  this 
chapter  are  included  in  the  period  of  the  sixth  trumpet, 
which  is  the  Mahometan  woe-trumpet ;  and  therefore  does 
not  refer  to  the  western  part  of  the  empire,  as  it  is  gene- 
rally explained.  In  the  fourteenth  verse  it  is  emphatically 
declared,  that  '  the  second  tvoe  is  past,''  which  ends  the  sixth 
trumpet,  and  the  Turkish  Mahometan  power.  The  verses 
immediately  preceding  are  to  be  interpreted  as  relating  to 
that  power.  The  interruption  of  the  subject  here  by  the 
interposition  of  a  new  chapter  must  not  be  regarded.  The 
preceding  chapter  is  occupied,  as  I  conceive,  with  those 
civil  and  military  movements  called  the  crusades,  and  with 
their  disastrous  results.  This  chapter  predicts  the  calam- 
ities of  the  church  inflicted  by  the  same  persecuting  power, 
and  its  deliverance  by  the  extinction  of  that  power.  I  am 
constrained  to  dissent  entirely  from  commentators  and  pro- 
phetical writers,  who  agree  in  interpreting  these  first  thir- 
teen verses  as  relating  to  the  protestant  reformation  and 
the  persecution  of  the  Waldenses  and  Albigenses,  or  other 


86  CHAPTER  XI. 

early  reformers  in  the  western  part  of  the  empire.  This 
error  is  one  of  the  principal  reasons  why  it  has  been  so 
difficult  to  understand  this,  and  the  two  succeeding  chap- 
ters. John,  guided  by  the  revealing  angel,  has  not  thrown 
this  confusion  into  his  prophecy.  He  finishes  one  branch 
of  his  prophetic  disclosures  before  he  takes  up  another. 
And  here  we  have  only  to  bear  in  mind,  that  he  does  not 
finish  the  Mahometan  woe-trumpet,  till  he  comes  to  the 
announcement  in  the  fourteenth  verse,  Tlie  second  woe  is 
2)ast. 

1.  And  there  was  given  me  a  reed  like  unto  a  rod :  and 
the  angel  stood,  saying,  Rise,  and  measure  the  temple  of  God, 
and  the  altar,  and  them  that  loorshiii  therein. — This  verse  is 
a  part  of  the  same  prophetic  narration  which  closes  the 
preceding  chapter,  as  the  connecting  particle  and  implies. 
It  should  be  read  thus, — And  he  gave  me  a  reed  like  a  staff, 
saying.  Rise  and  meastire  the  temple  of  God,  and  the  altar 
of  sacrifice,  and  those  who  worship  by  it.  The  temple  and 
its  inner  courts  are  emblems  of  the  Christian  church,  and 
the  altar  on  which  the  burnt  sacrifices  were  offered,  is  the 
emblem  of  Christian  worship  ;  and  the  last  clause  concern- 
ing the  worshipers,  gives  an  intimation  of  the  meaning  of 
the  whole.  It  is  as  if  the  angel  had  said,  Go  and  ascertain 
the  spiritual  condition  of  the  true  church,  and  its  worship, 
and  those  who  are  connected  with  it.  Apply  the  infallible 
rule  of  divine  truth  to  them,  that  it  may  be  seen  whether 
they  are  what  they  should  be.  In  like  manner  Ezekiel 
was  shown  a  man  with  a  line  and  measuring  reed  in  his 
hand,  who  took  the  dimensions '  of  the  temple  and  its 
various  appurtenances.  Zachariahalso  saw  in  a  vision  a 
man  with  a  line  proceeding  to  measure  Jerusalem,  sig- 
nifying the  care  and  protection  which  God  would  exorcise 
over  it. 


CHAPTER  XI.  87 

2.  But  the  court  lolilch  is  without  the  tem])le  leave  07it, 
and  vieasure  it  not ;  for  it  is  given  unto  the  Gentiles  ;  and 
the  holy  city  shall  they  tread  under  foot  forty  and  two  months. 
— The  inner  court  in  which  stood  the  altar  of  sacrifice,  was 
that  in  which  the  priests  officiated ;  the  outer  court  was 
appropriated  to  the  Gentiles,  those  who  were  not  by  biith 
Israelites,  meaning  in  this  case,  those  who  are  not  of  the 
Christian  church.  The  holy  city  is  Jerusalem  itself,  and 
this  they  were  to  tread,  that  is,  inhabit,  possess,  and  occupy 
forty-two  months.  In  prophecy  thirty  days  are  a  month, 
and  forty-two  months  make  twelve  hundred  and  sixty  days, 
and  by  these  years  are  intended.  The  Gentiles,  who  are 
to  do  this,  are  the  Mahometans,  and  the  simple  idea  is, 
that  they  will  have  possession  of  the  holy  city  for  the 
length  of  time  specified. 

If  we  date  the  rise  of  that  denomination  in  612,  the  time 
that  Mahomet  began  to  assert  his  claim  to  divine  inspira- 
tion, the  twelve  hundred  and  sixty  years  will  terminate  in 
1854,  reckoning  as  is  usual  in  prophecy,  three  hundred  and 
sixty  days  to  a  year.  If  we  date  it  in  622,  which  was 
the  time  of  his  flight  from  Mecca  and  the  commencement 
of  his  conquests,  (and  his  followers  make  this  the  date) 
then  the  twelve  hundred  and  sixty  years  will  close  in  the 
year  1864.  Till  then,  they  will  tread,  possess  and  occupy 
the  holy  city.  Here  we  have  confirmation  of  the  interpre- 
tation previously  given  of  the  solemn  affirmation  of  the 
mighty  angel,  whose  voice  like  that  of  a  roaring  lion, 
roused  up  the  crusaders, — '  The  time  shall  not  be  yet.''  The 
power  and  resources  of  Christendom  employed  at  intervals 
in  three  successive  centuries,  could  not  dispossess  the  infi- 
dels, as  they  were  called,  of  Jerusalem  and  the  holy  land. 
They  have  it  still,  and  doubtless  will  have  it,  till  the  expi- 
ration of  the  period  declared  by  Christ's  prophet.  Of 
course,  I  dissent  entirely  from  the  opinion  of  expositors, 


88  CHAPTER  XI. 

who  make  these  Gentiles  to  mean  the  papists  of  Europe, 
and  this  treading  of  the  holy  city  to  he  the  persecution  of 
the  Waldenses  and  other  protestants.  The  arrangement, 
which  the  writer  has  made  of  his  symbols,  one  Avould 
think,  is  enough  to  preclude  such  an  interpretation.  The 
temple  with  its  inner  court  represents  the  true  church  with 
its  worship ;  the  outer  court  of  the  Gentiles,  who  were  so 
far  favorable  to  the  Jewish  religion  as  to  witness  and  par- 
ticipate in  the  worship  of  the  true  God,  represents  the  Ma- 
hometans, who  also  worship  the  true  God,  and  receive  the 
scriptures  of  the  Old  Testament.  And  the  holy  city  is  Je- 
rusalem, including  the  country  of  which  it  is  the  capital, 
and  which  they  shall  possess  for  the  specified  time. 

3.  And  I  to  ill  give  poiuer  unto  my  two  ivitnesses,  and  they 
shall  prophesy  a  thousand  two  hundred  and  threescore  days, 
clothed  in  sackcloth. — We  are  here  informed  what  shall  be 
the  condition  of  the  Christian  church  under  this  Alahomet- 
an  supremacy.  The  two  witnesses  are  representatives  of 
a  succession  of  men,  who  maintain  the  j^u'e  doctrines  of 
Christianity,  and  contend  for  purity  of  Christian  worship. 
Thus  Christ  said  to  his  disciples,  '  Ye  shall  be  my  wit- 
nesses unto  me  in  Jerusalem,  and  to  the  uttermost  parts  of 
the  earth.'  Two  witnesses  are  mentioned,  doubtless  in 
reference  to  the  Jewish  law,  which  required  at  least  two 
witnesses  to  prove  an  allegation.  These  shall  prophesy, 
i.e.  preach,  inculcate,  declare  the  truth  for  the  same  period 
of  the  Mahometan  supremacy,  viz.,  twelve  hundred  and 
sixty  years,  clothed  in  sackcloth,  that  is,  in  a  state  of  great 
depression,  affliction,  and  trial.  How  fully  does  history 
illustrate  this  prediction  !  Long  since,  Mahometans  had 
nearly  extinguished  the  light  of  Christianity  all  through  the 
east.  What  became  of  the  very  numerous  churches 
formed  by  the  indefatigable  labors  of  the  Nestorians,  and 


CHAPTER  XL  89 

■«'hich  previous  to  the  fourteenth  century,  flourished  in  Tar- 
tary  and  the  northern  provinces  of  China  1  A  single  quo- 
tation from  Mosheirn  will  answer  the  question.  "  The 
Turks  and  Tartars  destroyed  wherever  they  went,  the 
fruits  which  had  sprung  up  in  such  a  rich  abundance  from 
the  labors  of  the  Christian  missionaries,  extirpated  the  re- 
ligion of  Jesus  in  several  provinces  and  cities  where  it 
flourished,  and  substituted  the  impostures  of  Mahomet  in 
its  place.  Many  of  the  Tartars  had  formerly  professed  the 
gospel,  and  still  more  had  tolerated  the  exercise  of  that 
divine  religion ;  but  from  the  beginning  of  this  (the  four- 
teenth) century,  things  put  on  a  new  face,  and  that  fierce 
nation  renounced  every  other  religious  doctrine,  except  that 
of  the  Alcoran."  '  Tamerlane,  their  mighty  emperor,  em- 
braced the  doctrine  of  Mahomet,  and  having  subdued  the 
greatest  part  of  Asia,  made  use  of  his  authority  to  force 
multitudes  of  Christians  to  apostatize  from  their  holy  fliith. 
Persuaded  that  it  was  his  duty  to  persecute  the  Christians, 
lie  employed  the  most  inhuman  acts  of  severity  to  van- 
quish the  magnanimous  constancy  of  those,  who  persevered 
in  their  attachment  to  the  Christian  religion,  of  whom, 
some  suflfered  death  in  the  most  barbarous  forms,  while 
others  w.ere  condemned  to  perpetual  slavery.'*  I  would 
ask  also,  what  became  of  the  numerous  churches  which  the 
same  Nestorians  formed  all  over  Persia  ?  They  shared 
the  common  fate  of  others,  wherever  the  conquering  power 
of  the  Turks  extended  itself,  except  the  few  which  have 
remained  sheltered  and  unkno^vn  among  the  almost  inac- 
cessible mountains  of  Kurdistan,  and  which  have  recently 
been  discovered  by  our  persevering  devoted  missionaries. 
Tlie  Nestorians  still  live,  and  in  their  secluded  flistnesses, 
have  preserved  the  Christian  religion  for  centuries.  They 
have  continued  to  prophesy,  though  imperfectly  for  want 

*Mos.  Vol.  3,  p.  1,  ch.  2,  cent.  14. 


90  CHAPTER  XI. 

of  the  means  of  knowledge,  and  they  have  prophesied  in 
sackcloth  indeed. 

4.  These  are  the  two  olive-trees^  and  the  two  candlesticks 
standing  before  the  God  of  the  earth. — ^These  two  witnesses 
are  called  olive-trees,  which  are  emblems  employed  both  in 
the  Old  and  New  Testament  to  signify  true  believers,  or 
faithful  ministers  who  diffuse  the  light  of  divine  truth  in 
the  world.  Thus  Zachariah  was  shown  in  an  entranced 
state,  a  candlestick,  having  two  olive  trees,  one  standing  on 
each  side,  supplying  the  lamps  with  pure  oil.  An  angel 
informed  him  that  these  were  the  two  anointed  ones,  or 
more  literally,  the  two  sons  of  oil,  who  stand  before  the 
Lord  of  the  whole  earth,  meaning  Zerubbabel  and  Joshua, 
the  servants  of  the  Lnrd,  whom  he  employed  for  the  re- 
building of  the  temple  and  city  of  Jerusalem.  Zach.  4  : 
11,  14.  John  undoubtedly  refers  to  this  passage.  A  can- 
dlestick is  an  emblem  of  the  church.  Christ  himself  says, 
chap.  1  :  20,  the  seven  candlesticks  are  the  seven  churches. 
In  Asia  the  two  great  divisions  of  the  Christian  church 
were  the  Greek  and  the  Nestorian.  The  two  witnesses, 
called  also  two  olive-trees  and  the  two  candlesticks,  repre- 
sent the  churches  in  the  east,  which  faithfully  maintained 
the  truth;  and  not  the  Waldenses,  Albigenses,  and  Re- 
formers in  the  west,  according  to  the  interpretation  of 
Scott,  Faber,  and  others. 

5.  And  if  any  man  will  hurt  them.,  fire  proccedeth  out  of 
their  mouth,  and  devoureth  their  enemies;  and  if  any  man 
will  hurt  them.,  he  must  in  this  manner  be  killed. — We  are 
here  informed  of  the  kind  of  warftire,  these  faithful  men 
would  carry  on  with  their  enemies.  It  would  be  a  moral 
warfare,  whose  weapon  of  defense  and  attack  would  proceed 
from  the  mouth,  and  it  would  not  of  course  be  literal  fire, 
but,  metaphorically,  the  fire  of  truth.     This  is  God's  own 


CHAPTER  XI.  91 

figure,  for  said  he  to  Jeremiah,  "  Behold,  I  \Yill  make  my 
words  in  thy  mouth,  fire^  and  this  people  wood,  and  it  shall 
devour  them."  Those  bold  defenders  of  divine  truth  would 
so  wield  it,  and  so  expose  the  errors  and  unchristian  prac- 
tices of  their  adversaries,  that  they  would  be  self-con- 
demned, would  sink  into  contempt,  and  their  cause  would 
be  overthro^vn.  The  fire  of  truth  will  consume  them.  If 
any  man  shall  maliciously  inflict  injury  upon  them,  he 
must  be  killed  in  this  manner.  In  what  manner?  Not 
by  being  put  to  death ;  but  he  will  be  condemned  by  the 
truth ;  will  lose  his  influence  and  be  covered  with  ignominy. 
The  term  to  kill  and  to  slay  often  has  a  moral  or  polit- 
ical signification  only,  as  m  chap.  9  :  18,  and  misa.  14  :  30. 
I  will  kill  thy  root  with  famine^  i.e.  I  loill  destroy  the  source  of 
thy  inosinrity.  And  again  in  2d  Cor,  3 :  6.  The  letter 
KiLLETH,  hut  the  sjnrit  giveth  life.  In  this  sense  it  is  com- 
mon to  use  the  phrase,  as  when  we  say  of  those  who  have 
lost  their  influence,  or  are  deprived  of  their  official  station 
and  power,  they  are  killed, — they  are  crushed  and  dead. 
"  The  Pope  is  dead." 

6.  These  have  poiver  to  shut  heaven,  that  it  rain  not  in 
the  days  of  their  'pro'phecy ;  and  have  power  over  tvaters  to 
turn  them  to  blood,  and  to  smite  the  earth  with  all  plagues^ 
as  often  as  they  will. — The  power  which  these  witnesses 
will  have  with  God  by  faith  and  prayer  is  represented  to 
be  like  that  of  Elijah,  who  prayed,  and  it  rained  not,  and 
like  that  of  Moses,  who  caused  the  waters  of  Egypt  to  be- 
come as  blood,  and  smote  the  land  \vith  plagues.  It  is 
probable  however,  that  this  is  to  be  understood  metaphori- 
cally, as  meaning,  that  on  account  of  the  treatment  of  the 
witnesses,  there  would  be  a  general  spiritual  death,  a  de- 
cline of  vital  religion, — sanguinary  contentions  about  the 
things  of  religion,  and  the  infliction  of  various  calamities 


92  CHAPTER  XI. 

upon  the  people.     History  informs  us,  that  such  were  the 
facts  to  a  distressing  degree. 

7.  And  when  they  shall  have  finished  their  testimony,  the 
beast  that  ascendeth  out  of  the  bottomless  2}it  shall  make  war 
ar/ainst  them,  and  shall  overcome  them,  and  kill  them. — 
When  the  destined  period  of  twelve  hundred  and  sixty- 
years  shall  draw  toward  its  close,  and  these  faithful  men 
shall  have  completed  the  time  of  bearing  their  testimony, 
a  power  denominated  the  beast  that  ascendeth  out  of  the 
bottomless pit^  will  fight  against  them,  overcome  them,  and 
kill  them,  that  is,  will  persecute  and  subdue  them,  destroy 
their  influence,  and  drive  them  into  obscurity.  Who  will 
do  this  ?  The  Pope  of  Rome,  say  the  expositors  of  prophecy. 
John  says,  The  beast  tltatcometh  ujjout  of  the  bottomless  jnt, 
and  this  is  not  the  Pope,  nor  the  papal  church.  A  wild 
beast,  as  the  original  signifies,  is  a  persecuting  civil  power. 
The  bottomless  pit,  or  deep  abyss,  in  the  language  of  this 
writer,  is  a  portion  of  the  earth  where  ignorance,  moral 
darkness,  heathenism,  and  barbarism  prevail.  The  phrase 
occurs  three  times  in  the  ninth  chapter  and  evidently  means 
the  region  from  which  the  fierce  and  rapacious  Saracens  is- 
sued. The  locusts  which  came  out  of  the  smoke  of  the  pit, 
are  acknowledged  to  be  that  people,  who  conquered  and 
ravaged  western  Asia,  Egypt,  and  Africa.  It  was  from 
such  an  abyss,  that  the  Turks  issued,  who  also  had  em- 
braced Mahometan  ism,  and  as  they  spread  their  conquests 
over  the  same  portions  of  Asia,  they  oppressed  the  Chris- 
tians, broke  up  their  societies,  demolished  their  temples, 
and  practiced  against  them  terrible  cruelties.  The  Roman 
church  did  not  arise  from  such  a  region,  but  from  the  rich- 
est, most  cultivated,  refined,  and  delightful  portion  ot 
Europe ;  and  is  descril)ed  in  its  proper  place,  as  an  animal 
having  two  horns  like  a  lamb.     (Ch.  13:  11.)     It  is  the 


CHAPTER  XL  93 

Mahometan  power,  as  I  think,  which  is  represented  here,  as 
opposing,  subduing,  and  driving  into  obscurity  those  who 
are  meant  by  the  witnesses. 

One  can  hardly  avoid  the  conclusion,  that  commentators 
never  thought  that  Christianity  ever  flourished  much  ex- 
cept in  Europe,  and  in  the  countries  bordering  upon  Pales- 
tine ;  or,  that  Christians  had  ever  suffered  persecution 
except  in  those  countries,  and  there^  chiefly  from  the  Ro- 
man Catholics.  Mosheim,  however,  states,  in  describing 
the  condition  of  the  Christian  religion  in  the  far  east  in  the 
fifteenth  century,  that  "  in  the  vast  regions  of  the  eastern 
world,  Christianity  lost  ground  from  day  to  day,  and  the 
Mahometans  united  their  barbarous  efforts  to  extinguish 
its  bright  and  salutary  luster.  Asiatic  Tartary,  Mogol, 
Tangut,  and  the  adjacent  provinces,  where  the  religion  of 
Jesus  had  long  flourished,  now  became  the  dismal  seats  of 
superstition,  which  reigned  among  them  under  the  vilest 
forms.  Nor,  in  these  immense  tracts  of  country,  were 
there  any  traces  of  Christianity  visible  except  in  China, 
where  the  Nestorians  still  preserved  some  scattered  re- 
mains of  their  former  glory.  In  this  century  the  Nesto- 
rian  pontiff"  at  Chaldea  sent  missionaries  to  Cathay  and 
China,  who  were  empowered  to  exercise  the  authority  of 
bishops  over  the  Christian  assemblies,  which  lay  concealed 
in  the  remote  provinces  of  these  great  empires."  These 
remarks  of  his,  I  discovered  after  having  written  the  inter- 
pretation which  precedes  them ;  and  I  introduce  them  as 
confirming  the  interpretation,  and  showing  how  and  where 
the  witnesses  have  prophesied  in  sackcloth.  After  having 
thus  spoken  of  the  Nestorian  churches  in  the  east,  he  adds 
in  regard  to  the  Greek  church  in  the  same  period,  that 
"The  ruin  of  the  Grecian  empire  was  a  new  source  of 
calamities  to  the  Christian  church  in  the  greatest  part  of 
Europe  and  Asia.     When  the  Turks,  headed  by  Mahomet 


94  CHAPTER  XI. 

II.,  an  accomplished  prince  and  formidable  warrior,  had 
made  themselves  masters  of  Constantinople  in  the  year 
1453;  the  cause  of  Christianity  received  a  blow,  from 
which  it  has  never  as  yet  recovered.  Its  adherents  in 
those  parts  had  no  resources  left,  which  could  enable  them 
to  maintain  it  against  the  perpetual  insults  of  their  fierce 
and  incensed  victors,  nor  could  they  stem  the  torrent  of 
barbarism  and  ignorance  that  rushed  in  with  the  trium- 
phant arms  of  Mahomet.  The  Turks  took  one  part  of 
Constantinople  by  force  of  arras;  the  other  surrendered 
vxpon  terms.  Hence  it  was,  that  in  the  former,  the  public 
profession  of  the  gospel  was  prohibited,  and  every  vestige 
of  Christianity  effaced ;  while  the  inhabitants  of  the  latter 
were  permitted  to  retain  their  churches  and  monasteries, 
during  the  whole  course  of  this  century,*  and  to  worship 
God  according  to  the  precepts  of  the  gospel,  and  the 
dictates  of  their  consciences.  Tliis  precious  liberty, 
however,  was  considerably  diminished  under  the  reign  of 
Selim  I.,  and  the  Christian  worship  was  loaded  with  severe 
and  despotic  restrictions.  The  outward  form  of  the  Chris- 
tian church  was  not,  indeed,  either  changed  or  destroyed  by 
the  Turks,  but  its  luster  was  eclipsed,  its  strength  was  un- 
dermined, and  it  was  gradually  attenuated  to  a  mere 
shadow  under  tlieir  tyrannic  empire."f  The  two  witnesses 
I  consider  to  be  the  Greek  and  Nestorian  churches  in  Asia, 
and  the  persecution  against  them  has  been  continued  to 
the  present  time. 

8.  And  their  dead  bodies  shall  lie  in  the  street  of  the  great 
city,  which  sjnritiiaU)/  is  called  Sodom  and  JE(/i/pt,  zvhere 
also  our  Lord  ivas  crucified. — As  the  witnesses  are  not  two 
persons,  but  a  succcssio)i  of  faithful  believers  united  in 
Christian  churches;  so  their  dead  bodies  are  not  the  lifeless 

*  The  fifteenth.  f  Mos.  vol.  iii.  p.  2,  c.  2. 


CHAPTER  XI.  95 

remains  of  individuals,  but  their  churches,  societies,  and 
communities.  All  is  symbolic.  Even  the  time  specified 
is  not  to  be  understood  literally,  for  days  signify  years. 
Their  bemg  warred  against,  overcome,  and  killed,  means, 
that  they  would  be  opposed,  persecuted,  and  deprived  of 
their  influence  and  their  rights,  become  few  and  feeble,  and 
be  thrust  into  obscurity.  As  decency  and  proper  respect 
for  the  dead  require,  that  they  should  be  interred ;  their 
remaming  unburied  signifies  their  exposure  to  public  in- 
dignity, contempt,  and  base  treatment.  Denial  of  the 
right  of  sepulture  is  the  denial  of  the  lowest,  smallest  of 
all  human  privileges. 

A  city  is  often  put  for  the  whole  country  of  which  it  is 
the  capital,  and  when  the  phrase  is  taken  in  that  large 
sense,  the  street  of  a  city,  is  some  important  part  of  the 
country  or  empire.  Here  the  place  seems  to  be  particu- 
larly designated.  It  is  not  Rome,  nor  Europe,  as  has  been 
supposed.  The  great  city  is  spiritually,  in  a  moral  respect, 
called  Sodom  and  Egypt; — a  city  that  is  like  Sodom  for 
licentiousness  and  wickedness,  and  like  Egypt  for  oppres- 
sion of  the  Lord's  people,  and  which  the  inspired  prophets 
have  called  by  those  names.  Now  Isaiah  expressly  calls 
the  rulers  of  Jerusalem,  "rulers  of  Sodom"  (1  :  10). 
And  Ezekiel  repeatedly  likens  Jerusalem  to  Sodom  (chap. 
16).  That  this  is  the  great  city  referred  to,  seems  to  be  made 
quite  evident  by  its  being  ivhere  oiir  Lord  tvas  crucijied. 
Tliis  explanatory  clause  is  added  on  purpose  to  designate 
the  place.  Jerusalem  is  the  great  center  of  Mahomet- 
anism,  where  stands  their  most  splendid  mosque  on  the 
very  site  of  Solomon's  temple. 

That  great  city  has  been  and  still  is  preeminent  for  the 
indignities  and  contempt  shown  to  Christians.  An  occur- 
rence detailed  in  the  Narrative  of  the  late  Expedition  to 
the  Dead  Sea,  will  sufficiently  illustrate  this,     A  party  of 


96  CHAPTER  XI. 

Ameiicans  belonging  to  that  expedition  were  in  Jerusalem, 
and  under  the  guidance  of  the  American  missionary  there, 
went  out  to  take  a  view  of  the  city.  They  came  near  to 
the  Open  Gateway  of  the  Grand  Mosque,  and  as  they 
stood  looking  at  it,  they  were  suddenly  assaulted  by  a 
guard  of  Turkish  soldiers,  who,  in  the  language  of  one  of 
the  party,  "  set  upon  beating  us  in  the  most  shameful  and 
disgraceful  manner  with  sticks  and  clubs  which  they  car- 
ried, in  the  name  of  the  Holy  Prophet,  calling  us  '  Chris- 
tian dogs,'  &c.  We  could  not  speak  their  language,  and 
therefore  could  not  reason  with  these  savage  fellows;  all 
gesticulating  demonstrations  were  unavailing,  and  their 
madness  and  fury  increased  as  we  parried  their  blows  in 
our  retreat."  "  Tlie  savage  clan  then  betook  themselves 
to  stones  which  lay  scattered  along  the  road.  Our  unfor- 
tunate missionary  received  a  sad  bruise  from  one  of  these 
well-directed  missives  hurled  at  us  in  the  name  of  the 
prophet  Mahomet.  We  took  a  wrong  course  and  found 
ourselves  brought  up  l)y  a  high  stone  wall,  and  our  pur- 
suers yelled  with  savage  delight,  and  set  upon  us  with 
renewed  fury,  kicking,  whipping,  stoning,  and  spitting  upon 
us."  They  were  then  taken  to  the  Judgment  Hall,  where 
they  were  examined  before  the  Pasha,  released  and  sent 
away.  Such,  to  this  day,  are  the  feelings  of  contempt  and 
hatred  cherished  by  the  Mahometans  against  Christians. 

In  the  third  verse  we  are  informed  that  the  witnesses 
shall  prophesy  1260  days,  and  in  the  seventh  verse,  that 
when  they  shall  have  finislied  their  testimony,  they  shall 
be  overcome  and  slain,  which  leads  us  to  conclude  that  the 
Completion  of  that  work  is  yet  future,  for  the  1260  years 
do  not  terminate  sooner  than  1854.  It  is  possible  then, 
that  as  protestant  missions  are  again  rcsuniod  in  the  east, 
and  are  having  considerable  success,  that  soon  there  will 
be  a  strong  demonstration  of  hostility  to  them,  and  the 


CHAPTER  XI.  97 

missionaries  be  greatly  embarrassed  in  their  labors.  It 
may  b  %  that  the  opposition  to  missions  among  the  Nesto- 
rians,  the  massacre  of  so  many  of  that  people,  and  the  de- 
struction of  their  villages  which  took  place  a  little  while 
since,  together  with  the  persecution  of  the  converted  Ar- 
menians, is  a  part  of  the  fulfillment  of  this  prophecy.  At 
any  rate,  we  may  be  quite  certain,  that  we  are  near  the 
accomplishment  of  what  is  here  predicted. 

9.  Atid  thcT/  of  the  j^^op^^-,  (^ncl  kindreds,  and  tongues, 
and  nations,  shall  see  their  dead  bodies  three  days  and  an 
half,  and  shall  not  syjfer  their  dead  bodies  to  be  put  in 
graves. — They  shall  see  from  among  the  people,  and  tribes, 
and  tongues,  and  nations,  their  dead  bodies  three  and  an  half 
days,  and  shall  not  permit  them  to  be  put  in  monuments 
or  tombs.  The  word  is  mnema,  '  that  which  remhids,  a 
memorial.'  The  idea  seems  to  be,  that  the  people  of  Pal- 
estine and  the  surrounding  countries,  will  not  allow  any 
monument  or  memorial  to  remain  to  keep  up  the  remem- 
brance of  these  churches  of  faithful  believers,  and  of  the 
effects  of  their  pious  labors.  This  desolation  shall  be  wit- 
nessed for  the  specified  time, 

10.  And  they  that  dtvell  upon  the  earth  shall  rejoice  over 
them,  and  make  merry,  and  shall  send  gifts  one  to  another  ; 
because  these  two  prophets  tormented  them  that  dwelt  on  the 
earth. — This  verse  expresses  the  satisfaction  and  demonstra- 
tions of  joy  which  will  be  made  by  those  who  dwell  in  the 
countries  where  this  suppression  of  Christian  truth  and 
ordinances  will  be  experienced.  They  wdll  greatly  rejoice 
because  their  consciences  will  be  no  more  disturbed  and 
their  fears  excited  by  these  defenders  of  revealed  truth  and 
of  a  pure  worship.  Their  testimony  against  prevailing 
superstitions  and  errors  will  be  silenced. 

5 


98  CHAPTER  XL 

11.  And  after  three  days  and  an  half  the  Spirit  of  11 
from  God  entered  into  them,  and  they  stood  upon  their  feet  ^ 

and  great  fear  fell  vpon  them  xuhich  saiv  them. — Who  can 
read  this  attentively  and  not  perceive,  that  it  is  wholly  sym- 
bolical ?  Revivification  and  resurrection  mean  in  prophecy 
a  restoration  to  moral,  religious,  or  political  existence,  of 
which  a  people  had  been  deprived.  The  sentiment  ex- 
pressed here  is,  that  by  the  interposition  and  power  of 
God,  those  faithful  servants  of  his,  who  are  represented  by 
the  witnesses,  would  be  restored  to  the  enjoyment  of  their 
rights,  would  be  raised  to  influence,  would  resume  their 
wonted  labors ;  and  true  religion  be  made  prosperous 
again.  This  will  be  after  the  specified  time  of  their 
oppression  shall  have  passed.  This  restoration  to  favor 
and  to  the  enjoyment  of  civil  and  religious  rights,  will  fill 
their  oppressors  with  consternation ;  for  it  will  be  the  sure 
precursor  of  the  ruin  of  their  cause,  and  of  the  triumph  of 
Christianity. 

12.  And  they  heard  a  great  voice  from  heaven  saying 
imto  them,  Come  up  hither.  And  they  ascended  tip  to 
heaven  in  a  doted;  and  their  enemies  beheld  them. — A  voice 
from  heaven  is  a  proclamation  from  the  civil  authority ; 
and  the  utterance,  Come  up  hither,  is  an  order  for  the  res- 
toration of  civil  rights  and  the  enjoyment  of  religious  priv- 
ileges. Its  signifie.ancy  is,  Be  no  longer  disfi-anchised. 
Have  the  same  immunities  as  others.  Be  at  liberty  to 
pxu'sue  your  chosen  avocations,  to  acquire  influence,  and  to 
exercise  official  authority  in  common  with  others.  This  is 
an  edict  for  full  toleration.  Wliethcr  the  recent  ordinance 
of  the  Grand  Sultin  in  favor  of  the  protestant  religion, 
tolerating  and  protecting  it,  be  the  fulfillment  of  this  we 
cannot  now  determine.     Probably  it  is  a  measure  prcpara- 


CHAPTER  XI.  99 

tory  to  another  more  liberal  and  decisive,  which  is  yet  to 
come. 

The  accomplishment  of  this  order  is  then  declared. 
They  are  restored  to  former  influence,  they  are  restored  to 
civil  rights,  they  share  in  civil  offices,  and  with  them  rises 
the  cause  which  most  of  all  they  venerate  and  love. 

In  a  cloud.  This  is  emblematic  of  a  multitude ;  and  the 
meaning  is,  that  a  great  number  of  these  witiiess-bearing 
people  will  at  once,  probably  by  an  edict  of  government, 
be  raised  to  these  privileges.  This  will  be  done  in  the 
midst  of  their  enemies, — they  beholding  them. 

The  opinion  of  Fleming  and  others  who  consider  the 
fulfillment  of  this  to  have  been  the  combined  efforts  of 
Maurice,  elector  of  Saxony,  and  other  protestant  princes 
for  the  defence  of  the  protestant  cause,  is  altogether  too 
preposterous  to  be  entertained. 

That  league,  called  the  League  of  Smalcald,  was  formed 
in  1530,  but  the  prophesying  of  the  witnesses  does  not 
close  until  the  year  1854.  Scott  says,  "It  should  be  noted, 
that  this  exceedingly  depressed  state  of  Christianity  seems 
only  to  refer  to  the  western  church  exclusively."  I  think 
it  refers  to  the  eastern  church  exclusively :  and  the  revi- 
vification predicted  is  yet  to  be  experienced. 

13.  And  the  same  hour  was  there  a  great  earthquake,  and 
the  tenth  2^a'>'t  of  the  city  fell,  and  in  the  earthquake  icere 
slain  of  men  seven  thousand  ;  and  the  remnant  ivere  affright- 
ed, and  gave  glory  to  the  God  of  heaven. — At  the  same  pe- 
riod a  great  revolution  in  civil  government  will  occur,  sig- 
nified by  an  earthquake ;  and  the  tenth  part  of  the  city 
fell :  that  is,  in  consequence  of  the  revolution,  a  tenth  part 
of  the  empire  changed  its  governmental  character ;  and 
also,  the  names  of  seven  thousand  men  were  destroyed 
or  taken  away,  as  it  should  be  read.     These  names  pro- 


100  CHAPTER  XI. 

bably  refer  to  the  dignities  and  titles  with  Avhich  they  had 
been  honored.  Republican  equality  will  be  established. 
These  wonderful  events  will  make  men  feel,  that  God 
reigns,  and  will  lead  them  to  honor  him  as  the  sovereign 
ruler  of  nations,  and  the  disposer  of  all  things.  The  resto- 
ration of  Christian  believers  to  the  enjoyment  of  their  re- 
ligious and  civil  rights,  and  the  revival  of  j^rimitive  Chiis- 
tianity,  will  be  a  wonderful  and  convincing  change.  This 
is  probably  yet  future. 

14.  The  second  ivoe  is  past  ;  and,  behold,  the  third  icoe 
Cometh  quickly. — Here  ends  the  Turkish  and  Mahometan 
dominion. 

15.  And  the  seventh  angel  sounded  ;  and  there  were  great 
voices  in  heaven,  sayiv.g,  The  kingdoms  of  this  loorld  are  be- 
come the  kingdoms  of  our  Lord,  and  of  his  Christ ;  and  he 
shall  reign  forever  and  ever. — This  is  the  third  woe- 
trumpet,  and  refers  to  the  Roman  papal  church  in 
the  western  portion  of  the  empire.  Before  the  rev- 
elator  goes  into  the  particulars  included  under  it,  he 
shows  what  will  be  the  spiritual  state  of  the  world  imme- 
diately subsequent  to  the  overthrow  of  the  Mahometan 
power.  The  kingdoms  of  the  world  will  be  Christ's,  and 
his  spiritual  reign  over  the  nations  will  be  established. 
This  of  course  brings  us  to  the  millennium.  The  eighteenth 
and  nineteenth  verses  complete  the  view  of  the  triumphs  of 
Christianity,  as  more  fully  described  toward  the  close  of 
the  book.  In  the  nineteenth  chapter  a  similar  description 
is  given  of  the  state  of  things  after  the  destruction  of  the 
papal  dominion.  In  each  series,  that  pertaining  to  the 
eastern  or  Mahometan  power,  and  that  wliich  pertains  to 
the  western  or  Roman  power,  he  carries  forward  his  pro- 
phetic views  to  the  millennium,  or  thousand  years  men- 


CHAPTER  XI.  101 

tioned  in  the  twentieth  chapter.  As  these  two  antichrists 
arose  about  the  same  time,  and  each  are  to  continue  twelve 
hundred  and  sixty  years,  their  overthrow  will  be  nearly 
simultaneous.  But  we  may  suppose  that  both  religions 
will  continue  feeble  and  waning  for  some  years  after  their 
power  and  supremacy  are  destroyed. 

When  the  seventh  angel  sounded  there  were  great  voices 
in  heaven,  that  is,  public  acknowledgments,  proclamations, 
and  thanksgivings.  The  occasion  for  these  will  be,  that 
the  kingdoms  of  the  world  have  become  the  kingdoms  of 
our  Lord  and  of  his  Christ ;  that  is,  subject  to  his  benig- 
nant reign.  This  is  the  great  spiritual  change  spoken  of 
by  the  ancient  prophets  ;■  and  implies,  that  instead  of  the 
former  despotic  and  oppressive  governments,  under  which 
the  Christian  church  had  suffered  so  amazingly  for  ages, 
Christ  would  be  acknowledged  as  the  supreme  Lawgiver 
and  Sovereign  ;  and  that  from  that  period,  his  divine  pre- 
cepts would  become  the  principles  for  the  government  of 
men.  It  implies  also,  that  Christianity  will  exert  its  ap- 
propriate influence  in  moulding  their  characters,  and  melior- 
ating their  condition.  Llis  reign  was  commenced  long 
since ;  but  now  it  will  receive  a  new  development,  will  be 
deeply  and  widely  felt,  and  be  thankfully  acknowledged. 

16  and  17.  And  the  four  and  tivcnty  elders,  tvhich  sat 
before  God  on  their  seats,  fell  upon  their  faces,  and  tvor- 
shijjed  God  :  Saying,  We  give  thee  thanks,  0  Lord  God 
Almighty,  ivhich  art,  and  wast,  and  art  to  come :  because 
thou  hast  taken  to  thee  thy  great  power,  and  hast  reigned. — 
At  this  happy  change,  the  twenty-four  elders,  who  repre- 
sent the  church,  and  who  sat  before  God,  implying  the  per- 
manent enjoyment  of  his  favor,  worship  him  with  profound 
reverence,  and  render  thanks  for  the  exercise  of  his  power, 
and  this  new  development  of  his  benevolent  reign.     Simi- 


102  CHAPTER  XI. 

lar  adoration  and  praise  is  represented  as  being  oflered  in 
other  instances,  when  a  special  season  of  prosperity  to  the 
church  is  predicted  as  occurring.  It  will  be  at  once  per- 
ceived that  this  seventh  trumpet  extends  over  the  whole 
period  which  is  included  under  the  seven  vials  which  follow. 
It  is  called  a  woe-trumpet  because  it  relates  chiefly  to  the 
destruction  of  the  papal  power  by  a  succession  of  divine 
judgments. 

The  reign  of  Christ  which  is  mentioned  here,  is  doubt- 
less the  same  as  that  mentioned  in  the  closing  chapters  of 
this  book. 

18.  And  the  nations  were  angry,  and  thy  wrath  is  come, 
and  the  time  of  the  dead,  that  they  should  .be  judged,  and  that 
thou  shouldst  give  reward  unto  thy  servants  the  prophets,  and 
to  the  saints  and  them  that  fear  thy  name,  small  and  great ; 
and  shouldst  destroy  them  tvliich  destroy  the  earth. — ^The 
amazing  change  which  will  take  place,  when  the  kingdoms 
of  the  world  will  become  the  kingdoms  of  Christ  will  pro- 
duce great  excitement,  and  probably  strong  opposition. 
The  nations  ivill  be  angry ;  the  wicked,  the  lovers  of  de- 
spotic power,  and  haters  of  true  religion,  will  make  great 
opposition  to  civil  freedom  and  pure  Christianity.  But  it 
will  be  unavailing,  for  then,  the  time  of  God's  wrath  is  come> 
— the  time  in  which  he  will  overthrow  oppression,  bigotry, 
superstition,  and  idolatry.  No  artifice  or  power  of  man 
will  then  be  able  to  prolong  the  existence  of  those  evils. 

And  the  time  of  the  dead.,  that  they  should  be  judged. 
By  the  dead  are  not  meant  those  whose  natural  life  is  ex- 
tinct. The  phrase  is  used  figuratively,  as  is  the  killing  of 
the  witnesses,  and  signifies  those  who  have  been  oppressed, 
deprived  of  civil  and  religious  rights,  held  in  a  state  of 
ignorance  and  debasement.  Those  who  shall  be  in  that 
condition  of  social  and  political  death  at  the  time  meant, 


CHAPTER  XL  103 

will  ])e  judged,  i.e.,  vindicated, — their  wrongs  will  be 
redressed  and  their  rights  secured.  Then  too  will  he 
given  a  recompense  to  the  faithful  ministers  of  Christ, 
called  here  as  elsewhere,  prophets,  and  to  the  saints, 
and  all  true  Christians  of  every  grade.  Tliat  promised 
recompense  is  the  enjoyment  of  the  fruits  of  their  labors, 
and  the  fulfillment  of  their  desires  in  the  prosperity  of  the 
cause  they  have  loved  and  sustained. 

The  signification  given  aboveof  the  term,  _;'HtZ^e(/,  is  com- 
mon in  the  Old  Testament, — the  same  Greek  word  {krino) 
being  used  in  the  Septuagint,  which  is  used  here.  Thus 
Ps.  67  :  4.  Thou  wilt  judge  the  people  righteously,  and 
govern  the  nations  upon  earth :  literally.  Thou  wilt  rule 
the  people  in  equity  and  guide  the  nations,  &c.  Ps.  10  : 
18.  He  will  judge  the  fatherless  and  poor;  i.e.,  will  vindi- 
cate their  rights  and  protect  them.  So,  Ps.  43  :  1,  Judge 
me,  O  God,  and  plead  my  cause  against  an  ungodly  nation. 
Also,  Ps.  110  :  6.  He  vail  judge  among  the  heathen,  &c. 
To  judge  among  the  heathen  means  in  this  instance  to  rule 
over  them  and  execute  justice  in  the  midst  of  them.  This 
will  be  done  preeminently  when  the  time  shall  draw  near 
for  the  kingdoms  of  the  world  to  become  the  Lord's.  The 
reference  is  not  at  cdl  to  the  general  judgment. 

In  contrast  with  this,  it  is  said  The  Lord  will  destroy 
them  who  destroy  the  earth.  The  term  earth  is  used  for 
those  who  inhabit  it;  and  the  class  of  men  who  have  de- 
spised, trodden  down  and  held  in  debasement  their  fellow 
men,  shall  be  despised,  and  no  others  like  them  shall  af- 
terwards be  found. 

19.  And  the  temple  of  God  was  opened  in  heaven,  and 
there  loas  seen  in  his  temple  the  ark  of  his  testament :  and 
there  were  lightnings,  and  voices,  and  thitnderings,  and  an 
earthquake^  and  great  hail. — We  must  remember,  that  all 


104  CHAPTER  Xf. 

these  are  scenes  on  earth,  not  in  heaven.  The  temple  of 
God  represents  the  Christian  church;  and  heaven  is  the 
civil  government.  The  temple  being  open,  as  if  for  free 
access,  signifies,  that  the  privileges  of  the  church  will  be 
accessible  to  all, — a  free  toleration  will  be  allowed  by  the 
civil  authorities  ; — all  will  enjoy  religious  liberty. 

As  a  consequence  of  opening  the  temple,  the  ark  of  the 
covenant  was  seen.  This  is  another  evidence,  that  it  is  not 
the  celestial  heaven  which  is  meant,  for  there  is  no  temple 
with  its  ark  there.  The  whole  reference  is  to  (he  church  on 
earth,  and  the  figures  are  drawn  from  the  temple  at  Jeru- 
salem. The  ark  stood  in  the  inner  apartment  called  the 
holy  of  holies  ;  its  top  or  lid  was  the  mercy-seat,  over 
which  two  cherubim  spread  their  wings ;  and  between 
these  was  a  supernatural  light,  which  was  a  symbol  of  the 
divine  presence.  Now,  the  opening  of  the  temple,  or  with- 
drawing of  the  partition  curtain,  would  give  a  full  view  of 
the  ark  and  the  divir^e  glory  above  it.  This  may  signify, 
that  at  the  period  intended,  God  will  give  a  manifestation 
of  himself  to  mankind  more  full  than  he  has  ever  done  be- 
fore. That  period,  as  I  think,  is  that  of  the  new  heaven 
and  new  earth  described  in  the  twenty-first  chapter,  which 
follows  the  thousand  years,  and  the  destruction  or  conver- 
sion of  the  enemies  of  the  church.  It  is  there  declared, 
that  '  the  tabernacle  of  God  will  be  with  men,  and  he  will 
dwell  with  them, — that  they  will  be  his  people,  and  that 
he'  will  be  with  them  and  be  their  God.'  Also,  that  '  the 
throne  of  God  and  the  Lamb  will  be  with  them,  and  they 
will  see  his  face.'  That  will  be  the  period  in  which  the 
church  will  attain  to  her  highest  earthly  perfection. 

Preparatory  to  this  happy  state  of  things,  there  will  be 
great  commotions,  wars,  overturnings,  and  signal  judgments, 
symbolized  by  lightnings,  voices,  thunderings,  an  earth- 
quake, and  great  hail.  Ch.  8  :  5.     Isa.  28  :  17,  where  hail 


CHAPTER  XL  105 

is  the  emblem  of  special  judgments  and  calamities.  These 
also,  if  I  mistake  not,  are  described  in  the  twentieth  chap- 
ter, from  the  eleventh  to  the  fifteenth  verses.  Before  that 
most  perfect  moral  and  political  state  of  the  world,  fitly 
distinguished  as  the  new  heaven  and  earth,  there  will  be 
vigorous  opposition  to  the  controlling  influence  of  pure 
religion,  and  there  will  be  signal  displays  of  God's  kindness 
to  his  people,  and  of  his  displeasure  against  his  enemies, 
figuratively  represented  by  the  appearance  of  a  great  shin- 
ing throne. 

Thus,  as  I  have  already  remarked,  John  extends  his  pro- 
phetic description  of  the  destruction  of  the  eastern  or  Mahom- 
etan antichrist  to  the  millennium,  and  then  glances  at  the 
great  events  pertaining  to  the  church  far  onward  beyond 
that  era  of  religious  prosperity,  even  into  that  distant  future 
period  which  Daniel  says,  is  forever  and  ever. 

Scott  remarks,  that  this  nineteenth  verse  "  introduces  a 
new  subject,  and  should  have  been  placed  at  the  beginning 
of  the  next  chapter."  So  far  is  this  from  being  the  fact,  it 
is  carrying  out  the  series  of  events  in  the  particular  line 
which  the  apostle  was  tracing  to  the  grand  consummation. 
He  follows  up  the  overthrow  of  the  Mahometan  enemies 
of  the  Christian  church  with  the  far  distant  eradication  from 
the  world  of  all  its  enemies,  and  the  full  and  permanent 
establishment  of  its  peace  and  supremacy.  In  the  subse- 
quent chapters  he  takes  up  the  Roman  antichrist,  traces 
its  progress,  depicts  its  overthrow,  and  carries  the  view 
onward  through  the  millennium  to  the  grand  consummation 
in  the  new  heaven  and  new  earth. 


106  CHAPTER  XII. 


CHAPTER    XII. 

The  Triumph  of  Christianity  over  its  Heathen  Op- 
posers  in  the  Weste?^  Empire. — The  Invasion  of 
the  JVorthern  Barbarians. 

The  writer  having  traced  the  progress  of  the  Mahomet- 
an Antichrist  onward  to  the  sounding  of  the  seventh  trum- 
pet, when  the  kingdoms  of  this  world  will  become  the 
kingdoms  of  our  Lord,  commences  the  prediction  of  a 
series  of  events  relating  to  the  western  or  Roman  Anti- 
christ. That  he  might  give  a  connected  view  of  that  great 
apostasy,  he  reverts  to  the  time  when  the  scepter  of  govern- 
ment was  wrested  from  pagan,  and  held  by  Christian  em- 
perors. In  this  and  the  succeeding  chapters,  he  foreshows 
the  casting  down  of  paganism  from  its  long  continued 
supremacy, — the  rise  of  the  papal  hierarchy, — its  progress 
to  almost  universal  dominion, — its  obscuration  of  the  glory 
of  the  church, — its  bloody  persecutions,  and  its  various 
fortunes  to  its  final  subversion,  just  previous  to  the  millen- 
nium. By  adopting  the  interpretation  we  have  given  of 
the  preceding  chapter,  and  observing  the  order  of  the 
visions  now  suggested,  much  confusion  and  perplexity  is 
avoided,  and  the  whole  is  seen  to  be  consistent  and  har- 
monious. 

1.  And  there  ajijyeared  a,  fjreal  wonder  in  heaven  ;  a  wo- 
man clothed  with  the  sun,  and  the  moon  under  her  feet,  and 
upon  her  head  a  crown  of  tivelvc  stars. — A  great  sign  or  pre- 
sage was  seen  in  heaven,  (this  being  the  literal  reading ;) — 
a  presage  of  an  important  era  of  the  church.  Heaven,  in 
this  place,  as  in  most  others  in  this  book,  signifies  the  gov- 


CHAPTER  XII.  107 

ernment  or  ruling  authority  of  the  empire.  This  will  be 
evident  when  it  is  ascertained  what  is  meant  by  the  woman 
and  her  son.  A  woman  is  the  well-known  emblem  of  the 
church.  Being  clothed  with  the  sun  signifies,  that  at  the 
period  designated,  the  church  will  be  invested  with  author  if  >/ 
to  rule, — that  she  will  shine  forth  from  the  heights  of  civil 
power,  dispelling  the  darkness  of  heathenism,  and  that  to 
her  will  be  given  a  bright  day  of  prosperity. 

The  Jews  reckoned  time,  regulated  their  festivals,  and 
determined  particular  seasons  for  religious  purposes  by  the 
phases  of  the  moon ;  and  so,  it  is  sometimes  taken  as  the 
symbol  of  their  ecclesiastical  economy.  In  this  respect  the 
moon  being  under  the  feet  of  the  woman,  would  indicate 
that  that  economy  had  been  made  subservient  to  her  ad- 
vancement to  a  more  elevated  state ; — that  she  had  risen 
above  it,  and  was  enjoying  a  brighter  dispensation. 

But,  inasmuch  as  it  was  the  general  practice,  even  in  the 
most  enlightened  nations,  to  worship  the  moon  and  to  offer 
human  and  various  other  sacrifices  to  it,  I  prefer  to  regard 
this  symbol,  as  signifying  the  triumph  of  the  church  over 
heathenism  and  idolatry.  The  Syrians  worshiped  the 
moon  under  the  name  of  Astarte  and  Urania, — the  Ara- 
bians, as  Alilat, — the  Egyptians  as  Isis, — the  Greeks  as 
Diana,  Venus,  &c.,  and  even  the  Hebrews  fell  into  this 
universal  idolatry,  and  paid  adoration  to  the  moon  as  the 
queen  of  heaven,  and  the  goddess  of  the  groves.  To  be 
under  the  feet  implies  a  state  of  subjection  and  degradation. 
At  the  period  intended,  the  church,  having  risen  to  author- 
ity and  supremacy  in  the  empire,  would  put  down  pagan- 
ism from  its  high  places,  and  subject  it  to  her  control. 

This  interpretation  is  strengthened  by  the  symbolic  fact, 
that  upon  the  head  of  the  woman  was  a  crown  of  twelve 
stars.  A  croAvn  is  always  the  emblem  of  regal  authority. 
The    twelve   stars    symbolize   the    twelve    apostles,     hi 


108  CHAPTER  XII. 

the  first  chapter  the  seven  stcars  are  declared  to  be  the 
angels,  i.e.  ministers  of  the  churches.  The  idea,  then, 
is,  that  the  church  will  possess  regal  authority  in  the 
empire,  by  means  of  the  truths  promulgated  to  the 
world  by  the  twelve  apostles  to  whom  Christ  committed 
the  great  work  of  teaching  the  nations.  The  eftect  would 
be  the  dejection  and  sujipression  of  paganism.  And  thus 
it  was,  as  the  sequel  will  show. 

2.  And  she,  being  with  child,  cried,  travailing  in  birth, 
and  pained  to  be  delivered. — The  time  of  her  parturition 
being  near,  she  was  in  great  distress ;  showing  that  God 
was  about  to  give  her  a  deliverer,  and  that  this  would  be 
preceded  and  attended  with  great  trials.  History  shows, 
that  this  was  precisely  the  state  of  affiiirs  from  the  death  of 
Constantius  to  the  entire  triumph  of  Christianity  over  its 
heathen  enemies  mider  the  reign  of  Constantino,  his  son. 
See  explanation  of  the  fourth  verse. 

3.  And  there  aj^peared  another  tconder  in  heaven  ;  and 
behold  a  great  red  dragon,  having  seven  heads  and  ten  hoims, 
and  seven  crowns  upon  his  heads. — Another  sign  or  2)>'esage 
was  exhibited  in  the  symbolic  heaven, — the  government, 
to  which  attention  is  particularly  directed.  This  was  a 
great  red  dragon  v,^ith  seven  crown-bearing  heads,  and  ten 
horns.  This  hideous  monster,  resembling  the  fabulous 
hydra  of  the  ancients,  is  a  fit  emblem  of  paganism  in  the 
Roman  empire.  A  writer  assigns  as  the  reason  for  adopt- 
ing "  the  dragon  as  the  emblem  of  the  empire  in  this  case, 
that  the  dragon  was  the  principal  standard  of  the  Romans 
next  to  the  eagle  in  the  second,  third,  fourth,  and  fifth  cen- 
turies of  the  Christian  era.  Of  this  we  have  abundant 
evidence  in  the  vv'ritings  both  of  heathens  and  Chiistians." 
Thus  Daniel  represents  the  Grecian  kingdom  by  a  he  goat. 


CHAPTER  XII.  109 

for  the  reason,  as  we  suppose,  that  the  figure  of  that  animal 
was  borne  upon  the  military  standards  of  that  nation.  Cer- 
tain it  is,  that  Daniel  describes  the  Eonian  empire,  as  a 
beast  dreadful  and  terrible,  and  exceedingly  strong,  having 
great  iron  teeth,  and  ten  horns.  John  calls  it  a  great  red 
dragon ; — great,  as  showing  the  extent  and  power  of  the 
empire, — and  red,  because  red  and  scarlet  distinguished 
the  civil  and  military  officers  of  the  empire. 

This  dragon  had  seven  heads  with  crowns  upon  them. 
The  cro^vn  being  the  emblem  of  ruling  authority,  the  seven 
crowned  heads,  mean  the  seven  successive  forms  of  govern- 
ment under  which  the  empire  has  existed.  These,  in  chap- 
ter 17  :  10,  are  called  seven  kings;  the  term  kings  being 
applied  to  any  kind  of  rulers.  The  seven  forms  are  enu- 
merated thus, — "1.  The  regal  power.  2.  The  consulate. 
3.  The  dictatorshij?.  4.  The  decemvirate.  5.  The  mili- 
tary tribunes.     6.  The  triumvirate.     7.  The  imperial. 

The  dragon  had  also  ten  horns.  A  horn  is  an  emblem 
of  a  nation  or  kingdom.  The  Roman  empire  comprised 
ten  kingdoms,  that  is,  all  of  Europe  with  the  exception  of 
the  northern  and  eastern  part  of  Russia.  As  the  seven 
heads  are  the  seven  forms  of  government,  and  as  the 
crowns  were  upon  the  heads,  and  not  upon  the  horns,  it 
is  evident,  that  at  the  time  intended,  the  supreme  "power 
was  still  vested  in  the  emperors  and  senate  at  Rome,  and 
not  as  afterwards,  in  the  monarchs  of  the  ten  kingdoms." 

4.  And  his  tail  dreio  the  third  j^oi't  of  the  stars  of 
heaven,  and  did  cast  them  to  the  earth :  and  the  dragon 
stood  before  the  woman  which  was  ready  to  he  delivered,  for 
to  devour  her  child  as  soon  as  it  tvas  born. — Cruden  says  of 
the  term  tail  in  this  passage,  "  It  signifies  the  power,  pol- 
icy and  flatteries  by  which  the  devil  and  his  instruments 
corrupt  and  allure  ministers  of  the  church  from  their  sim- 


1  io  CHAPTER  XII. 

plicity  and  purity  of  doctrine,  to  error,  superstition  and 
profaneness."  Teachers  of  false  doctrines  and  pernicious 
errors  are  represented  in  scripture  as  being  the  tail.  Thus 
in  Isa.  9  :  14,  15,  'The  Lord  will  cut  off  from  Israel  head 
and  tail,  branch  and  rush,  in  one  day.  The  ancient  and 
honoi-able,  he  is  the  head ;  and  the  prophet,  Avho  teacheth 
lies,  he  is  the  taiiy  In  Isa,  19  :  15,  the  term  tail  means 
the  idolatrous  priests  and  necromancers  of  Egypt.  No-w- 
as the  dragon  is  the  symbol  of  pagan  government  and 
pagan  religion  united,  his  tail  represents  the  teachers  and 
propagators  of  paganism,  -who  infuse  their  degrading  and 
■polluting  sentiments  into  the  minds  of  men. 

Stars  are  ministers  and  teachers  of  true  religion  ;  or,  if 
the  reference  be  to  civil,  matters,  they  mean  distinguished 
men  in  the  state.  Here,  doubtless,  the  stars  are  Christian 
ministers,  and  their  being  dragged  along  and  cast  to  the 
earth  means,  either  their  being  forcibly  taken  from  their 
stations,  deprived  of  their  oflice,  and  reduced  to  the  com- 
mon level  and  occupations  of  men ;  or,  that  they  were  in- 
duced by  fear  or  favor  to  adopt  heathen  sentiments,  and 
mingle  heathen  rites  in  Christian  worship.  All  this  was 
notoriously  the  fact.  In  the  last  half  of  the  third  century 
under  the  reign  of  Decius  Trajan,  a  furious  persecution  was 
carried  on  against  the  church.  Moshcim  states  that  "in 
all  the  provinces  of  the  empire,  multitudes  of  Christians 
were,  during  the  space  of  two  years,  put  to  death  by  the 
most  horrid  punishments.  The  most  unhappy  circum- 
stance of  all  these  cruelties  was  their  fatal  influence  upon 
the  fliith  and  constancy  of  many  of  the  sufferers ;  for,  a 
great  number  of  Christians  dismayed,  not  by  the  a]>proach 
of  death,  but  at  the  aspect  of  those  dreadful  and  lingering 
torments  which  a  barbarous  magistracy  had  prepared  to 
combat  their  constancy,  fill  from  the  ■profession  of  their 
faith,  and  secured  themselves  from  punishment,  either  by 


CHAPTER  XII.  1 1 1 

offering  sacrifices^  or  by  hiirninr/  incense  before  the  images 
of  the  gods,  or  by  purchasing  certificates  from  the  pagan 
priests." 

This,  if  I  mistake  not,  is  the  fulfillment  of  what  is  pre- 
dicted by  the  tail  of  the  dragon  drawing  a  third  part  of  the 
stars,  and  casting  them  to  the  earth.  Generally,  by  the 
term  third  part,  John  means  a  particular  portion  of  the  em- 
pire. In  this  instance  it  may  mean  a  considerable  indefinite 
portion  of  the  stars.  It  should  be  observed,  that  the  apostle 
in  this  description  of  the  Roman  Antichrist,  goes  back  to 
its  origin. 

The  dragon  stood  before  the  woman  to  destroy  her  child 
as  soon  as  it  was  bom.  The  following  I  regard  as  the  ex- 
planation or  rather  fulfillment  of  this  symbolic  act.  The 
father  of  Constantine  was  favorable  to  Christianity.  This 
awakened  the  jealousy  and  fears  of  the  heathen  priests. 
Upon  his  death,  a.d.  311,  the  army  proclaimed  his  son 
Constantine,  emperoi',  and  the  year  following  he  was  con- 
verted to  the  faith  of  Christ.  Then  began  a  terrible  and 
bloody  conflict  between  the  Christian  and  heathen  parties. 
Of  the  foiu-  prsefects,  Galerius  and  Diocletian  were  invete- 
rate enemies  of  Christianity  ;  and  instigated  by  the 
heathen  priests,  they  carried  on  a  horrid  persecution  of  Chris- 
tians. Various  attempts  were  made  to  destroy  Constantine 
by  engaging  him  in  dangerous  expeditions,  and  by  endeav- 
oring to  excite  the  heathen  against  him.  In  this  way  did 
the  dragon  seek  to  devour  the  woman's  child. 

Furthermore,  among  the  competitors  for  the  throne  was 
Maxentius,  another  steadfast  asserter  of  paganism,  who  had 
possession  of  Rome.  Constantine,  as  I  have  previously 
stated,  immediately  marched  from  France  against  that 
usurper,  and  entered  Italy  with  a  large  army.  Maxentius 
met  him  a  little  way  from  Rome  ;  but  though  his  force 
was  much  the  largest,  he  was  routed,  and  in  his  flight  was 


1 12  CHAPTER  XII. 

precipitated  into  the  Tiber,  and  dro^v^^ed.  Galerius  was 
seized  with  an  extraordinary  disease,  and  after  languisliing 
nearly  a  year  in  indescribable  torments,  expired. 

Then  Maximin,  Avho  governed  in  the  east,  meditated  the 
destruction  of  Constantino  and  the  seizure  of  the  western 
part  of  the  empire.  To  accomplish  this,  he  marched  with 
a  numerous  army  against  Licinius,  who  was  friendly  to 
Constantine,  and  was  wholly  defeated.  Soon  after,  he  died 
miserably  "  by  a  very  extraordinary  kind  of  madness." 

Finally  Licinius  himself  turned  against  Constantine,  and 
contested  his  right  to  the  throne  at  the  head  of  a  formidable 
army  composed  of  the  heathen  party.  Constantine's  sol- 
diers from  the  first  were  nearly  all  Christians.  '  Previous 
to  the  battle,  in  the  midst  of  his  Christian  bishops,  he  im- 
plored the  assistance  of  God;  and  Licinius  with  the  pagan 
priests  interceded  with  the  gods  for  help  and  victory.  The 
cause  of  truth  and  religion  triumphed.  Constantine  con- 
quered. Soon,  however,  his  antagonist  collected  another 
army,  and  was  again  defeated  in  a  general  engagement, 
and  was  pursued  into  Nicomedia,  where  he  surrendered 
himself  a  prisoner,  and  was  some  time  after  put  to  death. 
In  all  this  we  see  what  amazing  efforts  the  great  red  dragon 
made  to  destroy  the  woman's  child  as  soon  as  it  was  born, 
as  soon  as  he  became  a  Christian  and  an  emperor. 

5.  And  she  brought  forth  a  vian  child.,  who  was  to  rule 
all  nations  with  a  rod  of  iron :  and  her  child  was  caught  up 
unto  God,  and  to  his  throne. — It  is  truly  surprising,  that  men 
of  learning  and  biblical  research,  who  have  written  large 
commentaries  on  this  book,  should  have  asserted,  that  this 
male  child  of  the  woman,  the  church,  is  Jesus  Christ ! 
This  represents  the  writer  as  going  back  all  of  a  sudden, 
and  without  any  conceivable  reason,  to  the  commencement 
of  the  Christian  era,  and  thus  makes  him  a  historian  of 


CHAPTER  XII.  113 

the  jxist,  instead  of  a  prophet  of  the  future ;  and  this,  too, 
wlien  he  had  been  distinctly  informed,  that  these  visions 
related  to  '"things  which  must  be  hereafter;"  1  :  19  and 
4:1.  Besides,  Jesus  Christ  is  in  no  sense  whatever  the 
son  of  the  symbolic  woman,  the  church.  So  far  from  it  is 
the  fact,  that  the  church  owes  its  existence  to  him, — derived 
its  origin  from  him,  and  from  the  first  has  been  nourished 
and  sustained  by  him.  The  church  is  called  in  the  scrip- 
tures the  Lamb's  wife,  his  spouse,  his  bride,  but  never  his 
mother,  nor  he  its  Son. 

The  succeeding  prediction,  that  he  vrould  rule  all  nations 
ivith  a  rod  of  iron  is  doubtless  what  has  occasioned  the 
above  noticed  misinterpretation.  It  is  claimed,  that  there 
is  a  reference  in  this  to  Psalm  2:9,  '  Thou  shalt  break 
them  with  a  rod  of  iron,  and  shalt  dash  them  in  pieces  like 
a  potter's  vessel.'  There  is  not  the  slightest  evidence,  that 
there  is  any  reference  to  that  passage, — a  passage  which 
clearly  refers  to  Christ,  but  this  as  clearly  does  not. 

In  the  original  the  word  nations,  has  the  Greek  article 
before  it,  and  therefore  our  translation  should  read,  all  the 
nations,  that  is,  the  nations  of  the  empire.  Even  if  we  give 
to  the  phrase  the  broadest  signification  in  which  it  is  used 
in  scripture,  it  will  not  alter  the  case,  for  at  the  time  speci- 
fied, the  Roman  empire  embraced  nearly  the  whole  known 
world,  and  therefore,  the  tvkole  ivorld  is  a  phrase  repeatedly 
used  in  the  new  testament  to  signify  that  empire,  Luke 
2  :  1.     Rom.  1  :  8.     Rev.  13  :  3.     Col.  1  :  6. 

Iro7i  is  a  metal  distinguished  for  its  strength ;  and  a  rod 
of  iron  is  one  that  cannot  easily  be  broken.  Ruling  with  a 
scepter  of  iron,  signifies  the  exercise  of  great  authority  and 
power, — an  authority  which  could  not  be  easily  resisted  or 
overthrown.  Such  w^as  the  authoritj^  of  Constantine,  when 
he  repealed  the  oppressive  laws  against 'Christians,  sup- 
pressed paganism,  which  had  been  the  religion  of  the  em- 


114  CHAPTER  XII. 

pire  from  its  origin,  prohibited  its  idolatrous  rites,  and 
made  Christianity  triumpliant,  in  spite  of  the  efforts  of 
heathen  priests,  philosophers,  and  magistrates. 

This  man-child  was  caught  up  to  God  and  to  his  throne. 
This  is  another  figure  signifying  the  divine  protection  over 
him,  and  that  God  exalted  him  to  rule  for  his  church,  and 
for  his  glory.  In  a  subordinate  sense,  he  made  him  a  co- 
ruler  and  co-worker  with  him  to  promote  the  enlargement 
and  welfare  of  Christ's  kingdom.  I  have  already  noticed 
some  of  the  great  deliverances  which  God  wrought  for  this 
first  Christian  emperor,  beset  as  he  was  with  snares  and 
stratagems,  and  opposed  by  all  the  official  influence  and 
military  force  of  the  heathen  portion  of  the  empire. 

6.  And  the  looman  fied  into  the  tvilderness,  where  she 
hath  a  place  prepared  of  God,  that  they  should  feed  her  there 
a  thousand  two  hundred  and  threescore  days. — Of  all  the 
opinions  respecting  the  locality  of  the  wilderness  and  the 
flight  of  the  woman  into  it,  that  which  maintains  that  the 
United  States  of  America  is  the  place,  and  the  coming  of 
the  Puritans  here  is  the  event,  is  the  most  whimsical  and 
absurd.  And  yet  writers  have  seriously  maintained  this, 
as  the  true  interpretation.  This  is  making  the  apostolic 
seer  to  leap  over  a  period  of  1300  years,  viz.,  from  the 
settlement  of  Constantino  in  the  empire  about  the  year  313 
to  the  landing  of  the  Pilgrims  here  in  1620!  Besides, 
John  was  informed,  that  the  woman,  the  true  church, 
should  be  nourished  in  the  wilderness  1260  years,  which 
being  added  to  1620,  would  make  the  time  of  her  con- 
tinuance there  to  extend  to  the  year  2880,  or  2862  of 
prophetic  time,  which  would  be  through  almost  the  whole 
period  of  the  millennium ! !  So  men  let  their  fancies 
run  loose  upon  the  prophecies  of  this  book.     Instead  of 


CHAPTER  XII.  115 

this,  we  should  make  the  analogy  of  the  symbols,  and  the 
records  of  veritable  history  our  guide. 

Others  think,  that  her  flight  into  the  wilderness  signifies, 
that  the  church  soon  after  its  great  prosperity  and  enlarge- 
ment in  the  time  of  Constantine,  fell  into  a  maze  of  error 
and  superstition,  Avhich  brought  upon  it  spiritual  desolation. 
True,  there  was  a  great  multiplication  of  rites  and  ceremo- 
nies,— an  exhibition  of  splendor  and  of  pride,  and  a  conse- 
quent declension  of  spirituality,  till  at  length,  the  founda- 
tions of  papacy  were  laid  firm  and  strong,  and  that  mon- 
strous structure,  combining  Judaism,  heathenism,  and 
Christianity,  began  to  develop  its  vast  proportions  and  its 
lofty  pretensions. 

But,  surely,  this  falling  into  a  state  of  superstition  and 
declension,  cannot  be  fitly  represented  by  a  flight  to  a  place 
of  security  provided  by  God  himself,  where  she  is  to  be  nour- 
ished for  a  long  period  from  the  face  of  the  serpent.  Instead 
of  such  a  flight,  it  would  have  been  a  guilty  yielding  to  the 
corrupting  influence  of  the  dragon,  and  a  compliance  with 
his  wishes.  Be  it  remembered,  that  it  was  the  sun-clad 
woman,  the  true  church,  who  fled  into  the  wilderness,  not 
that  mass  of  nominal  Christians,  who  became  the  degen- 
erate Antichrist. 

A  careful  attention  to  history  shows  this  fact,  that  there 
has  ahvays  been  a  portion  of  Christians,  who  have  resisted 
all  the  corruptions  of  Christian  doctrine  and  worship,  which 
from  century  to  century  have  been  introduced ;  and  they 
have  been  more  or  less  persecuted.  This  has  been  the  case 
from  the  very  days  of  Constantine,  when  Pope  Sylvester 
introduced  his  unwarrantable  innovations,  down  to  this 
time.  Indeed,  so  early  as  the  year  251  Novatian  separated 
from  the  church  because  of  its  great  depravity.  "Great 
numbers,"  says  Mr.  Robinson,  "  followed  his  example,  and 
all  over  the  empire  Puritan  churches  were  constituted  and 


116  CHAPTER  XII. 

flourished  through  the  succeeding  tvro  hundred  years.  Af- 
terward, when  penal  laws  obliged  them  to  lurk  in  corners, 
and  worship  God  in  private,  they  were  distinguished  by  a 
variety  of  names,  and  a  succession  of  them  continued  till  the 
Reformation.''''  Another  writer  says,  "  The  Novatians  de- 
clared their  community  to  be  the  only  true  church."  No- 
vatian  was  a  pastor  of  a  church  formed  by  himself  in  the 
city  of  Rome,  "  which  maintained  no  fellowship  with  the 
so  called  Catholic  church." 

The  Novatians  called  themselves,  Cathari,  which  means, 
The  Pure  or  Puritans,  and  they  v.'ere  the  pure  of  the  church, 
or  rather  the  pure  church  from  the  middle  of  the  third  cen- 
tury to  the  sixteenth,  when  their  spirit  produced  the  great 
reformation.  It  is  the  recorded  acknowledgment  of  their 
enemies,  that  they  maintained  "  the  integrity  of  the  true 
faith,  together  with  the  purity  of  discipline,  and  the  power 
of  godliness."  "  These  Puritans,  being  exposed  to  severe 
and  sanguinary  persecutions  for  dissent,  from  age  to  age, 
were  compelled  to  shelter  themselves  from  the  desolating 
storm  in  retirement ;  and  when  at  intervals  they  re-appear 
on  the  page  of  cotemporary  history,  and  their  principles 
are  propagated  with  new  boldness  and  success,  they  are 
styled  a  new  sect,  and  receive  a  new  name,  thoxigh  in  reali- 
ty they  are  the  same  pcopley*  They  have  been  called 
Donatists,  Luciferians,  and  in  the  east,  Paulicians,  where 
they  flourished  in  the  sixth  and  following  centuries,  and  were 
the  Protestants  and  Puritans  imder  the  Greek  church.  In 
the  twelfth  century  the  same  class  of  Christians  were  called 
Waldenses,  and  in  France  they  were  called  Albigenses,  or 
the  pure.  Mr.  Robinson  shows  that  they  were  not  called 
Waldenses  from  Peter  Waldo,  as  has  been  supposed ;  but, 
they  had  that  name,  which  signifies,  Inhabitants  of  the  Val- 
leys, long  before  his  time.  It  was  applied  to  them,  because 
*  Rel.  Enc.  Novatians  and  also  Waldenses. 


CHAPTER  Xir.  117 

being  persecuted,  "  great  numbers  of  them  made  their  res- 
idence in  the  valleys  of  the  Alps  and  of  the  Pyrenees,  where, 
from  age  to  age,  they  found  an  asylum  from  the  tyranny 
of  the  church  of  Rome."  Their  own  historians  confirm  this 
view.  Dr.  Allix,  who  is  one  of  them,  says,  "  For  three 
hundred  years  or  more,  the  bishops  of  Rome  attempted  to 
subjugate  the  church  of  Milan,"  (composed  of  this  people) 
"  and  rather  than  own  their  jurisdiction,  they  retired  to  the 
valleys  of  Lucerne  and  Angrogne,  and  therefore  were  called, 
Vallenses,  Wallences,  or  the  People  of  the  Valleys.'''' 

The  testimony  of  Reinerius,  a  Catholic  inquisitor,  is  so 
important  concerning  this  people,  that  I  here  insert  it. 
"  Of  all  the  sects  which  have  been  or  now  exist,  none  is 
more  injurious  to  the  church  (that  is  of  Rome)  for  three 
reasons:  1.  Because  it  is  more  ancient.  Some  aver  their 
existence  from  the  time  of  Sylvester ;  others  from  the  very 
time  of  the  apostles.  2.  Because  it  is  so  universal.  There 
is  scarcely  any  country  into  which  this  sect  has  not  crept. 
And  3.  Because  all  other  heretics  excite  horror  by  the 
greatness  of  their  blasphemies  against  God ;  but  these  have 
a  great  appearance  of  piety,  as  they  live  justly  before  men, 
believe  rightly  all  things  concerning  God,  and  confess 
all  the  articles  contained  in  the  creed ;  only  they  hate  and 
revile  the  church  of  Rome,  and  in  their  accusations  are 
easily  believed  by  the  people."  '  Such  a  concession  ft-om 
such  a  source,  speaks  volumes.' 

This  must  suffice  to  show  who  those  are,  who  composed 
the  true  church  symbolized  by  the  sun-clad  woman  wear- 
ing a  crown  of  twelve  stars  ;  and  what  was  her  flight  into 
the  wilderness,  and  vrhere  that  wilderness  is.  They  are 
those  who  under  different  names,  and  in  successive  periods 
of  time,  nobly  stood  up  in  support  of  the  trutli,  and  for 
the  original  simplicity  and  purity  of  Christian  worship  in 
opposition  to  all  admixtures  of  Judaism  and  heathenism, 


118  CHAPTER  XII. 

and  all  usurpations  of  ecclesiastical  power  by  the  bishops 
and  metropolitan  churches.  These  tvere  the  (rue  church. 
Its  flight  into  the  wilderness  from  the  face  of  the  serjyent, 
(another  name  of  the  dragon  under  a  Christian  form)  was 
the  retreat  of  these  godly  believers  into  the  mountain 
wilds,  and  northern  countries  of  Europe,  where  it  has  been 
nourished  since  the  rise  of  papacy  in  the  early  part  of  the 
seventh  century,  making  a  period  of  a  thousand,  two  hun- 
dred and  three  score  years, 

7  and  8.  And  there  loas  ivar  in  heaven  :  Michael  and  his 
angels  fought  against  the  dragon  ;  and  the  dragon  fought 
and  his  angels,  and  prevailed-  not  ;  neither  was  their  place 
found  any  more  in  heaven. — Heaven  means  here,  as  in  other 
places,  the  government  or  ruling  power  of  the  empire. 
War  in  heaven  is  the  existence  of  civil  commotions  and 
bloody  encounters  between  parties  in  the  empire.  The 
parties  were  the  Christians  and  the  pagans.  The  leaders 
were  Constantine,  and  successive  Christian  emperors,  with 
the  Christian  magistrates  and  ministers  on  one  side; 
represented  by  Michael  and  liis  angels.  The  leaders  on 
the  other  side  were  the  heathen  emperors,  officers,  and 
priests,  represented  by  the  dragon  and  his  angels.  A  part 
of  this  war  I  have  noticed  in  the  remarks  on  the  fourth 
verse.  Though  Constantine  gave  the  supremacy  to  Chris- 
tianity, the  heathen  portion  of  his  subjects  did  not  read- 
ily succumb ;  and  the  conflict  went  on  through  successive 
reigns,  and  was  renewed  by  Julian  the  apostate,  with  great 
virulence  on  his  accession  to  the  imperial  throne.  But 
his  reign  was  short,  and  his  designs  against  Christianity 
were  frustrated.  His  last  words  were,  "  0  Galilean,  thou 
hast  conquered." 

The  six  emperors  who  succeeded  him,  professed  Chris- 
tianity, but  their  reigns  were  very  brief,  and  heathenism  re- 


CHAPTER  XII.  119 

taincd  a  strong  liold  in  the  empire.  Theodosius  the  Great, 
was  made  emperor  in  the  year  379,  and  "  exerted  himself 
in  the  most  vigorous  and  effectual  manner  in  the  extirpa- 
tion of  the  pagan  superstitions  throughout  all  the  provin- 
ces, and  enacted  severe  laws  and  penalties  against  such  as 
adhered  to  them.  His  sons,  Arcadius  and  Honorius,  pur- 
sued with  zeal,  and  not  without  success,  the  same  end ;  so 
that  toward  the  conclusion  of  the  fourth  century,  the  Gen- 
tile religions  declined  apace,  and  had  also  no  prospect  of 
recovering  their  primitive  authority  and  splendor."*  Thus 
the  dragon  prevailed  not,  neither  luas  their  place  found  any 
more  in  heaven  ;  that  is,  heathenism  had  no  more  control 
or  share  in  the  government  of  the  empire.  To  understand 
this  literally  as  a  war  in  the  celestial  heaven,  or,  as  a  com- 
mentator of  our  own  country  thinks,  "  in  the  upper  regions 
of  the  atmosphere,"  between  the  good  and  had  angels,  is 
entirely  foreign  to  John's  purpose,  and  is  intrinsically  ab- 
surd. Besides,  in  the  song  of  praise  for  this  victory  which 
is  given  in  the  tenth  verse,  these  Christian  combatants  are 
called,  our  brethren,  and  what  is  entirely  decisive  against 
such  a  celestial  fight,  it  is  declared  in  the  eleventh  verse, 
that  '  they  overcame  by  the  blood  of  the  Lamb,  and  by  th»  ivord 
of  their  testimony,  and  they  loved  not  their  lives  unto  the  deaths 
This  is  positive  evidence,  that  this  is  the  conflict  of  the 
church  on  earth  made  successful  by  faith  in  Jesus  Christ 
and  the  doctrines  of  the  cross. 

Further  still,  "  Constantino  himself,  and  others  of  his 
time,  describe  these  events  under  the  same  image  of 
dethroning  the  dragon."  Bishop  Newton  states,  that  "  a 
picture  of  Constantine  was  set  up  over  the  palace  gate, 
with  a  cross  over  his  head  ;  and  imdev  his  feet  the  great 
enemy  of  mankind,  (who  persecuted  the  church  by  means 
of  impious  tyrants)  in  the  form  of  a  dragon,  transfixed 

*  Mosheim,  Vol.  1,  p.  2.59. 


120  CHAPTER  XII. 

with  a  dart  through  the  midst  of  its  body,  and  falling  head- 
long into  the  depths  of  the  sea."  "  This,"  says  Dr.  Scott, 
"  shows  how  Christians  then  understood  the  prophecy  ;  and 
no  doubt  they  rightly  interpreted  it." 

9,  And  the  great  dragon  was  cast  out,  that  old  serpent, 
^alled  the  devil,  and  Satan,  which  deceiveth  the  whole  world  ; 
he  ions  cast  out  into  the  earth,  and  his  angels  vjcre  cast  out 
with  him. — Here  the  four  descriptive  names  of  the  heathen, 
persecuting  Roman  power  are  brought  together,  as  they  are 
again  in  the  second  verse  of  the  twentieth  chapter.  It  is 
called  the  dragon  to  mark  its  paganism.,  the  dragon  being  a 
fabulous  creature  of  the  heathen.  It  is  called  the  old  ser- 
pent fvom  the  fact  asserted,  that  it  deceiveth  tlie 'whole  world, 
and  its  cunning  devices  and  persecuting  opposition  to  Chris- 
tianity. This  heathen  power  is  styled  the  devil,  because  of 
its  fiilse  accusations,  foal  calumny,  and  ceaseless  vitupera- 
tion of  sincere  believers,  by  Avhich  means  vast  numbers  of 
them  were  destroyed.  The  devil  is  a  liar  and  a  murderer 
from  the  beginning.  And  it  is  called  Satan,  which  means 
an  adversary,  because  of  its  unappeasable  hostility  to  Chris- 
tianity. These  titles  are  used  descriptively,  and  as  person- 
ifications of  heathenism  connected  with  a  great  ruling  civil 
power,  viz  :  the  Roman.  And  yet  the  common  idea,  and 
one  which  is  maintained  by  distinguished  writers,  is,  that 
the  great  fallen  angel,  who  is.  known  by  these  names,  who 
deceived  our  first  parents,  and  is  the  god  of  this  world,  is 
what  is  meant  in  these  prophetic  visions.  This  is  making 
it  out  on  the  authority  of  the  inspired  revelator,  that  the 
prince  of  darkness  has  seven  heads  and  ten  horns,  and  a 
tail  so  long  and  so  strong,  that  at  some  time  or  other,  it 
has  swept  dowai  from  their  orbits  a  third  part  of  the  stars 
of  heaven  !  To  such  absurdities  have  good  men  been  car- 
ried by  not  observing,  that  everything  almost  in  this  book 


CHAPTER  XII.  121 

is  symbolical,  and  that  the  first  business  in  obtaining  an 
understanding  of  it,  is  to  interpret  the  symbols. 

The  dragon,  the  emblem  of  heathenism,  as  a  ruling  power 
was  cast  out,  ejected  from  the  heaven  of  government,  and 
thrust  to  the  earth,  degraded  from  all  places  of  influence 
and  power,  and  driven  into  obscurity :  and  "  Ms  angels^'' 
heathen  officers,  priests,  and  philosophers,  shared  the  same 
fate.  This  great  work,  begun  and  carried  far  onward  by 
Constantine,  may  be  considered  as  completed  by  his  suc- 
cessors, as  previously  sho■s^^l. 

To  convince  any  doubting  mind,  that  the  explanation 
now  given  is  correct,  I  will  present  positive  e^ddence  fur- 
nished by  that  very  time,  and  by  Constantine  himself,  on 
coins  and  medals,  which  he  caused  to  be  struck,  I  find  it 
in  a  work  on  the  apocalypse  by  our  countryman,  James 
Winthrop.  '  Constantine  adopted  for  his  emblems  those  of 
Apollo  or  the  sun.  He  issued  a  coin  on  which  was  the 
figure  of  a  zvoman  ivith  xvings  in  a  sitting  posture,  denoting  a 
state  of  rest,  and  the  moon  under  her  feet.  He  also  upon 
a  medal  surrounded  his  own  head  with  the  twelve  signs  of 
the  zodiac.  We  have  also  a  coin  of  his,  on  which  the 
dragon  is  represented  lying  at  the  foot  of  his  new  standard, 
which  was  the  cross.  This  probably  refers  to  the  transla- 
tion of  the  empire  from  heathenism  to  Christianity  in  the 
twentieth  year  of  his  reign,  A.D.  326.'  Tliis  shows  that 
Constantine  and  the  Christians  of  his  day  understood  this 
twelfth  chapter  as  predicting  the  very  scenes  in  which  they 
lived,  and  in  which  they  bore  a  part. 

And  furthermore,  "  Constantine  himself  in  an  epistle  to 
Eusebius  and  other  bishops,  concerning  the  rebuilding  and 
repairing  of  the  churches,  saith  that,  '  Liberty  being  now 
restored,  and  the  dragon  being  now  removed  from  the  ad- 
ministration of  public  aflairs,  by  the  providence  of  the 
6 


122  CHAPTER  XH. 

great  God,  and  by  my  ministry ;  I  esteem  the  great  power 
of  God  to  have  been  made  manifest  to  all.'  " 

10.  And  I  heard  a  loud  voice  saying  in  heaven,  JSfow 
is  come  salvation,  and  strength,  and  the  hingdom  of  our  God, 
and  the  'power  of  his  Christ :  for  the  accuser  of  our  brethren 
is  cast  doivn,  which  accused  them  before  our  God  day  and 
night. — A  song  of  triumph  was  heard  in  the  heaven  of  go- 
vernment, as  the  above  words  of  the  first  Christian  empe- 
ror show,  for  the  suppression  of  heathenism  and  the  victory 
of  Christianity.  It  was  felt  and  declared  by  all  who  were 
friendly  to  the  change,  and  shared  in  the  administration  of 
public  affairs,  that  salvation  had  come  to  the  hitherto  op- 
pressed people  of  God ;  and  strength  had  been  given  to 
them  against  their  enemies  ;  and  that  the  kingdom  or  reign 
of  God  is  come ;  and  the  poiver  of  Christ  has  been  mani- 
fested, the  power  of  his  spirit  and  his  truth  by  which  he 
subdues  mankind  to  himself  The  heathen  priests  and 
people  were  continually,  day  and  night,  accusing  Christians 
of  all  manner  of  crimes,  which  they  had  not  committed,  to 
procure  the  infliction  of  cruel  punishments,  and  to  effect 
their  destruction.  But  now  they  were  cast  down ;  their 
power  and  influence  taken  from  them,  so  that  they  could 
prosecute  this  fiendish  work  no  longer. 

11.  And  they  overcame  him  by  the  blood  of  the  Lamb, 
and  by  the  ivord  of  their  testimoity  ;  and  they  loved  not  their 
lives  unto  the  death. — This  shows  the  manner  in  -which  this 
conquest  was  achieved.  They,  the  believing  brethren  men- 
tioned above,  overcame  their  heathen  enemies  by  a  firm  be- 
lief in  Christ  as  their  Redeemer ;  by  his  truth  wliich  they 
maintained  and  disseminated,  and  by  their  unflinching  ad- 
herence to  his  cause  at  all  hazards,  even  that  of  life.     A 


CHAPTER  XII.  123 

lesson  which  Christians  of  this  age  need  to  learn  and  prac- 
tice. 

12.  Therefore  rejoice,  ye  heavens,  and  ye  that  dwell  in 
them.  Woe  to  the  inhabiters  of  the  earth  and  of  the  sea  ! 
for  the  devilis  come  doicn  unto  you^  having  great  tvraih,  be- 
cause he  knoweth  that  he  hath  but  a  short  time. — For  this 
glorious  victory,  let  all  the  governments  in  all  the  provin- 
ces of  the  empire,  and  all  connected  with  them  in  the  ad- 
ministration of  public  affairs,  rejoice,  and  give  thanks  to 
God. 

Immediately  following  this  exhortation  to  rejoice,  is  the 
utterance  of  a  u'oe,  which  seems  very  strange,  but  is  fully 
illustrated  by  the  facts  of  history ;  and  we  see  in  all  this, 
how  precisely  the  secrets  of  great  events  are  foreshoAvn  in 
these  visions.  The  heathen  priests,  officers  and  people, 
seeing  the  worship  of  their  gods  forbidden,  and  themselves 
deprived  of  office  and  influence,  were  extremely  exasper- 
ated, and  made  desperate  attempts  to  regain  their  ascend- 
ency. When  the  Goths  and  other  warlike  nations  of  the 
north  invaded  the  empire,  the  pagans  instigated  them  to 
treat  with  severity  and  violence  the  followers  of  Christ ;  and 
they  improved  every  opportunity  of  exciting  against  them 
the  hatred  of  those  fierce  invaders.  Everywhere  too,  they 
represented  that  these  calamities  under  which  the  empire 
was  suffisring,  were  all  owing  to  the  introduction  of  Chris- 
tianity, and  were  expressions  of  indignation  of  the  gods, 
whose  worship  had  been  prohibited.  Gibbon  says,  "The 
surprise  of  the  pagans  was  soon  succeeded  by  resentment ; 
and  the  most  pious  of  men  were  exposed  to  the  unjust  but 
dangerous  imputation  of  impiety.  Malice  and  prejudice 
concurred  in  representing  the  Christians  as  a  society  of 
atheists,  who  by  a  most  daring  attack  on  the  religious  con- 
stitution of  the  empire,  had  merited  the  severest    animad- 


124  CHAPTER  XII. 

version  of  tlie  civil  magistrate.  They  were  described  as 
the  most  wicked  of  mankind."  Thus  the  demon  of  pagan- 
ism came  down  with  great  wrath,  and  the  more  so,  because 
he  perceived  that  his  time  was  short.  The  inhabitants  of 
the  Roman  earth  and  those  upon  the  islands  of  the  sea,  were 
those  to  whom  this  woe  particularly  referred. 

13.  And  token  the  dragon  saw  tlait  he  urns  cast  unto  the 
earth,  he  j)crsecuted  the  tuoman  ivhlch  hr  ought  forth  the  man- 
child. — ^This  casting  down  of  the  dragon  from  influence  and 
power,  with  no  prospect  of  regaining  it,  caused  him  to 
adopt  other  methods  of  persecuting  the  church  which  are 
disclosed  in  the  following  chapters. 

14.  And  to  the  woman  were  given  two  wings  of  a  great 
eagle,  that  she  might  Jig  into  the  wilderness,  into  her  place, 
tvhere  she  is  nourished  for  a  time,  and  times,  and  a  half  a 
time,  from  the  face  of  the  serpent. — This  flight  of  the  woman 
is  probablj^  the  same  as  that  mentioned  in  the  sixth  verse, 
and  the  time  of  her  continuance  in  the  wilderness  is  the 
same,  though  stated  in  a  different  manner.  A  ti7ne  is  one 
year,  times  are  two  years,  and  the  half  time  is  half  a  year, 
making  in  all  three  years  and  a  half  In  prophetic  reckon- 
ing these  comprise  twelve  hundred  and  sixty  days.  See  the 
explanation  given  above,  of  the  sixth  verse. 

15.  And  the  serj)ent  cast  out  of  his  mouth  water  as  a 
flood  after  the  tvornan,  that  he  tnight  cause  her  to  be  carried 
awag  of  the  food. — A  food  is  used  figuratively  by  the  an- 
cient prophets  to  signify  the  invasion  of  a  country  by 
numerous  armies.  Thus  in  Isa.  8  :  7,  it  is  written.  The 
Lord  bringeth  upon  them  the  waters  of  tlie  river,  strong 
and  many,  even  the  king  of  Assyria  and  all  his  glory. 
Also  28  :  2.     In  Jer.  46  :  7,  8,  it  is  asked.    Who  is  this 


CHAPTER  XII.  125 

that  cometh  up  as  a  flood,  &c.  1  The  flood  poured  out  to 
sweep  away  the  woman,  was  probably  the  invasion  of  the 
empire  by  the  Goths,  Stievi,  Alans,  and  Vandals,  who 
poured  down  upon  the  southern  provinces  from  the  north 
like  an  overflowing  flood.  They  were  pagans  and  were 
encouraged  to  make  this  invasion  by  the  pagans  in  the  em- 
pire, with  the  intention  thus  of  destroying  the  predominant 
influence  of  the  church.  How  true  to  fact  is  John's  sym- 
bolic representation  ! 

16.  And  the  earth  helped  the  woman:  and  the  earth 
opened  her  mouth,  and  sivallowed  tip  the  flood  lohich  the  dra- 
gon cast  out  of  his  mouth. — The  earth  sometimes  means 
a  territorial  domain,  and  sometimes  the  common  people. 
The  flood,  which  was  the  northern  hordes,  was  sivalloived 
up  by  the  earth.  Those  barbarians  instead  of  overrunning 
the  countries,  and  then  retiring  to  their  native  land  with 
the  spoils  of  conquest,  as  invaders  usually  do,  settled 
down  and  became  absorbed  in  the  mass  of  the  population. 
And  instead  of  continuing  pagans,  and  helping  to  destroy 
Christianity,  they  embraced  it,  and  seemed  proud  of  adopt- 
ing the  laws,  manners,  and  usages  of  the  Romans.  Gib- 
bon says,  '  that  the  warlike  barbarians  of  Scythia  and 
Germany,  embraced  the  religion  of  the  Romans.'  Pie 
adds :  "  During  the  same  period,  Christianity  was  em- 
braced by  almost  all  the  barbarians  who  established  their 
kingdoms  on  the  ruins  of  the  western  empire ;  the  Bur- 
gundians  in  Gaul,  the  Suevi  in  Spain,  the  Vandals  in  Africa, 
the  Ostrogoths  in  Pannonia,  and  the  various  bands  of  mer- 
cenaries who  raised  Odoacer  to  the  throne  of  Italy."  Mo- 
sheim  gives  the  same  testimony  to  this  fact.  Thus  did  the 
earth  help  the  woman,  the  church,  by  swallowing  up  the 
flood,  which  was  poured  out  by  the  dragon  to  sweep  her 
away. 


126  CHAPTER  XIII. 

17.  And  the  dragon  zvasturoth  with  the  wo7nan,  and  went 
to  make  war  with  the  remnant  of  her  seed,  which  keep  the 
commandments  of  Ood,  and  have  the  testimony  of  Jesus 
Christ. — Foiled  in  this  endeavor  to  destroy  the  church  by 
the  force  qf  heathenism,  he  goes  to  vent  his  enmity  in  an- 
other manner  against  the  believing  and  obedient  followers 
of  Christ.  He  laid  aside  his  pagan  character,  and  assumed 
the  Christian.  He  enters  the  church,  becomes  mighty  zeal- 
ous to  increase  its  splendor  and  resources,  to  multiply  its 
privileges,  and  extend  its  boundaries.  He  goes  to  work  to 
corrupt  its  worship,  to  destroy  its  spirituality,  and  make  it 
a  worldly  church,  or  rather,  no  church  at  all.  In  other 
words,  he  sets  about  rearing  up  within  itself  the  great  pa- 
pal Antichrist,  whose  rise,  dominion,  despotism,  bloody 
persecution,  and  final  destruction,  are  the  prophetic  burden 
of  the  following  chapters  to  the  twentieth. 


CHAPTER   XIII. 

The    Roman    Government  as  professedly  Christian. 
Rise  of  Papacy. 

■  1.  And  I  stood  upon  the  sand  of  the  sea,  and  saiv  a  beast 
rise  up  out  of  the  sea,  having  seven  heads  and  ten  horns,  and 
upon  his  h'orns  ten  croivns,  and  upon  his  heads  the  name  of 
hlasjihemy. — A  dragon  is  a  fabulous  creature,  a  fiction  of 
the  heathen,  worshiped  by  the  heathen,  and  therefore  a 
suitable  symbol  of  heathenism,  or  of  the  pagan  Roman 
etnpire,  as  in  the  preceding  chapter.  The  wild  beast  de. 
scribed  in  this  chapter,  is  the  same  empire,  as  Christian  ; 
but  though  nominally  Christian,  a  persecuting  power,  re- 


CHAPTER  XIII.  127 

taiuing  many  of  its  former  traits,  The  seven  heads  of  the 
great  red  dragon  had  on  them  seven  crowns,  indicating 
seven  forms  of  government  under  which  the  empire  exist- 
ed. The  beast  has  seven  heads,  and  instead  of  seven 
crowns,  he  has  on  them  the  name  of  blasphemy ;  showing 
that  Rome  itself  is  meant,  being  built  on  seven  hills.  This 
explanation  is  given  by  John  in  the  seventeenth  chapter, 
where  Rome,  as  the  seat  of  papacy,  is  represented  by  a 
lewd  woman,  sitting  on  a  scarlet  colored  beast,  which  had 
seven  heads  and  ten  horns.  The  seven  heads  are  declared 
to  be  '•''seven  mountains  on  which  the  tooman  sitteth.^^  An- 
other difterence  in  the  two  descriptions,  showing  the  appro- 
priateness of  each,  is,  that  the  ten  horns  of  the  pagan  dra- 
gon have  no  crowns  ;  but  the  ten  horns  of  the  papal  beast 
have  crowns  ;  showing  the  fact  that  at  one  period  there  were 
ten  provinces,  and  that  afterward,  they  became  separate 
kingdoms,  still  retaining  a  sort  of  connection  with  the  em- 
pire. Upon  the  seven  heads  of  the  beast  was  the  name  of 
blasphemy.  Rome  assumed  the  name  of  '  Eternal  City,' 
'  the  Goddess  of  the  Earth,'  and  was,  and  is,  the  great 
center  of  heathenized  Christianity. 

Jolm  seemed  to  himself  to  be  standing  on  the  shore  and 
saw  this  beast  rise  up  out  of  the  sea,  signifying,  that  this 
state  of  the  empire  was  to  come  into  being  out  of  great 
commotions  and  changes,  of  which  the  sea  is  an  emblem. 

2.  And  the  beast  tohich  I  saio  was  like  unto  a  leopard, 
and  his  feet  toere  as  the  feet  of  a  bear,  and  his  mouth  as  the 
mouth  of  a  lion  :  and  the  dragon  gave  him  his  power,  and 
his  seat,  and  great  authority. — In  this  verse  we  have  the 
complex  character  of  the  empire.  Daniel  saw  four  beasts 
rise  from  the  sea,  the  first  was  like  a  lion,  representing  the 
Chaldean  empire ;  the  second  was  like  a  bear,  emblematic 
of  the  Medo-Persian ;  the  third  v/as  like  a  leopard,  em- 


128  CHAPTER  XIII. 

blematic  of  the  Grecian  ;  the  fourth  was  dreadful  and  terri- 
ble, and  exceedingly  strong,  and  had  ten  horns.  This  was 
the  Roman.  John  attributes  the  distinguishing  properties 
of  the  first  three  to  the  Roman  wild  heast  which  arose  out 
of  the  sea. 

Furthermore,  the  dragon  gave  the  beast  his  power,  and 
seat,  and  great  authority, — transferred  it  to  him ;  by  which 
we  are  to  understand,  that  the  empire  after  it  became  pro- 
fessedly Christian,  retained  the  same  despotic,  cruel,  perse- 
cuting character,  and  the  same  center  or  capital,  and  the 
same  pretensions  to  universal  rule,  as  when  it  was  heathen. 
Instead  of  the  old  idolatry  of  gods  and  goddesses,  a  new 
idolatry  was  introduced,  equally  gross,  and  more  abomina- 
ble, viz  :  the  worship  of  images,  crucifixes,  relics,  saints, 
and  the  virgin  Mary.  The  devil  still  kept  alive  the  spirit 
of  heathenism,  only  changing  the  objects  to  be  venerated 
and  worshiped.  The  design  of  this  amazing  corruption  of 
Christianity  was  to  conciliate  the  heathen  and  make  them 
pleased  with  what  w\as  presented  to  them  as  the  religion  of 
the  gospel. 

3.  And  I  saw  one  of  his  heads  as  it  tvere  wovnded  to 
death ;  and  his  deadly  loound  was  healed:  and  all  the  world 
wondered  after  the  beast. — The  heads  mentioned  in  this  verse 
are  the  seven  on  which  were  crowns,  meaning  the  seven 
forms  of  government  under  which  the  empire  had  existed. 
Five  of  these  had  passed  away  when  John  wrote  this  book, 
viz. :  the  monarchical,  the  consular,  the  dictatorship,  the  de- 
cemvirate,  and  the  military  tribune.  The  sixth  was  the  im- 
perial, or  that  of  the  Ctesars,  which  was  in  existence  in  the  time 
of  Christ  and  the  apostles.  It  was  the  sixth  which  received 
the  deadly  wound.  This  was  inflicted  by  Odoacer,  king  of 
the  Heruli,  and  by  Theodoric,  king  of  the  Ostrogoths,  who 
soon  conquered  Odoacer,  and  established  the  kingdom  of 


CHAPTER  XIII.  129 

the  Ostrogoths  in  Italy,  which,  as  we  are  informed  in  the 
seventeenth  chapter,  '  would  continue  but  a  short  space.''  It 
continued  about  eighty  years.  Augustulus,  the  last  empe- 
ror, abdicated  the  throne,  and  Odoacer  assumed  the  title  of 
king  of  all  Italy,  and  extinguished  the  title  of  emperor  of 
the  west.  This  was  the  fall  of  the  western  Roman  empire, 
the  vjounding  to  death  of  the  sixth  head  or  form  of  govern- 
ment about  the  year  476. 

His  deadly  ivound  was  healed.  In  A.D.  754  Pepin,  king 
of  France,  marched  into  Italy,  defeated  the  Lombard  king, 
and  obliged  him  to  deliver  up  to  the  See  of  Eome,  the 
Exarchate  of  Ravenna,  Pentapolis,  and  all  he  had  seized, 
and  this  it  was  which  made  the  bishop  of  Rome  a  temporal 
prince.  In  774  Charlemagne,  son  of  Pepin,  at  the  solicita- 
tion of  Pope  Adrian  I,  crossed  the  Alps  with  a  great  army, 
overturned  the  empire  of  the  Lombards,  confirmed  the 
grant  of  his  father  to  the  pontiff,  and  added  to  it  several 
cities  and  provinces  in  Italy.  To  reward  him  for  this,  the 
pontift  gave  him  the  name  of  Charlemagne,  or  Charles  the 
Great,  and  acknowledged  him  emperor  of  Rome  and  the 
west.  Thus,  the  deadly  wound  was  healed,  the  imperial  form 
of  government  was  restored.  The  civil  and  ecclesiastical 
power  was  united  in  the  pope,  and  the  Roman  government 
became  formidable  again  ;  and  all  the  world,  that  is,  all 
the  people  of  the  land,  wondered  after  the  beast,  were  as- 
tonished at  the  revival  of  the  empire,  which  had  for  three 
hiuidred  years  been  in  a  fallen  condition. 

4.  And  they  tnorshiped  the  dragon  ivhich  gave  poiver  unto 
the  beast  :  and  they  ivorshiped  the  beast,  saying,  Who  is  like 
unto  the  beast  ?  who  is  able  to  make  war  ivith  him  ? — The 
people  regarded  with  superstitious  reverence  the  pagan 
power,  which  had  been  transferred  to  the  papal  government ; 
and  they  bowed  with  deferenc-e  to  this  newly  revived  im- 


130  CHAPTER  XIII. 

perial  authority,  which  was  thus  enlisted  iu  the  support  of 
the  temporal  and  spiritual  power  of  Rome. 

5  and  6.  And  (here  loas  given  unto  him  a  mouth  speak- 
ing great  things,  and  blasphemies:  and  power  was  given 
unto  him  to  continue  fortg  and  two  months.  And  he  opened 
his  mouth  in  blasphemy  against  God,  to  blaspheme  Ids  name^ 
and  his  tabernacle,  and  them  that  dwell  in  heaven. — From 
this  time  the  influence  of  the  pope  and  the  Romish  church 
became  the  moving  spring  of  the  civil  government,  so  that 
its  enactments  and  operations  were  either  dictated  by  that 
lordly  pontiff',  or  in  accordance  with  his  wishes.  The  beast 
was  permitted  to  arrogate  to  itself  pompous  titles,  to  make 
high  pretensions  to  universal  dominion,  and  to  issue  cruel 
and  despotic  edicts  against  its  opponents. 

Blasphemy  against  God  is  the  utterance  of  impious  lan- 
guage concerning  him,  or  attributing  to  him  purpose  s  and 
acts  which  are  dishonorable  to  him.  It  is  speaking 
reproachfully  and  calumniously  of  him,  or  of  other  objects 
and  persons. 

The  unjust  and  murderous  edicts  issued  against  Chris- 
tians 'in  thenameof  God,' and  by  the  'grace  of  God,'  mak- 
ing him  as  it  were  the  indorser  and  approver  of  those 
wicked  acts,  and  the  assumption  of  sacred  titles  and  epi- 
thets, sufficiently  illustrate  the  correctness  of  this  prophetic 
description.  The  tabernacle  of  God  was  also  blasphemed. 
The  church  is  the  house  or  temple  in  which  God  dwells  ; 
and  this  has  been  blasphemed,  by  the  false  accusations, 
denunciations,  and  excomunications  of  all  who  do  not  sub- 
mit to  the  domination  of  this  papal  beast,  and  those  espe- 
cially who  resist  his  usurpations  and  stand  up  in  support 
of  a  pure  religion.  To  this  day  they  are  branded  with  the 
name  of  heretics ;  religious  intercourse  Avith  them  is  scru- 


CHAPTER  XIII.  131 

puloiisly  avoided,  and  it  is  denied  that  their  churches  are 
the  churches  of  Christ. 

Those  who  dwell  in  heaven  are  subjected  to  the  same 
calumny  and  abuse.  By  mistaking  the  meaning  of  the 
term,  heaven,  as  John  uses  it,  interpreters  have  considered 
this  as  referring  to  the  angels  and  glorified  saints.  But, 
how  they  have  been  blasphemed  by  being  unduly  honored, 
is  difficult  to  show.  The  feet  is,  that  John  is  not  discoursing 
about  the  celestial  world,  but  is  predicting  events  pertain- 
ing to  the  church  in  this  world.  The  term  heaven  is  used 
figuratively  to  signify  either  the  civil  or  ecclesiastical 
government;  and  those  who  dwell  in  heaven  are  the 
permanent  officers  of  the  government  or  of  the  church. 
When  it  is  considered  what  condemnatory  edicts  have  been 
issued,  what  vast  numbers  have  been  deposed  from  office 
and  influence,  deprived  of  their  rights,  and  shut  up  in  pris- 
on ;  what  wars  and  massacres  have  been  occasioned  by  the 
papal  beast  against  those  who  abjured  its  sentiments,  and 
resisted  its  usurpations,  whether  in  the  church  or  the  state, 
we  can  perceive  the  force  of  the  expression  under  consider- 
ation. 

7.  And  it  was  given  unto  him  to  make  toar  rvith  the 
saitits,  and  to  overcome  them  :  and  2iower  was  given  Mm  over 
all  kindreds,  and  tongues,  and  nations. — ^The  papal  beast,  or 
Latin  empire  has  made  war  against  the  saints  for  many 
centuries,  and  the  number  of  its  victims  has  swelled  to  an 
appalling  amount.  Llede  estimates  "  from  good  authori- 
ties, that  in  the  war  with  the  Albigenscs  and  Waldenses, 
there  perished  in  France  alone  a  million.  From  the  first 
institution  of  the  Jesuits  to  the  year  1.580,  a  little  more 
than  30  years,  nine  hundred  thousand  orthodox  Christians 
were  slain  by  the  common  executioner.  In  the  space  of 
about  thirty  years  the  inquisition  destroyed,  by  various 


132  CHAPTER  XIII. 

kinds  of  torture,  a  hundred  and  fifty  thousand  Chiistians. 
Sanders  himself  confesses  that  an  innumerable  multitude 
of  Lollards  and  Sacramentarians  were  burnt  throughout 
all  Europe,  not,  as  he  says,  by  the  pope  and  bishops,  but 
by  the  civil  magistrates."  The  controlling  power  of  the 
beast  extended  over  all  the  nations  which  composed  the 
empire,  i.e.,  the  whole  Christian  world. 

8.  And  all  that  dwell  upon  the  earth  shall  worship  him, 
whose  names  are  not  written  in  the  book  of  life  of  the  Lamb 
slain  from  the  foutidatio7i  of  the  world. — All  who  dwell 
in  the  territories  of  the  empire,  will  come  into  subjection 
to  tliis  secular  beast,  animated  by  the  spirit  of  papacy : — 
all  whose  names  as  true  believers,  are  not  enrolled  in  the 
Lamb's  book  of  life,  Tliis  shows  clearly  what  is  the 
character  of  those  Avho  revere  and  uphold  the  idolatrous 
system  of  papacy. 

9.  If  any  man  have  an  ear,  let  him  hear. — Let  every 
reader  carefully  attend  to  these  thmgs. 

10.  He  that  leadeth  into  captivity,  shall  go  into  captivity  : 
he  that  killeth  with  the  stvord,  7m(st  be  killed  with  the  sioord. 
Here  is  the  patience  and  the  faith  of  the  saints. — A  righteous 
retribution  is  foreshown,  which  will  be  similar  in  its  nature 
to  the  evils  which  this  murderous  power  has  inflicted  on 
others.  It  will  be  sulijected  to  a  state  of  captivity,  and  be 
destroyed  by  the  sword.  Through  all  these  long-continued 
troubles,  the  patience  and  faith  of  the  saints  would  be 
greatly  tried,  and  gloriously  manifested.  Truly  thus  it 
has  been. 

11.  And  I  beheld  another  beast  cominri  up  out  of  the 
earth  ;  and  he  had  two  horns  like  a  lamb,  and  he  spake  as  a 


CHAPTER  XIII.  133 

dragon. — Here  is  presented  still  another  beast,  which  is 
the  Roman  hierarchy  itself.  Instead  of  rising  from  the  sea 
of  civil  war  and  commotion,  it  comes  up  out  of  the  earth, — 
it  grows  out  of  the  ignorance  and  superstition  of  the  com- 
mon people,  gradually  and  almost  imperceptibly.  It  has 
two  horns  like  a  lamb.  A  horn  is  an  emblem  of  power. 
Some  have  considered  these  two  horns  to  be  the  regular 
and  secular  clergy;  but  this  seems  to  me  to  be  a  distinc- 
tion of  too  small  importance.  Daubuz  explains  the  two 
horns  as  meaning  "  the  successive  lines  of  the  bishops  of 
Rome  and  Constantinople."  But  the  apostle  is  evidently 
speaking  of  one  ecclesiastical  power,  and  not  of  two  separate 
and  distinct,  as  are  the  Roman  and  Greek  hierarchies.  I 
prefer  therefore,  to  consider  the  two  horns  as  the  civil  and 
ecclesiastical  authority  united  in  the  pope. 

This  beast  appeared  like  a  lamb,  in  reference  to  Christ, 
the  Lamb  of  God,  meek  and  mild.  The  pope  assumes  that 
he  is  the  vicar,  or  representative  of  Christ,  the  head  of  the 
church,  the  bishop  of  the  faithful.  But  his  character  and 
his  acts  give  the  lie  to  these  pretensions :  For  he  speaks 
like  a  dragon.  His  claims  to  universal  authority,  his  im- 
perious commands,  his  denunciations,  and  decrees,  manifest 
all  the  tyranny  and  cruelty  of  the  persecuting  heathen  em- 
perors. Indeed,  papacy  is  little  else  than  Christianized 
heathenism. 

12.  And  he  exerciseth  all  the  potoer  of  the  first  Least 
before  hiin,  and  causeth  the  earth,  and  them  %vhich  dwell 
therein,  to  worship  the  first  beast,  ivhose  deadly  tvound  was 
healed. — The  papal  hierarchy  exercises  all  the  power  of  the 
first  beast,  the  secular  Latin  empire.  At  first  the  ecclesias- 
tical authority  w^as  subject  to  the  civil, — but,  by  a  gradual 
process,  the  authority  of  the  pope  became  supreme.     He  is 


134  CHAPTER  XIII. 

both  a,  temporal  and  spiritual  prince,  and  has  claimed  the 
right  of  dominion  over  all  Christian  sovereigns. 

He  causes  the  people  of  the  Latin  empire  to  submit  to 
and  reverence  the  civil,  imperial  power,  which  was  over- 
thrown and  afterward  revived  in  the  person  of  Charle- 
magne. Here  we  see  the  first  and  second  beast  exercising 
dominion  together  over  the  same  earth  or  territory ;  one  is 
the  secular,  the  other  the  spiritual  power,  clearly  showing, 
that  these  are  the  two  horns.  These  being  on  the  head  of 
the  second  beast,  exhibits  the  fact,  that  the  spiritual  power 
became  supreme ;  or  rather,  that  both  were  exercised  by  the 
hierarchy.  This  is  done  before  the  first  beast,  i.e.,  in  his 
jjresence. 

13.  And  he  doeth  great  loonders,  so  that  he  maketh  fire 
come  down  from  heaven  on  the  earth  in  the  sight  of  men. — 
These  wonders  or  proofs  of  the  great  power  and  sanctity 
of  the  papal  church,  are  numberless  fictitious  miracles, 
which  have  been,  and  still  are  exhibited  by  the  priests ; 
the  claim  to  the  power  of  forgiving  sins,  granting  indul- 
gences, sending  to  pui'gatory,  or  releasing  from  it ;  and 
those  successful  methods  of  making  people  believe  the 
most  absurd  legends,  and  naked  falsehoods,  even  that  the 
wafer  is  changed  into  the  real  body  of  Christ. 

He  maketh  fire  come  down  from  heaven,  i.e.,  from  the 
civil  government  on  the  peo|:)le  of  the  land,  who  dare  to 
resist  his  authority  and  reject  his  false  doctrines.  Fire  is 
often  used  in  scripture  to  signify  the  anger  or  indignation 
of  God  or  men,  which  destroys  those  who  are  the  subjects 
of  it.  Here  it  means  church  censures,  bulls  of  excommuni- 
cation, and  damnatory  sentences.  The  ecclesiastical  courts 
try  the  cases  of  alleged  heresy,  and  pass  sentence,  but  the 
civil  magistrates  must  execute  it.  He  makes  the  consum- 
ing fire  come  down  from  heaven,  by  compelling  the  civil 


CHAPTER  XIII.  135 

authority  to  put  to  death  those  whom  he  condemns.  This  is 
done  in  the  sicf^lit  of  men  ;  i.e.,  these  censures,  excommunica- 
tions, and  sentences  are  read  in  all  the  churches,  and  the 
greatest  publicity  given  to  the  whole  matter. 

14.  And  deceiveth  them  that  dwell  on  the  earth  by  the 
means  of  those  tnirades  tvhich  he  had  power  to  do  in  the 
sight  of  the  beast.,  saying  to  them  that  dwell  on  the  earth, 
that  they  should  make  an  image  to  the  beast,  tvhich  had  the 
zvound  by  a  sword,  and  did  live. — The  first  beast  represents 
the  civil  authority  or  ruling  power  of  the  Latin  empire. 
To  make  an  image  of  him  is  to  invest  another  with  that 
power.  The  peoj^le  were  persuaded  to  confer  that  power  on 
the  pope,  to  invest  him  with  imperial  authority.  The  pope 
was  made  a  temporal  prince, — he  exercises  the  power  of 
an  emperor, — levies  taxes,  raises  armies,  makes  war,  nego- 
tiates treaties,  and  does  all  other  acts  of  a  civil  rviler.  The 
deceived  people  have  thus  been  induced  to  make  an  image 
of  the  secular  beast,  or  to  consent  to  the  doing  of  it. 

15.  And  he  had  j^oiver  to  give  life  unto  the  image  of  the 
beast,  that  the  image  of  the  beast  should  both  speak,  and  cause 
that  as  many  as  would  not  tvorshi})  the  image  of  the  beast 
should  be  killed. — ^The  papacy  had  power  to  give  life  to  this 
image  of  imperial  authority,  that  is,  to  impart  life  and  effi- 
ciency to  it,  so  that  it  should  actually  exert  civil  authority, 
and  not  be  a  dumb  and  lifeless  image,  incapable  of  doing 
anything.  It  should  speak, — give  forth  proclamations,  in- 
terdicts, and  commands;  and  also  cause  all  who  would  not 
submit  to  and  reverence  this  usurped  authority  to  be  put  to 
death.  In  the  thirteenth  century,  says  Dr.  Mosheim,  "the 
popes  inculcated  that  pernicious  naaxim,  that  the  bishop  of 
Rome  is  the  siqveme  lord  of  the  universe  ;  and  that  neither 
princes  nor  bishops,  civil  governors  nor  ecclesiastical  rulers, 


136  CHAPTER  XIII. 

have  any  lawful  power  in  cliurch  or  state  but  what  they  de- 
rive from  him."  He  has  dethroned  sovereigns,  disposed  of 
crowns,  absolved  subjects  from  obedience  due,  and  laid 
kingdoms  under  interdicts.  Indeed  the  tyranny  of  the 
papal  hierarchy  has  been  fully  equal  to  that  of  its  imperial 
prototype. 

16  and  17.  And  he  caused  all,  both  small  and  great, 
rich  and  poor,  free  and  bond,  to  receive  a  mark  in  their  right 
hand,  or  in  their  foreheads  ;  and  that  no  man  might  buy  or 
sell,  save  he  that  had  the  mark,  or  the  name  of  the  beast,  or 
the  number  of  his  name. — In  the  fourteenth  chapter  we  are 
informed  that  this  mark  is  the  mark  of  his  name, — the  name 
of  the  beast.  'That  name  is  the  Latin  etnpire ; — the 
mark  of  his  name  must  then  be  the  Latin  ivorshi'p  ;  for  this 
reason,  that  it  is  the  two-horned  beast,  the  papacy,  which 
causes  all  descriptions  of  persons  to  receive  it.'  '  The  Latin 
worship  is  the  universal  badge  of  distinction  of  the  Latin 
church  from  all  other  churches  on  the  face  of  the  earth  ;'  and 
is  therefore  an  infallible  mark  by  which  a  genuine  papist 
can  be  distinguished  from  all  the  rest  of  mankind. 

This  mark  is  received  in  the  right  hand  or  on  \\\q  fore- 
head. The  right  hand  is  a  phrase  used  in  the  sacred  scrip- 
tures to  signify  physical  strength  or  power.  To  leceive  the 
mark  of  the  beast  in  the  right  hand,  means  then,  that  the 
persons,  who  receive  it,  are  imder  obligations  to  employ  all 
their  mental  and  physical  powers  to  uphold  and  extend  the 
Latin  worship, — in  other  words,  the  Latin  church. — The 
mark  on  the  forehead  signifies  an  open  profession  of  the 
Latin  faith  and  worship.  '  Some  may  make  such  a  profes- 
sion, who  do  not  devote  themselves  actively  to  promote 
the  papal  cause,  hence  the  propriety  of  the  expression,  re- 
ceiving the  mark  in  the  right  hand  or  on  the  forehead.' 

In  papal  countries  Avithout  this  mark  of  lidelity  to  the 


CHAPTER  XIII.  137 

papal  cluirch,  a  man  is  not  allowed  to  buy  or  sell,  or  have 
the  common  privileges  of  a  citizen.  "  So  the  canon  of  the 
council  of  Lateran,  made  against  the  Waldenscs  and  Albi- 
genses,  enjoins  upon  pain  of  anathema,  that  no  man  pre- 
sume to  entertain  or  cherish  them  in  his  house  or  land,  or 
exercise  traffic  with  them."  The  Synod  of  Tours  in  France 
made  a  similar  enactment.  "  In  the  tenth  and  eleventh 
centuries,  the  severity  against  the  excommunicated  was 
carried  to  such  a  pitch,  that  nobody  might  come  near  them, 
not  even  their  wives,  children,  or  servants;  they  forfeited 
all  their  legal  rights  and  privileges,  and  were  excluded  from 
all  kinds  of  offices." 

A  critical  writer,  quoted  by  Dr.  Clarke,  has  shown,  that 
the  7iame  of  the  beast  is  "  The  Latin  Kingdom,"  and  that 
this  is  applied  in  this  place  to  the  secular  power.  The 
number  of  his  name  is  also  "The  Latin  Kingdom,"  and  is 
intended  here  for  the  papacy  itself  or  the  spiritual  power. 

18.  Here  is  ivisdom.  "Let  him  who  hath  a  mind  for 
investigations  of  this  kind  find  out  a  kingdom  which  con- 
tains precisely  the  number  666  ;  for  this  must  be  infallibly 
the  name  of  the  beast."  Before  figures  were  invented, 
numbers  were  written  with  the  letters  of  the  alphabet. 
Now  the  Greek  letters  which  form  the  words,  E  La  tine 
Basileia, — The  Latin  Kingdom,  make  just  the  mmiber  666. 
Letters  and  figures  may  be  combined  to  a  great  extent ;  but 
no  other  name  of  a  kingdom  can  be  found,  that  contains  in 
the  aggregate  of  its  numerical  letters,  the  number  666. 


138  CHAPTER  XIV. 


H  = 


A 

=  30 

a 

=     1 

r 

=300 

( 

=  10 

1' 

=  50 

V 

=     8 

B 

=     2 

u 

=     1 

0- 

=■200 

1 

=   10 

X 

=  30 

t 

=     5 

1 

=  10 

a 

=     1 

666 


CHAPTER    XIV. 

The   Reformation. 

The  prediction  concerning  the  papal  civil  power  and  the 
papal  ecclesiastical  power  in  the  former  chapter,  is  followed 
with  a  prophetic  announcement  of  the  Reformation  and  the 
fall  of  that  hierarchy. 

1.  And  I  looked,  and,  lo,  a  Lamb  stood  on  the  mount 
Sion,  and  zvith  him  an  hundred  forti/  and  four  thousand, 
having  his  Father''s  name  written  in  their  foreheads. — In 
continuation  of  the  visionary  representation,  John  saw  a 
Lamb,  the  emblem  of  Christ,  standing  on  JNIount  Zion,  an 
eminence  in  Jerusalem,  captured  and  fortified  by  David, 
indicating  here,  that  the  church  was  to  take  an  elevated 


CHAPTER  XIV.  139 

position,  and  be  defended  by  the  power  of  its  king.  "VVith 
him,  as  his  believing  people,  ■was  a  company  consisting  of 
an  hundred  and  forty  and  four  thousand  persons,  being 
a  definite  number  used  for  an  indefinite.  This  number 
may  have  a  reference  to  the  twelve  patriarchs  and  the 
twelve  apostles.  Clarke  understands  this  company  to  be 
"  those  who  were  converted  to  Christianity  from  among 
the  Jews."  But,  John  has  advanced  many  centuries  in 
his  prophetic  course  from  the  apostolic  period  of  Chris- 
tianity. They  are  those  true-hearted  believers,  who  came 
out  from  that  corrupt  and  blasphemous  commimity  just 
described,  and  took  an  elevated  stand  with  Christ  on  the 
Mount  Zion  of  pure  Christianity.  See  Heb.  12  :  22. 
They  were  distinguished  by  having  the  name  of  the  Father 
"written  on  their  foreheads,  which  is  a  figurative  expression 
signifying  a  moral  resemblance  to  him,  and  an  open  ac- 
knowledgment of  their  relation  to  him  as  his  people.  As 
the  followers  of  the  papal  beast  had  his  mark  in  their  right 
hands  and  in  their  foreheads  ;  so  the  followers  of  the  Lamb 
have  their  distinctive  mark,  and  openly  declare  that  they 
are  his. 

2.  And  I  heard  a  voice  from  heaven,  as  the  voice  ofmamj 
wafers,  and  as  the  voice  of  a  great  thunder  ;  and  I  heard  the 
voice  of  harpers  harinng  with  their  har2)S. — A  voice  from 
heaven  in  a  civil  sense  is  the  proclamation  of  the  will  of 
the  government ; — in  an  ecclesiastical  sense,  it  is  the  publi- 
cation by  the  church  of  the  will  of  the  Lord, — the  promul- 
gation of  his  truth.  This  voice  being  like  the  sound  of 
many  waters,  and  of  a  great  thunder,  signifies,  that  at  the 
period  referred  to,  which  as  I  think,  is  that  of  the  great 
Reformation,  there  Avould  be  a  bold,  awakening,  and  exten- 
sive promulgation  of  the  truths  of  the  gospel.  The  preaching 
of  the  reformers  aroused  all  Europe ;  astonished,  convinced, 


140  CHAPTER  XIV. 

and  led  to  Christ  great  multitudes,  and  excited  the  perse- 
cuting rage  of  the  papal  hierarchy.  John  the  Baptist  called 
himself  the  voice  of  one  crying  in  the  tvilderness,  and  his 
preaching  prepared  the  way  for  the  introduction  of  a  new 
dispensation.  So  the  preaching  of  such  men  as  WicklifT, 
Huss,  Jerome,  Luther,  Zuinglius,  and  Melancthon,  was  like 
mighty  thunder  to  the  consciences  of  self-deceived  and 
hypocritical  formalists,  whether  dignitaries  in  the  church, 
or  fellows  of  the  monastic  orders,  or  those  who  move  in 
common  walks  of  life:  and  it  introduced  a  new  era  of  light, 
and  purity,  and  prosperity  to  the  Christian  church. 

There  was  also  the  sound  of  harpers  singing  as  they 
played  upon  their  harps.  The  harp  was  used  in  oft'eriug 
praise  to  God;  and  the  idea  expressed  here  probably  is, 
that  the  labors  of  those  godly  men  and  the  happy  eftects 
produced  by  them,  occasioned  much  thanksgiving  to  God. 

3.  And  tliey  sung  as  it  were  a  new  song  before  the  throne, 
and  before  the  four  beasts,  and  the  elders :  and  no  man  could 
learn  that  song  but  the  himdred  and  forty  and  four  thousand, 
which  luere  redeemed  from  the  eartlt. — The  song  which  the 
harpers  sung,  was  in  some  respects  peculiar,  for  it  could 
not  be  learned  by  any  except  true  believers,  represented 
by  the  hundred  and  forty  and  four  thousand,  who  were 
redeemed  from  the  earth,  i.e.,  purified  from  the  evil  sen- 
timents and  practices  which  everywhere  prevailed.  The 
nature  and  efficacy  of  redemption  by  Christ, — the  suffi- 
ciency of  his  atonement  and  righteousness  to  meet  all 
the  demands  of  the  law, — and  justification  by  faith  in 
this  alone,  were  the  great  awakening  and  renovating 
doctrines,  which  began  and  carried  forward  the  refoi'ma- 
tion,  and  are  essential  to  a  living  and  life-producing  Chris- 
tianity. These  stand  in  direct  opposition  to  a  religion  of 
forms,  of  fantastic  parade,  and  of  meritorious  dead  works. 


CHAPTER  XIV.  141 

The  blind  devotees  of  superstitious  observances  do  not  un- 
derstand this.  Indeed  the  doctrine  of  justification  by  faith, 
is  a  fatal  antagonist  to  the  whole  sj^stem  of  the  Reman 
catholic  and  Greek  catholic  church.  Hence  the  declared 
fact  that  no  man  could  learn  the  new  song  of  the  harpers, 
beside  true  believers.  They  only  have  the  experience  of 
these  truths,  and  a  sense  of  their  glory  and  excellency. 
These  rejoicing  minstrels  sang  their  new  song,  commemo- 
rative of  these  new  triumphs  of  the  gospel  before  the 
throne,  the  emblem  of  civil  authority,  i.e.,  m  the  presence 
of  civil  rulers,  showing  their  acquiescence  in  and  approval 
of  this  great  reformation  in  religion,  which  was  remarkably 
fulfilled  in  the  favor  which  was  shown  by  the  German 
princes,  electors,  and  others  in  Netherlands  and  Great 
Britain;  and  in  the  presence  of  the  four  living  creatures  and 
the  elders,  who  are  the  representatives  of  the  true  church 
and  its  ministers.  To  all  the  friends  of  Christ,  and  lovers 
of  his  truth,  this  revival  of  true  religion  was  an  occasion  of 
great  rejoicing. 

4.  These  are  they  which  were  not  defiled  with  tvomen : 
for  they  are  virgins.  These  are  they  lohich  folloiv  the  Lamb 
whithersoever  he  goeth.  These  were  redeemed  from  among 
men,  being  the  first  fi'uits  unto  God  and  to  the  Lamb. — The 
character  of  this  great  company  of  believers  is  further  de- 
scribed as  those  who  were  not  defiled  with  women,  being 
chaste  and  pure.  It  is  common  in  the  scriptures  to  repre- 
sent the  union  between  God  and  his  people  by  the  mar- 
riage relation,  and  defection  from  his  worship  to  the  worship 
of  false  Gods,  as  lewdness  and  adultery.  To  his  ancient 
people,  he  said.  Turn,  O  backsliding  children,  for  I  avi  mar- 
ried unto  you.  Jer.  3  :  14.  Thy  Maker  is  thy  husband. 
Isa.  54  :  5.  Paul  wrote  to  the  Corinthians  saying,  I  have 
espoused  you  to  one  husband,  that  I  may  present  you  as  a 


142  CHAPTER  XIV. 

chaste  virgin  to  Christ.  2  Cor.  11:2.  As  antithetical  to 
this,  we  have  the  expressions,  committing  fornication,  i.e., 
by  practicing  idolatry  ; — playing  the  harlot, — going  after 
lovers,  denoting  the  sin  of  grossly  corrujiting  the  worship 
of  God.  The  women  of  the  Moabites  seduced  the  Hebrews 
into  the  worship  of  their  gods,  and  so  the  practice  of  idol- 
atry in  any  form  is  spoken  of  as  lewdness  or  conjugal  in- 
fidelity. The  affirmation,  then,  that  the  believers  referred 
to,  were  not  defiled  with  women,  means  that  they  kept 
themselves  pure  from  the  idolatrous  practices  of  a  degen- 
erate church. 

Another  high  commendation  of  them  is,  that  they  follow 
the  Lamb  ivherever  he  goes,  which  expresses  cheertul  obe- 
dience to  him,  and  an  imitation  of  his  example  under  all 
circumstances,  whether  joyous  or  afflictive.  They  per- 
formed duty  in  the  exercise  of  faith,  self-denial  and  patience. 
— They  were  redeemed  from  am.ong  men,  in  that  they  were 
delivered  from  the  bondage  of  sin,  and  from  the  condem- 
natory sentence  of  the  law. — They  were  first  fruits,  pre- 
cious and  sacred  to  the  Lord, — the  first  fruits  of  that  great 
spiritual  harvest  which  followed  the  labors  of  those  zealous 
reformers. 

6.  And  in  their  mouth  was  found  no  fjidle  :  for  they  are 
without  fault  before  the  throne  of  God. — They  were  true  to 
their  vows,  faithful  in  maintaining  divine  truth.  Being 
without  fault,  does  not  mean,  that  they  were  sinless,  but 
that  through  Jesus  Christ,  they  were  justified  fully  and 
freely,  and  lived  as  becometh  saints.  Though  eminent  in 
holiness,  they  needed  mercy  and  forgiveness.  This  whole 
description  may  well  be  applied  to  the  Waldenses  and  Al- 
bigenses,  for  they  preserved  the  Christian  religion  pure, 
while  the  Romish  church  everywhere  practiced  the  worship 
of  images,  relics,  saints,  and  the  blessed  virgin.     They  were 


CHAPTER  XIV.  143 

never  seduced  by  flattery,  nor  by  a  long  and  bloody  perse- 
cution, in  which  more  than  a  million  of  them  lost  their  lives, 
to  adopt  the  superstitions,  or  to  practice  the  idolatry  of  the 
times.  They  followed  the  Lamb  by  a  conscientious  obe- 
dience to  the  gospel,  often  under  circumstances  awfully 
trying. 

6,  And  I  saw  another  angel  fly  in  the  midst  of  heaven, 
having  the  everlasting  gospel  to  2)reach  unto  them  that  dwell 
on  the  earth,  and  to  every  nation,  and  Jcindred,  and  tongue, 
and  people. — This  angel  seems  to  be  emblematic  of  those 
faithful  preachers  of  the  gospel,  whose  labors  carried  for- 
ward the  reformation  in  different  parts  of  Europe.  His 
flying  in  the  midst  of  heaven,  shows  the  rapidity  with  which 
the  truth  Avould  be  disseminated.  The  everlasting  gospel, 
in  contradistinction  to  prevailing  errors  and  superstitions, 
was  to  be  preached  to  them  who  dwelt  in  the  empire,  and 
to  people  of  all  nations.  The  work  so  nobly  begun  by  the 
reformers,  is  still  carried  on  by  various  instrumentalities 
with  increasing  success. 

7.  Saying  tvith  a  loud  voice,  Fear  God  and  give  glory 
to  him  ;  for  the  hour  of  his  judgment  is  come  ;  and  2Vorship 
him  that  made  heaven,  and  earth,  and  the  sea,  and  the  foun- 
tains of  ivaters. — The  angel  proclaimed  as  he  went,  say- 
ing. Fear  God,  and  give  glory  to  him,  for  the  hour  of  his 
judgment  is  come,  that  is,  his  judgment  on  the  papal  hier- 
archy. Then  God  would  begin  to  destroy  the  mian  of  sin 
with  the  breath  of  his  mouth,  the  truth  of  his  own  revealing. 
Instead  of  fearing  the  persecuting  wrath  of  the  pope,  the 
people  were  exhorted  to  fear  God; — and  instead  of  the 
idolati'ous  worship  of  images,  saints,  and  the  virgin,  they 
were  to  praise,  adore,  and  serve  him,  who  made  all  things, 
and  controls  all  human  interests. 


144  CHAPTER  XIV. 

8.  And  there  followed  another  anr^el,  sayinr/,  Babylon  is 
fallen,  is  fallen,  that  great  citi/,  because  she  made  all  nations 
drink  of  the  wine  of  the  wrath  of  her  fornication. — Another 
angel  followed  announcing  the  fall  of  the  Roman  papal 
power,  symbolized  by  ancient  Bab^^lon,  which  was  long 
the  grand  center  of  idolatry,  superstition,  and  oppression  of 
God's  people.  The  reformers  boldly  declared  papacy  to  be 
antichrist,  and  proclaimed  its  overthrow,  and  ultimate  ex- 
tinction. The  reason  for  this  threatened  destruction  is,  that 
this  mystical  Babylon  had  caused  all  nations  to  drink  her 
poisonous  draught, — the  wine  of  the  wrath  of  Iier  fornica- 
tion. Mingling  of  idolatrous  rites  with  the  worship  of  God, 
and  thus  corrupting  true  religion,  is  called  fornication. 
The  phrase,  wine  of  ivrath  or  wrathful  wine,  when  used  in 
reference  to  providential  calamities,  signifies  the  terrible 
effects  of  God's  wrath  on  the  nations  who  receive  and  prac- 
tice the  superstitions  and  idolatries  of  papal  Rome.  Thus 
in  Jeremiah  25  :  15-18,  it  is  written,  "Take  the  wine-cup 
of  this  fury  at  my  hand,  saith  the  Lord,  and  cause  all  the 
nations  to  whom  I  send  thee,  to  drink  it.  And  they  shall 
drink,  and  be  moved,  and  enraged,  because  of  the  sword 
that  I  Avill  send  among  them,"  &;c. 

This  prophecy  of  J  ohn  teaches  us,  that  the  preaching  of 
the  everlasting  gospel  to  all  nations,  is  to  precede  the  final 
destruction  of  papacy,  and  will  be  the  chief  means  of  bring- 
ing to  jjass  that  event. 

9  land  10.  And  the  third  angel  followed  them,  saying 
with  a  loud  voice,  If  any  man  worship  the  beast  and  his 
image,  and  receive  his  mark  in  his  forehead,  or  in  his  hand, 
the  same  shall  drink  of  the  wine  of  the  wrath  of  God,  which 
is  poured  out  without  mixture  into  the  cup  of  his  indigna- 
tion ;  and  he  shall  be  tormented  with  fire  and  brimstone  in 
the  2ii'^sence  of  the  holy  angels,  and  in   the  presence  of  the 


CHAPTER  XIV.  145 

Lamb. — A  third  angel  followed  loudly  proclaiming  divine 
vengeance  on  those  who  reverence,  approve,  admire,  and 
obey  the  persecuting  civil  power,  and  his  image,  the  papal 
hierarchy.  At  the  destined  period,  his  vengeance  upon 
them  will  he  unmitigated,  terrible,  irresistible.  The  wine 
of  his  indignation,  which  he  vdW  give  those  nations,  will  be 
undiluted, — it  will  prostrate  their  strength,  and  they  will 
rcjl  to  and  fro,  and  fall  like  a  drunken  man. 

Another  part  of  the  punishment  threatened  against  those 
who  reverence  the  beast  and  his  image  and  profess  attach- 
ment and  obedience  to  them,  is,  that  they  shall  he  tonnented 
with  fire  and  brimstone,  in  the  presence  of  the  holy  angels, 
and  of  the  Lamb.  This  is  generally  interpreted  to  mean 
the  punishment  to  be  inflicted  in  the  future  state.  Now, 
we  should  observe,  that  the  revelator  is  speaking  of  things 
which  were  to  take  place  in  this  world,  and,  as  in  the  pre- 
ceding verses,  of  the  punitive  judgments,  which  God  will 
bring  on  those  who  corrupt  the  church  by  their  inventions, 
superstitions,  and  idolatries.  Daniel  speaks  of  this  same 
punishment,  in  these  words, — '  The  judgment  will  sit,  and 
they  shall  take  away  his  dominion  to  consume  and  destroy 
it  unto  the  end.''  What  John  expresses  by  being  tormented 
with  fire  and  sulphur,  Daniel  expresses  by  consuming  and 
destroying  the  dominion  or  reign  of  the  beast.  Paul  says 
the  same,  thus,  '  whom  the  Lord  will  consume  with  the 
breath  of  his  mouth,  and  destroy  v/ith  the  brightness  •  of 
his  coming,'  i.e..,  with  his  truth,  and  with  signal  dispensations 
of  his  providence. — God  himself  calls  his  truth,  fire.  Is 
not  my  word  like  fire  1  Jer.  23  :  29.  See  also  Isa.  66  :  15. 
Paul  says,  '  Every  man's  work  shall  be  made  manifest — 
because  it  shall  be  made  known  by  fire.,  and  the  fire  shall 
try  every  man's  work  of  what  sort  it  is.'  This  is  the  fire 
of  divine  truth,  and  perhaps  also,  of  persecution. 

Sulphur,  called  also  brimstone,  is  a  highly  inflammable 


146  CHAPTER  XIV. 

substance,  and  in  scripture  is  used  figuratively  to  signify 
the  destructive  nature  and  terribleness  of  divine  judgments. 
In  Genesis,  it  is  recorded,  that  the  Lord  rained  upon  Sodom 
and  Gomorrah,  brimstone  and  fire  out  of  heaven.  Hencej 
in  the  Psalms  it  is  said  figuratively, — '  Upon  the  wicked  the 
Lord  will  rain  snares,  fire  and  brimstone,  and  a  horrible 
tempest.'  In  the  3Sth  chap,  of  Ezekiel,  God  declares  his 
judgment  against  Gog  thus, — I  will  plead  against  him 
with  pestilence  and  blood,  and  I  will  rain  upon  him  and 
his  bands,  an  overflowing  rain,  and  great  hailstones,  fire 
and  brimstone.  John,  in  this  instance,  as  in  others,  uses 
the  figures  of  the  Old  Testament  writers,  and  doubtless  in 
the  same  sense.  His  idea  is,  that  the  •  worshipers  and 
favorers  of  the  beast  and  the  papacy,  will  be  troubled, 
alarmed,  vexed,  and  conscience-smitten,  with  the  truth 
which  they  hate,  and  which  they  fear  will  work  the  destruc- 
tion of  their  delusive  system  ;  and  also,  they  will  be  visited 
with  grievous  and  destructive  calamities.  These  things 
will  take  place  in  presence  of  the  holy  angels,  the  messen- 
gers of  the  Lord,  and  in  presence  of  the  Lamb  ; — i.e.,  with 
their  approbation,  as  justly  merited. 

11.  And  the  smoke  of  their  torment  ascendeth  up  forever 
and  ever  :  and  they  have  no  rest  day  nor  niyht,  tvho  worship 
the"  beast  and  his  imar/e,  and  whosoever  receiveth  the  mark  of 
his  name. — ^These  figures  are  frequent  in  the  writings  of  the 
ancient  prophets,  and  it  is  strange,  that  their  meaning  and 
application  in  this  place  have  been  so  erroneously  explain- 
ed. The  fact  is  too  generally  overlooked,  that  this  is  a 
book  of  prophecy,  and  not  of  doctrinal  instruction.  It  may 
be  regarded  as  an  expansion  of  those  ancient  prophecies, 
which  relate  to  the  Christian  dispensation.  It  does  not  ap- 
pear to  me  to  be  any  part  of  the  design  of  the  writer  to 
teach  in  these  verses  the  eternal  punishment  of  the  wor- 


CHAPTER  XIV.  147 

shipers  of  the  beast  and  his  image  ;  but  to  j^reclict  the  cala- 
mities and  distresses  in  which  they  will  be  involved  in  this 
world.  The  model  text  is  plainly  that  which  is  contained 
in  the  thirty-fourth  chapter  of  Isaiah,  where  he  describes  the 
destruction  of  Edom.  "  Their  land  shall  be  drenched  in 
blood,  and  their  dust  made  fat  with  fatness.  For  it  is  the 
day  of  the  Lord's  vengeance,  the  year  of  the  recompense  for 
the  controversy  of  Zion.  And  the  streams  thereof  shall  be 
turned  into  pitch,  and  the  dust  thereof  into  brimstone,  and 
the  land  thereof  shall  become  burning  pitch.  It  shall  not 
be  quenched  night  nor  day ;  the  smoke  thereof  shall  go  up 
forever,  from  generation  to  generation,  it  shall  lie  waste ; 
none  shall  pass  through  it  forever  and  ever."  Who  thinks 
of  interpreting  this  of  the  eternal  punishment  of  the  in- 
habitants of  that  country  ?  Tor  aught  I  know,  they  were 
eternally  destroyed.  But,  it  was  no  part  of  the  prophet's 
detign  to  teach  that  sentiment.  He  speaks  only  of  its  tem- 
poral calamities,  and  the  whole  description  to  the  close  of 
the  chapter  clearly  proves  it.  The  smoke  ascending  up 
forever,  is  the  very  language  of  John,  and  the  phrase /o?-ei;er 
atrd  ever  is  explained  to  be  from  generation  to  generation. 
The  same  declai-ation  is  expressed  in  the  subsequent  verses 
in  a  similar  manner,  where  it  is  predicted,  that  the  wild 
beasts,  the  satyr,  the  owl,  and  the  vulture,  "  shall  possess 
it  forever,  from  generation  to  generation  shall  they  dweD 
therein."  Such  is  the  condition  of  that  country  to  this 
day.  John  uses  the  same  language  with  the  same  significa- 
tion. 

Smoke  is  sometimes  the  symbol  or  visible  token  of  the 
anger  of  the  Lord,  as  in  Ps.  18:8.  'There  v/ent  up  a 
smoke  out  of  his  nostrils,  and  fire  out  of  his  mouth  devour- 
ed.' Here  also,  fire  signifies  the  truth,  or  the  threatening 
which  God  utters.  Smoke  also  expresses  figuratively  great 
calamities,  such  as  war,  and  invasion,  as  in  Isa.  14:31. 


148  CHAPTER  XIV. 

'  There  shall  come  from  the  north  a  smoke,'  referrhig  to  the 
overthrow  of  Babylon  by  the  Medes. 

The  writer  of  this  book  often  subjoins  an  expression, 
which  is  a  key  to  the  explanation  of  the  figures  he  uses.  So 
here,  the  next  clause  shows  what  he  means  by  the  smoke  of 
their  torment ;  viz.  :  Tliey  have  no  rest  day  nor  night,  who 
worship  the  beast  and  his  image.  They,  have  no  true  peace 
within  themselves,  because  they  do  not  seek  to  be  justified 
by  flxith  in  Jesus  Christ  according  to  the  gospel.  And  the 
providences  of  God  will  be  such,  that  they  will  have  no  rest 
in  outward  circumstances.  What  a  spectacle  have  catholic 
countries  presented,  and  do  still  present  in  regard  to  this 
matter  ! 

12.  Here  is  the  patience  of  the  saints:  here  are  they  that 
keep  the  commandments  of  God^  and  the  faith  of  Jesus. — It 
is  difficult  to  ascertain  the  connection  and  application  of  this 
verse.  The-  word  translated  here,  signifies  also  '  thus,^  or  in 
like  manner,  and  the  idea  may  be,  that  at  this  period  of 
calamities  to  the  j^apal  antichrist,  the  patience  of  the  saints 
win  be  brought  into  exercise  in  a  peculiar  manner.  Certain 
it  is,  that  at  this  period,  which  we  suppose  is  the  sixteenth 
century,  as  the  Reformation  spread  in  Germany,  France, 
Switzerland,  England,  Scotland,  Ireland  and  Denmark,  the 
papists  were  alarmed,  embittered,  and  made  vengeful,  (the 
very  thing  perhaps  which  is  meant  in  the  preceding  verses,) 
and  the  protestants  experienced  unrelenting  ojiposition  and 
persecution.  Queen  Mary  restored  popery  in  England, 
and  occasioned  scenes  of  barbarity  and  persecution  Avhich 
shock  humanity.  In  this  century,  the  order  of  the  Jesuits 
was  founded,  and  the  inquisition  was  established  :  and  the 
horrid  massacre  of  the  protestants  in  Paris  on  St.  Bartho- 
lomew's day,  was  perpetrated.  At  this  period  too,  the  pa- 
pacy began  the  inhuman  practice  of  burning  people  alive, 


CHAPTER  XIV.  149 

because  of  their  belief  and  propagation  of  the  truth,  and 
great  numbers  perished  in  that  manner. 

13.  And  I  heard  a  voice  from  heaven  sarjing  nnto  me, 
Write,  Blessed  are  the  dead  tvhich  die  in  the  Lord  from 
henceforth :  Yea,  saith  the  Sjyirit,  that  they  may  rest  from 
their  labors  ;  and  their  luorks  do  folloio  them. — It  is  the 
heaven  of  the  true  church  which  is  meant  in  this  place,  and 
the  voice  is  that  of  the  faithfid  reformers  declaring  God's 
truth  against  the  doctrine  of  purgatory,  masses,  and  prayers 
for  the  dead.  John  was  commanded  to  write  down  the 
truth,  to  be  used  in  future  times  against  that  prodigious  mo- 
ney-making imposition,  that  the  dead  who  die  in  the  Lord , 
are  presently,  or  from  that  time,  happy.  Yea,  the  Spirit 
declareth,  that  they  peacefully  rest  from  their  labors,  and 
their  good  works  follow  with  them  to  be  rewarded.  They 
enter  at  once  into  a  state  of  happmess  and  rest  from  toil 
and  suffering.  Let  this  precious  truth  stand  forever  as  a  con- 
demnation of  the  impious  assumption,  that  there  is  a  purga- 
tory, from  Avhich  people  may  be  exempt  by  the  payment  of 
great  sums  of  money ;  or,  that  their  stay  there  may  be 
shortened  by  the  purchased  prayers  of  the  priest  and  the 
church. 

14.  And  I  looked,  and  behold  a  white  cloud,  and  upon 
the  cloud  one  sat  like  unto  the  Son  of  man,  having  on  his  head 
a  golden  crown,  and  in  his  hand  a  sharp  sickle. — Da- 
niel saw  in  the  night  visions,  and  behold,  one  like  the 
Son  of  man  came  with  the  clouds  of  heaven.  Christ  said 
concerning  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem,  '  Tliey  shall  see 
the  Son  of  man  coming  in  the  clouds  of  heaven.'  In  all 
these  cases,  coming  with  clouds,  and  sitting  on  a  white 
cloud,  mean  a  signal  display  of  the  divine  character  in  the 
remarkable  events,  which  are  to  transpire,  particularly  the 


150  CHAPTER  XIV. 

divine  power,  justice,  and  sovereignty.  On  the  cloud  sat 
one  who  appeared  like  the  Son  of  man,  indicating,  that  the 
events  appertained  to  his  kingdom  ;  having  on  his  head  a 
golden  crown,  the  emblem  of  sovereignty,  showing  the  ex- 
tension of  his  kingdom,  or  a  new  era  of  its  prosperity.  A 
sickle  is  an  instrument  commonly  used  for  cutting  grain, 
that  it  may  be  gathered  into  the  storehouse. 

15.  And  another  angel  came  out  of  the  iemple^  crying 
with  a  loxid  voice  to  him  that  sat  on  the  cloudy  Thrust  in  thy 
sickle  and  reap  :  for  the  time  is  come  for  thee  to  reap  ;  for 
the  harvest  of  the  earth  is  ripe. — This  angel  from  the  temple, 
may  represent  the  faithful  preachers  of  the  gospel  at  that 
period ;  and  his  address  to  him  who  sat  on  the  cloud,  may 
mean  their  fervent  prayers,  that  a  spiritual  harvest  may 
be  reaped,  and  their  full  belief  that  the  time  had  come  for 
this. 

16.  And  he  that  sat  on  the  cloud  thrust  in  his  sickle  on  the 
earth  ;  and  the  earth  ivas  readied. — The  phrase  on  the  earth, 
gives  altogether  too  broad  a  signification  to  this  prediction, 
unless  it  be  borne  in  mind,  that  it  is  the  Roman  earth.  In 
each  of  the  instances,  it  would  be  better  to  substitute  the 
word,  land.  The  sickle  was  thrust  in,  and  the  harvest 
reaped.  This  has  usually  been  interpreted  to  signify  the 
infliction  of  judgments  ;  but  I  prefer  to  understand  it  accord- 
ing to  the  true  import  of  a  liarvest,  as  a  great  spiritual  in- 
gathering to  the  church  and  kingdom  of  Christ.  The  refor- 
mation spread  over  the  northern  countries  of  Europe,  gave 
spirituality  and  life  to  the  church,  and  made  vast  multitudes 
of  converts  to  the  Lord  Jesus. 

17.  And  another  angel  came  out  of  the  temple  tvhich  is  in 
heaven^  he  also  having  a  sliarp  sickle. — In  the  other  instance 


CHAPTER  XIV.  151 

the  sharp  sickle  was  hi  the  hand  of  hiui  who  sat  on  the 
cloud  ;  here  it  is  in  the  hand  of  the  angel,  who  may  repre- 
sent some  agent  or  agency  for  executing  the  judgments  fore- 
told in  the  next  verse. 

18.  And  anotiier  angel  came  out  from  the  altar,  tvhich 
had  power  over  fire  ;  and  cried  with  a  loud  cry  to  him  that 
hod  the  sharp  sickle,  saying,  Thrust  in  thy  sharp  sickle,  and 
gather  the  clusters  of  the  vine  of  the  earth  ;  for  her  grapes 
are  fully  ripie. — Another  angel  came  from  the  altar  on 
which  the  burnt  sacrifices  were  offered,  ha\'ing  power  over 
fire, — authority  or  control  over  the  fire  of  the  altar,  to  kin- 
dle or  extinguish  it,  as  he  pleased.  This  angel  seems  to  be 
a  personation  of  faithful  ministers,  who  have,  and  preach 
God's  truth,  and  by  it  kindle  the  fire  of  conviction  in  men's 
consciences.  His  relation  to  the  altar  seems  to  imply  that 
these  judgments  which  he  directs  to  be  inflicted,  will  con- 
sume the  enemies  of  Christ,  as  fire  consumes  the  ofiiered 
sacrifice.  With  a  loud  cry,  showing  earnestness  and  the 
importance  of  the  thing  to  be  done,  he  bade  the  angel  with 
the  sharp  sickle,  do  the  work  for  which  he  was  commis- 
sioned. By  affirming  that  the  grapes  were  fully  ripe,  he 
affirmed  that  the  time  for  punishing  the  wicked  communi- 
ties referred  to,  had  arrived,  their  iniquities  having  arisen 
to  a  great  height. 

19.  And  the  angel  thrust  in  his  sickle  into  the  earth,  and 
gathered  the  vine  of  the  earth,  and  cast  it  into  the  great 
wine-'press  of  the  lorath  of  God. — The  order  is  executed. 
The  reaping  and  gathering  of  the  grain  indicates  the  pros- 
perity of  the  church  subsequent  to  the  reformation.  The 
gathering  of  the  vintage  and  treading  of  the  grapes  is  a 
figure  used  in  scripture  with  a  different  signification,  viz  : 
as  expressing  terrible  calamities,  such  as  bloody  and  de- 


152  CHAPTF^R  XIV. 

structive  wars.  Thus  in  Isa.  G3  cli. :  I  have  trodden  the 
wine-press  alone,  &c.  The  day  of  vengeance  is  iu  my 
heart,  and  the  year  of  my  redeemed  is  come ;  and  I  v.'ill 
tread  down  the  people  in  my  anger,  &c.  The  expression, 
wine-press  of  the  wrath  of  God,  plainly  shows  that  dreadful 
judgments  are  meant. 

The  papal  hierarchy  with  its  almost  numberless  abomina- 
tions had  now  attained  its  greatest  height ;  was  fully  ripe 
for  the  vintage ;  and  now  its  decline  and  ruin  were  to 
begin.  England  had  declared  itself  independent  of  the 
pope.  Knox  aroused  all  Scotland  to  throw  off  the  authority 
and  superstitions  of  Eome.  The  Belgic  Provinces,  the 
Netherlands,  withdrew  from  their  allegiance  to  the  pontiff. 
A  powerful  army  was  sent  by  Philip  11.,  king  of  Spain,  un- 
der the  duke  of  Alva,  to  force  them  mto  subjection.  After 
a  long  and  bloody  war,  William  of  Nassau,  assisted  by 
England  and  France,  delivered  the  provinces  from  both  the 
Spanish  and  Eoman  yoke.  Soon  after  the  French  clergy  in 
convention  declared  the  pope's  pretensions  to  tonporalities, 
null  and  void  ;  placed  the  authority  of  a  council  above  that 
of  the  pope,  and  maintained  that  his  decisions  were  not  in- 
fallible, except  when  attended  with  the  decision  of  the 
church.  To  all  these  things  succeeded  the  bloody  scene  of 
the  French  revolution,  and  the  wars  of  Bonaparte. 

20.  And  the  wine-press  was  trodden  withotit  the  city^  and 
blood  came  out  of  the  wine-press^  even  unto  the  horse  bridles, 
by  the  space  of  a  thousand  and  six  hundred  furlowis. — The 
infidel  movements  attending  and  following  that  revolution, 
may  perhaps  be  the  treading  of  the  wine-press  xvithout  the 
city.  Blood  issuing  from  the  wine-press  in  such  quantity, 
shows  that  there  will  be  great  sacrifice  of  life.  "Whether 
the  sixteen  hundred  furlongs  refer  to  the  church  States  in 
Italy,  as  some  suppose,  I  know  not. 


CHAPTER  XV.  153 


CHAPTER    XV 


Preparation  for  the  Seven  Last  Plagues. 

It  is  declared  in  the  tenth  chapter,  that  '  in  the  days  of 
the  voice  of  the  seventh  angel  when  he  shall  begin  to  sound, 
the  mystery  of  God  shall  be  finished,  as  he  hath  declared 
to  his  servants  the  prophets.'  Under  this  last  woe-trumpet 
are  included  the  seven  vials  of  the  wrath  of  God,  called 
also  the  last  seven  plagues,  the  description  of  which  is  now 
given.  The  events  predicted  under  these  symbols  relate, 
as  I  think,  to  the  destruction  of  both  the  antichristian  pow- 
ers, the  papal  and  Mahometan,  and  fill  up  the  time  to  the 
year  two  thousand,  which  will  be  the  commencement  of 
the  millennium. 

1.  And  I  saiv  another  sign  in  heaven,  great  and  marvel- 
oits,  seven  angels  having  the  seven  last  plagves  ;  for  in  them 
is  filled  vj)  the  wrath  of  God. — Another  emblematic  repre- 
sentation of  great  and  marvelous  changes  in  the  firmament 
of  government,  viz  :  seven  angels,  or  instrumental  agents, 
having  the  seven  last  plagues,  in  which  the  wrath  of  God 
on  the  western  and  eastern  antichrist,  is  completed. 

2.  And  I  saio  as  it  were  a  sea  of  glass  mingled  xvith  fire  ; 
and  them  that  had  gotten  the  victory  over  the  beast,  and  over 
his  image,  and  over  his  mark,  and  over  the  number  of  his 
name,  stand  on  the  sea  of  glass,  having  the  liaiys  of  God. — 
The  phrase,  sea  of  glass,  is  an  incorrect  translation ;  the 
word  for  glass  being  an  adjective,  and  not  a  noun,  and  the 
reading  should  be,  a  crystaline  or  transparent  sea.  To  in- 
terpret tills  sea  as  meaning  the  blood  of  Christ,  or  "  the 

7* 


154  CHAPTER  XV. 

gospel  covenant,"  or '  tin  allusion  to  the  l)i-azon  sea  in  the 
court  of  the  temple,'  I  regard  as  fanciful  guessing ;  a  disre- 
gard of  the  principles  which  should  guide  us  in  explaining 
the  symbols  of  this  book. 

A  sea  is  the  emblem  of  a  comraimity  or  nation  in  a  state  of 
agitation  and  commotion  ;  and  fire  is  the  emblem  of  divine 
truth,  and  sometimes  of  divine  anger.  Is  not  my  word 
like  fire,  saith  the  Lord  ?  Behold,  I  will  make  my  words 
in  thy  mouth,  _;?rc,  and  this  people  wood,  and  it  shall  de- 
vour them.  Jer.  5  :  14.  A  transparent  sea  mingled  with 
fire,  is  a  nation  in  a  state  of  agitation  and  excitement  con- 
cerning the  truth  ;  or,  the  truth  is  one  of  the  elements  of 
that  excitement,  and  all  combining  to  produce  an  enlightened, 
moral,  and  more  purely  spiritual  state  of  things,  indicated 
by  the  transparency  of  the  sea.  As  is  customary  with  this 
writer,  he  has  given  a  clew  to  his  meaning  in  the  subsequent 
portion  of  this  verse,  and  it  confirms  the  interpretation  just 
given.  Those  who  had  successfully  resisted  the  papal  civil 
power,  and  the  papal  ecclesiastical  power,  (the  beast  and 
his  image)  and  had  refused  to  receive  his  mark  and  the  num" 
ber  of  his  name,  i.e.^  to  adopt  his  corrupt  forms  of  worship, 
and  be  sul)ject  to  his  authority,  stood  on  that  transparent 
sea,  mingled  with  Jire,  having  the  hai'ps  of  God  in  th(;ir 
hands,  in  the  attitude  of  praise,  as  having  come  out  of  those 
commotions  with  triumph ;  and  they  stood  Jirmhj  in  the 
midst  of  these  agitations  and  conflicts,  ujiheld  by  the  power 
of  the  Lord,  and  rejoiced  in  witnessing  the  reforming  and 
purifying  eftects  produced.  The  sea  became  translucent. 
What  a  beautiful  and  striking  representation  of  the  blessed 
effects  of  the  labors  of  the  reformers  on  the  continent  of 
Europe,  and  of  the  puritans  in  the  days  of  Cromwell  and 
the  English  Commonwealth,  and  subse([uently  !  How 
firmly  did  they  maintain  divine  truth ;  how  zealously  did 
they  diflfuse  it,  and  what  glorious  results  have  fulluwod ! 


CHAPTER  XV.  155 

The  fire  and  the  water,  two  opposite  elements,  were  niui- 
gled,  but  the  fire  could  not  be  extinguished. 

3  and  4.  And  the]/  sing  the  song  of  Moses  the  servant  of 
God,  caul  the  song  of  the  Lamb,  saying^  Great  and  marvel- 
ous are  thy  works,  Lord  God  Almighty  ;  just  and  true  are 
thy  ways^  thou,  king  of  saints.  Who  shall  not  fear  thee,  0 
Lord,  and  glorify  thy  name  ?  for  thou  only  art  holy  :  for  all 
nations  shall  come  and  worship  before  thee  ;  for  thy  judg- 
ments are  made  manifest. — "We  have  here  the  substance  of 
the  song  which  those  courageous,  noble-minded,  godly  men 
are  said  to  have  sung.  As  Moses  composed  a  sublime 
song  to  commemorate  the  deliverance  of  the  Israelites 
from  the  power  of  their  Egyptian  oppressors  at  the  Eed 
Sea,  so  this  song  commemorates  the  deliverance  of  the 
Lord's  j^eople  from  their  oppressors  at  the  time  referred  to, 
and  therefore,  is  called  the  song  of  Moses.  And,  as  this 
deliverance  was  wrought  preemmently  by  faith  in  the  blood, 
righteousness,  and  power  of  Christ,  it  is  called  the  song  of 
the  Lamb,  It  declares  the  works  of  the  Lord  to  be  great 
and  marvelous  :  that  he  is  just  in  his  dealings  with  his 
enemies,  and  true  and  faithful  to  his  believmg  people. 

In  view  of  the  great  things  he  had  done  for  them,  and 
for  his  cause,  they  ask  with  grateful  admiration.  Who  shall 
not  fear  thee,  O  Lord,  and  glorify  thy  name  1  Then,  as 
v\^as  truly  characteristic  of  the  men  of  that  period,  they 
express  their  confidence  that  all  nations  shall  pay  a  spirit- 
ual and  acceptable  v.'orship  to  the  Most  High;  for  these 
interpositions  will  clearly  show  his  approval  of  the  good 
and  the  true  in  distinction  from  that  which  is  false  and  inju- 
rious. 

If,  however,  we  give  to  the  word  translated  judgments, 
the  signification  which  it  also  has  of  p^-ece^^fe,  we  shall  have 
another  evidence  that  we  have  assigned  to  this  prophecy. 


156  CHAPTER  XV. 

the  right  period  and  the  right  fulfillment.  The  reading  then 
would  be,  All  nations  shall  come  and  worship  before  thee, 
for  thy  precepts  have  been  made  known.  The  fact  was, 
that  the  art  of  printing  was  discovered  about  that  time, 
and  the  Bible  was  disseminated,  and  its  truths  inculcated 
with  great  zeal.  Indeed,  from  that  age  to  the  present,  the 
efforts  of  protestant  Christians  have  been  directed  to  the 
great  work  of  making  known  the  precepts  of  the  Lord  to 
people  of  all  nations. 

5.  And  after  that  I  looked^  and^  behold^  the  teiivple  of  the 
tabernacle  of  the  testimony  in  heaven  was  opened. — After 
this,  another  scene  was  presented,  preparatory  to  the  pour- 
ing out  of  the  vials.  The  apostle  seemed  to  himself  to  be 
in  the  temple,  and  beheld  the  holy  of  holies,  into  which 
none  but  the  high  priest  ever  entered,  laid  open.  In  that 
sacred  place  was  the  ark  of  the  covenant,  a  chest  in  which 
was  a  copy  of  the  law  delivered  to  Moses,  and  over  it  a 
luminous  appearance,  indicating  the  presence  of  the  Deity. 
His  dwelling-place  being  opened  in  heaven,  so  that  a  view 
could  be  had  of  it,  signifies,  as  I  think,  that  God  would 
give  peculiar  manifestations  of  himself  to  his  church  in  that 
period,  and  that  his  peoj^lc  would  have  great  freedom  in 
approaching  him  in  prayer.  It  is  well  known,  that  such 
was  the  fact,  when  the  Protestants  and  especially  the  Puri- 
tans, threw  off  the  dead  formalities  of  the  Romish  church, 
performed  in  a  language  not  generally  understood,  and 
poured  forth  their  fervent  prayers  in  language  dictated  by 
their  wants  and  the  feelings  of  their  hearts.  There  may 
also  be  indicated  here  that  era  of  freedom  to  worship  God 
according  to  the  dictates  of  conscience,  which  began  with 
Protestantism. 

G.     And  the  seven  angels  came  ont  of  the  tcmj^le,  huving 


CHAPTER  XV.  157 

the  seven  i:)lafjues,  clothed  in  ^j?»*e  and  ivhite  linen,  and 
having  their  breasts  ffirded  toith  golden  girdles. — The  seven 
angels,  who  might  with  propriety  be  called  '  ministers  of 
vengeance,'  came  out  of  the  temple,  as  if  they  were  officiat- 
ing priests,  clad  in  pure  and  white  linen,  as  the  priests 
used  to  be,  emblematic  of  moral  excellence,  and  girded 
about  their  breasts  Avith  golden  belts,  indicative  of  strength 
and  resolution  in  their  righteous  cause.  Coming  out  of  the 
temple  where  was  the  manifested  presence  of  God,  may 
signify,  that  they  were  commissioned  by  him. 

7.  And  one  of  the  four  beasts  gave  unto  the  seven  angels 
seven  golden  vials  full  of  the  wrath  of  God,  ivho  liveth  for- 
ever and  ever. — This  symbolic  action  of  one  of  the  four 
living  creatures,  mentioned  in  the  fourth  cha,pter,  which 
represent  the  ministers  of  the  true  church, — giving  the 
vials  or  rather  bowls  to  the  agents  for  executing  the  judg- 
ments intended,  may  signify,  that  the  infliction  of  thein 
would  be  in  answer  to  the  prayers  of  faithful  ministers, 
and  in  vindication  of  the  holy  cause  they  labor  to  sustain. 
These  bowls  v.-ere  filled  with  the  wrath  of  God,  a  figure 
showing  that  there  were  to  be  these  distinct  and  signal 
manifestations  of  the  displeasure  of  God  against  the  op- 
posers  of  true  religion.  The  vials  therefore,  with  their 
dreadful  contents  to  be  poured  out,  mean  the  infliction  of 
divine  judgments.  This  will  appear  as  we  come  to  con- 
sider them  separately. 

8.  And.  the  temple  was  filed  with  smoke  from  the  glory 
of  God,  and  from  his  poiver ;  and  no  man  was  able  to 
enter  into  the  tcmjyle,  till  the  seven  ^9/<7yi<es  of  the  seven 
angels  ivcre  fid  filled . — At  the  dedication  of  the  temple  by 
Solomon,  when  the  ark  of  the  covenant  was  carried  in  and 
put  in  its  place,  a  cloud  filled  the  house  of  the  Lord,  so 


158  CHAPTER  XVI. 

that  the  priests  could  not  stand  to  minister.  This  was  a 
token  of  divine  ikvor.  So  in  this  visionary  representation, 
the  temple  was  filled  with  smoke  from  the  glory  and  the 
power  of  God.  This  may  mean,  that  while  the  predicted 
judgments  would  full  on  papal  antichiist,  the  presence  and 
favor  of  God  would  be  manifested  in  his  true  church  by 
sustaining  it,  purifying  it,  and  enlarging  it.  The  church 
will  be  favored  in  a  peculiar  degree  with  the  influences  of 
the  Spirit,  expressed  by  the  glory  and  power  of  God. 
This,  together  with  the  remarkable  dispensations  of  provi- 
dence, will  deter  worldly,  unconverted  men  from  rushing 
into  the  church,  by  making  a  profession  of  what  they  never 
possessed.  It  is  difficult  to  fix  on  the  particular  events 
which  constitute  the  fulfillment  of  this  verse.  The  idea  of 
the  writer  seems  to  be,  that  the  providences  of  God  will 
be  peculiar  toward  his  chm-ch  during  the  period  embraced 
by  these  vials,  in  sustaining,  defending,  and  purifying  it. 
And  it  may  be  well  to  remark  by  way  of  anticipation,  and 
to  aid  in  the  explanation,  that  some  of  these  vials  embrace 
our  own  time,  particularly  the  fifth ;  and  in  a  very  short 
time,  the  things  predicted  under  the  sixth,  will  take  place. 


CHAPTER    XVI 


Judgments  on  the  Antichristlun  Paivcrs. 

The  period  emljraced  in  the  pouring  out  of  the  seven 
vials  is  probably  about  400  years,  extending  from  the 
great  Reformation  to  the  millennium.  Vials  of  the  wrath 
of  God,  or,  more  correctly,  bowls,  are  emblems  showing 
that  as  a  fluid  is  poured  from  a  bowl,  so  the  displeasure  of 


CHAPTER  XVI.  159 

God  against  the  corrupters  of  Christianity,  would  be  mani- 
fested in  the  infliction  of  judgments  upon  them,  and  the 
angels  commissioned  to  do  this,  are  the  instrumentalities 
which  God  will  employ  for  this  purpose. 

1.  And  I  heard  a  great  voice  out  of  the  temjjle  saying  to 
the  seven  angels,  Go  your  ways,  and  2)our  out  the  vials  of 
the  wrath  of  God  upon  the  earth. — The  preparation  being 
made,  a  great  voice  out  of  the  temjyle  gives  command  for 
the  wrathful  visitation  to  begin.  As  the  tabernacle  in  the 
wilderness,  and  subsequently,  the  temple  at  Jerusalem, 
were  the  sources  of  divine  communications,  the  presence  of 
God  being  manifested  there ;  so,  the  great  voice  from  the 
temple,  signifies,  that  these  judgments  proceed  from  him, 
who  now  dwells  in  his  church,  and  they  manifest  his  care 
of  it. 

2.  And  the  first  tvent,  and  jMurcd  out  his  vial  u^yon  the 
ear  tit ;  and  there  fell  a  noisome  and  grievous  sore  upon  the 
men  which  had  the  mark  of  the  beast,  and  u'pon  them  lohich 
worshiped  his  image. — The  first  vial  was  poured  upon  the 
land.,  that  is,  upon  the  people  of  the  papal  dominion  ;  for 
we  are  immediately  informed,  that  the  effect  produced  re- 
lated to  the  people.  A  bad  and  distressing  sore  came  upon 
the  upholders  of  the  Latin  worship,  which  is  the  mark  of 
the  beast,  and  upon  those  who  bowed  down  obsequiously  to 
the  papal  hierarchy,  which  is  the  image  of  the  beast.  But 
what  is  meant  by  the  painful  wound  or  sore  ?  Mr.  Faber 
says,  '  it  was  the  atheistical  spirit  which  pervaded  Catholic 
nations,  and  which  was  so  fatally  developed  in  the  French 
revolution.'  It  is  surprising,  that  he  should  not  have  per- 
ceived, that  this  plague  is  something  grievous  and  distress- 
ing ;  not  something  which  the  people  chose,  loved,  and 
cherished,  as  they  do  erroneous  sentiments.     A  proper  at- 


160  CHAPTER  XVI. 

tention  to  the  history  will  show  any  one  that  this  running 
sore  was  the  exposure,  by  the  reformers,  of  the  errors, 
superstitions,  shameless  sale  of  shameful  indulgences,  and 
other  abominable  practices  of  the  papal  church.  This  ex- 
posure and  reprobation  did  grieve,  vex,  and  torment  the 
dignitaries,  priests,  monks,  and  adherents  of  that  mother  of 
abominations  ;  for  they  saw,  that  their  power  and  resources 
were  in  danger.  A  deep  and  incurable  wound  was  mflict- 
cd  on  the  corrupt  system,  by  the  preaching  and  writings  of 
those  faithful  reformers. 

There  are  certain  coincidences  between  the  seven  trum- 
pets and  the  seven  vials,  which  deserve  notice.  The  effect 
of  the  first  trumpet  was  upon  the  land ;  so  also  was  that 
of  the  first  vial.  The  effect  of  the  second  trumpet  was 
upon  the  sea,  turning  it  into  blood  ;  so,  as  to  the  second 
vial.  The  third  trumpet  aftected  the  rivers  and  fountains  ; 
so  the  third  vial.  The  fourth  trumpet  afiectcd  the  sun  ;  so 
does  the  fourth  vial.  The  fifth  trumpet  refers  to  the  cor- 
ruption of  religion  by  the  superstitious  and  idolatrous  prac- 
tices introduced  by  the  popes ;  the  fifth  vial  is  poured  on 
the  seat  of  the  Koman  beast.  The  sixth  trumpet  looses 
the  Turks  for  conquest,  called  the  four  angels  limited  by 
the  river  Euphrates ;  and  the  sixth  vial  is  poured  upon  the 
Euphrates,  and  dries  up  its  waters,  that  is,  destroys  the 
Turkish  power.  The  seventh  trumpet  introduces  great 
changes, — a  new  state  of  things, — mighty  revolutions  sym- 
bolized by  lightnings,  thunders,  voices,  earthquakes  and 
hail ;  so  does  the  seventh  vial.  These  are  called  the  last 
plagues,  doubtless,  because  they  will  be  the  last  destruc- 
tive visitations  on  the  pajiai  and  ^lahometan  antichrist  pre- 
vious to  the  millennium  ;  at  which  time  these  delusions 
will  be  swept  awaj-,  and  the  nations  will  be  deceived  by 
them  no  more. 


CHAPTER  XVI.  161 

3.  And  the  second  angel  poured  out  his  vial  upon  the 
sea;  and  it  became  as  the  blood  of  a  dead  man:  and  every 
living  soul  died  in  the  sea. — The  sea  is  usually  the  emblem 
of  a  nation  in  a  state  of  agitation,  and  the  sea  turned  into 
blood  imports  a  sanguinary  revolution.  In  this  instance, 
the  sea  became  like  the  blood  of  a  dead  man,  stagnant  and 
putrid.  Here  also  the  effect  was  upon  the  people  ;  for  it 
is  added,  every  living  soul  died  in  the  sea.  By  every 
living  soul  is  meant  every  human  being,  the  term  soul 
being  often  used  in  scripture  for  the  whole  man.  Death 
in  the  sense  of  this  writer,  generally  signifies  the  extinction 
of  moral  or  political  life,  as  when  individuals  ornations  are 
thrust  do^vn  from  their  proper  rank  into  obscurity  and  in- 
significance ;  or  when  they  have  become  morally  degraded, 
ignorant,  and  corrupt.  This  vial  refers  probably  to  Spain 
and  to  Italy,  countries  almost  surrounded  with  the  sea. 
Not  only  was  Spain  vmsucccssful  in  the  long  and  bloody 
war  with  the  United  Netherlands,  and  her  vast  Armada 
was  destroyed ;  but  from  that  time,  (the  close  of  the 
sixteenth  century)  she  declined  in  power,  in  learning,  and 
in  morals.  The  inexorable  inquisition  suppressed  inquiry, 
investigation,  and  propagation  of  divine  truth.  The  society 
of  Jesuits  was  established,  and  the  bloodthirsty  vigilance 
of  the  spies,  minions,  and  officials  of  the  pope,  struck  terror 
into  all  classes  of  the  people.  This  inhumanity  and  grind- 
ing oppression  was  backed  up  and  sustained  by  the  vast  in- 
fluence and  the  arms  of  Charles  V.  The  effect  in  Spain 
and  Italy  was  the  almost  total  extinction  of  spiritual  light 
and  life.  Mosheim  states,  that  '  the  inquisitors  put  so 
many  to  death,  and  perpetrated  on  the  friends  of  liberty 
such  horrid  acts  of  cruelty  and  oppression,  that  most  of  the 
reformists  consulted  their  safety  by  a  voluntary  exile ; 
while  others  returned  to  the  religion  of  Rome,  at  least  in 
appearance.'    '  The  inquisition  reigned  triumphant  in  Spain, 


162  CHAPTER  XVI. 

and  by  racks,  gibbets,  stakes,  and  other  formidable  instru- 
ments of  torture  and  death,  soon  frightened  the  people 
back  into  popery ;  and  suppressed  the  vehement  desire 
they  had  of  changing  a  superstitious  worship  for  a  rational 
religion.'  As  a  consequence,  the  life  blood  of  the  soul 
became  stagnant ;  spiritual  death  ensued ;  moral  putridity 
spread  through  the  body  politic;  and  to  this  day,  it  has 
experienced  no  resurrection.  The  key  of  knowledge  was 
taken  away ;  the  vitality  of  religion  Avas  destroyed ;  and  a 
dead  carcass  of  formalism  was  all  that  remained. 

4.  And  the  third  angel  'poured  out  his  vial  upon  the 
rivers  and  fountains  of  waters  ;  and  they  became  blood. — ^The 
third  vial  was  poured  on  the  rivers  and  fountains  of  waters, 
and  they  became  as  blood.  As  in  the  case  of  the  third 
trumpet,  so  here,  rivers  and  fountains  signify  the  sources 
of  knowledge  and  power  to  a  people.  Now,  the  schools 
and  seminaries  of  protestants,  their  faithful  and  learned 
ministry;  their  churches  and  means  of  disseminating  truth, 
were  sources  of  knowledge  of  great  value.  In  the  early 
part  of  the  seventeenth  century,  there  was  a  bloody  reli- 
gious war  against  the  protestants,  and  they  were  driven 
out  of  Austria  and  some  other  of  the  important  states  of 
Germany.     Thus  the  rivers  and  fountains  became  blood. 

5,  6,  and  7.  And  I  heard  the  angel  of  the  scalers  sag, 
Thou  art  righteous,  0  Lord,  ivhich  art,  and  ivast,  and  shalt 
be,  because  thou  hast  judged  thus :  For  they  have  shed  the 
blood  of  saints  and  'prophets,  and  thou  hast  given  them  blood 
to  drink  ;  for  they  are  wortliy.  And  I  heard  another  out  of 
the  altar  say,  Even  so.  Lord  God  Almighty,  true  and 
righteous  are  thy  judgments. — But  when  the  protestant 
cause  seemed  on  the  verge  of  ruin  there,  a  sudden  change 
took  place    in   its  favor.       Gustavus  Adolphus,   king    of 


CHAPTER  XVr.  163 

Sweden,  who  had  espoused  the  cause  of  the  reformation, 
marched  an  army  into  Germany,  was  everywhere  victorious, 
and  his  troops  continued  to  be  successful  against  the 
enemies  of  protestantism,  after  his  death.  These  con- 
flicts went  on  for  eighteen  years,  when  conditions  of  peace 
were  agreed  upon  at  Munster  in  1648,  which  secured  the 
toleration  of  the  protestant  religion.  To  this,  as  we  may 
suppose,  the  words  of  the  angel  refer  in  the  fifth  and  sixth 
verses,  acknowledging  the  righteous  retribution  of  the  Lord 
on  the  persecutors  of  his  people.  The  angel  from  the  altar 
gave  an  accordant  rejoinder. 

8  and  9.  And  the  fourth  angel  poured  out  his  vial  upon  the 
sun  •  and  power  was  given  unto  him  to  scorch  men  loithfire. 
And  men  loere  scorched  with  great  heat,  and  blas'phemed  the 
name  of  God,  tchich  hath  2)oiver  over  these  jiiagues  :  and  they 
repented  not  to  give  him  glory. — The  fourth  vial  had  its 
effect  on  the  sun,  and  it  was  given  to  him  (so  it  should  be 
read)  to  scorch  men  with  great  heat.  The  sun  is  an  emblem 
of  an  important  civil  power,  and  the  scorching  men  with 
heat  is  the  exercise  of  power  injuriously  and  oppressively 
over  them.  It  is  probable,  that  France  is  the  kingdom 
mieant  by  the  sun  ;  and  it  is  worthy  of  remark,  that  the 
king  takes  the  sun  for  his  emblem.  That  France  did  scorch 
men  with  great  heat  during  the  time  of  this  vial,  which 
comprises  about  one  hundred  and  forty-eight  years,  ending 
in  1794,  is  too  apparent  to  admit  of  a  question.  When  we 
call  to  mind  the  contests  between  the  house  of  Austria  and 
that  of  Bourbon; — the  overthrow  of  the  French  monarchy 
in  1789  ; — the  infamous  and  bloody  revolution  which  re- 
sulted in  establishing  a  republic; — the  reign  and  wars  of 
Bonaparte ; — the  prevalence  of  infidelity  and  atheism ; — 
the  declaration  of  the  national  assembly,  that  there  is  no 
God  ; — and  the  intolerable  oppression  and  calamities  under 


164  CHAPTER  XVI. 

which  the  people  groaned,  "we  may  perceive  what  is  meant 
by  this  vial.  Truly,  men  were  scorched,  and  blasphemed 
God ;  but  instead  of  repenting  and  rendering  due  honor 
to  him,  they  have  persisted  in  their  unbelief  and  wicked- 


10  and  11.  And  the  fifth  angel  20oured  out  his  vial  upon 
the  scat  of  the  beast  ;  and  his  kinr/dom  rvasfull  of  darkness  ; 
and  they  gnaioed  their  tonr/ues  for  pain^  And  blasphemed 
the  God  of  heaven  because  of  their  2ictins  and  their  sores,  and 
repented  not  of  their  deeds. — The  fifth  vial  was  to  discharge 
its  contents  on  the  seat  or  throne  of  the  beast.  This  beast 
is  the  Latin  kingdom,  or  papal  dominion, — its  scat  is  Rome 
itself.  The  effect  will  be,  that  his  kingdom  will  be  filled 
with  darkness,  which  is  the  emblem  of  great  distresses  and 
calamities,  as  well  as  ignorance.  This  effect  is  expressed 
more  fully  by  the  phrase,  They  gnawed  their  tongues  for 
pain.  Thus  the  prophet,  Joel,  predicting  a  time  of  peculiar 
calamity,  said,  The  day  of  the  Lord  cometh, — a  day  of 
darkness  and  gloominess,  a  day  of  clouds  and  thick  dark- 
uess.     Also  Isa.  8  :  21,  22. 

It  is  added  as  another  eftcct  of  this  vial,  that  they  blas- 
phemed God,  because  of  these  pains  and  sores ;  i.e..,  because 
of  their  distresses,  and  the  exposure  of  their  frauds,  their 
wickedness,  and  lying  abominations.  Yet  they  repented 
not  of  their  deeds.  The  pontiff,  the  cardinals,  the  almost 
numberless  priests,  monks,  and  friai's,  and  those  who  sus- 
tain them,  have  persisted  in  the  same  course  as  formerly, 
and  have  admitted  of  no  reform  in  their  religious  system  or 
general  practice. 

12.  And  the  sixth  angel  poured  07tt  his  vial  vp>on  the  great 
river  Euphrates ;  and  the  water  thereof  was  dried  up,  that 
the  ivay  of  the  kings  of  the  east  might  be  prepared. — The 


CHAPTER  XVr.  165 

sixth  vial  will  be  poured  on  the  great  river  Euphrates,  the 
effect  of  which  will  be  to  dry  up  its  waters,  and  prepare  the 
way  to  the  kingdom  of  the  east.  The  sixth  trumpet  an- 
nounced the  rise  and  conquests  of  the  Turkish  power,  under 
the  figure  of  loosing  the  four  angels  Avhich  were  limited  or 
restrained  by  the  Euphrates ;  and  the  sixth  vial  predicts 
the  destruction  of  that  power,  under  the  figure  of  drying 
vp  the  waters  of  that  river.  An  eflfect  of  this  is  declared  to 
be,  that  the  way  of  the  kings  of  the  east  may  be  prepared. 
It  is  common  in  prophetic  writings,  to  use  the  term  king^ 
for  kingdoms,  and  so  it  is  here,  for  the  literal  reading  is, 
Kings  of  those  tvho  are  at  the  rising  of  the  sun.  The  idea 
seems  to  be,  that  the  waning  of  the  Turkish  power  will 
open  the  way  for  the  free  introduction  of  Christianity  to  the 
eastern  nations. 

This  .favorable  change  is  probably  now  commenced. 
The  Sultan  has  granted  a  full  toleration  of  the  protestant 
religion,  and  is  fast  putting  an  end  to  persecution.  A  com- 
munication from  our  missionaries  among  the  Nestorians  in 
the  north-western  part  of  Persia,  informs  us,  that  the  sway 
of  the  Turkish  scepter,  "  is  novr  as  equitable  and  humane, 
as  itns  efteotual ;"  and  this  change  is  attributed  to  "  the  re- 
cent ingrafting  of  righteous  elements,  such  as  religious  tole- 
ration, the  prohibition  of  bribery,  oppression,  and  extortion 
on  the  part  of  the  rulers."  It  is  stated  by  them,  "  The 
Lord  has  now  opened  the  Koordish  mountains  to  the  gospel, 
in  a  manner  as  effectual  as  it  is  marvelous."  The  gospel  is 
having  a  mighty  effect  there  in  enlightening  the  people  and 
turning  them  to  the  service  of  God.  Thus,  the  way  to  the 
kingdoms  of  the  east  is  laid  open  to  the  Christian  church ; 
and  this  too  at  the  very  time,  v.'hen,  as  is  known,  the  wa- 
ters of  the  Turkish  power  are  being  dried  up.  As  Darius 
took  Babylon  by  cutting  a  new  channel  fiir  the  Euphrates, 
solhat  it  passed  round  one  side  of  the  city,  thus  lading  its 


166  CHAPTER  XVI. 

bed  through  the  city  bai*e;  so  protestantsare  cuttuiga  new 
channel  for  the  waters  of  salvation  in  that  region,  and  Ma- 
hometanism  -witli  the  Turkish  power,  will  fall. 

13.  And  I  saw  three  unclean  spirits  like  fror/s  come  out  of 
the  mouth  of  the  dragon,  and  out  of  the  mouth  of  the  beast, 
and  out  of  the  mouth  of  the  false  prophet. — In  connection 
■with  these  events,  John  saw  three  unclean  spirits  resem- 
bling frogs  come  out  of  the  mouth  of  the  dragon,  which  is 
the  emblem  of  the  heathen  Roman  empire,  and  out  of  the 
mouth  of  the  beast,  which  is  the  Christian  Roman  empire, 
and  out  of  the  mouth  of  the  false  prophet,  which  is  the  papal 
hierarchy.  Coming  out  of  the  mouth  shows,  that  the  utter- 
ance and  pro2>agation  of  sentiments  peculiar  to  each,  is 
what  is  intended.  This  appears  from  the  explanation  given 
in  the  next  verse  : — For  they  are  the  spirits  of  devils,  i.e., 
demons  ;  and  to  these  is  assigned  the  work  of  intelligent  be- 
ings,— a  work  requiring  great  skill,  wisdom  and  intluence. 
They  go  forth  to  the  kings  of  the  la?id,  the  empire,  and  of 
the  whole  world,  to  rouse  them  up  and  assemble  them  to  a 
great  moral  conflict,  called  the  battle  of  the  great  day  of 
God  Almighty.  The  idea  is,  that  about  the  time  of  the 
overthrow  of  papacy  and  Lfahometanism  in  Europe  and 
Asia,  there  will  be  a  remarkable  rousing  up  of  the  spirit  of 
heathenism,  and  of  nominal  and  spurious  Christianity,  such 
as  now  pervades  the  old  world,  to  make  a  strong  resistance, 
a  general  and  virulent  opposition  to  the  progress  of  true  re- 
ligion. This  great  struggle  between  the  enemies  and  the 
friends  of  the  cause  of  Christ,  will  be  the  mightiest  and 
the  last,  previous  to  the  millennium.  It  is  well  styled  the 
battle  of  the  great  day  of  God  Almighty  ;  and  is  doubtless 
already  begun. 

We  should  observe  the  similarity  of  these  last  plagues 
to  those,  which  were  inflicted  on  the  Egyptians.     One  of 


CHAPTER  XVI.  167 

those  was  the  breaking  out  of  boils  and  blains  on  the  peo- 
ple ; — another  was,  that  the  rivers  and  fountains  became  as 
blood  ; — another  was  darkness ; — another  was  that  of  the 
frogs  ; — another  of  fire  and  hail ; — and  the  slaying  of  the 
first-born  was  a  miniature  of  what  will  be  done  in  the  course 
of  this  great  battle,  in  which  God's  retributive  vengeance 
on  the  enemies  of  his  people,  will  be  signally  displayed. 

These  impure  spirits  work  siptis^  not  real  miracles,  but 
deceptive  tricks  to  increase  their  influence,  and  accomplish 
their  purposes.  It  is  well  known,  that  these  have  been,  and 
still  are  very  numerous  with  the  Romanists  ;  and  to  prop  up 
their  declining  power,  they  will  be  practiced  in  time  to 
come. 

15.  Behold,  I  come  as  a  thief.  Blessed  is  he  that  watch- 
eth,  and  keepeth  his  garments,  lest  he  walk  naked,  and  they 
see  his  shame. — To  those  who  are  blinded  by  their  delu- 
sions and  are  slumbering  in  false  security,  the  providential 
coming  of  Christ  to  do  these  things,  will  be  as  unexpected 
as  the  stealthy  approach  of  a  thief.  He,  therefore,  is  pro- 
nounced happy,  who  watches  and  keeps  his  garments  about 
him ;  otherwise,  being  roused  from  sleep  he  has  to  make 
his  escape  in  nakedness,  and  be  exposed  to  shame.  These 
will  be  times  of  great  trial,  and  evei'y  one  should  be  well 
clad  in  the  garments  of  righteousness,  the  graces  of  the 
Christian,  and  be  watchful  against  error,  and  delusion. 

16.  And  he  gathered  them  together  into  a  place  called  in 
the  Hebrew  tongue  Armageddon. — And  he,  that  is  God,  (for 
there  is  no  other  antecedent  for  this  word,)  gathered  the 
enemies  of  his  cause  to  a  place  called  Armageddon.  This 
is  supposed  to  be  the  valley  near  Mount  Megiddo  where 
two  great  battles  were  fought,  mentioned  in  2  Kings  23  : 
29,  and  in  Judges  4  :  16-19,     In  that  country,  perhaps, 


1G8  CHAPTER  XVI. 

will  be  the  severest  part  of  the  struggle  of  the  two  great 
antichristian  i)owers  against  true  Christianity.  Just  at  that 
crisis  the  seventh  vial  is  poured  out,  and  great  changes  take 
place. 

17.  And  the  seventh  angel  poured  out  his  vial  into  the 
air  ;  and  there  came  a  great  voice  out  of  the  temple  of  heaven^ 
from  the  throne,  saying ^Jt  is  done. — The  seventh  vial  is  to 
be  poured  into  the  air,  indicatiiig  perhaps  the  universality  of 
its  effects,  aad  jiarticularly  its  effects  on  the  kingdom  of  the 
prince  of  tlie  power  of  the  air.  ^  great  voice  from  the 
temple  of  heaven,  is  a  proclamation  from  the  divine  pres- 
• -ence.  The  brief  and  emphntio  announce=nSent  is.  It  is  done' 
The  period  for  the  continuance  of  false  religions  will  now 
draw  to  a  close.  Heatlienisui,  Mahomotanism,  and  Popery 
will  be  swept  away.  The  era  of  .millennial  light,  truth, 
.and  hoiy  influences  will  then  beghi  to  dawn  upon  the 
world. 

This  seventh  vial  correspfinds  with  the  seventh  trumpet, 
at  the  sounding  of  which,  as  we  are  told,  the  mystery  of 
God  will  be  finished,  and  there  will  be  great  voices  in 
heaven,  saying,  '  The  kingdoms  of  this  world  are  become 
the  kingdoms  of  our  Lord,  and  of  his  Christ ;  and  he  shall 
reign  forever  and  ever.'  Both  carry  the  prediction  of  events 
onward  to  the  millennium,  which  will  commence,  as  I  be- 
lieve, in  the  year  two  thousand.  The  time  from  the  pres- 
ent to  that,  will  be,  in  a  peculiar  sense,  the  time  of  prepa- 
ration, in  which  there  will  be  great  cqmmotions,  wonder, 
fill  changes,  bloody  wars,  and  mighty  revolutions.  These 
are  predicted  in  tlie  next  verse. 

IS.  And  there  were  voices,  and  thunders,  and  lightnings  ; 
and  there  was  a  great  earthquake,  stich  as  'was  not  since  men 
were  vpon  the  earth,  so  mighigun  earthquake,  and  so  great. — 


CHAPTER  XVI.  169 

Voices  are  governmental  edicts  and  proclamations.  Thun- 
ders and  lightnings  are  symbols  of  wars  and  hostile  inva- 
sions ;  and  an  earthquake  is  that  of  a  revolution.  There 
is  a  special  importance  attributed  to  the  earthquake  here 
predicted.  The  epithets  employed  in  this  instance,  lead  us 
to  conclude,  that  it  will  be  vastly  important,  as  respects  the 
objects  aimed  at,  and  the  effects  to  be  produced.  It  will 
be  ffreat  and  mighty  as  to  its  extent,  embracing  as  it  doubt- 
less will,  all  the  nations  which  once  composed  the  Roman 
empire.  Thrones  will  fall ;  kingdoms,  empires  and  states 
will  be  overturned;  and  a  new  order  of  things  will  succeed. 
Tyranny,  despotism,  oppressive  rule,  both  civil  and  eccle- 
siastical, will  be  abolished  ;  and  in  their  stead  will  be  es- 
tablished constitutional  governments,  guaranteeing  to  the 
people  their  rights,  and  having  in  view  the  best  good  of  the 
whole.  It  is  probable,  that  the  revolutions  and  commo- 
tions in  Europe  which  have  signalized  the  past  and  present 
year,  are  tending  to  this  result. 

19.  And  the  great  city  was  divided  into  three  parts^  and 
the  cities  of  the  nations  fell :  and  great  Babylon  came  in  re- 
membrance before  God,  to  give  unto  her  the  cup  of  the  wine 
of  the  fierceness  of  his  ivrath. — The  great  city  refers  prob- 
ably to  the  papal  dominion,  and  its  division  into  three 
parts,  may  signify  three  great  parties,  like  those  now  exist- 
ing in  Italy,  viz :  those  who  are  in  favor  of  the  civil  and 
ecclesiastical  supremacy  of  the  pope  ;  those  who  would 
allow  him  ecclesiastical  supremacy  only  ;  and  those  who 
are  for  neither,  but  would  abolish  the  hierarchy  entirely. 

In  this  period  of  convulsions,  the  cities  of  the  nations  tvill 
fall.  This  struggle  for  civil  and  religious  liberty,  which  is 
now  going  on,  has  and  will  yet  cause  the  capture  and  re- 
duction of  the  principal  cities  of  nations,  or  the  civil 
power  of  those  nations  will  be  greatly  diminished. 


170  CHAPTER  XVI. 

And  great  Babylon,  the  mystical  name  of  Rome,  was 
remembered  by  God,  to  give  to  her  in  his  retributive  just- 
ice, the  wine-cup  of  his  terrible  wrath.  This  is  an  allu- 
sion, perhaps,  to  the  ancient  practice  of  putting  criminals 
to  death  by  giving  them  poisonous  mixtures.  That  anti- 
christian  hierarchy,  which  has  destroyed  the  lives  of  mil- 
lions of  protestants,  is  doomed  to  experience  the  awfulness 
of  divine  indignation.  An  expanded  view  of  this  is  given 
in  the  eighteenth  chapter. 

20.  And  every  island  fled  away  ^  and  the  moimtains  were 
not  found. — The  fleeing  away  of  islands  and  mountains, 
means  the  subversion  of  states  and  kingdoms,  together 
with  the  long  established  political  or  religious  systems. 
The  phrase  occurs  in  this  sense  in  the  sixth  chapter,  where 
the  reference  is  to  the  overthrow  of  heathenism  in  the 
reign  of  Constantine,  and  the  cessation  of  those  false  sys- 
tems which  were  connected  with  it.  A  mountain  is  the 
symbol  of  a  kingdom.  Thus,  in  Nebuchadnezzar's  dream, 
the  stone,  cut  out  without  hands,  that  smote  the  image, 
became  a  yreat  mountain  and  filled  the  whole  earth,  Avhere 
mountain  means  the  kingdom  of  Christ.  So  in  Isa.  2  :  2. 
Tlie  mountain  of  the  Lord's  house  shall  be  established  in 
the  top  of  the  mountains ;  i.e.,  the  kingdom  of  the  saints 
will  be  established  over  all  the  kingdoms  of  men.  The 
fleeing  away  of  the  islands  and  mountains,  will  be  the 
overthrow  of  all  the  kingdoms  and  hierarchies,  which  are 
opposed  to  the  cause  of  the  Redeemer,  with  their  idola- 
trous and  oppressive  systems,  religious  and  civil.  It  is 
the  divine  purpose,  that  "  the  nation  and  the  kingdom,  that 
will  not  serve  him  shall  perish.'  The  mountains  were  not 
found,  is  a  very  strong  expression,  showing  as  in  the 
eighteenth  verse,  that  the  revolutions  and  consequent 
changes  will  sweep  away   the   existing   governments,  so 


CHAPTER  XVI.  171 

completely,  that  no  vestiges  of  them  will  remain.     An  en- 
tire new  order  of  things  will  be  produced. 

21.  And  there  fell  upon  men  a  great  hail  out  of  heaven, 
every  stone  about  the  weight  of  a  talent :  and  menhlas2iheined 
God  because  of  the  plague  of  the  hail  ;  for  the  plague  thereof 
ioas  exceeding  great. — What  is  signified  by  a  great  hail  out 
of  heaven  1  One  of  the  plagues  inflicted  on  Egypt  was  a 
tempest  of  hail,  which  destroyed  the  flax  and  the  barley, 
two  of  the  most  valuable  productions  of  that  country,  and 
with  these  whatever  was  growing  in  the  fields.  Thus  were 
their  means  of  sustenance  and  the  sources  of  their  wealth 
cut  off.  It  is  to  be  observed,  that  the  hail  in  the  prediction 
before  us,  fell  on  the  w^e?i,  and  that  it  came  out  of  heaven, 
which,  as  I  have  repeatedly  remarked,  is  in  this  book,  the 
emblem  of  government.  Now,  it  seems  to  me,  that  there 
is  a  peculiar  significancy  in  each  of  these  expressions  ;  else 
why  should  it  be  said  that  the  hail  fell  on  the  men.,  rather 
than  the  earth,  or  fruits  of  the  earth  1  And  as  hail  comes 
from  the  clouds  as  a  matter  of  course,  why  should  it  be 
specified  here  that  it  came  out  of  heaven  1  The  interpi-et- 
ation  which  I  would  give  is  this :  there  will  be  ruinous 
burdens  laid  on  the  people  by  the  government,  consisting 
of  exorbitant  exactions  in  the  levying  of  taxes  and  the 
plundering  of  their  property ;  in  conscriptions  of  men  to 
fill  the  armies  of  conflicting  nations  in  these  turbulent 
times  ;  and  in  oppressing  them  by  other  means,  destructive 
to  their  interests  and  welfare.  Wars  and  revolutions,  des- 
titution and  distress  will  probably  characterize  this  period. 
A  talent  was  a  term  used  anciently  for  a  certain  amount 
of  money ;  the  Roman  silver  talent  being  of  the  value  of 
about  a  thousand  dollars ;  the  Jewish  talent  was  double 
that  value. 

histead  of  true  repentance  while  suftering  these  calami- 


172  CHAPTER  XVI. 

ties,  the  people  will  blaspheme  God,  that  is,  speak  against 
him,  and  manifest  great  obduracy  and  impiety.  It  is 
usually  the  case,  that  if  men  are  not  subdued  and  reformed 
by  divine  judgments,  they  are  made  worse  ;  more  obstinate 
and  inimical  toward  Him  who  chastises  them.  An  inten- 
sive expression  is  added,  teaching,  that  these  calamities 
will  be  peculiarly  severe.  The  plague  of  the  hail  was  ex- 
ceedingly great. 

We  are  assured  then  that  the  period  of  the  seventh  vial 
will  be  distinguished  by  unusual  overturnings  and  distresses, 
even  such  as  have  never  been  since  men  were  upon  the 
earth.  It  will  be  the  transition  period  in  which  the  domin- 
ion of  Satan  will  be  weakened,  and  the  cause  of  civil  and 
religious  liberty,  of  truth  and  godliness  will  obtain  the 
ascendency.  The  final  overthrow  of  that  despotism,  civil 
and  religious,  with  which  the  eastern  M'orkl  has  been  cursed, 
will  then  be  witnessed ;  and  governments  will  become  the 
guardian  power  of  the  rights,  the  peace,  and  the  welfare  of 
men.  A  glance  at  the  state  of  the  world,  is  sufficient  to 
convince  any  one  that  the  preparation  for  the  reign  of 
Christ,  must  involve  vast  changes  in  almost  everything 
pertaining  to  the  social,  political,  and  religious  state  of 
mankind. 

Ours  is  that  preparation  period.  Ours  is  the  time  for 
recruiting  the  army  that  is  to  fight  the  battle  of  the  great 
day  of  God  Almighty.  Ours  is  the  important  work  of 
equipi)ing  the  men  and  the  women  for  that  prolonged  con- 
test, which  already  is  begun.  But,  let  me  not  convey  the 
idea  that  we  arc  exempts.  We  are  to  bear  our  part,  not 
only  in  preparing  for  what  is  to  come,  but  in  actual  service, 
for  even  now  the  battle  is  begun.  Our  talents,  our  strength, 
our  influence,  our  prayers,  our  eflbrts,  our  almsgiving,  are 
needed  now,  and  more  now,  perhaps,  thaii  they  ever  will 
be  hereafter.     It  is  a  srcat  thin"  to  live  in  such  an  ase  as 


CHAPTER  XVII.  173 

this.  It  is  a  great  honor  to  be  in  the  forward  ranks  of  that 
army  which  is  moving  on  conquering  and  to  conquer  under 
the  guidance  of  the  King  of  lungs.  Truly  our  responsi- 
bilities are  great ! 


CHAPTER    XVII. 

A  description  of  the  Papal  Church. 

As  THE  destruction  of  papacy  is  the  next  event  in  the  se- 
ries, the  announcement  of  it  is  preceded  by  a  description  of 
that  hierarchy ;  and  though  penned  more  than  a  thousand 
years  before  it  had  attained  the  height  of  its  supremacy, 
it  is  accurate  in  every  particular.  A  woman  is  a  scriptural 
emblem  of  the  church,  and  also  of  a  city.  The  true  church, 
maintaining  purity  of  worship  and  doctrine,  is  styled  'a 
chaste  virgin,' — '  the  spouse  of  Christ,' — '  the  bride  and  wife 
of  the  Lamb.'  A  church  that  is  corrupt  in  doctrine  and 
worship,  so  that  it  forfeits  its  character,  and  becomes  repro- 
bate, is  called  a  harlot,  and  sometimes  an  adulteress.  Re- 
ferring to  the  early  period  of  its  purity,  we  have  had  the 
true  church  represented  as  a  woman  clothed  with  the  sun, 
and  the  moon  under  her  feet,  and  a  crown  of  twelve  stars 
on  her  head.  12:1.  Now,  we  have  an  apostate  church  de- 
scribed in  its  deepest  degeneracy,  as  an  abandoned  woman 
given  to  mercenary  lewdness  and  prostitution  ;  and  her  con- 
demnation is  declared. 

1  and  2.  And  there  came  one  of  the  seven  angels  ivhich 
had  the  seven  vials,  and  talked  with  me,  saying  unto  me. 
Come  hither  ;  I  will  shoiv  unto  thee  the  judgment  of  the  great 
whore  that  sitteth  xqion  many  waters  ;    With  ivhom  the  kings 


174  CHAPTER  XVII. 

of  the  earth  have  committed  formcation,  and  the  Inhabitants 
of  the  earth  have  been  made  drunk  with  the  wine  of  her  for- 
nication.— One  of  the  angels  commissioned  for  the  infliction 
of  the  seven  last  plagues,  informed  John  that  he  would  now 
disclose  to  him  the  condemnation  of  that  great  mercenary/ 
'prostitute,  who  sitteth  on  many  waters.  The  term  great, 
may  refer  either  to  the  extent  of  her  influence  and  power, 
or  to  the  enormity  of  her  wickedness.  The  many  waters 
over  which  she  presides  as  mistress,  are  explained  in  the 
fifteenth  verse  to  be  '  peoples,  and  multitudes,  and  nations, 
and  tongues.'  Sitting  on  those  waters  implies  an  establish- 
ed authority  and  control  over  them. 

With  this  lewd  woman,  the  kings  of  the  earth,  i.e.,  of 
the  empire,  have  committed  fornication, — have  adopted  her 
superstitions,  her  corrupt  doctrines,  and  her  wicked  prac- 
tices. The  people  also  have  been  intoxicated  with  the  wine 
of  her  fornication, — have  drank  in  greedily  her  errors ;  and 
have  been  infatuated  with  them.  As  prostitutes  gave  love 
potions  to  inflame  the  passions  of  their  paramours,  and  at- 
tach them  more  closely  to  them  ;  so  that  corrupt  church 
has  invented  almost  numberless  ways  to  excite  admiration, 
to  gratify  pride,  and  infatuate  the  people.  Its  imposing 
ceremonies,  the  splendid  vestments  of  its  officials,  its  nu- 
merous festivals,  its  gorgeous  processions,  and  its  adoption 
of  the  most  attractive  portions  of  the  rites  of  their  heathen 
ancestors,  are  all  designed  to  bind  her  votaries  to  her  in 
the  strongest  attachment.  The  world  beholds  the  fulfill- 
ment of  this  prediction. 

3.  So  he  carried  me  aioay  in  the  spirit  into  the  toilder- 
ness:  and  I  saw  a  woman  sit  xqmn  a  scarlet-colored  beast, 
full  of  names  ofblasphemij,  having  seven  heads  and  ten  horns. 
— In  this  visionary  exhiljition,  John  seemed  to  himself  to  be 
carried  away  into  a  wilderness,  which  is  to  be  understood 


CHAPTER  XVII.  175 

as  an  appropriate  emblem  of  the  desolating  effects  of  this 
system  of  delusion  and  oppression,  for  the  wilderness  was 
lohere  the  ivoman  resided.  There  he  saw  her  sitting  on  a 
scarlet-colored  beast,  the  same  wild  beast  as  that  described  in 
the  thirteenth  chapter,  which  is  the  Latin  empire,  whose 
number  is  666.  That  empire  supported,  carried,  and  obey- 
ed the  meretricious  woman.  To  designate  it  more  fully, 
its  color  is  mentioned,  which,  as  is  well  known,  has  been 
the  distinguishing  color  in  the  personal  decorations  and 
equipages  of  the  Eoman  emperors,  senators,  generals,  and 
chief  officers. 

This  beast  had  many  names  of  blasphemy,  or  blasphem- 
ous titles  and  appellations, — such  as  belong  only  to  God. 
These  were  impious  and  profane, — such,  for  instance,  as, 
'  The  eternal  city,'  and  the  pope  is  called,  '  His  holiness,' 
'  Sovereign  of  kings  and  kingdoms,'  '  Christ's  vicegerent,' 
'  God  upon  earth,' 

This  beast  had  seven  heads,  which  are  explained  in  the 
ninth  and  tenth  verses  to  mean  either  the  seven  hills  on 
which  Rome  was  built,  or  the  seven  forms  of  government 
under  which  the  empire  existed,  called  seven  kings.  The 
ten  horns  are  the  ten  kingdoms  comprised  in  the  empire. 

4.  And  the  looman  was  arrayed  in  purple  and  scarlet 
color ^  and  decked  with  gold,  and  precious  stones^  and  pearls, 
having  a  golden  cup  in  her  hand,  full  of  abominations  and 
filthiness  of  her  fornication. — Tlie  attire  and  ornaments  of 
the  woman  were  most  gorgeous  and  costly.  Instead  of  be- 
ing arrayed  in  linen,  clean,  aiid  white  as  the  spouse  of 
Christ  is,  this  harlot  glares  out  before  the  world  in  gaudy 
colors ; — the  j)opes  with  the  scarlet  tiara  and  triple  crown, 
and  robes  of  the  same  hue  ; — the  cardinals  with  red  caps 
and  red  stockings  extending  to  the  knee,  as  if  it  had  been 
for  ages  the   intention  to  verify  this  prediction  of  John. 


176  CHAPTER  XVII. 

Tlie  riches  of  the  old  and  the  new  world  have  for  many  cen- 
turies been  poured  into  the  treasm-ies  of  that  church,  and 
have  been  profusely  lavished  to  increase  its  splendor  and 
gorgeousness. 

In  the  hand  of  the  woman  was  a  cup  filled  with  the  offen- 
siveness  and  uneleanness  of  her  fornication,  '  This,'  as  a 
writer  says,  'rej)resents  the  fascinating  allurements,  the 
impostures,  delusions,  promises  of  impunity,  indulgences, 
absolutions,  with  hopes  of  worldly  interest  and  preferment, 
by  which  this  church  has  obtained  and  preserved  her  iriflu- 
ence,  and  seduced  men  to  join  in  her  spiritual  fornication 
and  corrupt  worship.'  As  the  church  is  called  the  spouse, 
the  bride,  the  Lamb's  wife,  the  corruption  of  its  worship, 
the  introduction  of  heathenish  and  idolatrous  practices,  is 
termed  lewdness  and  adultery.  With  great  propriety  are 
these  terms  employed  in  this  case,  as  descriptive  of  a 
church  whose  worship  is  a  combination  of  heathen  and 
Jewish  rites  with  Christianity  ;  and  which  sanctions  and 
prescribes  the  worship  of  saints,  and  relics,  and  statues,  and 
crucifixes,  and  the  virgin  Mary.  With  these  abominations, 
the  nations  have  been  infatuated,  and  intoxicated  as  with 
the  contents  of  an  inebriating  cup. 

5.  And  npon  her  forehead  was  a  name  written,  mystery, 
Bahjlon  the  Great,  the  mother  of  harlots  and  abominations 
of  the  earth. — The  name  of  this  licentious  woman  is  made 
conspicuous  upon  the  forehead, — a  name  which  proclaims  her 
character,  infamous  and  revolting  as  it  is.  This  is  a  fore- 
showing of  the  flict,  that  she  is  not  ashamed  of  her  wicked- 
ness, but  vaunts  it  before  the  world,  and  glories  in  it.  The 
name  inscribed  is  '  Mystery,  Babylon  the  great,  the  mother 
of  harlots  and  abominations  of  the  earth.''  Fleming  says, 
'that  not  many  centuries  back  on  the  front  of  the  pope's 
mitre,  the  word  mystery  used  to  Ik*  inscribed,  and  was  worn 


CHAPTER  XVII.  177 

till  the  reformers  discovered  and  pointed  it  out  to  the  peo- 
ple as  the  scripture  mark  of  Antichrist,  and  that  the  word 
was  then  erased.'  The  sentiment  expressed  by  the  exhibi- 
tion of  this  descriptive  and  reproachful  name  upon  the  fore- 
head, is,  that  the  character  of  this  woman  is  fully  known, 
and  that  she  is  not  ashamed  of  it,  but  glories  in  it.  As 
Babylon  of  old  was  the  capital  of  the  vast  Assyrian  empire, 
and  the  center  of  idolatry,  and  oppression  of  God's  people  ; 
so  Rome,  excelling  in  these  respects,  is  called  Babylon  the 
great.  And,  as  she  has  been  the  prolific  source  of  corrupt 
and  corrupting  influences,  she  is  styled.  The  mother  of 
harlots  and  of  those  spiritual  abominations  which  she  has 
spread  over  the  earth. 

6.  And  I  saw  tlte  woman  drunken  ivith  the  blood  of  the 
saints,  and  with  the  blood  of  the  martyrs  of  Jesus  :  and  when 
I  saw  her,  I  wondered  with  great  admiration. — Another 
characteristic  mark  of  the  harlot  is,  that  she  is  a  mui'- 
deress.  She  riots  in  the  blood  of  the  saints  and  martyrs, — 
is  even  intoxicated  with  it,  as  an  inebriate  with  strong  drink. 
Her  cruelty,  oppression,  persecution  and  slaughter  of  be- 
lievers, have  been  flagitious  and  notorious.  Millions  have 
been  put  to  death  in  all  the  horrible  ways  of  torment, 
which  ingenuity  could  suggest.  These  atrocious  acts  have 
been  perpetrated  in  one  form  and  another  for  more  than  a 
thousand  years.  I  beheld,  says  Daniel,  and  the  same  horn 
made  ivar  with  the  saints  and  2yrevailed  against  them.  The 
contemplation  of  this  fact  filled  John  with  amazement  and 
horror. 

7  and  8.  And  the  angel  said  unto  me,  Wherefore  didst 
thou  marvel  ?  I  will  tell  thee  the  mystery  of  the  woman,  and 
of  the  beast  that  carrieth  her,  which  hath  the  seven  heads  and 
ten  horns.     The  beast  that  thou  saivest  ivas,  and  is  not  ;  and 

8* 


178  CHAPTER  XVII. 

shall  ascend  ok  I.  of  the  hottomleas  p«7,  and  go  into  perdition  ; 
and  theij  that  dwell  on  the  earth  shall  wonder,  {whose  names 
loere  not  written  in  the  book  of  life  from  the  foundation  of 
the  ivorld,)  tvhen  they  behold  the  beast  that  tvas,  and  is  not, 
and  yet  is. — The  angel  observing  the  wonder  of  the  Chris- 
tian seer,  offered  to  disclose  the  mystery,  and  explain  to 
him  more  clearly,  who  this  woman  is,  and  what  is  the  beast 
that  carries  her.  A  wild  beast  is  the  emblem  of  an  oppres- 
sive, persecuting  government.  The  beast  with  seven  heads 
and  ten  horns  is  the  Latin  kingdom  or  Roman  empire.  It 
was  and  is  not.  It  existed  at  first  as  a  pagan  or  heathen 
kingdom.  When  Christianity  obtained  ascendency  in  the 
reign  of  Constantine,  it  ceased  to  be  a  heathen  kingdom, 
and  became  nominally  CIn-istian.  At  the  close  of  the  verse 
it  is  added,  '  and  yet  is,''  which  means,  tliat  it  had  become 
idolatrous  and  oppressive  again  under  the  papal  autlioiity. 
Says  Bishop  Newton,  "  Tlic  empire  was  idolatrous  under 
the  heathen  emperors,  and  then  ceased  to  be  so  under  Chris- 
tian emperors,  and  then  became  so  again  under  the  Roman 
pontiffs,  and  hath  continued  so  ever  since.  But  in  this  last 
form  it  will  go  into  perdition." 

The  papal  form  will  resemble  the  pagan  form  inasmuch 
as  it  will  arise  out  of  the  bottomless  pit,  which  is  an  emblem 
of  a  state  of  darkness,  ignorance  and  de])ravity  in  the  people. 
It  was  from  just  that  state,  that  both  those  systems  arose. 

The  expression,  was,  and  is  not,  and  yet  is,  has  provetl 
true  politically,  as  well  as  religiously.  For  the  empire  was 
overthrown  by  the  northern  barbarians  in  A.D.  467.  It  re- 
mained in  a  broken  dilapidated  condition  till  Pepin,  king 
of  France,  made  the  pope  a  temporal  prince  by  the  gift  of 
certain  states  in  A.D.  758,  and  Charlemagne  soon  after  en- 
larged and  confirmed  this  grant,  in  consideration  of  which 
the  pope  gave  him  the  title  of  cmijcror  of  Rome.  The  pope 
has  possessed  and  exercised  tcinporal  power  ever  since,  till 


CHAPTER  XVII.  179 

the  last  year,  wheu  it  was  taken  from  him  by  his  own  sub- 
jects, and  he  fled  in  disguise  to  Gaeta.  By  the  interven- 
tion of  other  nations,  it  has  been  restored  to  him ;  but  the 
time  is  probably  near,  when  the  beast,  the  Latin  kingdom, 
will  go  into  perdition ;  and  we  may  soon  see  this  last  rem- 
nant of  the  empire  pass  away  forever. 

They  who  dwell  on  the  earth, — the  Roman  earth,  will  be 
filled  with  amazement,  as  they  witness  this  final  destruction 
of  the  beast.  Observe  what  is  the  character  of  those  who 
are  the  devotees  of  this  antichristian  power.  They  are 
declared  to  be  those  tohose  names  are  not  written  in  the 
book  of  life: — tliose  who  are  not  the  true  followers  of 
Christ, — whose  names  are  not  enrolled  as  those  who  have 
spiritual  life. 

9.  And  here  is  the  mind  lohich  hath  wisdom.  The  seven 
heads  are  seven  mountains,  on  which  the  looman  sitteth. — 
The  papists  have  often  denied,  that  this  description  was  in- 
tended to  be  applied  to  the  Roman  hierarchy;  but  the 
mind  that  hath  wisdom  will  readily  understand  the  expla- 
nation which  the  angel  gives.  As  in  a  former  instance  the 
kingdom  alluded  to  was  known  by  the  number  666,  chap. 
13  :  18;  so  here  the  same  thing  is  made  evident  by  the 
description  which  follows.  In  the  first  j)lace,  the  seven 
heads  are  seven  mountains  on  which  the  woman  sitteth. 
Rome,  the  seat  of  this  power,  civil  and  ecclesiastical,  is 
built  on  seven  hills.  These  were  named,  the  Palatine,  Capi- 
toline,  Quirinal,  Cajlian,  Esquiliae,  Viminal,  and  Aventine. 
This  designates  the  locality  of  the  woman's  residence. 

In  the  second  place,  the  seven  heads  designate  the  seven 
kinds  of  government,  called  here  seven  kings,  under  which 
the  empire  had  existed,  except  the  last,  which  was  yet 
future  when  John  wrote.  The  first  of  these  was  the  gov- 
ernment of  kings, — the  second  was  that  of  dictators, — tlie 


180  CHAPTER  XVII. 

third  that  of  praitors, — the  fourth  that  of  consuls, — the 
fifth  that  of  triumvirs, — the  sixth  that  of  emperors,  called 
Caesars,  which  was  the  one  under  which  John  lived,  and 
the  seventh  was  that  of  patricians,  or  as  some  think,  it  was 
the  exarchate  of  Ravenna,  under  which  Rome  was  a  duke- 
dom for  about  one  hundred  years. 

Five  of  these  kings,  or  governments,  had  fallen  or  passed 
away  when  John  wrote: — one  is,  the  imperial  then  existed, 
and  one  was  to  come,  and  would  continue  but  a  short  time. 
The  patriciate  continued  only  forty-five  years,  whereas  the 
imperial  which  preceded  it,  continued  more  than  five  hun- 
dred years. 

11.  And  the  beast  that  tvas,  and  is  not,  even  he  is  the 
eighth,  and  is  of  the  seven,  and  goetli  into  perdition. — The 
wild  beast  that  was,  and  is  not,  and  yet  is,  we  have  just 
shown  to  be  the  Latin  kingdom.  It  was  a  pagan  idolatrous 
kingdom,  then  it  was  not  such  when  Constantine  and  his 
successoi-s  eradicated  paganism  and  made  Christianity  the 
only  religion  tolerated ;  and  now  under  papacy  it  has  be- 
come heathen  and  idolatrous  again  by  a  profane  mingling 
of  heathen  rites  and  customs  with  Christianity.  Any  per- 
son who  will  read  the  little  book  of  Conyers  Middlcton, 
D.D,  entitled  a  "  Letter  from  Rome,  showing  an  exact  con- 
formitg  between  Pojoery  and  Paganism,^''  will  have  abundant 
proof  that  the  draconic  beast  still  is  having  his  eighth  form, 
wliich  is  the  papal,  and  it  is  of  the  seven,  as  being  a  con- 
tinuation of  the  same  power,  and  having  the  character  of 
its  predecessors  in  respect  to  oppression  and  persecution. 
The  old  Roman  empire  exercised  control  over  the  nations 
of  Europe  ;  though  it  did  not  destroy  their  nationality.  So, 
papacy  has  exercised  a  control  over  those  nations,  and  popes 
liave  put  forth  the  claini,  that  there  is  no  rightful  author- 
ity, which  is  not  derived  from  them  and  subject  to  thcnj. 


CHAPTER  XVII.  181 

They  have  deposed  and  anatliematized  kings  and  absolved 
their  subjects  from  allegiance  to  them.  But  this  eighth 
government  goeth  into  perdition,  i.e.,  will  be  utterly  de- 
stroyed. 

12.  Atid  the  ten  horns  which  thou  saioest  are  ten  kings, 
which  have  received  no  kingdom  as  yet ;  but  receive  power  as 
kings  one  hour  vnth  the  beast. — Here  we  are  told  what  is 
meant  by  the  ten  horns.  They  are  ten  kings,  or  sovereign- 
ties. The  Roman  empire  in  the  west  comprised  ten  king- 
doms, viz. :  France,  Spain,  Great  Britain,  Germany,  Swe- 
den, Denmark,  Poland,  Hungary,  Portugal  and  Italy. 
These  had  not  received  supreme  and  independent  power 
when  John  had  these  visions ;  but  they  had  power  as 
subordinate  sovereignties,  one  hour,  that  is,  at  the  same 
time  with  the  beast.  We  conclude,  then,  that  the  events 
which  will  bring  ruin  on  the  papal  hierarchy,  will  occasion 
the  overthrow  of  the  governments  of  the  ten  kingdoms. 
They  are  the  same  as  the  ten  toes  of  the  image  which 
Nebuchadnezzar  dreamed  he  saw,  and  which  are  to  be 
ground  to  powder  by  the  stone  which  was  cut  out  without 
hands,  and  became  a  great  mountain  and  filled  the  whole 
earth.  If  we  date  the  rise  of  the  papal  power  at  a.d.  606, 
the  1260  years  of  its  continuance  will  end  in  1848,  accord- 
ing to  the  prophetic  time  of  360  days  to  a  year,  or  in  1866 
of  common  time.  We  may  expect  therefore  to  hear  of 
convulsions  and  overturnings  among  the  nations  of  Europe, 
like  those  which  have  recently  taken  place. 

13.  These  have  one  mind,  and  shall  give  their  'poiver  and 
strength  unto  the  beast. — This  is  a  declaration,  that  all  these 
nations  will  be  agreed  in  upholding  popery.  Whatever  dif- 
ferences have  existed  among  them  in  regard  to  other  things ; 
— though  they  have  waged  most  blo(xly  wars  against  e;ich 


182  CHAPTER  XVII. 

other,  they  have  agreed  in  acknowledging  the  snprernaey 
of  the  Roman  beast,  and  in  former  ages  have  upheld  it 
with  all  their  influence  and  resources.  Having  thus  given 
their  power  and  strength  to  the  beast,  they  must  be  in- 
volved in  its  ruin. 

14.  These  shall  make  tvar  with  the  Lamb,  and  the  Lamh 
shall  overcome  them :  for  lie  is  Lord  of  lords,  and  King  of 
kings ;  and  they  that  are  with  him  are  culled,  and  chosen, 
and  faithful. — This  prediction  should  be  seriously  consid- 
ered ;  for  it  shows,  that  the  Catholic  nations  of  Europe  as 
a  whole,  have  been  opposed  to  the  pure  and  simple  religion 
of  the  gospel,  for  the  last  thousand  years;  and  that  their 
prevailing  systems  and  jjractices,  though  professedly  Clnis- 
tian,  have  been  hostile  to  the  cause  of  Christ.  Till  the 
reformation,  there  was  scarcely  an  exception  to  this,  and 
even  now  the  greatest  portion  of  the  population  of  Europe 
is  wholly  and  strongly  opposed  to  the  holy  doctrines  and 
the  pure  spirituality  of  the  gospel.  Ignorance,  superstition, 
and  formalism  still  maintain  their  predominance.  Thus 
they  do  still  make  war  with  the  Lamb. 

But  he  will  overcome  them  by  the  means  he  has  ap- 
pointed,— by  distressing  calamities,  by  terrible  judgments, 
war,  pestilence,  and  famine,  and  by  his  truth  working  pow- 
erfully in  the  minds  of  the  peojjle,  eiilighteniug  and  refurju- 
ing  them. — The  certainty,  tliat  Clu-ist  will  overcdme  tlieiii, 
is  predicated  on  the  fact,  that  he  is  Kiug  of  kings  and  Lord 
of  lords, — lie  is  the  supreme  ruler,  and  of  course  will  make 
his  own  cause  triumphant. 

It  is  added  as  another  fact  connected  with  this  victory, 
They  who  are  with  him  are  called,  and  chosen,  and  faithful. 
Ilis  true  servants  are  those  who  are  with  him; — they  are 
called  by  his  Spirit,  and  made  his; — they  are  chosen  as  ves- 
sels of  mercy  and  designated  tuperfurm  a  great  work;  and 


CHAPTER  XVII.  183 

they  arc  llutlifiil, — are  conscientious,  intrepid,  and  persever- 
ing. Such  were  the  reformers,  such  were  the  puritans,  and 
such  are  many  now  who  aj'e  laboiing  in  the  same  cause. 

15.  And  he  saith  unto  ?ne,  The  tvaters  tvhich  thou  sawest, 
where  the  whore  sitteth,  are  2i(!oples^  and  multitudes,  and  na- 
tions, and  tongues. — Here  is  the  angel's  explanation  of  the 
term  waters^  as  used  in  this  vision.  It  means  a  multitude 
of  people  of  different  nations  and  languages,  foresho\ving 
the  great  extent  of  the  spiritual  dominion  of  the  church 
symbolized  by  the  woman.  Her  boastful  name  is  The 
catholic  or  universal  church. 

16.  And  the  ten  horns  ivhich  thou  sawest  iiimn  the  Least, 
these  shall  hate  the  tuhore,  and  shall  make  her  desolate  and 
naki'd^  and  shall  eat  her  Jlcsh,  atid  burn  her  toith  fire. — 
This  discloses  the  manner  in  which  the  papal  hierarchy  will 
be  destroyed.  The  ten  kingdoms  which  have  given  their 
support  to  that  antichristian  system,  as  stated  in  verse 
thirteenth,  will  finally  hate  it,  despise  it,  and  strip  it  of  its 
fictitious  attractions,  and  take  away  its  wealth,  and  con- 
sume with  inspired  truth  its  whole  organization.  This  is 
depicted  in  the  usual  emblematic  style.  They  will  hate  the 
whore,  because  they  will  become  fidly  sensible  of  her  char- 
acter and  abominations.  For  years  past  this  spirit  of  oppo- 
sition to  her  usurpations,  and  of  detestation  of  her  deluding, 
debasing,  and  idolatrous  princi]>les  and  practices,  has  been 
increasing  and  will  continue  to  increase.  They  will  make 
her  desolate  and  naked  by  withdrawing  from  connection 
with  her,  and  so  strip  her  of  her  extensive  dominions. 
They  will  eat  her  fiesh,  i.e.,  they  will  confiscate  her  vast 
church  estates,  cut  oft' her  resources,  and  take  possession  of 
her  monasteries  and  nunneries,  and  convert  them  to  better 
uses.     Thev  will  burn  her  with  fire.     Here  is  an  instance 


184  CHAPTER  XVII. 

proving  clearly,  that  the  term  fire  is  used  metaphorically 
and  not  literally.  For  the  woman  is  a  symbol  of  a  corrupt 
church,  and  as  such  is  not  capable  of  being  literally  burned ; 
and  further,  that  church  is  composed  of  a  vast  multitude  of 
difterent  nations  and  languages.  A  church  so  composed, 
cannot  be  literally  burned  with  material  fire.  What  then 
is  the  meaning  1  It  is  this, — the  ten  kingdoms  being  re- 
formed from  popery,  will  consume  that  whole  system  with 
God's  truth,  which  is  called  by  himself  a  fire.  This  fire 
was  applied  by  the  reformers,  and  is  burning  with  rapidly 
increasing  brightness  and  intensity.  The  flames  are  burst- 
ing out  all  over  the  ten  kingdoms,  and  have  now  reached 
the  seat  of  her  vitality.  Take  as  a  single  fact,  that  eighty 
thousand  copies  of  the  Bible  were  sold  in  Eome  in  a  few 
months  after  the  flight  of  the  pope  to  Gaeta. 

17.  For  God  luith  i^ut  in  their  hearts  to  fulfill  his  tvill, 
and  to  agree  and  give  their  kingdom  unto  the  beast,  until  the 
words  of  God  shall  he  fulfilled. — We  are  then  assured,  that 
all  this  will  be  in  accordance  with  the  will  of  God ;  and 
that  these  kingdoms  will  yield  subjection  to  the  beast  until 
the  time  arrives  for  the  fulfillment  of  his  prophetic  words. 
All  will  be  accomplished  as  he  has  purposed  and  declared. 

18.  And  the  wurnan  'which  thou  sawest  is  the  great  citg, 
luhich  reigncth  over  the  kings  of  the  earth. — To  rcnu)vc  all 
duul)t  as  to  the  meaning,  we  are  distinctly  informeJ,  that 
the  woman  is  that  great  city.,  &c.  Jerusalcjn  is  an  emblem 
of  the  true  church; — Babylon  is  the  emblem  of  the  oppres- 
sive, idolatrous  chuich  of  Rome.  She  it  is,  who  has  ruled 
over  the  kings  of  the  empire.  Her  influence  has  controlled 
not  only  their  religious,  but  their  civil  alTairs.  She  has 
taken  the  croM-ns  from  the  heads  of  their  rulers,  or  conferred 
them  at  her  will.     She  has  absolved  thcii'  subjects  from 


CHAPTER  XVIII.  185 

theii"  allegiance  to  them, — dictated  terms  of  intercourse, — 
roused  to  war,  and  prescribed  terms  of  peace,  and  more 
than  all,  controlled  the  consciences  of  rulers  and  the  ruled. 
As  a  celebrated  historian  says,  "  The  popes  claimed  su- 
preme dominion,  not  only  over  the  church  but  also  over 
kings  themselves,  and  pretended  to  reduce  the  whole  uni- 
verse under  their  ghostly  dominion."  But  her  doom  stands 
recorded  on  the  page  before  us,  and  waits  only  the  arrival 
of  the  appointed  time  for  its  full  and  fearful  realization. 
This  doubtless  is  near  at  hand. 


CHAPTER    XVIII. 

The  Destruction  of  Mystic  Babylon. 

1.  And  after  these  things  I  saw  another  angel  come 
down  from  heaven,  having  great  poivcr  ;  and  the  earth  luas 
lightened  with  his  glory. — In  these  dramatic  visions,  per- 
sonages are  introduced  as  speaking  and  acting,  either  to 
carry  on  the  scenic  representation,  or  as  symbolizing  the 
instrumentalities  by  which  the  things  predicted  were  to  be 
performed.  Another  angel,  distinct  from  those  who  have 
been  introduced,  appeared  to  the  mind  of  the  apostle,  as 
coming  down  from  heaven,  having  great  poAver,  indicating 
a  great  work  to  be  done ;  and  the  earth  was  illuminated 
with  his  glory  : — a  flood  of  light  emanating  from  him  will 
be  diftused  over  the  empire.  This  angel  may  be  consider- 
ed as  the  personification  of  those  important  instrumentali- 
ties, which  God  employs  to  sjDread  the  light  of  his  truth, 
and  to  expose  and  eradicate  error ;  particularly  the  faith- 
ful preaching  of  the  gospel,  the  dissemination  of  the  scriji- 
tures,  and  of  all  that  truth  which   is  adapted   to  work  the 


186  CHAPTKR  XVII f. 

destruction  of  civil  and  religious  despotism,  and  the  re- 
formation of  mankind.  The  appearance  of  this  angel,  and 
the  illumination  he  occasions,  ])recedes  the  destruction  of 
great  Baljylon ;  and  thus  the  diffusion  of  gospel  light  'will 
precede  the  overthrow  of  that  hierarchy. 

From  heaven^  i.  e.,  the  high  places  of  power  and  influence, 
both  in  church  and.  state,  the  light  will  be  poured  forth,  dis- 
sipating moral  and  intellectual  darkness,  exposing  errors 
and  delusions,  and  preparing  the  way  for  freedom  of  con- 
science, freedom  of  speech,  and  purity  of  worship.  As 
great  power  and  the  i-adiation  of  much  light,  are  character- 
istic of  this  angel,  we  may  suppose,  that  great  changes 
will  be  wrought  by  the  instrumentalities  of  which,  as  it 
seems  to  me,  he  is  the  personation.  This  mighty  sytn- 
bolic  angel  is  now  spreading  his  light  in  papal  countries  ; 
and  the  consequence  is,  that  the  people  there  begin  to  per- 
ceive the  delusions  and  errors  under  which  they  have  been 
held;  the}^  are  showing  a  determination  to  continue  in  that 
state  no  longer  ;  and  the  indications  are  strong  and  decisive, 
that  Babylon  the  great  is  soon  to  fall  and  rise  no  more. 

2.  And  he  cried  mightily  with  a  strong  voice,  saying, 
Babylon  the  great  is  fallen,  is  fallen,  and  is  become  the  hab- 
itation of  devils,  and  the  hold  of  every  foul  spirit,  and  a 
cage  of  every  unclean  and  hateful  bird. — The  angel  cried 
mightily  with  a  strong  voice,  indicating  that  it  was  a  great 
event  which  he  announced,  and  that  it  was  vastly  important 
to  have  it  widely  known.  The  nations,  which  have  been  so 
long  and  so  thoroughly  deluded  with  this  system  of  splen- 
did abominations,  should  understand  its  nature  and  perni- 
cious effects,  and  be  aware  of  the  certainty  of  its  destruction. 

The  astounding  announcement  of  the  angel  is,  Babylon 
tJie  great  is  fallen,  is  fallen.  The  repetition  of  the  phrase 
is  fallen,  indicates  the  certainly  of  the  event.     Its  towering 


CHAPTER  XVIII.  187 

greatness,  its  vast  influence,  its  imposing  grandeur,  and  its 
ruling  power,  are  doomed  to  destruction.  The  complete- 
ness of  the  destruction  is  aflirmcd  by  its  becoming  a  habi- 
tation of  demons,  &c.  So  says  the  prophet  Jeremiah  con- 
cerning ancient  Babylon,  '  It  shall  become  heaps^  a  dwcllinr/ 
place  of  dragons.''  Isaiah  says  also,  '  The  houses  shall  he 
full  of  doleful  creatures.,  and  owh  shall  dioell  there.,  and 
satijrs  shall  dance  there.''  These,  instead  of  the  proud,  luxu- 
rious, and  impious  inhabitants,  shall  have  their  dwellings 
there. 

3.  For  all  nations  have  drunk  of  the  wine  of  the  loratk 
of  her  fornication,  and  the  kings  of  the  earth  have  committed 
fornication  with  her,  and  the  merchants  of  the  earth  are  wax- 
ed rich  through  the  abundance  of  her  delicacies. — The  reason 
of  this  utter  destruction  is  here  given.  She  has  been  the 
source  of  corruption  and  debasement  of  the  nations.  They 
have  been  seduced,  by  her  inflammatory  cup,  into  spiritual 
lewdness,  that  is,  into  idolatrous  sentiments  and  practices. 
The  kings  of  the  earth  have  adopted  her  corruptions  of 
Christianity,  and  have  given  the  whole  strength  of  their  in- 
fluence to  spread  them ;  and  the  venders  of  indulgences, 
images,  pictures,  crosses,  &c.,  have  made  themselves  rich 
by  the  traflic. 

4  and  5.  And  I  heard  another  voice  from  heaven  saying., 
Come  out  of  her,  my  people,  that  ye  be  not  partakers  of  her 
sins,  and  that  ye  receive  not  of  her  2^lci'!jues  :  For  her  sins 
have  reached  unto  heaven,  and  God  hath  remembered  her 
iniquities. — Having  given  this  description  of  this  antichris- 
tian  community,  (for  a  church  of  Christ  it  is  not)  and  fore- 
warned the  world  of  its  destruction,  which  is  a  thing  never 
to  happen  to  the  true  church ;  a  solemn  command  is  utter- 
ed to  separate  Avholly  from  it,  and  have  no  participation  in 


188  CHAPTER  XVIII. 

its  sins  ;  for  those  who  participate  in  her  sins  must  receive 
of  her  plagues.  Tlie  enormity  of  her  sins  Avas  such  that 
they  have  reached  to  heaven,  and  called  for  the  vengeance 
of  God ;  and  he  hath  remembered  them  to  render  a  right- 
eous recompense  for  them.  The  voice  from  the  heaven 
of  the  true  church,  i-equiring  all  her  peo2:)le  to  separate  from 
this  antichristian  community,  must  be  considered  as  pro- 
phetic, the  same  as  other  parts  of  the  vision.  It  is  a  pre- 
diction of  what  will  be ;  and,  therefore,  teaches  us,  that 
previous  to  the  destruction  foretold,  or  in  its  progressive 
stages,  there  will  be  incessant  and  urgent  calls  to  those 
who  are  to  be  aclcnowledgcd  as  the  people  of  God,  to 
separate  from  that  heaven-doomed  establishment. 

6.  Reward  her  even  as  she  rewarded  you,  and  double  unto 
her  double,  according  to  her  works  :  in  the  cup  which  she 
hath  filled^  fill  to  her  double. — This  also  is  prophecy,  and 
not  to  be  understood  simply  as  a  precept,  addressed  to 
those,  who,  in  the  preceding  verse  are  called,  my  people. 
It  is  an  energetic  apostrophe,  and  its  design  is,  by  making 
this  direct  personal  address,  to  show  what  will  be  done  in 
the  future.  There  will  be  repaid  to  her  double  to  what 
she  has  done.  There  will  be  paid  back  to  her  double  the 
unsparing  vengeance  she  has  practiced.  In  the  providence 
of  God,  the  cup  of  sorrows  will  be  filled  to  her  again  and 
again. 

7.  IIoiv  much  she  hath  glorified  herself,  and  lived  deli- 
ciously,  so  much  torment  and  sorroio  give  her :  for  she  saith 
in  her  heart,  I  sit  a  queen,  and  am  no  widow,  and  shall  see 
no  sorroiv. — Just  in  proportion  as  she  hath  exalted  and 
magnified  herself,  and  indulged  in  luxuriousness,  there 
will  be  given  to  her  dishonor  and  destitution  ;  for,  in  the 
greatness  of  her  pride   she  says,   /  sit  a   queen, — 1  abide 


CHAPTER  XVIII.  189 

in  the  enjoyment  of  regal  authority,  splendor,  and  joyous- 
ness,  as  'mistress  of  the  world.'  lam  no  widow,  and  shall 
see  no  sorroio.  I  am  not  a  bereaved,  lonely  widow,  nor 
shall  I  experience  the  sorrow  of  desolateness  and  destitu- 
tion. Such  language  Isaiah  attributed  to  Ancient  Babylon, 
thus,  '  Thou  sayest  I  shall  be  a  lady  forever — I  am,  and 
none  else  beside  me  ;  I  shall  not  sit  a  widow,  neither  shall 

1  know  the  loss  of  children :  but  these  two  things  shall  come 
on  thee  in  a  moment,  in  one  day,  the  loss  of  children  and 
widowhood.' — Isaiah  47  :   7-9. 

8.  Therefore  shall  her  2')lag lies  come  in  one  day,  death, 
and  mourning,  and  famine  ;  and  she  shall  be  utterly  burn- 
ed with  fire  :  for  strong  is  the  Lord  God  loho  judgeth  her. — 
The  apjiropriate  language  of  prediction  is  now  resumed, 
and  John  proceeds  to  say,  that  the  papal  harlot  will  be 
made  to  experience  just  what  Isaiah  foretold  of  ancient 
Babylon.  Because  of  this  pride,  self-confidence,  and  boast- 
fulness,  the  desolating  judgments  of  God  will  come  in  one 
day,  i.e.,  suddenly.  Death  will  be  one  of  these  judgments, 
the  violent  death  of  the  people  by  wars,  and  political 
death,  i.e.,  the  extinction  of  political  existence.  Mourning, 
grief  and  sadness  on  account  of  the  declining  and  ruinous 
state  of  things  : — and  famine  literally  a  great  destitution 
of  what  is  necessary  to  support  life  :  ecclesiastically,  it 
means  sj^iritual  sterility,  and  a  destitution  of  those  privi- 
leges which  are  necessary  to  sustain  spiritual  life. 

Further,  she  shall  be  utterly  burned  loith  fire.  This  pun- 
ishment is  doubtless  the  same  as  that  predicted  by  Paul  in 

2  Thess.  2  :  8,  to  be  inflicted  on  the  man  of  sin,  which  is 
another  name  of  the  papal  antichrist.  '  Whom,'  says  he, 
'  the  Lord  will  consume  with  the  spirit  of  his  mouth,  and 
will  destroy  with  the  brightness  of  his  coming.'  Now  it 
is  evident,  that  the  truths  of  the  gospel  are  meant   by   the 


190  CHAPTER  XVIII. 

breath  of  his  mouth,  which  is  to  consume  the  great  aposta- 
sy. Using  another  figure,  John  calls  it  a  fire ;  the  effect  in 
both  cases  is  to  consume.  They  are  not  two  separate  de- 
structions, but  one  and  the  same.  To  destroy  with  the 
brightness  of  his  coming  expresses  the  same  catastrophe, 
and  shows  still  another  instrumentality  ;  which  I  under- 
stand to  be  not  a  personal  coming  by  any  means,  but  re- 
markable dispensations  of  his  providence,  and  the  power- 
ful influences  of  his  Spirit. 

In  the  case  under  examination,  we  should  inquire,  what 
is  to  be  utterly  burned  with  fire  1  It  is  the  mystical 
Babylon,  the  Roman  hierarchy, — a  politico-religious  sys- 
tem, fiilsely  called  a  church.  Dropping  the  emblems,  I 
ask,  what  kind  of  fire  that  must  be  to  destroy  a  moral, 
political,  religious  system  ?  It  certainly  must  be,  not  the 
material  element  of  fire,  but  the  word  of  God,  the  everlast- 
ing truths  of  the  gospel.  This  fire,  the  reformers  in 
England  and  Germany  applied  with  prodigious  etTect ;  and 
it  has  been  burning  ever  since  ;  and  will  continue  to  burn 
brighter,  hotter,  and  more  widely,  till  that  vast  system  of 
deception  and  l)lasphemy  be  consumed.  In  conjmictictn 
with  this,  there  will  be  ])eculiar  calamities,  and  desolating 
judgments,  destroying  the  lives  of  some,  and  opening  the 
eyes  of  others ;  and  all  conspiring  to  complete  the  same 
overthrow. 

It  is  added.  For  strong  is  the  Lord  who  jiidf/eth  her.  No 
artifice  of  her  own, — no  aid  from  her  lovers, — no  power  on 
earth  or  in  hell,  can  deliver  her  when  the  time  of  her  de- 
struction shall  come. 

9  to  19.  And  the  kinr/s  of  the  earthy  who  have  commit- 
ted fornication  and  lived  dclicioiisli/  with  her,  shall  bewail 
her,  and  lament  for  her,  when  the//  shall  see  the  smoke  of  her 
burning,  d'c. — The  sorrowlid  feelings  of  the  iiilcrs  of  tho 


CHAPTER  XVIII.  191 

empire,  and  of  the  traffickers  in  the  religious  wares  of  this 
religious  establishment,  are  now  expressed  in  a  long  and 
pitiful  lament.  Bishop  Bale,  once  a  Eomish  priest,  para- 
phrases these  verses  in  a  manner  which  shows  his  perfect 
understanding  of  the  whole  matter.  The  following  some- 
what abbreviated  specimen,  I  quote  from  Dr.  A  Clarke's 
Commentary.  "Her  mitered  merchants,  her  shorn  sol- 
diers, her  mass-mongers,  her  soul-sellers,  and  her  mart- 
brokers,  waxed  very  rich  through  the  sale  of  her  oils,  cream, 
salt,  water,  bread,  orders,  hallowings,  houselings,  ashes, 
palm,  wax,  frankincense,  beads,  crosses,  candlesticks,  copes, 
bells,  organs,  images,  relics,  and  other  peddlery  wares." 

"  And  they  who  have  lived  wantonly  with  her,  in  follow- 
ing her  idle  observances  in  matins,  hours,  and  masses  ;  in 
going  processions  with  canopy,  cross,  and  pyx ;  with  ban- 
ners, streamers,  and  tor^i  light,  with  such  other  gauds  too 
foolish  for  children." 

"  Alas,  alas,  that  great  city,  that  beautiful  Babylon,  that 
blessed  holy  mother,  the  church,  which  had  so  many  popes' 
pardons,  so  many  bishops'  blessings,  so  many  holy  stations, 
so  many  clean  remissions  a  pena  et  cul'pa,  so  many  good 
ghostly  fathers,  so  many  religious  orders,  so  much  holy 
water  for  spirits ;  is  now  decayed  forever." 

"  Alas,  alas,  who  shall  pray  for  us  now  ?  Who  shall 
sing  dirges  and  trentals  1  Who  shall  spoil  us  of  our  sins  ? 
Who  shall  bless  us  with  a  spade,  and  sing  us  out  of  purga- 
tory when  we  ai'e  dead  1  If  we  lack  these  things  we  are 
likely  to  want  heaven.  These  are  the  desperate  complaints 
of  the  wicked."  This  whole  description  is  adapted  "  to 
convey  in  the  most  impressive  manner  imaginable,  some 
idea  of  the  splendor,  luxury,  excess,  and  self-indulgence  of 
all  kinds,  which  have  so  long  triumphed  in  the  powerful, 
magnificent,  luxurious,  and  licentious  metropolis  of  popery  ; 
and  which  have  enriched  a  vast  number  of  individuals  in 


192  CHAPTER  XVIII. 

different  ways  by  impoverishing  the  nations  belonging  to 
that  eomminnion." 

Even  ship-masters,  sailors,  passengers,  and  those  who 
trade  by  sea,  nnitc  in  this  deep-felt  lamentation,  that  in  one 
hour  so  great  riches  have  come  to  naught,  and  this  great 
city  is  jiiade  desolate.  In  view  of  its  ruin  manifesting  so 
clearly  the  avenging  justice  of  God,  they  are  represented 
as  standing  afiir  off,  filled  with  fear,  and  venting  their  sor- 
rows with  weeping  and  wailing. 

20.  Rejoice  over  her,  thou  heaven^  and  ye  holy  apostles 
and  projihets  ;  for  God  hath  avenged  you  on  her. — The  godly, 
even  those  who  have  gone  to  their  eternal  rest,  are  called 
npon  to  rejoice  over  the  downfall  of  this  corrupt  and  op- 
pressive hierarchy  ;  and  this  dreadful  visitation  is  declared 
to  be  from  God,  as  a  manifestation  of  his  avenging  justice. 

21.  And  a  mighty  angel  took  up  a  stone  like  a  great  mill- 
stone, and  cast  it  into  the  sea,  saying,  Thus  with  violence 
shall  that  great  city  Babylon  be  thrown  down,  and  shall  be 
found  no  more  at  all. — The  completeness  and  suddenness  of 

this  destruction  is  emblematically  represented  by  the  act 
of  a  mighty  angel  in  taking  up  a  stone  like  a  great* mill- 
stone, and  casting  it  into  the  sea.  This  and  other  expres- 
sions repeated  in  this  prediction,  lead  us  to  conclude,  that 
the  final  catastrophe  on  Rome  and  the  papacy  will  be  effect- 
ed by  some  sudden  and  special  judgments  of  God.  What 
these  Avill  be  we  know  not.  A  part  of  the  prosess  is  now 
going  on  in  the  convulsions  which  are  shaking  the  seat  of 
the  beast  ;  the  recent  flight  of  the  pope ;  the  capture  of 
Rome  by  the  French  army  ;  the  overthrow  of  the  short- 
lived republic,  and  now  the  restoration  of  the  old  despo- 
tism, all  carrying  the  whole  structure  of  papacy  to  ruin. 
Here  again  the  revealing  angel  used  a  figure  employed 


CHAPTER  XVIII.  193 

by  an  ancient  prophet.  Jeremiah  put  his  prediction  of  the 
destruction  of  Babylon  in  Chaldea,  into  the  hand  of  Seraiah, 
and  told  him  to  go  and  read  it  to  the  people ;  and,  said  he, 
'  It  shall  be  Avhen  thou  hast  made  an  end  of  reading  this 
book,  thou  shalt  bind  a  stone  to  it,  and  cast  it  into  the 
midst  of  the  Euphrates :  and  thou  shalt  say,  Thus  shall 
Babylon  sink,  and  shall  not  rise  from  the  evil  that  I  will 
bring  upon  her.'  So  completely  annihilated  has  that  great 
city  of  the  east  become,  that  it  has  long  been  a  question 
where  it  once  stood.  Like  the  casting  of  a  great  stone 
into  the  depth  of  the  sea,  shall  papal  Babylon  be  thrown 
down,  and  be  found  no  more  at  all.  From,  that  fall  there 
will  be  no  recovery.  The  whole  influence,  power,  and 
wealth  of  that  idolatrous,  corrupt  hierarchy,  will  be  swept 
away,  and  probably  Rome  itself  will  be  blotted  out  of  ex- 
istence. 

It  is  worthy  of  notice,  that  among  the  articles  of  mer- 
chandise, one  is,  the  souls  of  men,  an  expression  which 
sometimes  means  the  same  as  persons.  As  a  matter  of 
fact,  it  is  literally  true  in  this  case.  Romanism,  as  a  theo- 
logical system,  is  in  direct  opposition  to  the  gospel  of 
Christ.  It  enjoins  almost  innumerable  religious  observan- 
ces, and  causes  people  to  expect  salvation  by  these,  rather 
than  by  faith  alone  in  Jesus  Christ.  It  imposes  penances 
and  austerities,  instead  of  that  true  repentance  which  is 
unto  life.  It  makes  obedience  to  the  church  the  ground  of 
acceptance  with  God,  instead  of  a  simple  reliance  on  the 
atonement  and  righteousness  of  Christ.  It  teaches  that 
there  are  other  mediators,  such  as  the  saints,  and  the  bless- 
ed virgin,  beside  that  one  Mediator,  whom  God  hath  ap. 
pointed.  It  makes  forgiveness  of  sins  to  depend  on  confes- 
sion to  the  priest  and  absolution  granted  by  him,  instead  of 
faith  in  the  atoning  Redeemer.  It  makes  a  fictitious  purga- 
tory and  deliverance  from  it  to  depend  on  masses  well 
9 


194  CHAPTER  XVIII. 

paid  for  before  a  person  dies,  or  by  his  friends,  after  he  is 
dead.  Its  sale  of  indulgences,  dispensations,  absolutions, 
&c.,  begets  false  hopes,  and  quiets  men  in  their  sins,  even 
sins  the  most  opprobious.  Thus  does  it  trifle  -with  the  in- 
terests of  the  soul,  and  sends  its  millions  into  eternity  "with 
a  lie  in  their  right  hands.     What  a  traffic ! 

22.  And  the  voice  of  harpers,  and  musicians^  and  of  ^;i- 
pers^  and  tnunpeters,  shall  be  heard  no  more  at  all  in  thee  ; 
and  no  craftsman^  of  whatsoever  craft  he  he,  shall  be  found 
any  more  in  thee  ;  and  the  sound  of  a  millstone  shall  be 
heard  no  more  at  all  in  thee. — In  the  poetic  language  of 
Jeremiah  and  of  the  old  prophets,  it  is  declared,  that  in- 
stead of  the  sound  of  music  from  various  instruments  de- 
lightful to  the  ear,  there  shall  be  the  stillness  and  silence  of 
the  grave.  No  cunning  artificer  shall  be  found  there  any 
more  to  ply  his  trade  of  manufacturing  church  wares ;  and 
even  the  sound  of  the  millstone  shall  cease,  either  because 
there  would  be  no  people  to  need  the  flour  produced  by 
them,  or  because  consecrated  cakes  and  wafers  will  be  no 
longer  called  for  as  profitable  articles  of  merchandise  in  a 
communion  that  will  use  them  no  more. 

23.  And  the  light  of  a  candle  shall  shine  no  more  at  all 
in  thee ;  and  the  voice  of  the  bridegroom  and  of  the  bride 
shall  be  heard  no  more  at  all  in  thee  ;  for  thy  merchants  were 
the  great  men  of  the  earth  ;  for  by  thy  sorceries  were  all  na- 
tions deceived. — The  wax  candles,  now  deemed  so  impor- 
tant, will  no  longer  burn  at  her  altars,  and  in  the  apart- 
ments of  the  dead ;  \he  gladsome  greetings  of  the  bride- 
groom and  the  brid'  will  be  heard  no  more :  for  the  sellers 
of  church  commod  'ies  have  made  themselves  great  by 
their  unrighteous  gains,  and  her  sorceries,  jugglery, 
pretended  miracle  ,  and  pious  frauds  have  long  deceived 


CHAPTER  XVIII.  195 

the  nations,  but  now  will  deceive  them  no  more.  Her  im- 
posing processions,  her  gorgeous  shows,  and  splended  fes. 
tivals,  which  have  long  kept  up  the  delusion  in  the  minds 
of  the  people,  will  be  held  in  derision,  and  be  made  to 
cease  forever. 

Bishop  Bale  upon  the  last  clause  has  the  following  : 
"  Thy  shorn  shavelings  (monks  and  friars)  were  lords  over 
the  multitude,  when  they  held  their  priestly  authority  over 
the  souls  and  bodies  of  men,  yea,  and  with  thy  privy 
legerdemain,  with  thy  juggling  castes,  with  thy  crafts  and 
enchantments  of  thy  subtle  charms  were  all  nations  of  the 
world  deceived." 

24.  And  in  her  ivas  found  the  blood  of  pro2)hets,  and  of 
saints,  and  of  all  that  loere  slain  upon  the  earth. — Christ 
told  the  unbelieving  persecuting  scribes  and  pharisees,  that 
upon  them  would  come  all  the  righteous  blood  shed  upon 
the  earth ;  and  so  in  regard  to  this  spiritual  Babylon,  it  is 
predicted  that  upon  her  would  be  found  the  blood  of  proph- 
ets, i.e.,  preachers  of  Christ's  gospel,  and  the  blood  of 
saints  ;  the  believing  and  godly,  and  indeed  the  blood  of 
all  slain  in  the  land.  The  number  of  those  who  have  been 
put  to  death  by  tortures,  by  fire  at  the  stake,  in  dungeons 
of  the  inquisition,  and  by  open  wholesale  slaughter,  is  al- 
most incredible.  The  unspeakable  guilt  of  this  is  yet  to 
be  recompensed,  for  the  day  of  vengeance  is  determined  by 
the  Lord.  Desolating  wars  with  other  terrible  calamities, 
will  signalize  coming  years,  and  show  to  the  world  the 
judgment  of  this  antichristian  hierarchy  ;  and  send  a  thrill 
of  fear  through  the  hearts  of  men,  as  did  the  destruction 
of  the  idolatrous  oppressive  Egyptians  and  Babylonians  in 
ages  long  since  past. 


196  CHAPTER  XIX. 

CHAPTER    XIX. 

The  Final  Conflict  with  Papal  Antichrist. 

The  last  chapter  carried  us  into  that  portion  of  these 
visions  which  relates  to  the  future.  We  have  done  with 
histo)y,  because  we  have  done  with  what  is  fulfilled.  The 
historical  record  of  the  events  of  this  and  the  following 
chapters,  is  yet  to  be  written.  In  making  out  the  interpret- 
ation, we  must  now  be  guided  by  the  analogy  of  the  book, 
and  the  rules  we  have  already  employed  in  explaining  the 
language  of  symbols. 

1.  And  after  these  things  I  heard  a  great  voice  of  mnch 
people  in  heaven,  saying,  Alleluia ;  Salvation,  and  glory, 
and  honor,  and  power,  unto  the  Lord  our  God. — The  de- 
struction of  mystic  Babylon,  which  had  just  been  foreshown, 
will  cause  a  shout  of  praise  to  God  from  many  people  for 
that  auspicious  event.  This  is  said  to  be  done  in  heaven, 
which  may  signify  the  symbolic  and  not  the  literal  celestial 
heaven  ;  for  it  seems  to  be  the  grateful  act  of  those,  who 
are  relieved  from  the  oppressive  domination  which  had  been 
exercised  over  them.  That  it  is  the  thankful  ascription  of 
praise  of  Christian  believers,  appears  from  the  expression, 
our  God  ;  and  we  should  bear  in  mind,  that  the  whole  is  a 
revelation  of  things  pertaining  to  the  Christian  church  on 
earth ; — things  declared  at  the  opening  of  the  book  to  be 
those,  which  were  "  shortly  to  come  to  pass,"  and  "  the 
things  which  shall  be  hereafter."  This  tribute  of  thanks- 
giving is  like  that  recorded  in  the  twelfth  chapter,  where 
the  civil  authorities  of  the  empire  and  of  the  church  render 
grateful  acknowledgments  for  the  triumph  of  Christianity 
over  heathenism  under  Constantine.     Furthermore  it  is  a 


CHAPTER  XIX.  197 

prophetic  declaration,  showing,  that  at  the  destruction  of 
the  papal  Antichrist,  there  will  be  great  rejoicing  in  the 
high  places  of  civil  authority,  as  well  as  in  the  church  for 
this  signal  interposition  of  God  in  behalf  of  his  suftering 
cause  and  suftering  people.  It  is  the  alleluia  of  the  people 
for  their  relief  from  the  exactions,  impositions,  abuses,  and 
oppressions  of  the  Roman  hierarchy. 

The  word  alleluia  is  from  the  Hebrew  Halal,  to  praise, 
and  Jail,  a  name  of  God. 

The  translators  should  not  have  omitted  the  article,  the, 
before  the  several  substantives  of  the  ascription ;  for  it 
gives  a  designed  particularity  to  it.  We  should  read  it 
thus, — The  salvation,  the  glory,  &c.  The  salvation  wrought 
for  the  church  by  its  deliverance  from  a  corrupt  and  despot- 
ic domination, — the  glory  of  that  merciful  interposition, — 
and  the  power  by  Avhich  it  is  effected,  be  ascribed  to  the 
Lord  our  God. 

2.  For  true  and  righteous  are  his  judgments  ;  for  he 
hath  judged  the  great  luhore,  tvhich  did  corriqjt  the  earth  with 
her  fornication,  and  hath  avenged  the  blood  of  his  servants  at 
her  hand. — The  particular  reason  for  this  devout  praise  is 
here  assigned.  For  true  and  righteous,  i.e.,  faithful  and 
equitable,  are  his  judgments, — his  retributive  acts,  in  punish- 
ing the  great  harlot,  who  hath  long  corrupted  the  earth,  (by 
which  is  meant  here  as  elsewhere,  the  people)  with  her  su- 
perstitions, idolatries,  and  perversions  of  divine  truth.  God 
is  righteous  too  in  avenging  the  blood  of  his  servants, 
who  had  been  j^ut  to  death  by  her  murderous  hand. 

3.  And  again  they  said,  Allehiia.  And  her  smoke  rose 
uji  forever  and  ever. — The  repetition  of  the  grateful  accla- 
mation. Alleluia,  indicates  a  deep  sense  of  the  favor  con- 
ferred.    As  a  dense  column  of  smoke  rising  into  the  air,  is 


198  CHAPTER  XIX. 

seen  at  a  great  distance ;  so  the  evidence  of  these  consum- 
ing judgments,  will  be  very  conspicuous,  and  will  be  long 
remembered.  In  other  words,  the  destruction  here  fore- 
told, will  be  notorious,  and  will  make  a  lasting  impression. 
The  figure  is  similar  to  that  in  Isaiah  34  :  9,  10,  which 
describes  the  destruction  of  Idumea.  Both  Isaiah  and  John 
probably  adopted  the  figure  from  the  manner  in  which 
Sodom  and  Gomorrah  were  destroyed,  concerning  which  it 
is  said,  "  The  smoke  of  the  country  went  up  as  the  smoke 
of  a  furnace." 

4.  And  the  four  and  ixoeyity  elders,  and  the  four  beasts, 
fell  down  and  worshi23ed  God  that  sat  on  the  throne,  saying^ 

Amen  ;  Alleluia. — The  true  church  represented  by  the  four 
living  creatures,  and  the  four  and  twenty  elders,  unites  in 
the  same  ascriptions  of  praise  to  Him,  who  administers  the 
government  of  the  world  according  to  his  own  will. 

5.  Ayid  a  voice  came  on t  of  the  throtie,  saying,  Praise  our 
God,  all  ye  his  servants,  and  ye  that  fear  him,  both  small  and 
great. — The  throne  in  the  preceding  verse  is  a  symbol  of 
divine  sovereignty ;  but  in  this  verse  it  appears  to  be 
the  symbol  of  civil  authority.  A  voice  from  the  ruling  au- 
thority gives  command  for  all  classes  of  Christians  to  i^raise 
our  God.  The  term  our  God,  shows,  that  it  is  not  the  Lord 
himself  who  issues  this  command,  but,  that  it  is  one  who 
joins  himself  with  the  people  in  acknowledging  God,  and  in 
rendering  thanksgiving  unto  him.  It  is  a  civil  proclamation 
for  the  universal  expression  of  thanks  to  the  Almighty  De- 
liverer. 

6.  And  I  heard  as  it  were  the  voice  of  a  great  multitude, 
and  as  the  voice  of  many  waters,  and  as  the  voice  of  mighty 
thunderings,  saying  Alleluia:  for  the  Lord  God  omnipotent 


CHAPTER  XIX.  199 

reigneth. — The  command  thus  given  is  obeyed,  and  a  shout 
is  pealed  forth  by  a  great  multitude,  like  the  roar  of  many 
waters,  and  mighty  thunderings,  repeating  the  exultation, 
Alleluia,  &c.  The  relief  will  be  felt  to  be  so  great,  when 
this  system  of  darkness,  delusion,  and  oppression  is  over- 
thrown, that  the  friends  of  true  religion  will  rejoice,  that 
the  Lord  God,  the  Almighty  Ruler,  reigneth.  It  will 
be  felt  and  acknowledged,  that  this  prostration  of  this 
long  continued  politico-religious  power,  is  the  work  of  the 
Lord. 

7.  Let  ns  be  glad  and  rejoice,  and  give  honor  to  him  :  for 
the  marriage  of  the  Lamb  is  come,  and  his  wife  hath  made 
herself  readg. — This  overthrow  of  papal  Antichrist,  will  be 
followed  by  a  new  era  of  pi'osperity  to  the  church.  The 
above-named  multitude  of  believers,  therefore,  exhort  each 
other  to  gladness  and  rejoicing.  This  era  of  prosperity  and 
increased  purity  of  the  church,  is  emblematically  repre- 
sented by  the  marriage  of  the  Lamb,  and  the  preparation 
of  his  bride  for  that  event.  A  marriage  is  an  open  and 
public  acknowledgment  of  the  espousals  of  those  who  be. 
come  husband  and  wife.  It  is  the  consummation  of  a 
union,  when  they  are  to  abide  together  according  to  divine 
ordinance.  So  at  this  coming  period,  Christ  will  signally 
manifest  his  love  to  his  true  church  called  his  wife,  and  will 
take  her  into  closer  intimacy  and  fellowship,  and  as  a  lov- 
ing bridegroom  abundantly  supply  her  wants.  For  this 
happy  event  she  will  be  prepared  by  the  influences  of  the 
Spirit,  making  her  more  holy,  increasing  her  devotedness 
and  zeal,  and  qualifying  her  to  do  honor  to  her  Lord. 
When  the  errors  and  superstitions  of  papacy  shall  be  swept 
away,  the  true  church  will  receive  peculiar  tokens  of  her 
Redeemer's  love.  It  will  be  to  her  a  new  era  of  prosper- 
ity,— an  era  in  which  she  will  appear  in  the  adornings  of 


200  CHAPTER  XIX. 

spiritual  graces,  the  beauty  of  holiness.  As  a  lovely  bride 
she  will  manifest  the  charrns  of  spiritual  excellence,  and  send 
her  attractive  influence  over  the  world.  It  should  be  care- 
fully observed,  that  the  revealing  angel  places  the  harlot 
and  the  Lamb's  wife  in  contrast  with  each  other,  as  different 
persons,  entirely  distinct,  totally  unlike  in  character  and 
destination.  Let  those  who  glory  in  what  they  call  The 
Mother  Church,  think  of  this  ! 

8.  And  to  her  ivas  granted  that  she  should  be  arrayed  in 
fine  linen,  clean  and  white :  for  the  fine  linen  is  the  righteous- 
ness of  saints. — The  attire  of  the  lewd  woman  was  described 
to  be  of  purple  and  scarlet  color,  and  her  ornaments  were 
gold,  and  precious  stones,  and  pearls.  Very  different  is 
the  attire  of  the  Lamb's  wife.  To  her  it  was  given  to  be 
arrayed  in  fine  linen  clean  and  white,  and  this  is  explained 
to  be  the  righteousness  of  the  saints; — not  the  rvj  teousness 
of  Christ  imputed  to  them,  but  those  virtues  w  h  ch  are  the 
fruits  of  the  Spirit. 

9.  And  he  saith  unto  me,  Write,  Blessed  are  they  hich 
are  called  unto  the  marriage  supper  of  the  Lamh.  And  he 
saith  unto  me,  These  are  the  true  sayings  of  God. — Having 
spoken  of  the  marriage  of  the  Lamb,  the  instructing  angel 
bade  John  write,  saying,  Happy  are  they  who  are  called  to 
the  marriage  supper,  that  is,  to  a  participation  in  the  abun- 
dant blessings  and  enjoyments  of  that  period.  Those,  who 
have  experienced  the  holy  joys,  and  heavenly  communings 
of  a  pure  and  powerful  revival,  know  something  of  the  hap- 
piness of  those  who  will  participate  in  that  marriage  fes- 
tival. The  church  will  he  purified  from  unbelief,  worldliness, 
unchaiitableness,  and  many  other  sins,  and  Christ  will 
come  near  to  it  and  manifest  himself  to  it,  shed  abroad  his 
love  by  the  Holy  Spirit  in  the  hearts  of  his  people,  and  give 


CHAPTER  XIX.  201 

them  a  rich  and  soul-satisfying  feast.  No  doubt,  at  this 
period  great  numbers  of  the  Romanists  will  be  converted, — 
savingly  called  to  this  marriage  supper. 

10.  And  I  fell  at  his  feet  to  tvorshi})  him.  And  he  said 
unto  me,  See  ikon  do  it  not:  I  am  thy  fellow-servant,  and 
of  thy  brethren  that  have  the  testimony  of  Jesus  :  worship 
God  :  for  the  testimony  of  Jesus  is  the  spirit  of  prophecy. — 
The  soul  of  the  apostle  kindled  into  ecstasy,  as  this  de- 
lightful prospect  was  presented  to  his  mind ;  and  he  pros- 
trated himself  at  the  feet  of  the  hierophant  to  worship 
him.  This  he  was  forbidden  to  do,  because,  said  he,  I  am 
thy  fellow  servant,  a  servant  as  you  are  of  Jesus  Christ ; 
and  of  thy  brethren  who  have  the  testimony  of  Jesus  ;  the 
testimony  concerning  Jesus  to  deliver  to  mankind.  Our 
work  is  the  same,  which  is  to  make  known  the  will  of 
Christ  concernmg  his  church  to  the  world.  This  testimony 
is  the  spirit  of  prophecy,  the  great  subject,  the  chief  scope 
of  prophecy.  Both  of  us  have  from  Christ  the  spirit  of 
prophecy,  and  the  work  of  prophets  to  perform.  It  might 
be  inferred  that  the  angel  was  in  fact  one  of  the  old  pro- 
phets commissioned  to  make  this  revelation  to  John. 
Upon  this,  I  may  speak  more  fully  in  another  place. 

11.  And  I  saw  heaven  opened.,  and  behold  a  ivhife  horse  ; 
and  he  that  sat  upon  him  was  called  Faithful  and  True;  and 
in  righteousness  he  doth  judge  and  make  toar. — A  new  scene 
is  now^  presented,  imposing  as  to  the  actors  in  it,  momen- 
tous as  to  the  events  embraced,  and  glorious  as  to  its  re- 
sults. This  is  the  final  conflict  with  Antichrist,  which  is  to 
precede  the  millennium.  On  the  territorial  domain  of  the 
church,  within  the  Roman  empire,  is  to  be  enacted  what  is 
now  symbolically  represented. 

A  white  horse  is  an  emblem  of  joyous  victory,  as  in  the 
9* 


202  CHAPTER  XIX. 

sixth  chapter,  where  John  says,  Behold  a  -white  horse,  and 
he  that  sat  on  him  had  a  bow,  and  a  crown  was  given  to 
him  and  he  went  forth  conquering  and  to  conquer,  which 
predicts  the  early  triumphs  of  Christianity.  The  symbol 
before  us  has  a  similar  signification.  Upon  the  white  horse 
was  seated  a  princely  rider,  whose  name,  indicative  of  his 
character,  is  Faithful  and  True;  faithful  in  everything  per- 
taining to  his  mediatorship ;  true  to  liis  word  of  promise 
and  of  threatening.  In  righteousness  doth  he  govern,  and 
wage  war.  His  government  is  administered  in  equity,  and 
justice  marks  his  way  in  all  his  conflicts  with  Iris  enemies. 

12.  His  eyes  tvere  as  a  flame  of  fire,  and  on  his 
head  ivere  many  crowns ;  and  he  had  a  name 'written.,  that 
no  man  knew  but  he  himself. — His  eyes  like  a  flame  of  fire 
indicates  that  his  knowledge  is  thorough  and  searching. 
The  many  crowns  on  his  head  denote  his  dominion  over 
the  nations.  A  name  was  inscribed  on  his  person,  proba- 
bly the  forehead,  the  import  of  which  no  one  fully  compre- 
hends but  himself  What  the  name  was,  we  are  not 
informed.  The  Savior  himself  said,  '  No  man  knoweth  the 
Son  but  the  Father,  neither  knoweth  any  man  the  Father, 
save  the  Son,  and  he  to  whom  the  Son  will  reveal  him.' 

13.  And  he  was  clothed  with  a  vesture  dipped  in  blood: 
a-yid  his  name  is  called  the  Word  of  God. — His  vesture 
dipped  in  blood,  indicates  a  great  slaughter  of  his  enemies, 
as  in  Isaiah  63  :  1-3.  His  name  is  called  the  Word  of  God, 
probably  because  from  the  beginning,  he  has  been  the 
teacher  of  mankind,  the  revealer  of  the  character  and 
will  of  God.  '  The  words,  which  I  speak  are  not  mine,  but 
his  who  sent  me.' 

14.  And  the  armies  which  were  in  heaven  followed  him 


CHAPTER  XIX.  203 

upon  white  horses,  clothed  in  fine  linen,  white  and  clean. — 
The  armies  of  the  glorious  chieftain  are  also  mounted  on 
white  horses,  and  like  the  bride,  are  clothed  in  linen  white 
and  clean,  emblematic  of  the  purity  of  their  characters. 
This  dress  shows  them  to  be  Christ's  believing  people; 
and  their  being  on  white  horses,  shows  that  they  share  with 
him  in  the  warfare  and  in  the  victory. 

15.  And  out  of  his  mouth  goeth  a  sharp  sioord,  that  with 
it  he  should  smite  the  nations  :  and  he  shall  rule  them  with  a 
rod  of  iron  :  and  he  treadeth  the  wine-press  of  the  fierceness 
and  torath  of  Almighty  God. — Here  we  have  proof  positive 
that  all  these  things  take  place  in  this  world,  and  depict 
the  conflicts  and  the  progress  of  his  church. 

The  weapon  employed  in  this  battle  is  a  sharp  sword, 
which  goeth  out  of  the  mouth  of  the  conqueror.  This  is 
divine  truth.  Paul  says,  Eph.  6:17,  '  Take  the  sword  of 
the  Spirit,  which  is  the  Word  of  God.''  This  is  a  spiritual 
and  not  a  carnal  weapon ;  and  this  shows  what  is  the  nature 
of  the  warfare.  It  is  a  moral  warfare,  involving  all  the 
interests  of  men.  It  is  a  struggle  between  despotism  and 
freedom,  both  civil  and  religious  ;  a  conflict  between  the 
friends  of  light  and  the  upholders  of  ignorance  and  super- 
stition ;  a  conflict  between  those  who  would  give  the  Bible 
as  a  common  boon  to  mankind,  and  those  who  would  keep 
it  from  the  people ;  a  conflict  between  usurpers  and  des- 
pots in  church  and  state,  and  the  friends  of  liberty,  of  con- 
science and  equal  rights  ;  just  such  a  conflict  as  is  now 
going  on  all  over  Europe.  It  is  the  stone  which  is  ciit  out 
without  hands,  breaking  to  pieces  and  grinding  to  powder 
the  lower  extremities  of  Nebuchadnezzar's  image ;  the 
kingdom  of  Christ  warring  against  the  kingdom  of  tlie 
beast  in  this  last  period  of  its  direful  prolongation.     '  The 


204  CHAPTER  XIX. 

strong  holds  of  Satan '  are  trembling,  and  -will  ere  long  be 
laid  prostrate. 

The  result  of  this  great  conflict  is  plainly  indicated  by 
the  declaration,  He  iv'dl  rule  them  iv'ith  a  rod  of  iron ;  an 
iron  scepter,  that  is,  with  irresistible  power  and  authority. 
He  will  subdue  them  to  himself,  and  rule  over  them  with 
undisputed  sway.  Furthermore,  as  grapes  are  put  into  a 
wine-press  and  trodden  or  mashed,  that  the  juice  may  be 
expressed ;  so  this  mighty  conqueror  will  manifest  the  ter- 
ribleness  of  divine  wi-ath  by  crushing  his  enemies.  What 
a  fearful  work  has  yet  to  be  performed  among  the  nations 
which  have  upheld  the  papal  Antichrist ! 

16.  And  he  hath  on  his  vesture  and  on  his  thigh  a  name 
written,  King  of  kings,  and  Lord  of  lords. — Another  name 
of  this  glorious  conqueror  was  made  conspicuous  on  his 
vesture  and  on  his  thigh.  The  muscles  of  the  thigh  are 
the  strongest  in  the  body,  and  in  them  lies  the  power  of 
motion  and  activity.  The  import  of  it  is,  that  he  is  able 
to  acquire  and  maintain  all  that  supremacy  which  is  implied 
in  the  name.  King  of  kings,  and  Lord  of  lords.  The 
kingdoms  of  the  world  are  to  become  his  kingdoms,  and 
acknowledge  him  as  the  reigning  sovereign. 

17  and  18.  And  I  saw  an  angel  standing  in  the  sun,  <&c. 
— The  announcement  of  the  result  of  the  battle  is  made  in 
the  most  conspicuous  manner  possible.  The  sun  is  the 
symbol  of  the  highest  ruling  authority  ;  and  the  angel 
standing  in  it,  making  proclamation,  suggests  the  idea,  that 
the  event  which  he  declares  is  most  important,  and  will 
awaken  vmiversal  attention,  and  will  be  everywhere  noto- 
rious. It  is  like  the  utterance  of  a  voice,  that  would  be 
heard  round  the  globe.  The  angel,  as  if  clothed  with  the 
authority  of  God  himself,  summons  all  the  birds  of  })rcy  to 


CHAPTER  XIX.  205 

come  to  a  supper  which  God  will  make ;  and  feast  on  the 
flesh  of  kings,  and  captains,  and  mighty  men,  and  of  horses, 
and  of  the  free  and  bond,  the  high  and  low.  This  speaks 
an  entire  defeat  of  the  enemies  of  Christ,  and  a  terrible 
slaughter  of  them.  Ezekiel  gives  a  prediction  of  the  same 
or  a  similar  battle,  and  in  nearly  the  same  language.  39  : 
17-20. 

19.  And  I  saio  the  beast,  and  the  kings  of  the  earth,  and 
their  armies,  gathered  together  to  make  war  against  him  that 
sat  on  the  horse,  and  against  his  army. — Here  is  presented 
the  opposing  force  with  which  Christ  and  his  army  are  en- 
gaged. It  consists  of  the  Ijeast  which  carried  the  harlot, 
viz.  :  the  Roman  civil  power,  and  the  kings  of  the  Roman 
earth,  who  support  papacy,  and  their  armies  consisting  of 
the  opposers  of  pure  Chi-istianity.  From  this  description 
we  might  infer,  that  the  previous  conflicts  of  the.  church 
have  been  but  mere  skirmishes,  compared  with  what  is  yet 
to  come.  Tlie  time  betwixt  the  present  and  the  millennium, 
will  doubtless  be  occupied  with  terrible  conflicts  with  the 
enemies  of  human  rights  and  a  pure  Christianity. 

20.  And  the  beast  ivas  taken,  and  ivith  him  the  false 
projihet  that  wrought  miracles  before  him,  loith  lohich  he  de- 
ceived them  that  had  received  the  mark  of  the  beast,  and  them 
that  luorshiped  his  image.  These  both  were  cast  alive  into 
a  lake  of  fire  burning  with  brimstone. — Here  we  have  the 
issue  of  this  momentous  warfare.  The  beast  is  the  civil 
power  of  Rome, — the  false  prophet  is  the  papal  priesthood. 
This  is  made  evident  by  what  is  said  of  his  doings,  viz., 
he  wrought  miracles  in  the  presence  of  the  beast,  and  by 
these  deceived  those  who  had  received  his  mark,  i.e.,  those 
who  practice  the  Latin  worship,  and  those  who  bow  down 
in  reverence  and  subjection  to  the  hierarchy,  which  is  the 


206  CHAPTER  XIX. 

image  of  the  beast,  resembling  it  in  its  arrogance,  its  claim 
to  universal  rule,  and  in  its  despotism.  It  is  notorious, 
that  for  many  centuries  past,  and  at  this  day,  the  Romish 
priests  by  various  tricks,  perform  what  are  called  miracles, 
to  delude  the  people,  to  overawe  their  minds,  and  keep 
them  in  a  state  of  blind  subjection. 

The  beast  and  false  prophet,  having  long  acted  in  con- 
cert, are  seized,  and  cast  alive  into  a  lake  of  fire,  burning 
with  brimstone.  It  is  not  a  little  remarkable,  that  commen- 
tators have  either  not  given  an  interpretation  of  this  pas- 
sage, or  have  passed  over  it  with  a  single  remark,  assuming 
that  the  lake  of  fire  means  hell.  That  it  docs  not  mean 
Gehenna,  or  the  place  of  eternal  punishment,  is  to  my  mind 
certain,  and  for  the  following  reasons.  1.  It  is  a  figure, 
like  most  others  which  John  uses,  borrowed  from  the  Old 
Testament,  where  the  corresponding  expressions  have  not 
that  signification.  In  the  eleventh  psalm  showing  how  God 
deals  with  men  in  this  world,  David  says,  '  The  Lord  trieth 
the  righteous ;  but  the  wicked  and  him  who  loveth  violence, 
his  soul  hateth.  Upon  the  wicked  he  will  rain  snares,  fire, 
and  brimstone,  and  a  horrible  tempest.'  So,  in  the  thirty- 
eighth  chapter  of  Ezckiel,  the  Lord  saith,  '  when  Gog  shall 
come  against  the  land  of  Israel,  my  fury  shall  come  up 
into  my  face, — and  I  will  plead  against  him  with  pestilence 
and  with  blood ;  and  I  will  rain  upon  him,  and  upon  his 
bands,  an  overflowing  rain,  and  great  hailstones,  fire,  and 
brimstone.'  No  one  can  be  at  a  loss  in  understanding  this 
to  mean  the  infliction  of  judgments  on  the  invaders  of  the 
land  of  Israel.  The  whole  chapter  makes  this  indubitable. 
It  is  probable,  that  there  is  here  again  an  allusion  to  the 
destruction  of  Sodom  and  Gomorrah,  and  to  the  plagues 
inflicted  on  Egypt. 

2.  Scriptural  usage,  analogy,  and  the  consistency  of  this 
prophetic  narrative,  forbid  the  interpretation  which  makes 


CHAPTER  XIX.  207 

it  mean  hell.  For  the  whole  description  is  plainly  that  of 
a  great  conflict  between  the  Christian  church  and  Antichrist ; 
and  this  terminates  with  casting  the  latter  into  a  lake  of 
fire,  &c.  Now  the  false  prophet  is  a  concrete  phrase,  and 
does  not  signify  an  individual  man,  but  the  Romish  clergy 
of  all  grades,  many  thousands  of  persons,  some  of  whom 
are  scattered  all  over  the  Christian  world.  To  suppose 
that  these  are  to  be  seized,  and  literally  cast  alive  into  the 
place  of  eternal  torment,  is,  to  say  the  least  of  it,  a  very 
improbable  supposition.  Then  also,  the  beast  is  not  a 
person,  punishable  as  such ;  but,  it  is  a  civil  persecuting 
government,  administered  by  its  proper  officers  under  the 
controlling  influence  of  popery^,  as  it  is  now  in  all  the 
catholic  countries  of  Europe.  And  how  is  a  government 
administered  by  numerous  successive  agents,  to  be  literal- 
ly cast  alive  into  hell  1 

Again  3. — The  phrase  alive  or  living,  shows,  that  the 
punishment,  whatever  it  may  be,  is  to  be  suffered  in  this 
world.  And  it  seems  as  if  the  writer  used  that  word  on 
purpose  to  prevent  the  misunderstanding  of  this  passage 
which  is  so  general.  No  one  can  rationally  suppose  that 
great  masses  of  officials  scattered  over  the  earth,  and  even 
whole  nations,  who  are,  or  have  been  under  the  govern- 
ment of  the  beast,  are  to  be  taken  and  cast  living  into  the 
place  of  eternal  torment.  Men  usually  die  before  they  go 
there,  and  we  are  also  taught  that  there  must  be  a  day  of 
judgment  to  consign  the  wicked  to  that  place.  To  say  that 
alive  means  at  the  height  of  their  power  and  prosperity, 
does  not  relieve  the  difficulty  at  all. 

What  then  is  the  meaning  %  It  is,  as  I  conceive,  that 
the  papal  states  of  Europe,  and  the  papal  church,  the  coun- 
tries and  the  people  who  are  under  that  hierarchy,  which 
has  so  long  been  doing  battle  against  Christ  and  his  truth, 
will  be  subjected  to  fiery  trials, — long  continued  and  terri- 


208  CHAPTER  XIX. 

ble  calamities,  until  that  corrupt  and  oppressive  system  is 
destroyed.  By  various  means,  by  the  diffusion  of  revealed 
truth,  waking  up  the  people  to  a  sense  of  their  duties  and 
their  rights :  by  convulsions  and  ovcrturnings  in  govern- 
ments ;  and  by  remarkable  and  distressing  events  in  divine 
providence,  the  povrer  and  influence  of  Eomanism  will  be 
destroyed.  These  with  their  natural  effects,  disappoint- 
ment, chagrin,  grief,  and  entire  despair  of  sustaining  the 
hierarchy  any  longer,  and  utter  hopelessness  of  its  being 
again  revived,  will  be  like  a  consuming  fire,  eating  into  the 
soul.  It  may  be,  that  this  consuming  process  has  already 
begun. 

A  fourth  reason  for  the  above  interpretation  is,  that 
Daniel  predicts  the  same  destruction  of  the  beast  and  the 
papacy  in  words  which  limit  it  to  this  world.  Says  he,  7: 
26,  The  judgment  shall  sit,  and  they  shall  take  aivaij  his 
dominion  to  consume  and  destroy  it  unto  the  end.  This  is 
said  of  the  fourth  beast  who  should  devour  the  whole 
earth,  and  the  horn,  who  should  speak  great  words  against 
the  Most  High,  and  wear  out  the  saints  of  the  Most  High. 
Let  it  be  observed,  that  what  John  expresses  by  being  cast 
into  a  lake  of  fire  and  brimstone,  Daniel  expresses  by  de- 
priving of  dominion,,  to  consuriie  and  destroy  it  to  the  end. 
Daniel  says  again,  verse  eleventh,  "  I  beheld  till  the  beast 
(the  same  beast)  was  slain,  and  his  body  destroyed,  and 
given  to  the  burning  flame."  And  immediately  following 
this,  Daniel  speaks  of  the  giving  to  Christ  "  dominion,  and 
glory,  and  a  kingdom,  that  all  people,  nations  and  languages 
should  serve  him."  So  here  in  the  apocalypse,  the  millen- 
nium follows  the  destruction  of  the  beast  and  the  false 
prophet.  Both  prophets  speak  of  the  same  events,  and  the 
language  of  the  former  explains  the  language  of  the  latter. 

It  is  certain,  then,  that  the  whole  reference  is  to  things 
to  transpire  in  this  world,  and  m>t  at  all  to  the  future  world, 


CHAPTER  XIX.  209 

except  by  implication.  Being  cast  into  a  lake  of  fire  and 
sulphur,  is  a  figurative  expression,  signifying  the  infliction 
of  various  distresses  and  desolating  calamities,  which  toge- 
ther with  other  means,  will  work  the  destruction  of  papacy 
both  politically  and  ecclesiastically. 

I  am  aware,  that  I  expose  myself  by  this  interpretation 
to  the  charge  of  believing  the   doctrines  of  universalism. 

Let  those  who  may  be  inclined  to  prefer  such  a  charge, 
know  that  it  is  utterly  untrue.  It  is  positively  declared, 
that  '  he  tvho  believeth  not  on  the  Son  of  God.,  shall  not  see 
life  ;'' — that '  the  loicked  shall  go  away  into  everlasting  pun- 
ishment ;'  and  that  '  the  Lord  Jesus  shall  be  revealed  from 
heaven  with  his  mighty  angels,  taking  vengeance  with 
flaming  fire  on  them  who  know  not  God,  and  obey  not 
the  gospel  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ ;  who  shall  be  punish- 
ed with  everlasting  destruction,  from  the  presence  of  the 
Lord,  and  from  the  glory  of  his  power?  John  3  :  36. 
Matt.  25  :  46.  2  Thess.  1  :  7,  8,  9.  These,  and  similar 
declarations,  I  fully  believe  in  their  literal  import.  But  I 
do  not  believe  that  John  has  taught,  or  intended  to  teach 
the  doctrine  of  a  place  of  torment  in  another  world,  and 
the  punishment  of  the  wicked  there,  in  the  passage  under 
consideration.  True  it  is,  that  the  sudden  destruction  of 
the  wicked  by  divine  judgments,  such  as  the  deluge, — the 
burning  of  the  cities  of  the  plain  with  fire  from  heaven, — 
the  submerging  of  Pharaoh  and  his  hosts  in  the  Red  Sea, — 
the  overthrow  of  Babylon  and  other  great  cities  for  their 
wickedness,  and  the  slaying  of  myriads  on  the  field  of 
battle,  does  imply,  that  the  wicked  among  them  do  perish 
forever.  But  in  interpreting  the  facts  of  prophecy,  we  are 
not  to  draw  conclusions,  and  then  make  those  conclusions 
the  interpretation  of  the  facts. 

21.     And  the  remnant  zvere  slain  ivith  the  sicord  of  him 


210  CHAPTER  XIX. 

that  sat  upon  the  horse,  tvhich  sword  proceedeth  out  of  his 
mouth  ;  and  all  the  foivls  xvere  filled  with  their  fiesh. — Who 
are  the  remnant  ?  I  would  say  they  are  those  who  do  not 
perish  by  the  above-named  calamities.  They  will  be  slain 
in  another  manner ;  viz.,  the  sword  of  Him  who  sitteth  on 
the  white  horse,  which  sword  proceedeth  out  of  his  mouth. 
This  weapon,  beyond  all  question,  is  his  truth, — the  gospel 
of  the  grace  of  God.  These  will  be  slain  as  all  true  Chris- 
tians are,  spiritually  by  the  truth.  They  will  be  convinced 
of  their  sins,  their  errors,  and  delusions,  and  will  abandon 
them,  and  submit  to  Christ.  The  sword  of  the  Spirit  will 
have  its  appropriate  effect,  being  made  living  and  powerful 
by  that  divine  agent. 

A7id  all  the  fowls  ivere  filled  with  their  flesh.  Tliis  or 
course  refers  to  those  who  are  spoken  of  in  the  eighteenth 
verse.  In  the  seventeenth  chapter  it  is  said  of  this  same 
hierarchy,  under  the  figure  of  a  lewd  woman,  that  the  na- 
tions once  subordinate  to  her,  will  hate  her,  and  make  her 
desolate,  and  naked,  and  tvill  eat  her  flesh ;  which  means, 
that  they  will  strij^  her  of  her  wealth,  cut  off  her  revenues, 
confiscate  her  estates,  and  tluis  take  away  the  means  of 
sensual  indulgence  and  sinful  pleasure.  Whether  the 
term  flesh  has  the  same  meaning  here,  I  know  not.  It  is 
considered  a  great  dishonor  to  have  the  dead  bodies  of 
human  beings  lie  unburied,  and  become  food  for  beasts 
and  birds.  The  idea  may  be,  that  this  overthrow  and 
destruction  will  be  entire  and  dishonorable  to  those  who 
are  the  subjects  of  it. 


CHAPTER  XX.  211 

CHAPTER    XX. 

The  Thousand  Years  called  the  Millennium. 

The  difficulties  attending  a  consistent  and  satisfactory 
explanation  of  this  chapter  are  many  and  great.  In  all  the 
professed  expositions  of  it,  which  I  have  seen,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  that  of  Professor  Bush,  the  error  is  committed 
of  taking  some  parts  of  the  language  as  literal,  and  other 
parts  as  symbolical,  with  no  perceptible  reason  for  this 
distinction.  Viewing  the  lohole  2^'>'ophet'ic  imrt  of  this  book 
as  symbolical,  I  shall  adhere  to  the  rule,  which  has  guided 
me  thus  far,  which  is,  first  to  interpret  the  symbols,  and 
then,  if  practicable,  point  out  their  fulfillment. 

This  chapter  is  a  continuation  of  the  same  visionary  rep- 
resentation of  events  as  that  of  the  preceding,  and  stands 
in  immediate  connection  with  it.  Simultaneously  with,  or 
closely  following  the  terrible  calamities,  which  will  work 
the  utter  ruin  of  the  beast  and  the  false  prophet,  which  are 
the  Roman  civil  power  and  the  papacy,  the  binding  and 
incarceration  of  the  dragon  will  occur. 

1  and  2.  And  I  saiu  an  angel  come  doimi  from  heaven^ 
having  the  key  of  the  bottomless  pit  and  a  great  chain  in  his 
hand.  And  he  laid  hold  on  the  dragon,  that  old  serpent, 
which  is  the  devil,  and  Satan,  and  bound  him  a  thousand 
years. — An  angel  is  any  agent  human  or  superhuman,  or 
any  instrumentality  by  which  God  accomplishes  his  pur- 
poses. I  ask  any  man  if,  on  serious  consideration,  he 
believes,  that  a  celestial  angel  will  come  down  to  tliis 
earth  with  a  gi-eat  chain  of  iron  or  some  other  metal  in  his 
hand ;  and  that  he  Avill  seize  another  spiritual  being  and 
bind  him  with  a  metallic  chain,  and  lock  up  such  a  spirit  in 


212  CHAPTER  XX. 

some  deep,  dark  prison  in  this  world  or  some  olherl  We 
should  say  at  first  thought,  that  no  person  of  common  un- 
derstanding, and  but  little  acquainted  with  the  figurative 
language  of  scripture,  would  believe  this.  And  yet,  such 
is  the  general  belief,  and  learned  commentators  have  re- 
garded this  as  a  literality,  and  have  given  their  interpreta- 
tions accordingly.  To  my  mind  this  representation,  like 
the  destruction  of  the  beast  and  the  false  prophet  in  a  lake 
of  fire,  &c.,  is  wholly  symbolical.  There  is  not  an  object 
presented  in  it,  that  is  to  be  taken  in  a  literal  sense.  The 
angel,  heaven,  the  chain,  the  hand,  the  key,  the  bottomless 
pit,  the  dragon,  the  seizing  and  binding  of  him,  arc  all  sym- 
bols, hieroglyphics.  Our  first  business  is  to  explain  them, 
scrijiturally^  not  fancifully^  and  accorduig  to  the  usus  loquen- 
di,  or  usage  of  this  book. 

The  commentaries  in  common  use,  which  are  all  I  have 
at  hand,  do  not  explain  at  all,  who  or  what  the  angel  is, 
who  is  the  chief  actor  in  this  scene ;  except  that  of  Dr. 
Clarke,  who  says  the  angel  is  "  one  of  the  executors  of  the 
divine  justice,  who  receives  criminals,  and  keeps  them  in 
prison,"  &c.  But,  as  the  instrumentality  of  angels  in  one 
sense  or  another  pervades  this  book,  and  almost  every- 
thing is  represented  as  being  done  by  them  ;  it  is  indispen- 
sable to  a  correct  understanding  of  what  is  predicted,  to 
ascertain  in  each  particular  case,  what  is  meant  by  the 
angels.  In  the  second  and  third  chapters,  the  message  to 
each  church  is  addressed  to  the  angel  of  the  church,  who 
undoubtedly  was  the  pastor  or  minister,  hi  other  instances 
angels  are  the  particular  instrumentalities  by  which  the 
events  predicted  are  brought  about.  The  description  of  the 
destruction  of  Babylon  the  great,  is  introduced  by  the 
descent  of  an  angel  from  heaven,  having  great  power,  and 
illuminating  the  earth  with  his  glory.  This  I  explained  as 
the  personification  of  the  appropriate  instrumentalities  for 


CHAPTER  XX.  213 

difFLisi)ig  the  light  of  divine  truth ;  such  as  the  faithful 
preaching  of  the  gospel,  dissemination  of  the  scriptures, 
and  other  means  for  the  overthrow  of  civil  and  religious 
despotism  and  the  reformation  of  mankind. 

The  signification  of  the  term  angel  or  angels,  as  agents 
or  instrumentalities,  must  be  such  as  will  be  appropriate 
to  the  particular  work  to  be  accomplished.  The  work  now 
before  us  is  the  suppression  and  removal  of  something  that 
is  evil,  expressed  by  the  binding  and  imprisonment  of  the 
dragon.  The  angel  then  means  the  appropriate  agencies 
or  instrumentalities  for  this.  And  who  are  these,  but  the 
institutions  of  the  state  and  the  institutions  of  religion, 
— in  other  words,  civil  authority  and  the  inculcation  of 
divine  truth?  These  are  God's  appointed  means  for  the 
suppression  of  social  and  moral  evil,  and  the  reformation  of 
mankind.  First  of  all,  the  gospel,  with  its  ministry  and 
ordinances,  and  these  protected  in  their  free  operation  by 
the  government.  Accordingly  the  angel  comes  down  from 
heaven,  which  term  signifies  the  ruling  authority,  either 
civil  or  ecclesiastical,  or  both  operating  together.  At  the 
time  intended,  the  institutions  of  religion  and  the  influence 
of  government  will  doubtless  be  conjoined,  so  as  to  form  a 
mighty  agency,  for  the  eradication  of  the  evil  alluded  to, 
which  we  shall  soon  consider. 

This  symbolic  angel  had  the  hey  of  the  botiomless  pit.  A 
key  is  an  instrument  for  opening  or  making  fast  a  door, 
and  implies  the  power  of  admission  or  exclusion.  Christ 
says,  chap.  1  :  18,  I  have  the  keys  of  hades  and  of  death, 
which  means  that  he  had  "the  power  to  bring  to  the  grave, 
or  to  deliver  from  it, — to  summon  to  the  state  of  departed 
spirits,  or  to  release  from  that  state  at  the  resurrection." 

In  the  ninth  chapter  these  same  symbols  are  made  use 
of,  and  doubtless  with  similar  significations.  There,  it  is 
said  a  star  fell  from  heaven,  and  to  him  was  given  the  key 


214  CHAPTER  XX. 

of  the  bottomless  pit.  And  he  opened  the  bottomless  pit. 
This  star  evidently  was  some  eminent  person,  for  he  is  de- 
signated by  the  personal  pronoun,  and  personal  acts  are 
attributed  to  him.  Of  course  it  was  not  the  literal  heaven 
from  which  he  fell,  but  it  was  from  the  highest  official  sta- 
tion in  the  church.  See  exposition  of  chap.  9  :  1-3.  The 
key  of  the  bottomless  pit  given  to  him,  with  which  he 
opened  the  pit,  and  a  great  smoke  arose,  and  out  of  the 
smoke  came  an  army  of  locusts ;  signifies,  that  through  his 
instrumentality  a  destructive  army  of  invaders,  the  Sara- 
cens, would  issue  forth  from  their  dark  abodes,  and  over- 
run a  portion  of  the  empire.  It  would  be  a  departure  from 
analogy,  and  a  strange  inconsistency,  to  say  that  the  same 
symbols  in  this  twentieth  chapter  have  an  entirely  different 
signification.  We  say  then,  that  the  heaven  in  this  case  is 
the  ruling  authority,  civil  or  ecclesiastical,  or  both  together ; 
— that  the  angel  is  the  agency  and  instrumentality  which 
God  employs  to  produce  the  effects  intended ; — and  that 
the  key  of  the  bottomless  pit  to  be  used  in  this  case  to  shut 
it  up,  instead  of  opening  it,  signifies  the  power  and  efficiency 
of  that  agency  to  suppress,  remove,  and  confine  the  evil 
referred  to. 

A  chain  is  used  for  binding  criminals,  and  also  for  forcibly 
moving  things ;  and  is  here  an  emblem  of  restraining  force 
and  control.  Cruden  considers  its  meaning  in  this  place  to 
be  "  Severe  laws  for  the  curbing  of  all  open  impiety."  It 
is  used  in  scripture  to  express  subjection  and  forcible 
restraint.  Thus  in  Jude,  the  angels  who  rebelled,  are  said 
to  be  '  reserved  in  everlasting  chains  under  darkness  unto 
the  judgment  of  the  great  day.     Also  2  Pet.  2  :  4. 

2.  The  dragon  was  laid  hold  of  and  bound  for  a  thou- 
sand years.  The  above-named  agencies  and  instrumental- 
ities will  be  effectual.  What  now  is  the  dragon?  The 
dragon  of  the  ancients  was  a  fabulous  monster  of  the  ser- 


CHAPTER  XX.  215 

pent  kind,  and  is  used  by  John  as  the  symbol  of  paganism, 
or  of  a  civil  power  under  which  paganism  prevails.  In  the 
twelfth  chapter,  the  term  seems  to  be  used  in  both  signifi- 
cations. When  used  in  a  civil  respect,  it  is  described  as 
having  seven  heads  and  ten  horns  ;  and  when  in  a  religious 
respect,  it  is  "  that  old  serpent,  called  the  devil  and  Satan, 
which  deceiveth  the  whole  world."  This  distinction  in  the 
signification  of  the  term  dragon,  has  not,  so  far  as  I  know, 
been  observed,  and  many  perplexities  and  wrong  conclu- 
sions have  been  the  consequence.  For  instance,  the  great 
red  dragon  with  its  heads,  and  horns,  and  crowns  upon  its 
heads,  has  been  generally  admitted  to  be  the  heathen  Roman 
empire.  In  the  ninth  verse  of  the  same  chapter,  (the  12th) 
it  is  said  '  the  great  dragon  was  cast  out,  that  old  serpent, 
called  the  devil  and  Satan,'  and  this  is  very  properly  con- 
sidered as  the  putting  down  and  final  suppression  of  pagan- 
ism by  Constantine  and  his  Christian  successors.  But,  if  the 
dragon  means  the  empire  in  both  instances,  the  question 
arises,  how  could  the  empire  be  cast  out,  or  eradicated  from 
the  empire  ?  The  fact  seems  to  be,  that  in  the  one  case,  it 
is  the  pagan  civil  power  that  is  meant;  and  in  the  other 
case,  it  is  paganism  as  a  religion,  which  is  meant.  My  own 
mind  was  much  perplexed  with  this  difficulty,  till  very 
recently  this  distinction  occurred  to  me,  as  I  was  observing, 
that  the  dragon  in  the  two  places  is  described  with  very 
different  concomitants,  indicating  a  difference  in  significa- 
tion. 

We  can  now  see  clearly  what  is  meant  by  the  dragon  in 
the  second  verse  of  this  twentieth  chapter.  It  is  designated 
by  the  same  names,  and  doubtless  means  the  same  thing  as 
in  the  ninth  verse  of  the  twelfth  chapter.  It  is  Paganism, 
Avhich  in  former  ages,  has  deceived  the  tohole  world  ; — one  of 
the  chief  devices  of  the  prince  of  darkness  for  destroying 
mankind.     It  is  this  which  is  to  be  suppressed  and  eradicat- 


216  CHAPTER  XX. 

ed  by  the  agencies  and  instrumentalities  spoken  of  above. 
This,  as  the  order  of  events  is  presented  by  John,  will  take 
place  in  immediate  connection  with  the  destruction  of  the 
beast  and  the  flilse  prophet,  with  which  the  previous  chap- 
ter closed. 

If,  as  in  all  the  preceding  visions,  what  is  said  here  refers 
exclusively  to  the  nations  of  the  Roman  empire,  we  can 
easily  see  what  occasion  there  is  for  casting  out  of  the 
idolatry  and  despotism,  which  are  the  chief  ingredients  of 
paganism  from  those  nations.  Civil  oppression  still  reigns 
over  nearly  the  whole  of  Europe,  and  paganism  has  for  the 
thousand  years  past  been  incorporated  into  the  Romish 
religion. 

But,  if  the  ejection  and  suppression  of  paganism  in  this 
instance,  refers  to  portions  of  the  earth  now  overspread 
with  it ;  we  see,  that  there  is  suthcicnt  occasion  and  scope 
for  the  work.  This  great  work,  as  I  believe,  is  going  on, 
as  is  also  the  destruction  of  the  beast  and  false  prophet, 
and  will  be  continued  for  years  to  come,  perhaps  until  the 
thousand  years  commence. 

3.  And  cast  him  into  the  bottomless  pit,  and  shut  him  ?<;>, 
and  set  a  seal  upon  him,  that  he  should  deceive  the  nations  no 
more,  till  the  thousand  years  should  he  fulfilled  :  and  after 
that  he  must  be  loosed  a  little  seaso7i. — Here  too,  all  is  sym- 
bolic. The  term  abussos,  signifies  an  abyss,  an  unknown 
depth,  and  metaphorically,  immensity.  The  idea  of  a 
place  of  punishment  does  not  enter  at  all  into  its  significa- 
tion. If  we  attach  that  idea  to  it,  it  is  an  inference  of  our 
own,  drawn  from  the  attendant  circumstances,  or  the  ap- 
parent exigencies  of  the  passage.  The  word  occurs  nine 
times  in  the  New  Testament,  seven  of  which  are  in  this 
book,  and  in  no  case  is  its  signification,  the  place  of  the  fu- 
ture punishment  of  the  wicked.     In  the  ninth  chapter  the 


CHAPTER  XX.  217 

phrase  bottomless  pit  seems  to  mean  the  dark  and  exten- 
sive region  from  which  the  Saracens  issued  in  immense 
numbers,  spreading  their  conquests  to  a  great  extent.  The 
allusion  in  the  case  under  consideration  may  be  to  those 
caverns  in  the  earth,  w^hich  were  used  as  places  of  conceal- 
ment from  enemies,  and  of  confinement  for  criminals.  The 
sentiment,  as  it  seems  to  me,  is,  that  paganism,  including 
as  its  essential  ingredients,  superstition,  idolatry,  and  des- 
potism, will  be  eradicated  from  the  nations  intended,  and 
will  be  confined  to  the  dark  and  remote  portions  of  the 
earth,  during  the  thousand  years,  after  which  for  a  brief 
period  efforts  will  be  made  to  restore  it,  as  shown  in  this 
and  succeeding  verses.  During  that  period  those  systems 
of  idolatry,  falsehood,  and  oppression,  personated  by  the 
dragon  and  Satan,  will  cease  to  operate  to  deceive  the  na- 
tions. 

4.  And  I  saw  thrones^  and  they  sat  upon  them,  and 
judgment  loas  given  unto  them  :  and  I  saw  the  souls  of  them 
that  xvere  beheaded  for  the  loltness  of  Jesus,  and  for  the  ivord 
of  God,  and  ivhkh  had  not  ivorshiped  the  beast,  neither  his 
image,  neither  had  received  his  mark  upon  theh' foreheads,  or 
in  their  hands ;  and  they  lived  and  reigned  toith  Christ  a 
thousand  years. — After,  or  simultaneously  with,  this  sup- 
pression of  false  religion  and  despotic  rule,  which  are  usu- 
ally leagued  together,  a  new  scene  opens,  viz.  :  the  preva- 
lence of  true  religion,  and  the  enjoyment  of  its  attendant 
blessings.  I  saw  thrones,  and  they  sat  upon  them,  and  judg- 
ment was  given  to  them.  What  thrones  these  are,  and  who 
sat  upon  them,  is  made  plain,  as  it  seems  to  me,  by  Daniel, 
who  says,  (7  :  9,)  /  beheld  till  the  thrones  were  cast  doivn, 
&c.  Scott  remarks  very  truly,  "  This  was  spoken  of  the 
coming  of  the  Lord  to  destroy  the  kingdom  of  the  little 
horn,  and  to  set  up  the  kingdom  of  God  on  earth.  Rome 
10 


218  CHAPTER  XX. 

will  be  wholly  desolated,  and  her  hierarchy  abolished ; 
every  antichristian  power  will  be  crushed  ;  and  the  whole 
will  be  reduced  under  the  government  of  Christ,  and  those 
who  rule  under  him  and  for  him."  In  exact  accordance 
with  Daniel,  John  says,  that  judgment  was  given  to  them, 
that  is,  sentence  was  rendered  against  them  ; — they  were 
condemned  to  be  cast  down,  overthrown.  The  second  ad- 
ventists  and  others  explain  the  passage  to  mean,  that  the 
saints  are  to  be  the  occupants  of  those  thrones,  and  that  by 
judgment  being  given  to  them,  is  meant,  that  the  saints  are 
to  sit  in  judgment  on  the  rest  of  mankind,  and  rule  over 
them.  But,  the  writer  is  speaking  of  the  suppression  and 
removal  of  that  which  is  wrong,  evil,  and  oppressive ;  and 
not  only  the  scope  of  the  context,  but  the  meaning  of  the 
word  krima,  which  is  "  a  judgment,  a  decision,  a  sen- 
tence, a  condemnation — a  penalty,"  shows,  that  sentence, 
condemnation,  is  rendered  against  them  to  their  destruc- 
tion. The  prophetic  announcement  of  Daniel  concerning 
those  thrones,  is  that  of  a  terrible  overthrow.  He  says  that 
'  a  fiery  stream  issued  and  came  forth  from  before  the  An- 
cient of  days  : — thousand  thousands  ministered  to  him, 
and  ten  thousand  times  ten  thousand  stood  before  him  :  the 
judgment  was  set,  and  the  books  were  opened.  And  he  be- 
held, till  the  beast,  on  whose  head  were  ten  horns,  among 
which  there  sprang  up  the  little  horn,  papacy,  which  spake 
great  words,  was  sfem,  and  his  bodij  destroyed.,  and  given 
to  the  burning  flame.'  How  evident  it  is,  that  this  is  the 
same  thing  with  John's  description  in  the  jircvious  chapter 
of  the  great  conqueror,  whose  eyes  were  as  a  flame  of  fire, 
who  in  righteousness  doth  judge  and  make  war,  whose 
name  is  Faithful  and  True,  and  against  whom  the  kings  of 
the  earth  and  their  armies  were  arrayed, — the  result  of 
which  was,  that  the  beast  and  false  prophet,  were  taken  and 
cast  alive  into  a  lake  of  fire  burning  with  brimstone.     The 


CHAPTER  XX.  219 

idea  of  Daniel  is,  that  those  thrones  were  occupied  hy  oj^j^res- 
sive  kings,  and  that  they  will  be  overthrown  ;  and  that  the 
governments  represented  by  them  will  be  destroyed.  John 
expresses  the  same.  The  idea,  that  the  saints  are  to  occu- 
py those  thrones,  and  be  associated  with  Christ  in  the  bu- 
siness of  judging  and  ruling,  is  all  assumption,  and  most 
preposterous.  And,  so  far  is  this  fiom  being  the  final  judg- 
ment, the  fact  probably  is,  that  these  events  are  soon  to 
transpire  ;  those  thrones  in  catholic  Europe  are  shaking ; 
and  Daniel's  fiery  stream  from  before  the  Lord  has  begun 
to  flow ;  and  ere  long  the  body  of  the  idolati-ous  and  per- 
secuting beast,  will  be  "  destroyed  and  given  to  the  burn- 
ing flame  ;"  or,  as  John  expresses  it,  "  be  cast  alive  into  the 
lake  of  fire  burning  with  brimstone."  Both  prophets,  the 
one  in  captivity  in  Babylon,  the  other  in  exile  in  Patmos, 
declai'e  the  destruction  of  idolatry,  superstition  and  despot- 
ism, paganism  and  Antichrist,  and  the  governments  by 
which  these  are  upheld.  This  part  of  the  great  drama  of 
this  world's  affairs,  if  I  mistake  not,  is  soon  to  be  enacted. 

!Mede,  a  learned  English  divine,  who  wrote  on  the  Apo- 
calypse more  than  two  hundred  years  ago,  remarks,  with 
great  propriety,  "  John  does  not  affirm,  that  he  saw  the 
souls  of  those  who  were  beheaded,  sitting  upoyi  thrones. 
He  says  only  he  saw  thrones,  and  those  who  sat  upon  them, 
not  determining  who  they  were  who  sat  upon  them,  but 
making  it  sufficiently  plain,  that  this  is  not  to  be  understood 
of  souls  ;  for  the  words  employed  do  not  admit  of  this  in- 
terpretation." '  The  word  for  those  to  whom  judgment  was 
given,  is  in  the  masculine  gender,  {autois)  but  if  John  had 
meant  to  say,  that  the  souls  of  the  beheaded,  were  those  to 
whom  judgment  was  given,  the  word  should  have  been  in 
the  feminine  {iiutais).''  Witsius  makes  the  same  criticism, 
and  accompanies  it  with  similar  remarks. 

That  Daniel  and  John  both  predict  the  same  events  in 


220  CHAPTER  XX. 

this  instance,  is  proved  l)y  the  fact,  that  both  assign  the 
same  length  of  time  for  the  continuance  of  the  little  horn  or 
papacy,  viz. :  one  thousand  two  hundred  and  sixty  days, 
by  which  are  meant  years,  which  expire  just  about  the  pre- 
sent time.  It  is  jiroved  also  by  the  fact,  that  both  follow 
that  destruction  of  that  persecuting  power  with  a  prediction 
of  the  triumijhant  reign  of  Christ.  The  interpretation 
which  the  angel  gave  to  Daniel  at  his  earnest  solicitation  is 
this.  '  The  little  horn  which  shall  subdue  three  kings  or 
kingdoms,  shall  speak  great  words  against  the  Most  High, 
and  shall  wear  out  the  saints  of  the  Most  High,  and  think 
to  change  times  and  laws  :  and  they  shall  be  given  into  his 
hand  until  a  time,  and  times,  and  the  dividing  of  time. 
But  the  judgment  shall  sit  and  they  shall  take  away  his 
dominion,  (which  John  expresses  by  seizing  the  dragon  and 
shutting  him  up  in  a  pit),  to  consume  and  destroy  it  unto 
the  end.  And  the  kingdom  and  dominion,  and  the  great- 
ness of  the  kingdom  under  the  whole  heaven  shall  be  given 
to  the  people  of  the  saints  of  the  Most  High,  whose  king- 
dom is  an  everlasting  kingdom,  and  all  dominions  s'.  all 
serve  him.'  This  glorious  triumph  of  the  saints,  and  the 
permanent  establishment  of  the  kingdom  of  the  Most  High 
over  the  earth,  John  describes  and  amplifies  in  the  twen- 
tieth, twenty-first  and  twenty-second  chapters  of  this  book. 

Another,  and  a  distinct  portion  of  the  vision,  which  intro- 
duces a  new  subject,  standing  in  immediate  connection  with 
the  former,  is  now  given. 

I  saw  the  souls  of  those  v)Ko  were  beheaded  for  the  witness 
of  Jesus,  &,c.  Here  a  distinct  class  of  persons  is  presented. 
Both  in  the  old  and  new  testaments  and  in  numerous  in- 
tances,  the  term  so «/s  means ^;erson.s.  Gen.  4G  :  26.  'All 
the  souls  that  came  with  Jacob  into  Egypt,  besides  his 
son's  wives,  all  the  souls  were  threescore  and  six.'  Acts 
27  :  37.     '  And  we  were  in  all  in  the  ship  two  hundred 


CHAPTER  XX.  221 

three  score  and  sixteen  souls,'  The  persons  meant  are  de- 
scribed as  those,  who  were  beheaded  on  account  of  the 
testimony  they  gave  for  Christ,  and  for  their  maintenance 
of  the  word  of  God  in  opposition  to  the  errors,  supersti- 
tions and  idolatry  of  Antichrist.  For  they  were  those, 
who  had  not  submitted  to  and  reverenced  the  beast,  the 
Eoman  civil  power,  nor  his  image,  the  papacy,  neither  had 
received  his  mark,  the  papal  idolatrous  worship.  (See  ex- 
planation of  chap.  13  :  16-18.)  In  a  word,  they  are  those 
who  believed,  obeyed,  and  propagated  the  gospel  of  Christ 
in  the  midst  of  cormption  of  Christianity  ;  and  who  had  suf- 
fered persecution  and  death  for  their  fidelity. 

These  lived  and  reigned  with  Christ  a  thousand  years. 
How,  in  what  respects,  and  where  will  those  persons  live 
and  reign?  The  analogy  of  the  book  and  the  structure  of 
the  context  require,  that  this  be  understood  metaphorically. 
The  word  {czesan)  translated  they  lived ^  signifies  also,  '  to 
flourish,  to  enjoy  life,  to  he  prosperous.''  The  apostle  does 
not  say,  that  the  martyred  saints  were  raised  from  the 
dead,  and  their  souls  united  again  to  material  bodies,  or  to 
spiritual  bodies.  He  says  simply,  that  he  saw  the  souls  of 
those  who  were  beheaded,  and  they  lived  and  reigned  with 
Christ.  The  learned  Witsius  remarks,  that  the  apostle 
does  not  say,  "  the  men  who  were  beheaded  lived  again  ; 
far  less  that  the  bodies  of  the  beheaded  lived  again  on  the 
earth.  He  asserts  merely,  that  he  saw  the  souls  of  them 
that  were  beheaded,  not  living  again,  but  living  ;  that  is, 
filled  with  unceasing  joy,  as  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob 
live  to  God ;  and  reigning  with  Christ  in  the  kingdom  of 
glory,  where  they  reap  the  fruit  of  their  labors  and  death, 
whilst  they  behold  the  enlargement  of  the  church  these 
thousand  years." 

Making  a  distinction  between  these  and  those  who  did  not 
worship  the  beast  nor  his  image,  he  says,  "  These  also  lived, 


222  ■  CHAPTER  XX. 

enjoying  a  blessed  peace  of  conscience  and  a  rich  abund- 
ance of  spiritual  consolation.  Not  that  their  lives  as  indi- 
viduals extended  to  a  thousand  years,  for  this  never  was, 
and  never  will  be  the  lot  of  any  mortal,  but  men  of  that 
description  reigned  during  many  successive  ages,  till  the 
appointed  period." 

It  is  not  evident  that  the  apostle  intends  two  classes  of 
persons  here,  but  it  is  quite  evident  that  he  docs  not  say, 
nor  intend  to  say  of  those  who  suffered  martyrdom  long 
ago,  that  they  lived  and  reigned  with  Christ  personally  on 
earth. 

Without  approving  or  censuring  the  discordant  opinions 
of  others,  I  suggest  the  following  as  the  interpretation  of 
this  much  controverted  passage.  The  true  meaning  will 
not  be  likely  to  be  ascertained,  if  one  part  be  taken  in  a 
literal  sense,  and  another  part  in  the  same  connection  and  of 
the  same  character,  be  taken  in  a  metaphorical  sense.  One 
general  rule,  made  necesary  by  the  structure  of  the  book, 
must  govern  us. 

Now,  let  it  be  recollected,  that  the  killing  of  the  two 
witnesses,  as  stated  in  chapter  the  eleventh,  and  the  expo- 
sure of  their  dead  bodies  in  the  street  of  the  great  city, 
which  is  spiritually  called  Sodom  and  Egypt,  was  not  a 
literal  killing,  nor  were  the  two  witnesses,  two  particular 
individuals,  nor  did  the  transaction  occur  in  the  city  of 
Sodom,  which  was  destroyed  long  before  the  Christian  era ; 
and  as  to  Egypt,  there  never  was  a  city  of  that  name  in 
that  country.  But  the  killing  and  exposure  of  their  dead 
bodies  to  insult  is  wholly  metaphorical,  having  a  moral  and 
political  signification  only.  The  witnesses  were  a  succes- 
sion of  numerous  and  faithful  defenders  of  gospel  truth  in 
opposition  to  the  errors  and  superstitions  which  prevailed. 
Their  restoration  to  life  and  ascension  to  heaven  was  their 


CHAPTER  XX.  223 

restoration  to  the  enjoyment  of  cml  and  religious  privi- 
leges under  the  protection  of  government. 

So  in  the  case  before  us,  the  beheading  and  the  living  and 
reigning,  are  not  to  be  understood  literally.  For,  why 
should  those  who  lost  their  lives  in  that  particular  maimer 
and  at  a  particular  time,  be  singled  out  and  distinguished 
from  the  vastly  greater  number,  who  have  been  put  to  death 
in  all  the  horrible  methods  which  ingenuity  could  devise  1 
I  can  conceive  of  no  reason  for  such  a  distinction. 

But,  if  we  will  maintain  the  correspondence  between  this 
and  the  preceding  verses,  and  consider  that  the  writer  is 
now  showing  the  improved  and  happy  state  of  things  after 
the  eradication  of  false  religion  and  civil  despotism,  express- 
ed by  the  binding  and  incarceration  of  the  dragon,  we  ob- 
tain a  consistent  view  of  the  whole.  I  would  express  my 
understanding  of  it  in  a  kind  of  paraphrase,  thus, — I  saw 
those  who  had  been  oppressed,  deprived  of  their  rights, 
civil  a  religious,  and  held  in  obscurity  and  subjection  ; 
relieve  i  nom  this  state  of  oppression,  living  in  the  enjoy- 
ment of  their  rights,  and  happy  under  equitable  govern- 
ments and  Christian  privileges.  The  cause  they  espoused 
flourished, — rose  superior  to  all  opposition,  and  held  the 
ascendency.  Tlius  will  they  live  and  reign  with  Christ. 
The  spirit  of  martyrs  and  confessors  of  former  ages  will 
animate  them  in  this  proximate  period  of  a  thousand  years. 
This,  as  I  conceive,  is  coincident  with  what  has  preceded, 
and  preserves  the  harmony  and  connection  of  the  events 
predicted. 

Just  in  this  metaphorical  sense  of  .beheading,  are  similar 
words  employed  in  this  book  and  elsewhere.  For  instance, 
in  the  ninth  chapter  it  is  said  that  the  four  angels  who  were 
bound  in  or  bg  the  river  Euphrates,  "  were  prepared  to  slay 
a  third  part  of  men,"  and  in  a  subsequent  verse  it  is  said, 
"  a  third  part  of  men  were  killed.''''     Now,  if  this  be  taken 


224  CHAPTER  XX. 

literally,  it  is  not  true,  for  there  never  was  a  time,  when  a 
third  part  of  men  have  been  killed.  They  were  killed 
politically,  being  brought  under  the  dominion  of  those 
fierce  invaders,  the  Turks. 

Instances  of  this  beheading  there  have  been  recently  in 
the  case  of  the  persecuted  Portuguese  of  Madeira,  who 
have  fled  to  our  country  to  save  their  lives.  Faithful 
Christians  like  them,  who  may  suffer  in  a  similar  manner, 
will  ere  long  live  and  reiffii  with  Christ  in  the  sense  of 
being  happy  in  the  enjoyment  of  civil  and  religious  privile- 
ges, and  in  participating  in  the  supremacy  of  pure  Chris- 
tianity. 

Precisely  of  this  nature  is  the  vision  of  Ezekiel.  The 
dry  bones  in  the  midst  of  the  valley  were  the  whole  house 
of  Israel,  who  were  represented  as  slain.  Then  said  the 
Lord,  '  Behold,  O  my  people,  I  will  open  your  graves,  and 
cause  you  to  come  out  of  your  graves,  and  bring  you  into 
the  land  of  Israel.'  What  does  this  slaying  mean  1  What 
do  those  bones  exceeding  dry,  overspreading  the  valley, 
signify?  What  does  the  resurrection  of  those  dead 
decayed  bodies,  when  '  breath  came  into  them,  and  they 
lived,  and  stood  upon  their  feet,  an  exceeding  great  army,' 
mean  ?  Their  being  conquered,  subdued,  carried  away 
into  captivity  to  Babylon  among  idolaters,  and  deprived  of 
their  religious  institutions,  and  their  subsequent  restoration 
to  their  own  country,  and  their  being  made  prosperous  and 
happy  in  the  enjoyment  of  civil  and  religious  privileges 
again,  is  the  answer.  It  was  a  2>olitical  death  and  a  political 
resurrection,  involving  their  religious  interests,  and  nothing 
more. 

I  understand  John  to  use  language  just  as  the  ancient 
prophets  did  ;  and  that  in  this  fourth  verse,  he  predicts  that 
at  a  particular  period,  probably  not  far  distant,  the  op- 
pressed,   persecuted,   down-trodden,  abused    servants   of 


CHAPTER  XX.  225 

Christ,  will  enjoy  freedom,  rights  of  conscience,  happiness, 
and  prosperity,  and  will  see  and  participate  in  the  suprem- 
acy of  Christ's  cause  for  a  thousand  years.  The  writer,  or 
rather  the  revealing  angel,  carries  forward  the  religious  and 
political  affairs  of  the  nations  together,  because  they  are  so 
blended,  that  whatever  affects  the  one,  has  an  impor- 
tant influence  and  effect  upon  the  other. 

5.  But  the  rest  of  the  dead  lived  not  again  until  the 
thousand  years  tvere  finished.  This  is  the  first  resurrection. 
— The  rest  of  the  dead,  who  lived  not  again  during  the 
thousand  years,  are  those  who,  under  the  same  system  of 
civil  and  religious  absolutism,  do  not  stand  for  personal 
rights  and  Christian  truth  ;  those  who  sustain  the  old  order 
of  things ;  those  who  are  destitute  of  the  spirit  of  the  de- 
voted, persecuted,  and  crushed  servants  of  Christ.  These 
opposers,  infidels,  pagans,  enemies  of  pure  Christianity, 
lived  not  again  till  the  thousand  years  were  finished.  Here 
lived  is  to  be  taken  in  the  same  sense  as  explained  above. 
As  if  it  had  been  said.  They  once  flourished  and  Avere  pros- 
perous. They  had  power  and  used  it  oppressively.  They 
had  riches  and  used  them  luxuriously.  But,  the  state  of 
things  will  be  entirely  changed  in  the  thousand  years  when 
false  religion  and  despotism  will  be  suppressed.  Such  as 
they  are,  will  not  be  in  power.  They  will  not  bear  rule  ; 
and  they  will  have  no  successors.  There  will  be  none  who 
sustain  their  antichristianity  ;  none  who  will  defend  the 
errors  and  superstitions  they  cherished  ;  none,  who  will 
persecute  the  followers  of  Christ  as  they  did.  The  events 
just  previously  predicted,  will  destroy  their  power,  and 
their  cause  can  never  flourish  again.     See  Daniel  7  :  26,  27. 

This  is  the  first  resurrection.  It  should  be  recollected 
that  all  which  is  contained  in  this  and  the  three  preceding 
chapters,  belongs  to  the  period  of  the  seventh  vial  ;  and  is 
10* 


226  CHAPTER  XX. 

an  expanded  view  of  what  is  announced  in  general  terms 
in  the  latter  part  of  the  sixteenth  chapter.  It  should  also 
be  borne  in  mind,  that  this  first  resurrection,  whatever  be 
the  nature  of  it,  relates  to  the  defenders  of  pure  Christian- 
ity, and  civil  freedom. 

It  is  readily  perceived  that  the  term  first  resurrection  is 
only  a  name  given  to  the  events  predicted  at  the  close  of 
the  preceding  verse.  What  those  events  are,  I  have  en- 
deavored to  show.  It  is  not  then  a  literal  but  a  metaphori- 
cal resurrection.  It  is  the  living  and  reigning  with  Christ 
in  a  moral  and  political  sense,  as  their  beheading  is  to  be 
understood  in  that  sense. 

Why  is  this  styled  the  first  resurrection  ?  Not  because 
it  is  a  literal  resurrection  of  the  saints  to  precede  the  gen- 
eral raising  of  the  dead.  This  would  be  affirming  two  res- 
urrections. But  Christ  and  his  apostles  have  told  us  of 
no  more  than  one  literal  resurrection  of  the  deaJ.  Besides, 
if  a  literal  meaning  be  given  to  the  several  particulars  con- 
tained in  the  fourth  ve'-'jc,  on  which  many  insist,  it  cuts  off 
their  favorite  idea  of  a  premillennial  resurrection  of  all  the 
saints,  and  even  of  all  the  martyred  saints.  For  John 
speaks  only  of  those  who  were  beheaded  ;  and  it  will  not 
do  to  extend  this  phrase  so  as  to  embrace  all  the  martyrs ; 
least  of  all  will  it  do  for  Uteralists  to  stretch  the  meaning 
so  entirely  beyond  the  import  of  the  term. 

Nowhere  in  scripture  is  a  seco;ic?  resurrection  mentioned. 
But,  if  there  be  a  literal  ^rsi  resurrection,  there  must  be  a 
literal  second.  The  term  first,  therefore,  has  no  relerence 
to  a  literal  numerical  second,  for  there  is  none  such.  Among 
all  the  numerous  passages  in  the  New  Testament,  which 
speak  of  the  resurrection,  this  place  is  the  only  one  where 
this  phrase  occurs.  Everywhere  else,  the  literal  resurrec- 
tion of  those  who  have  died,  is  spoken  of  as  one  event. 
Christ  said,   '  Marvel  not  at  this,  for  the  hour  is  coming  in 


CHAPTER  XX.  227 

which  all  -who  are  in  their  graves,  shall  hear  his  voice,  and 
shall  come  forth  ;  they  who  have  done  good,  unto  the  res- 
urrection of  life,  and  they  who  have  done  evil,  to  the  resur- 
rection of  damnation.'  The  remark  of  Paul  to  the  Thessa- 
lonians,  that  '  The  dead  in  Christ  shall  rise  first,'  means 
simply,  that  the  dead  in  Christ  will  be  raised  before  those 
who  are  alive  on  the  earth  will  be  caught  up  to  meet  the 
Lord  in  the  air.  To  the  Corinthians  he  said,  '  Every  man 
in  his  own  order,  Christ  the  first  fruits,  afterward  they  who 
are  Christ's  at  his  coming.'  This  is  only  a  mention  of  the 
particular  order  in  which  the  one  resurrection  will  take 
place. 

Why,  then,  is  this  symbolic  resurrection  styled  the  first  ? 
Because,  as  it  seems  to  me,  it  will  be  the  first  deliverance 
which  the  nations  of  the  empire  will  experience  from  a  false 
and  tyrannical  religion ;  and  a  deliverance  also  from  civil 
oppression,  with  which  it  is  conjoined.  I  say,  the  nations 
of  the  empire ;  for  I  consider  these  visions  as  relating  to 
them.  This  will  be  the  first  time,  that  the  friends  of  true 
religion  and  free  government  there,  will  obtain  that  full 
and  undisputed  reign  with  Christ,  which  consists  in  the  en- 
joyment of  all  those  rights  and  privileges,  which  the  gospel 
and  the  reign  of  Christ  are  designed  to  give  to  mankind. 
It  will  be  the  first  general  emancipation  of  the  mind  from 
the  shackles  of  superstition,  error,  and  tyranny  in  those 
nations  since  the  Christian  era.  Who  does  not  know,  that 
these  hold  absolute  sway  in  Italy,  Greece,  Spain,  Austria, 
and  all  Roman  and  Greek  catholic  countries,  notwithstand- 
ing all  that  the  reformation  has  done  for  others  1  What  a 
proof  of  this  do  we  have  in  the  recent  events  pertaining  to 
the  short-lived  republic  of  Rome,  and  the  crushed  Hunga- 
rians ! 

In  this  first  resurrection,  the  Jews,  as  we  believe,  will  be 
participants  ;  will  be  restored  to  the  land  of  their  fathers  ; 


228  CHAPTER  XX. 

will  acknowledge  Christ  as  the  Messiah,  and  become  an  in- 
tegral part  of  his  church.  This  will  be  as  life  from  the 
dead. 

The  termors/  may  have  a  further  signification  in  this  in- 
stance, viz :  peculiar  eminence,  highest  importance.  The 
Greek  word  is  defined  to  mean  "  the  most  eminent,  most 
illustrious,  the  principal."  This  alone  is  a  sufficient  reason 
for  its  use. 

Now,  if  we  admit  that  the  first  resurrection  implies  a 
second,  we  are  prepared  to  show  what  is  that  second.  Ev- 
idently the  second  must  correspond  to,  or  be  of  a  like  na- 
ture with  the  first,  unless  a  difference  is  plainly  indicated- 
It  seems  to  me,  that  we  have  this  second  resurrection  dis- 
tinctly stated  in  the  following  verses.  It  is  declared,  that 
after  the  thousand  years  shall  have  expired,  Satan  will  be 
loosed  out  of  his  prison,  and  shall  go  out  to  deceive  the  na- 
tions, which  are  in  the  four  quarters  of  the  land,  the  Roman 
earth,  just  as  he  has  done  in  former  ages.  Here  again  is 
the  same  old  dragon,  serpent,  devil  and  Satan,  the  instigator 
and  representative  of  false  religion  and  t3'^ranny  ;  and  his 
being  loosed  signifies,  that  he  will  be  permitted  to  make 
mighty  efforts  to  revive  the  old  errors,  superstitions,  and 
idolatries ;  and  the  old  oppressive  forms  of  government. 

Then  there  will  be  another  signal  manifestation  of  the 
power  and  grace  of  God  in  behalf  of  his  cause  and  people. 
The  enemies  of  true  religion  and  human  welflire  will  be 
destroyed  as  the  beast  and  false  prophet  were,  by  being 
overwhelmed  with  various  troubles  and  calamities  ;  or  by 
direct  and  awful  judgments  of  God,  called,  verse  ninth,  '  fire 
sent  down  from  God  out  of  heaven.'  Then  comes  the 
second  symbolic  resurrection,  as  described  in  verses  1 1, 12,  13, 
viz. :  the  deliverance  of  the  people  from  moral  and  political 
degradation  and  the  perpetual  enjoyment  of  the  full  bless- 


CHAPTER  XX.  229 

ings  of  Messuah's  reign ;  all  that  is  signified  by  the  new 
heavens  and  new  earth,  and  the  making  of  all  things  new. 

6.  Blessed  and  holy  is  he  that  hath  part  in  the  first  resur- 
rection ;  on  such  the  second  death  hath  no  power  ;  but  they 
shall  be  priests  of  God  and  of  Christ,  and  shall  reign  with 
him  a  thousand  years. — This  verse  declares  the  happy  con- 
dition of  those  who  will  participate  in  the  blessings  and 
privileges  included  in  the  first  resurrection.  The  term 
blessed  is  used  here  as  in  numerous  other  passages  instead 
of  happy.  Thus,  Blessed,  or  as  we  might  read  it,  Happy 
are  the  poor  in  spirit,  &c.  They  are  holy  as  well  as  happy. 
Holy  as  being  set  apart  and  consecrated  to  the  service  of 
God,  and  holy  because  subjects  of  the  Spirit's  influence. 

On  such  the  second  death,  (&c.  What  is  meant  by  the 
second  death  ?  Is  it  literal  or  metaphorical  ?  I  think  it  is 
the  latter.  Not  that  I  would  in  the  least  countenance  the 
error,  that  the  wicked  will  not  suffer  hereafter,  the  penalty 
threatened  in  the  divine  law.  But,  it  is  unwise  to  attempt 
to  support  that  solemn  truth  with  passages  of  scripture 
which  have  no  reference  to  it. 

We  have  seen  in  the  preceding  context,  the  prediction 
of  the  first  death  or  destruction  of  the  supporters  of  false 
religion  and  civil  despotism ;  and  also  the  first  resurrection 
of  the  friends  of  true  religion  and  civil  freedom.  Each  is 
to  be  followed  by  a  second  alike  in  its  nature,  and  pertain- 
ing to  the  same  nations.  The  second  death  will  be  the 
second  overthrow  of  the  supporters  of  false  religions,  corrup- 
tions of  Christianity,  and  all  despotism  in  church  and 
state.     This  is  described  in  the  ninth  and  tenth  verses. 

The  nature  of  the  second  death  may  be  perceived  in  the 
fact,  that  it  stands  in  contrast  with  the  succeeding  clause  ; 
— but  they  shall  be  priests  of  God,  dbc.  It  is  the  negative 
of  what  is  there  positively  asserted.     The  negative  part  of 


230  CHAPTER  XX. 

the  antithesis  is,  07i  svch  the  second  death  hath  no  poioer,  or 
permission  to  hurt.  The  positive  part  is  what  follows, — 
But  tJieij  shall  he  priests.  &c.,  and  shall  reign  with  him  a 
thousand  years.  Now,  this  positive  part  clearly  refers  to 
their  privileges  and  blessings  in  this  world ;  for  there  can 
be  no  occasion  for  any  to  be  priests  to  God  to  offer  prayers 
and  sacrifices  in  the  heavenly  world.  The  scriptures  do 
not  teach,  that  there  will  be  praying  where  the  condition 
of  all  will  be  fixed,  and  where  all  will  be  filled  with  peace 
and  blessedness.  Further  still,  their  reign  with  Christ  is 
to  be  for  a  thousand  years,  which  all  understand  to  relate 
to  the  church  in  this  world,  hi  heaven  the  saints  will 
reign  not  merely  a  thousand  years,  but  forever  and  ever. 

The  conclusion  is  legitimate  and  unavoidable,  that  the 
second  death  is  something  which  is  to  transpire  in  this 
world,  as  is  the  first  and  second  resurrection  with  whicli  it 
is  contrasted.  It  is  the  second  destruction  of  all  that  is 
meant  by  the  beast,  the  false  prophet,  and  the  dragon, 
under  God's  judgments,  wliich  will  be  like  '  fire  out  of 
heaven ;'  like  the  fire  which  consumed  Sodom  and  Gomor- 
rah, to  which  probably  there  is  allusion.  These  judgments 
will  not  harm  or  affect  injuriously  those,  who  are  pro- 
nounced happy  and  holy, — the  friends  of  truth  and  equity, 
who  participate  in  the  privileges  and  mercies  of  the  first 
resurrection.  As  Lot  escaped  from  Sodom,  and  the  disci- 
ples and  their  believing  brethren  from  Jerusalem  previous 
to  its  destruction,  in  obedience  to  the  warning  of  Christ; 
so  these  will  be  safe  while  the  enemies  of  God,  of  true  re- 
ligion, and  of  human  rights,  will  be  overwhelmed,  and 
their  cause  destroyed. 

To  1)e  priests  of  God  and  of  Christ,  is  to  be  honored 
with  free  access  and  intimate  commimion  with  the  God- 
head. The  Jewish  priests  were  appointed  to  offer  prayers 
and  sacrifices,  and  to  them  was  granted  the  privilege   of 


CHAPTER  XX.  231 

entering  the  holy  ph^ce,  of  coming  near  to  the  Lord,  and 
ministering  before  him.  Sucli  is  now  the  privilege  of  all 
believers,  and  in  the  millennium,  as  it  seems  to  be  here 
intimated,  this  privilege  will  be  very  highly  prized,  and  be 
eminently  enjoyed.  To  his  believing  brethren  Peter 
wrote,  saying,  'Ye  are  a  holy  priesthood  to  offer  up  spirit- 
ual sacrifices,  acceptable  to  God  through  Jesus  Christ.' 
By  him  all  believers  have  freedom  of  access  to  the  mercy- 
seat,  as  did  the  priests  under  the  former  dispensation. 
They  will  reign  with  Christ,  or  by  and  through  him,  in  that 
coming  2yeriod,  because  imre  Christianity,  tvith  all  its  atten- 
dant blessings,  will  have  supremacy.  Instead  of  being  op- 
pressed, despised,  and  persecuted  as  in  former  ages ;  the 
ruling  power,  the  control  of  civil  and  religious  affairs,  will 
be  in  their  hands.  Christians  will  hold  the  reins  of  govern- 
ment, and  will  regulate  public  matters  by  the  principles  of 
the  gospel.  Of  the  church  God  hath  said,  '  The  forces  of 
the  Gentiles,  and  their  kings  shall  be  brought  to  thee.  For 
the  nation  and  kingdom  that  will  not  serve  thee  shall 
perish,  yea,  those  nations  shall  be  utterly  wasted.'  The 
church  of  Christ  is  to  have  the  preeminence,  and  will  exert 
its  appropriate  influence  for  all  that  is  good,  humane,  and 
excellent. 

7  and  8.  And  when  the  thousand  years  are  expired, 
Satan  shall  be  loosed  out  of  his  prison,  And  shall  go  out  to 
deceive  the  nations  ivhich  are  in  the  four  quarters  of  the 
earth,  Gog  and  Magog,  to  gather  them  together  to  battle  ;  the 
number  of  whom  is  as  the  sand  of  the  sea. — After  this  season 
of  brightness,  a  portentous  storm  gathers,  and  again  the 
scene  changes.  The  old  deceiver  is  released  from  his  con- 
finement, and  is  permitted  to  resume  his  former  work  of 
blinding  and  deceiving  mankind.  The  human  heart  will 
be  the  seat  of  the  same  depravity  as  ever,  and  this  is  shown 


232  CHAPTER  XX. 

by  the  fresh  manifestation  of  hostility  to  the  holy  religion 
of  the  gospel,  and  the  pure  and  spiritual  worship  of  God. 
All  that  will  be  good  and  beautiful  in  the  millennium,  will 
be  the  effect  of  the  extraordinary  power  of  the  Spirit, 
making  the  means  of  salvation  effectual ;  and  is  not  to  be 
attributed  to  anything  connate  in  men.  This  new  devel- 
opment of  hostility  to  Christianity  and  its  purifying  and 
elevating  institutions,  does  not  appear,  however,  to  be  an 
apostasy  on  the  part  of  those,  who  have  enjoyed  them  ;  but 
rather  proceeds  from  nations  who  have  lived  in  a  heathen- 
ish state  during  the  thousand  years.  What  nations  these 
are,  is  made  quite  evident  by  the  names  given  to  them, 
which  are  Gog  and  Magog.  In  the  3Sth  and  39th  chapters 
of  Ezekiel,  these  hostile  nations  are  represented  as  making 
a  combined  attaclc  on  the  people  of  God  :  and  their  entire 
discomfiture  and  destruction  is  foretold.  Ezekiel  says  this 
shall  be  "  in  the  latter  days ;"  and  it  is  conceded,  that 
these  are  the  same  events  which  John  predicts  to  transpire 
after  the  thousand  years.  The  nations  and  tribes  included 
under  those  names,  were  anciently  called  Scythians,  and 
inhabited  the  northern  and  northeastern  jjortion  of  Asia, 
embracing  that  vast  territory  which  includes  Independent 
and  Chinese  Tartary,  Tibet,  and  Siberia,  This  has  been 
so  often  and  so  satisfactorily  proved  by  the  ablest  writers, 
that  we  take  it  as  indisputable.  Ezekiel  joins  Persia, 
Ethiopia,  and  Lybia  with  these.  It  may  be,  that  under 
these  various  nations,  are  included  all  the  enemies  of  pure 
Christianity  wherever  found.  In  the  writings  of  the  apos- 
tles the  word  etJuws,  nation,  is  used  to  signify  any  who  are 
neither  Jews  nor  Christians.  As  Satan,  the  genius  of  evil, 
the  fabricator  of  lying  vanities,  the  jiersonification  of  idola- 
try, and  desjwtism,  will  be  set  at  liberty,  and  renew  his 
efforts  to  deceive  the  nations  ;  I  understand  the  meaning  to 
be,  that  great  ingenuity   and    energy    will  be    employed 


CHAPTER  XX.  233 

against  true  religion  and  civil  freedom,  and  for  the  reestab- 
lishment  of  the  old  forms  of  idolatry  and  tyranny,  or  others 
resembling  them.  Vast  numbers,  compared  with  the  grains 
of  sand  on  the  sea-shore,  will  join  in  this  atrocious  conspi- 
racy against  the  kingdom  of  Christ. 

9.  And  they  tvetit  np  on  the  breadth  of  the  earthy  and 
compassed  the  camp  of  the  saints  about,  and  the  beloved 
city :  and  fire  came  doion  from  God  out  of  heaven,  and  de- 
voured them. — These  countless  hosts  are  represented  as 
making  a  simultaneous  invasion  of  the  land,  encompassing 
the  camp  of  the  saints,  and  the  beloved  city,  as  if  deter- 
mined on  reducing  all  to  their  authority.  Ezekiel  says, 
'  they  shall  come  from  their  place  out  of  the  north  parts, 
and  many  people  Avith  them,  sitting  upon  horses,  a  great 
company,  and  a  mighty  army :  And  they  will  come 
against  my  people  of  Israel,  as  a  cloud  to  cover  the  land  ; 
it  shall  be  in  the  latter  days.'  I  think,  that  the  allusion  is 
still  to  that  part  of  Christendom,  which  constituted  the 
Roman  empire  at  the  time  in  wliich  John  wrote.  The 
camp  of  the  saints  is  a  figure  drawn  probably  from  the  en- 
campment of  the  Israelites,  when  the  Lord  led  them  through 
the  wilderness  ;  and  the  beloved  city  is  Jerusalem,  both, 
in  this  instance,  symbolizing  the  Christian  church.  This 
formidable  demonstration  against  Christianity,  though  re- 
presented by  an  invasion  of  a  country  and  the  besieging  of 
a  city,  may  be  continued  through  a  considerable  period  of 
time  before  the  fearful  crisis,  here  predicted,  shall  come. 

When  the  Christian  cause  shall  be  thus  assailed,  and  be 
put  in  imminent  peril,  God  will  remarkably  interpose  to 
save  it  from  ruin,  and  to  deliver  his  people  from  their  ene- 
mies. This  is  expressed  in  the  style  of  this  whole  book, 
figuratively,  hy  fire  coming  down  from  God  out  of  heaven. 
This  may  be  an  allusion  to  what  took  place  in  the  camp  of 


234  CHAPTER  XX. 

the  Israelites,  when  the  two  hundred  and  fifty  princes  were 
destroyed  for  their  opposition  to  Moses  and  Aaron,  '  Fire 
came  out  from  the  'presence  of  the  Lord,  and  consumed  them.^ 
More  than  two  thousand  four  hundred  years  ago,  Ezekiel 
gave,  from  the  Lord,  a  sublime  and  graphic  prediction  of 
this  destruction  of  these  enemies  of  Christianity.  '  It  shall 
come  to  pass  when  Gog  shall  come  against  the  land  of 
Israel,  saith  the  Lord,  that  my  fury  shall  come  up  into  my 
face.  And  I  will  plead  against  him  with  pestilence  and 
with  blood  ;  and  I  v.ill  rain  upon  him  and  upon  his  bands, 
and  upon  the  many  people  with  him  an  overflowing  rain, 
and  great  hail  stones,  fire,  and  brimstone.  Thus  will  I 
magnify  myself,  and  sanctify  myself,  and  the  nations  shall 
know,  that  I  am  the  Lord.'  How  evident  it  is,  that  John 
uses  the  figures  of  the  ancient  prophets  and  with  the  same 
signification.  Here  we  have  the  whole  array  of  the  most 
destructive  elements, — pestilence,  war,  rain,  hailstones, 
fire,  and  brimstone,  all  combined  to  express  the  most  ter- 
rible judgments  of  the  Lord,  like  those  which  he  sent  up- 
on Egypt ; — judgments  to  be  inflicted  in  this  world  upon 
the  adversaries  of  his  righteous  cause. 

10.  And  the  devil  that  deceived  them  was  cast  into  the  lake 
of  fire  and  brimstone,  where  the  beast  and  the  false  prophet  are, 
and  shall  be  tormented  day  andni(fht  forever  and  ever. — The 
destruction  of  the  enemies  of  Christianity  is  attended  with 
the  destruction  of  their  antichristian  heathenish  principles 
and  practices.  This  is  expressed  symbolically  by  casting 
the  devil  into  the  lake  of  fire  and  brimstone,  just  as  the 
beast  and  false  prophet  were.  Here  the  name  devil  seems 
to  be  used  as  embracing  those  who  are  influenced  by  him, 
and  believe  the  destructive  errors  of  which  he  is  the  inven- 
tor, and  do  his  Avill  in  propagating  them.  For,  beyond 
question,  there  is  in  all  these  names  a  reference  to  that  apos- 


CHAPTER  XX.     '  235 

tate  spirit,  who  is  the  enemy  of  all  righteousness  ; — whom 
Paul  calls,  '  The  Prince  of  the  power  of  the  air,  the  spirit 
that  now  worketh  in  the  hearts  of  the  children  of  disobe- 
dience.' In  these  visions,  he  seems  to  be  the  impersona- 
tion of  antichristianism,  heathenism,  and  despotism,  those 
mighty  evils,  by  which  the  great  mass  of  mankind  have 
ever  been  deluded,  led  into  the  grossest  errors,  and  held 
fast  in  those  errors,  with  an  all-controlling  power.  And,  I 
have  no  doubt,  that  the  design  of  the  writer  throughout  this 
entire  chapter,  is  like  that  of  the  ancient  prophets,  to  show 
the  utter  and  Jinal  destruction  of  those  monstrous,  long- 
continued,  wide-spread  evils.  This,  I  trust,  will  be  made 
to  appear,  as  we  proceed. 

The  lake  of  fire  and  brimstone  xuhere  the  beast  and  false 
2)rophet  are,  is  a  plain  declaration,  that  it  is  identical  with 
that  mentioned  in  the  twentieth  verse  of  the  preceding 
chapter.  See  the  explanation  there  given.  Similar  lan- 
guage is  employed  by  Isaiah  in  describing  the  destruction 
of  the  Assyrian  army  under  Sennacherib  w  hich  came  against 
Jerusalem.  "  The  Lord  shall  cause  his  glorious  voice  to  be 
heard,  and  shall  show  the  lighting  down  of  his  arm,  with 
the  indignation  of  his  anger,  and  ivith  the  flame  of  a  devour- 
ing fire,  with  scattering  and  tempest,  and  hailstones." 
Isa.  30  :  30.  This  is  explained  by  the  record  of  the  facts  in 
the  nineteenth  chapter  of  the  second  book  of  Kings.  "  It  came 
to  pass  that  night,  that  the  angel  of  the  Lord  w^ent  out,  and 
smote  in  the  camp  of  the  Assyrians  a  hundred  fourscore 
and  five  thousand."  This  may  serve  as  an  illustration 
of  the  passage  under  consideration.  On  the  above  words 
of  Isaiah,  Scott  very  properly  remarks: — "The  ruin  of  all 
antichristian  powers,  in  order  to  the  final  triumph  of  the  gos- 
pel, seems  likewise  to  be  intended." 

Shall  he  tormented  day  and  night  forever  and  ever.     To  be 
tormented  means  to  be  greatly  distressed,  as  people  are 


236  CHAPTER  XX. 

when  they  are  involved  m  calamities,  and  are  filled  with 
self-reproach  and  fear.  The  same  thing  is  said  of  the  wor- 
shipers of  the  beast  and  his  image  in  the  fuurteenth  chap- 
ter. '  The  smoke  of  their  torment  ascendeth  up  forever  and 
ever,  and  they  have  no  rest  day  nor  night.'  I  have  shown 
there,  that  John  adopts  the  language  of  Isaiah  in  which  he 
predicts  the  destruction  of  Edom. 

So  in  the  case  before  us.  The  devil,  who  is  the  repre- 
sentative of  those  who  support  false  religion  and  tyranny, 
will  be  filled  with  vexation,  shame,  and  fear,  night  and  day, 
i.e.,  without  intermission,  and  for  a  period  of  great  length. 


Events  preparatory   to  the  JYeio  Heaven  and  a  JYew 
Earth. 

The  uniform  construction  put  upon  the  remaining  verses 
of  this  chapter,  is,  that  they  predict  the  second  personal 
coming  of  Christ,  the  resurrection  of  the  dead,  the  final 
judgment,  the  end  of  the  world,  and  the  doom  of  the  impen- 
itent. It  may  seem  rash  to  go  against  what  may  be  re- 
garded as  the  universal  opinion  of  Christendom. 

That  there  will  be  a  second  personal  advent  of  Jesus 
Christ,  a  resurrection  of  the  dead,  and  a  general  judgment, 
I  hold  to  be  unequivocally  taught  in  the  New  Testament. 
But,  that  those  momentous  facts  are  predicted  here,  is  what 
I  am  not  prepared  to  admit.  To  admit  it,  would  be  to  de- 
part entirely  from  the  analogy  of  the  book ;  and,  without 
any  show  of  reason  to  drop  the  metaphorical,  and  assume 
the  literal  signification. 

11.  And  I  saw  a  great  white  throne,  and  him  that  sat  on 
it,  from  whose  face  the  earth  and  the  heaven  fled  away  ;  and 


CHAPTER  XX.  237 

there  was  found  no  place  for  them. — A  throne  is  an  emblem 
of  governmental  authority,  of  sovereign  rule.  The  qualify- 
ing epithets,  great  and  shining,  seem  to  give  intensity  to 
the  meaning,  as  being  of  peculiar  importance,  and  the  gov- 
ernment indicated,  as  most  equitable  and  perfect.  Though 
we  are  not  told  who  sat  upon  the  throne  ;  yet  from  the 
scope  of  what  is  said,  we  infer,  that  it  was  Chi'ist  himself, 
styled  previously.  King  of  kings,  and  Lord  of  lords.  Hav- 
ing been  foreshown  by  successive  panoramic  scenes,  the 
destruction  of  heathenism,  papacy,  religious  aiid  political 
despotism,  -snth  their  attendant  evils,  I  think  we  are  now  to 
be  sho^vn  the  reign  of  Christ  in  the  fullness  of  its  glory  on 
earth. 

John's  vision  of  this  great  shining  throne  no  more  implies 
the  second  coming  of  Christ,  than  his  vision  of  a  throne  in 
heaven  and  one  seated  upon  it,  as  related  in  the  fourth 
chapter.  It  no  more  suggests  a  personal  advent,  than  does 
his  beholding  heaven  opened,  and  a  white  horse,  and  him 
who  sat  upon  it,  called  Faithful  and  True.  Not  a  word  is 
said  here  about  the  second  appearing  of  Christ,  nor  is  his 
name  mentioned ;  and  all  that  commentators  and  others 
have  written  to  this  effect,  is  an  inference  of  their  o^\ai. 
Regarding  the  nature  of  symbolic  language,  I  conceive  the 
simple  idea  to  be,  that  at  the  period  intended,  there  tviU  be 
a  signal  manifestation  of  the  poive^\  the  sovereignty  and  the 
grace  of  the  great  King,  in  the  wonderful  events  and  changes, 
which  the  writer  goes  on  to  detail.  For  a  parallel,  see 
Isaiah's  vision  of  "  the  Lord  sitting  on  a  throne,  high  and 
lifted  up,"  when  he  was  commissioned  to  prophesy  most 
important  events  concerning  Israel.  Isa.  6:1.  See  also, 
that  magnificent  symbolic  display  of  the  wisdom,  power, 
and  sovereignty  of  God  to  Ezekiel ;  when  among  other 
things  he  beheld  "  the  likeness  of  a  throne,  as  the  appear- 


238  CHAPTER  XX. 

ance  of  a  sapphire-stone,  and  upon  the  likeness  of  the  throne 
the  likeness  of  a  man."     Ezek.  1. 

From  the  lace  of  him  ^yho  sat  on  the  throne,  John  says, 
the  heaven  and  the  earth  fled  away  ;  and  there  was  found  no 
place  for  them.  Now,  if  this  should  be  understood  literally, 
and  surely  it  has  the  same  claim  to  be  so  understood,  as 
that  which  precedes  and  follows  it ;  then,  not  only  our 
earth  is  to  fly  from  its  orbit  and  vanish  into  nothingness ; 
but  also  heaven  itself,  the  expanse  over  our  heads,  or  the 
place  of  the  blessed,  is  to  be  annihilated,  so  that  it  will  no- 
where be  found.  Is  such  a  thing  to  be  imagined  1  Is 
this  reconcilable  with  the  analogy  of  divine  providence,  and 
with  other  portions  of  divine  truth  1  I  think  not.  What 
then  is  the  sentiment  expressed  by  the  disappearance  of  the 
earth  and  heaven  ? 

Without  repeating  the  definition  so  often  given  of  the 
terms,  earth  and  heaven^  I  would  say,  that  it  is  the  cessa- 
tion of  the  old  order  of  things,  preparatory  to  the  introduc- 
tion of  one  which  is  far  better.  It  is  the  incipient  stage  of 
an  entire  change  in  the  moral,  social,  and  governmental  con- 
dition of  the  people. 

So  spake  the  ancient  prophets.  Predicting  the  destruc- 
tion of  Edorn,  Isaiah  says,  '  The  heavens  shall  be  rolled 
together  as  a  scroll,  and  all  their  host  shall  fall  down,  as 
the  leaf  falleth  off  the  vine.  For  my  sword  shall  be  bath- 
ed in  heaven,  it  shall  come  down  upon  Idumea.'  Bishop 
Lowth  thinks,  that  "  this  proj)hecy  has  a  further  view  to 
some  great  revolutions  to  be  eflected  in  the  latter  times, 
antecedent  to  that  more  perfect  state  of  the  kingdom  of 
God  on  earth,  and  serving  to  introduce  it." 

John  uses  the  same  symbolical  language  in  the  sixth 
chapter  of  this  book,  where,  as  is  generally  admitted,  he 
predicts  the  great  change  in  the  Roman  empire  from  pagan- 
ism to  Christianity.     The  old  systems  of  error,  supersti- 


CHAPTER  XX.  239 

tion,  and  oppression,  which  have  blinded,  and  degraded 
mankind,  will  be  swept  away,  and  so  completely,  that  no 
place  ivill  he  found  for  them. 

12.  And  I  saw  the  dead,  small  and  great,  stand  before 
God;  and  the  books  ivere  opened:  and  another  book  was 
opened,  ivhich  is  the  book  of  life :  and  the  dead  were  judged 
out  of  those  things  which  were  written  in  the  books,  according 
to  their  ivorks. — All,  who  are  acquainted  with  the  contents 
of  the  Bible  know,  that  the  prophets,  Christ,  and  the  apos- 
tles use  the  terms  dead  and  death  in  a  moral  and  political 
sense,  signifying  a  state  of  sinfulness,  oppression,  and  deg- 
radation. See  instances  already  quoted,  Isa.  26  :  19.  Ezek, 
37  :  1-14.  Christ  said,  "  As  the  Father  raiseth  up  the 
dead  and  quickeneth  them  ;  even  so  the  Son  quickeneth 
whom  he  will."  In  the  same  conversation  he  reaffirmed 
this  in  these  Avords,  'The  hour  is  coming  and  now  is,  v/hen 
the  dead  shall  hear  the  voice  of  the  Son  of  God,  and  theg 
ivho  hear  shall  live.'  John  5  :  21,  25.  These  are  the 
spiritually  dead,  who  were  made  spiritually  alive  by  the 
truth  and  by  the  Spirit  of  Christ.  "  Dead  in  trespasses 
and  sin," — "  dead  to  sin," — "  dead  with  Christ," — "  if  one 
died  for  all,  then  were  all  dead,"  are  instances  of  the  use  of 
this  term  in  a  naoral  sense.  See  explanation  of  the  fifth 
verse  of  this  chapter. 

Great  and  small  is  a  descriptive  phrase,  meaning  persons 
of  every  rank  and  condition,  not  persons  of  different  ages. 
And  this  is  proof,  that  these  are  not  the  literally  dead  ;  nor 
is  this  as  is  generally  suj^posed,  a  literal  resurrection,  for 
that  will  include  persons  of  all  ages. 

These  persons  of  every  rank  stand  before  God.  This  is 
commonly  understood  to  be  the  arraignment  for  the  last 
judgment.  Of  course,  here  again,  contrary  to  the  scope  of 
the  prediction  and  the   analogy  of  the  book,  the  literal 


240  CHAPTER  XX. 

meaning  is  adopted.  I  am  constrained  to  dissent  entirely 
from  such  an  interpretation.  If  any  one's  recollection  does 
not  suffice  to  show  them  how  the  word  stand  is  used  in  the 
scriptures,  let  him  turn  to  Cruden's  Concordance,  for  in- 
stances showing  its  use.  '  The  Lord  will  stand  at  the  right 
hand  of  the  poor,  to  save  him  from  those  that  condemn  his 
soul.'  Ps.  109  :  31.  That  is,  the  Lord  will  help  and  pro- 
tect the  poor.  '  The  liberal  deviseth  liberal  things,  and  by 
liberal  things  shall  he  stand  ;'  that  is,  he  shall  be  approved, 
made  secure,  and  prosperous.  Isa.  32  :  8.  '  Who  shall 
stand  when  he  appeareth  1  for  he  is  like  a  refiner's  fire,  and 
like  fuller's  soap.'  Mai.  3:2;  i.e.,  Who  will  be  approved 
as  good  and  faithful  ?  '  Watch,  and  pray  always,  that  ye 
may  be  accounted  worthy  to  escape  all  these  things,  that 
shall  come  to  pass,  and  to  stand  before  the  Son  of  man, 
Luke  21  :  36.  That  is,  worthy  to  escape  from  the  evils 
coming  on  Jerusalem  and  the  Jews,  and  to  be  approved, 
vindicated,  and  protected  by  the  Son  of  man.  Directly  in 
point  is  Ezckiel's  manner  of  expressing  the  restoration  of 
the  Israelites  to  their  own  land  and  to  their  civil  and  reli- 
gious privileges ; — '  breath  came  into  the  dry  bones,  and 
they  lived,  and  stood  up  upon  their  feet,  an  exceeding  great 
arm3^'  What  then  is  the  idea  expressed  by  the  Christian 
prophet?  It  is,  that  persons  of  every  rauk  and  condition, 
who  are  in  a  state  of  moral  and  2">olitical  death,  will  be 
raised  up  from  their  unhappy  condition,  and  will  be  vindi- 
cated, protected  and  favored  by  God.  At  that  period, 
when  the  old  state  of  things  shall  vanish,  God  will  vindi- 
cate the  rights  of  all  classes  of  people,  and  establish  them 
in  the  permanent  enjoyment  of  those  blessings,  which  the 
reign  of  Christ  on  earth  is  designed  to  confer. 

And  the  book,"  were  opened.  These  are  coinmonly  con- 
sidered to  be  the  registers  of  the  actions  of  mankind, 
according   to   which   the   final  judgment   will   be   given. 


CHAPTER  XX.  241 

Daniel,  prophesying  perhaps,  of  these  events,  says,  '  Tiie 
judgment  was  set  and  the  books  were  openeiV  Bnt  it  is 
perfectly  plain,  that  he  does  not  speak  of  the  general  judg- 
ment ;  for  he  is  describing  what  will  take  place  just  pre- 
vious to  the  giving  to  Christ,  the  dominion,  and  glory,  and 
kingdom,  that  all  people,  nations,  and  languages  may  serve 
him.     This  is  precisely  what  John  is  showing  in  this  place. 

What  then  are  these  books  1  Surely  not  account  books, 
which  it  is  supposed,  God  keeps  for  recording  human  ac- 
tions. He  needs  no  such  books.  But,  they  are  those, 
which  contain  the  statutes,  instructions,  and  precepts  by 
which  the  jieople  are  to  regulate  their  conduct.  They  are 
those  sources  of  knowledge,  which  are  needful  for  the 
people,  making  them  acquainted  with  their  relations  and 
duties  to  themselves  and  to  God. 

These  books  being  open  indicates,  that  the  sources  of 
knowledge  will  be  open  and  accessible  to  all.  Their  con- 
tents will  be  for  the  benefit  of  those  persons  of  all  classes 
just  spoken  of.  Thus,  in  the  fifth  chapter,  the  book  sealed 
with  seven  seals,  which  no  one  except  the  Lamb  was  found 
worthy  to  open,  signifies,  that  its  contents  were  not  made 
known,  and  that  it  belonged  to  Christ  alone  to  make  them 
known.  Again  in  the  tenth  chapter,  the  little  open  book 
purports,  that  its  contents  were  to  be  at  once  communicated. 
An  open  book  is  an  appropriate  emblem  for  the  diffusion 
of  knowledge.  In  the  latter  times  we  are  told  that 
'•knowledge  shall  be  increased,"  yea,  says  Isaiah,  "The 
earth  shall  be  full  of  the  knowledge  of  the  Lord." 

And  another  book  was  opened,  which  is  the  book  of  life. 
The  Bible  is  the  book  of  life.  '  The  loords  which  I  speak 
%into  you,  said  Christ,  are  spirit,  and  they  are  life.''  Ihe 
gospel  brings  life  and  immortality  to  light; — it  shows  the 
way  of  life,  and  its  truths  are  the  means  of  producing  life 
m  the  souL  It  portrays  the  work  of  redemption,— Ihe 
11 


242  CHAPTER  XX. 

method  which  God  hath  taken  to  bestow  justification  and 
life  upon  the  guilty  and  perishing.  It  also  prescribes  the 
rules  by  which  we  should  regulate  all  our  feelings  and  ac- 
tions so  as  to  be  perfect  as  our  Father  in  heaven  is  perfect. 

This  book  u'cis  opened.  At  that  future  period  to  which 
this  refers,  the  precious  instructions  of  the  Bible  will  be 
free  to  all.  Those  things  which  now  obstruct  the  diiTusion 
of  the  truth,  will  be  tal<;en  out  of  the  way,  and  then  the 
Bible  will  be  disseminated,  and  read,  and  understood. 
Then,  all  will  know  the  Lord  from  the  least  to  the  greatest. 
Then  small  and  great  will  stand  upright  before  God, — will 
be  raised  up  from  their  crushed  and  wretched  condition, 
and  will  experience  his  protection  and  favor.  The  book  of 
life  opened  for  the  perusal  of  all,  and  unsealed,  so  that  it 
will  be  understood  by  all,  will  be  one  principal  means  of 
that  glorious  reformation,  whose  happy  scenes  are  depicted 
in  the  following  chapters. 

And  the  dead  were  judged  out  of  those  things  which  ^vere 
written  in  the  books,  according  to  their  icorks.  It  is  gen- 
erally thought,  that  the  term  judged  in  this  place  makes  it 
unquestionable,  that  the  final  judgment  is  meant.  But, 
commonly  in  the  old  Testament  from  which  this  whole 
figurative  language  is  drawn,  the  term  is  ^scd  to  signify  the 
exercise  of  government,  the  act  of  ruling,  and  also  the  act 
of  vindicating.  I  give  a  few  examples. — Deborah  judged 
Israel  at  that  time.  ToAa  judged  Israel  twenty -three  years. 
Saw  judged — twenty-two  years ;  Jephtha — six  years ;  Samp- 
son— twenty  years ;  and  so  of  Samuel  and  many  others. 
David  says,  Ps.  67  :  4,  'Thou  shtiM judge  the  people  right- 
eously ;'  that  is,  govern  them  in  equity.  Again,  96  :  13, 
'  The  Lord  shall  judge,  i.e.,  rule  the  world  with  righteous- 
ness and  the  people  with  his  truth.'  This  is  directly  in 
point,  for  it  evidently  refers  to  the  very  period  of  which 
John  is  speaking.     The  psalm  is  a  sublime  song  of  praise 


CHAPTER  XX.  243 

for  the  spread  of  the  knowledge  of  the  glory  of  God  through 
the  world,  and  for  his  reign  over  all  people. 

To  be  judged  out  of  the  things  written  in  the  books,  is  to 
be  governed  according  to  the  statutes,  precepts,  and  ordi- 
nances contained  in  them.  It  is  to  make  these  the  rules  by 
which  the  people  are  to  regulate  their  conduct,  and  by 
which  the  government  is  to  be  administered.  The  people 
will  be  governed  equitably,  righteously,  because  they  will  be 
dealt  with  according  to  their  works.  Thus  will  it  be  under 
the  glorious  reign  of  the  Son  of  God  in  that  future  period. 

13.  And  the  sea  gave  up  the  dead  which  vjere  in  it;  and 
death  and  hell  delivered  up  the  dead  which  were  in  them: 
and  they  were  judged  every  man  according  to  their  works. — 
And  the  sea  gave  vj)  the  dead  tvhich  tvere  in  it.  The  sea  is 
an  emblem  of  nations  in  a  state  of  commotion,  contention, 
or  anarchy,  either  without  proper  laws  and  institutions,  or 
regardless  of  them.  These  nations,  whether  heathen  or 
civilized,  will  yield  up  their  dead,  viz.,  their  ignorant,  irre- 
ligious, oppressed  people,  to  be  governed  by  the  righteous 
principles  contained  in  the  books.  Instead  of  being  turbu- 
lent, heathenish  and  rebellious,  they  will  yield  a  willing 
subjection  to  the  mild  and  equitable  reign  of  the  Prince  of 
peace. 

And  death  and  hell  delivered  njJ  the  dead  zvhich  were  in 
them.  The  word  for  hell  in  this  place  is  hades,  which  is  not 
that  used  for  the  place  of  future  punishment.  If  we  would 
know  what  is  meant  by  death  and  hell  here,  we  must  ob- 
serve the  manner  in  which  John  himself  uses  the  phrase. 
It  occurs  in  the  sixth  chapter  in  describing  the  events  under 
the  fourth  seal,  thus  :  '  Behold  a  pale  horse,  and  his  name 
that  sat  on  him  was  Death,  and  Hell  followed  with  him.' 
Now  this  describes  the  dreadful  state  of  the  Roman  empire 
under  heathen  rulers,  from  Com  modus  to  Philippus,  when 


244  CHAPTER  XX. 

internal  commotions,  wars,  massacres,  and  most  barbarous 
persecution  of  Christians  characterized  the  times.  There 
•were  twenty  emperors  and  thirty  usurpers  in  fifty  years. 
John  himself  furnishes  the  key  to  the  explanation, 
by  saying,  that  '  j^ower  was  given  to  Death  and  Hell  to 
kill  with  sword,  with  hunger,  and  with  death,  and  with  the 
beasts  of  the  earth.'  In  reference  to  this,  Woodhidl  says, 
"  To  profess  pure  religion  became  a  crime.  Severe  and 
murderous  laws  were  enacted  against  those  who  deviated 
from  the  standard  of  doctrine  established  by  corrupt  rulers. 
Whole  nations  of  Christians  were  subjugated  or  extirpated." 
This  horrible  state  of  things  is  expressed  by  Death  on  a 
pale  horse  and  Hell  following;  fit  emblems  truly  to  ex- 
press the  rampant  domination  of  heathenism  and  tyranny  ; 
and  the  practice  of  relentless  persecution  and  murder,  at- 
tended with  various  tortures,  too  revolting  to  be  described. 
It  is  readily  perceived  and  is  admitted,  that  in  these  cases 
Death  and  Hades  are  personifications  of  great  public  evils, 
and  a  great  sacrifice  of  life.  As  personal  beings,  they  are 
represented  as  having  authority  and  power  over  a  portion 
of  mankind,  viz.,  those  who  are  held  in  a  state  of  moral 
and  political  degradation,  called  for  that  reason,  the  dead. 
These  unhappy  subjects  of  theirs,  they  surrender  to  a 
higher  authority,  to  be  dealt  with  in  a  di  fie  rent  manner. 
They  %vere  judged  every  man  according  to  his  works,  i.e., 
they  will  be  ruled  over  according  to  the  principles  of  equity, 
and  every  one  will  be  treated  as  he  deserves.  In  this 
coming  reign  of  righteousness,  no  wrong  will  be  inflicted 
on  any,  and  all  will  stand  on  their  own  merits. 

14.  And  death  and  hell  ivere  cast  into  the  lake  of  fire. 
This  is  the  second  death. — Here  the  evidence  is  conclusive, 
that  these  terms  are  not  used  in  a  literal  sense.  Let  us 
ask,  what  is  death  %     It  is  not  a  personage,  nor  a  substance ; 


CHAPTER  XX.  245 

but  simply  an  event — the  cessation  of  life.  How  can  an 
event  be  cast  into  a  lake  of  fire  1  And  what  is  hell  or 
hades  1  It  is  the  invisible  Avorld,  the  place  of  departed 
spirits.  How  can  that  be  cast  into  a  lake  of  fire  ?  Plainly 
all  is  symbolical.  The  lake  of  fire  is  that  which  we  have 
repeatedly  explained  it  to  be,  viz.,  the  experience  of  great 
troubles  and  desolating  calamities. 

Death  and  Hell,  considered  as  beings,  are  represented  as 
cast  into  that  lake  ;  that  is,  the  wretched  state  of  things, 
which  those  tcmis  symbolize,  will  be  destroyed  by  signal 
visitations  of  divine  justice  and  power ;  in  other  words, 
religious  errors,  superstition,  and  idolatry,  social  evils,  con- 
tention and  anarclw,  with  political  evils,  oppressions  and 
wrongs,  will  be  destroyed  by  the  spiritual  and  providential 
means,  which  God  will  then  employ.  This  is  the  second 
death  ;  the  second  and  final  destruction  of  those  mighty 
evils.  The  Jirst  was  previous  to  the  thousand  years  ;  but 
was  partial  both  as  to  completeness  and  extent.  This  will 
be  complete  and  entire.  The  earth  will  be  purged  of  the 
evils,  with  which  mankind  have  been  aflflicted,  through  all 
preceding  ages,  and  these  verses  describe  the  purifying  pro- 
cess. Death,  says  the  Vocabulary  of  Symbolical  Lan- 
guage, "  is  the  extinction  of  mo'i-al  or  political  existence.'''' 
This  second  death  is  the  second  destruction,  the  final  extinc- 
tion of  those  moral  and  political  evils,  by  which  mankind 
have  been  degraded  besotted,  and  ruined. 

If  it  be  objected,  that  this  is  giving  a  signification  to  the 
term  death  in  this  last  clause,  different  from  that  in  the 
first  clause  where  it  is  coupled  with  hell,  I  reply,  that  so 
John  uses  the  word  in  the  two  places.  By  no  rational  inter- 
pretation can  they  be  made  to  signify  the  same.  To  say  that 
the  death,  which  is  to  be  cast  into  a  lake  of  fire,  is  the  sec- 
ond death,  is  to  speak  unintelligible  nonsense.  And  the 
manner  in  which  commentators  have  passed  over  these  ex- 


246  CHAPTER  XX. 

pressions,  sliows  that  they  felt  conscious,  that  theii'  mixed 
literal  and  metaphorical  mode  of  interpretation,  is  at  least 
questionaLle. 

If  it  be  doubted,  whether  death  is  used  in  the  senses 
which  I  have  given  to  it,  then  let  the  Bible  decide.  I  have 
said,  that  in  the  one  case,  it  means  the  state  of  ignorance, 
obscurity,  heathenism,  destitution  of  Christian  privileges 
and  of  the  blessings  of  an  equitable  government.  The  fol- 
lowing are  a  few  out  of  many  inspired  examples.  Job 
said,  '  The  Lord  poureth  contempt  ujion  princes ; 
he  discovereth  deep  things  out  of  darkness,  and  bringeth 
out  to  light  the  shadoiv  of  death.''  Again,  '  lie  setteth  an 
end  to  darkness,  and  the  shadotv  of  death.''  David  said, 
'  Thou  hast  sore  broken  us  in  the  place  of  dragons,  and 
covered  us  with  the  shadow  of  death.'  The  previous  verses, 
particularly  the  eleventh,  in  which  it  is  declared,  '  Thou 
hast  given  us  like  sheep  appointed  for  meat :  thou  hast 
scattered  us  among  the  heathen,''  show  plainly  what  the 
^ place  of  dragons,  and  shadow  of  death,^  mean.  Ps.  44  : 
19.  Again,  in  Psalms  107  :  10  and  14,  it  is  written,  'Such 
as  sit  in  darkness  and  in  the  shadow  of  death,  being  bound 
in  affliction  and  iron.'  '  lie  brought  them  out  of  darkness 
and  the  shadow  of  death,  and  brake  their  bands  asunder.' 
Isaiah  says,  (9  :  2,)  'The  people  that  walked  in  darkness  have 
seen  a  great  light  ;  and  they  who  dwell  in  the  land  of  the 
shadow  of  death,  upon  them  hath  the  light  shincd.'  Also 
Matt.  4  :  16,  and  Luke  1  :  79.  Thus  said  the  Lord  by 
Jeremiah,  'Give  glory  to  the  Lord  your  God,  lest  while  yo 
look  for  light,  he  turn  it  into  the  shadoiv  of  death,  and  make 
it  gross  darkness.''  How  manifest  it  is,  that  John  uses  the 
word  death  in  the  sense  of  the  above  writers,  as  meaning  a 
state  of  ignorance,  depression,  destitution,  and  sufioring. 
Accordant  with  this,  as  I  have  sjiown  repeatedly,  is  the 
phrase,  the  dead.     The  second  death  expresses  simply  the 


CHAPTER  XX.  247 

idea  of  tlcstruction  or  extinction,  viz. :   of  those  terrible 
evils  with  which  the  world  has  been  cursed. 

15,  And  ti'hosGever  was  not  found  written  in  the  booh  of 
life  ivas  cast  into  the  lake  of  Jire. —  The  books  are  those 
which  prescribe  the  rules  of  human  action.  Not  to  be 
found  written  in  them,  is  not  to  have  a  character  correspond- 
ent with  what  is  required.  It  is  to  pursue  a  course  of 
conduct  opposite  to  the  principles  prescribed.  Those  who 
are  guilty  of  such  disobedience,  will  experience  those 
calamities  and  distresses,  with  which  God  will  finally  pu- 
rify the  w'orld.  For  then  '  the  greatness  of  the  kingdom 
under  the  whole  heaven  will  be  given  to  the  people  of  the 
saints  of  the  Most  High,  whose  kingdom  is  an  everlasting 
kingdom,  and  all  dominions  shall  serve  and  obey  him.' 

The  preceding  verses  from  the  eleventh,  as  I  understand 
them,  do  not  refer  to  the  final  judgment  at  all,  nor  to  the  end 
of  the  world.  The  end  of  the  world  is  not  mentioned,  nor 
even  intimated.  There  has  seemed  to  be  an  universal  de- 
termination throughout  Christendom,  to  put  the  end  of  all 
sublunary  things  here.  But,  my  belief  is,  that  God  has  de- 
termined far  otherwise.  I  have  no  doubt,  that  he  has  great 
and  glorious  things  to  accomplish  in  this  world  beyond  the 
period  with  which  this  chapter  closes.  There  is  in  these 
verses  no  intimation  of  the  second  advent  of  Christ ; — none 
of  the  concomitants  of  that  great  event  are  mentioned ; — no 
voice  of  an  archangel ;  no  retinue  of  mighty  angels  is  an- 
nounced ;  no  glorious  appearing  of  the  Son  of  God  is 
affirmed.  From  the  mode  of  expression  w^e  should  con- 
clude, that  the  object  which  principally  engaged  the  atten- 
tion of  John  at  the  moment,  was  the  great  shining  throne, 
which  is  an  emblem  of  an  equitable,  perfect  government. 
This  government,  wielded  by  Him  who  occupied  the  throne, 
}xe  goes  on  to  show"  will  work  an  entire  change,  a  most  aus- 


248  CHAPTER  XX. 

|)icious  change  in  the  social,  political  and  s])iritual  condition 
c^f  men,  j^repaiatory  to  the  bright  scenes  in  the  succeeding 
chapters. 

A  reason  for  fixing  the  time  for  the  final  judgment  and 
the  end  of  the  world  at  the  close  of  the  thousand  yeai's,  seems 
to  have  been,  that  it  could  not  be  perceived,  what  other 
time  could  be  fixed  upon  for  those  great  events.  And  the 
universal  impression,  produced  by  a  misunderstanding  of 
other  passages  in  the  New  Testament,  has  been,  that  those 
events  are  somewhat  near  at  hand.  That  mistaken  notion 
lias  probably  had  its  influence  to  produce  the  erroneous  in- 
terpretation, which  makes  these  verses  to  designate  the 
(coming  of  Christ,  the  last  judgment,  and  the  closing  of  the 
world's  great  drama.  Hence,  the  question  which  is  so 
often  put.  If  this  be  not  the  time  for  those  august  trans- 
actions, when  will  it  be  ?  I  have  only  to  answer,  that  God 
has  nowhere  taught  us  when  it  will  be  :  and  I  regard  it  as 
highly  presumptuous  for  any  man  to  undertake  to  specify 
the  time.  That  the  time  will  be  according  to  the  popular 
belief,  at  the  close  of  the  thousand  years,  I  see  no  reason  to 
admit.  On  the  other  hand,  I  see  weighty  reasons  for  repu- 
diating that  belief  These  reasons  will  appear  in  the  exe- 
gesis of  the  remaining  chapters. 

Yet,  here  I  may  ask,  Avhy,  after  the  brief  period  of  seven 
thousand  years,  should  this  wonderfully  constructed  world 
be  strack  out  of  existence  1  Why  should  sin  have  so  long 
a  reign,  and  the  kingdom  of  Christ  set  up  to  destroy  it, 
scarcely  attain  ascendency  at  all  ?  A  careful  and  candid 
examination  of  what  is  here  said  of  the  thousand  years, 
does  not  show  them  to  be  years  of  such  spiritual  perfection, 
which  they  have  been  represented  to  be,  by  any  means  . 
All  that  is  affirmed,  or  that  can  be  properly  inferred,  con- 
cerning that  period  is,  that  there  will  then  be  a  suppression 


CHAPTER  XXr.  240 

of  certain  evils,  and  a  large  degree  of  prosperity  given  to 
true  religion. 

And,  is  this  all,  that  Clirist  will  do  for  his  church  and 
kingdom  in  the  world  1  Can  this  be  reconciled  with  the 
infinitely  benevolent  design  of  his  mission  ?  Is  Satan  to  be 
the  god  of  this  world  till  just  about  the  close  of  its  dura- 
tion ]  When  somewhat  more  than  a  thousand  years  shall 
have  passed,  is  this  earth,  so  beautifully  adorned,  and  so 
full  of  evil,  to  be  struck  from  its  orbit,  and  be  dismissed 
from  the  sisterhood  of  planets  in  our  system  1  Did  the 
travail  of  the  Redeemer's  soul  mean  no  more  than  this  ; 
and  will  he  accomplish  no  more  than  this  1  Let  those  be- 
lieve this  who  will ;  but  I  can  ncA^er  admit,  that  such  will 
be  the  termination  of  this  world's  affairs. 


CHAPTER    XXI. 

The  Mew  Heaven  and  JYew  Earth. 

The  preceding  chapter  closes  with  the  presentation  of 
the  great  changes  which  will  be  made  under  the  perfect 
government  of  Messiah,  which  government  is  symbolized 
by  a  great  shining  throne.  The  mighty  evils  which  have 
cursed  mankind  being  swept  away,  and*  correct  principles 
relating  to  human  welfare  in  this  life  and  that  which  is  to 
come,  being  universally  diffused  and  understood,  we  come 
to  the  last  act  in  the  great  drama  of  divine  providence  con- 
cerning our  world.  New  scenes  now  open,  bright,  cheer- 
ing and  glorious.  The  mind,  pained  and  sickened  with 
contemplating  human  degradation  and  wi'etchedness,  turns 
to  those  scenes  with  delight,  and  the  soul  feels  the  refresh- 
ing influence  of  them,  even  at  this  large  distance. 
11* 


250  CHAPTER  XXI. 

It  is  the  comiiionly  receiv'cd  opinion,  that  what  is  por- 
trayed in  this  and  tlie  succeedhig  chapter  relates  exclusively 
to  heaven.  The  new-  Jenisaleui  is  considered  to  be  the 
heavenly  city,  and  poets  have  sung  of  it  as  the  eternal  and 
"  happy  home"  of  the  saints.  This  view  of  the  matter  re- 
sults necessarily  from  the  error  of  understanding  what  im- 
mediately precedes,  as  the  end  of  the  world ;  for  what  but 
the  scenes  of  eternity  are  to  follow  the  end  of  time  and  of 
all  sublunary  things'?  But,  there  are  many  particulars  in 
these  tAvo  chapters,  which  cannot  with  propriety  be  attrib- 
uted to  heaven  and  the  eternal  state  of  the  blessed. ('  On 
the  face  of  the  description  it  is  apparent,  that  these  are 
scenes  to  be  realized  on  this  terrestrial  theater  of  human  af- 
fairs. '  I  have  no  doubt,  that  these  arc  the  scenes  briefly  but 
brilliantly  exhibited  by  the  ancient  prophets ;  that  in  those 
scenes  will  be  the  fulfillment  of  what  Daniel  said  concern- 
ing the  stone  which  became  a  great  mountain  and  filled  the 
whole  earth ;  which  he  interprets  to  be  that  kingdom, 
which  shall  break  in  pieces,  a^irf  consume  all  other  kingchms, 
and  which  shall  stand  forever.  It  is  not  a  little  remarkable, 
that  as  John  employs  the  same  emblems,  and  appears  to 
predict  the  same  events,  as  do  the  ancient  prophets,  it 
should  have  been  so  uniformly  agreed,  that  they  speak  of 
the  kingdom  of  Christ  in  this  world,  but  that  he  refers  to 
the  heavenly  world.  Why  not  say,  that  the  new  heavens 
and  new  earth  mentioned  by  Isaifih  and  the  city  which 
Ezekiel  so  minutely  describes,  and  his  river  of  living,  pu- 
rifying water,  whose  banks  were  adorned  with  trees,  are  all 
descriptive  of  heaven  ?  The  absurdity  of  such  an  inter- 
pretation would  be  its  own  refutation. 

1,  And  I  saw  a  neio  heaven  and  a  new  earth  :  for  the 
first  heaven  and  the  first  earth  ivere  2}asscd  away  ;  and  there 
was  no  more  sea. — We  have  just  been  told  that  the  heaven 


CHAPTER  XXI.  251 

and  earth  fled  away  from  the  face  of  him  who  sat  on  the 
throne,  which  fact  is  repeated  in  this  verse ;  and  now  we 
are  informed  that  a  new  heaven  and  earth  will  succeed  in 
their  place.  The  old  disordered  state  of  things  will  pass 
away  ;  and  a  new,  happy,  and  delightful  state  of  things  will 
follow.  Thus  God,  by  his  servant  Isaiah,  describes  the 
happy  change  which  he  would  work  for  his  people  in  restor- 
ing them  from  captivity,  and  in  putting  them  in  the  enjoy- 
ment of  great  temporal  and  spiritual  blessings,  as  the 
creation  of  new  heavens  and  a  new  earth.  '  Behold  I  create 
new  heavens  and  a  new  earth  ;  and  the  former  shall  not  be 
remembered,  nor  come  into  mind.  Be  ye  glad  and  rejoice 
forever  in  that  which  I  create  ;  for  behold,  I  create  Jerusa- 
lem a  rejoicing,  and  her  people  a  joy.  And  I  will  rejoice 
in  Jerusalem,  and  joy  in  my  people,'  &c.  Isa.  65  :  17-25. 
Dr.  Scott  remarks  upon  this  passage,  "  By  the  new  creating 
power  of  God,  the  circumstances  of  the  church,  and  the  char- 
acter of  men,  shall  be  so  altered,  that  it  will  appear  as  en- 
tirelv  a  new  world ;  so  that  the  former  confusions,  iniquities, 
and  miseries  of  the  human  race  shall  be  no  more  remem- 
bered or  renewed."  This  exhibits  the  real  meaning  of  the 
new  heavens  and  new  earth,  both  as  regards  the  Jews  and 
others.  Yet,  in  the  same  connection  he  says,  "  John  uses 
the  expressions  new  heaven  and  new  earth,  to  mean  the 
heavenly  state,  after  the  end  of  the  world,  and  the  day  of 
judgment."  To  my  mind  it  is  much  more  accordant  with 
scriptural  analogy  and  consistency  to  maintain,  that  the 
Christian  prophet,  who  was  also  a  Jevv^,  uses  the  symbolical 
language  of  the  ancient  prophet,  and  in  the  same  sense. 

By  the  new  heaven  and  new  earth,  I  understand,  a  re- 
formed and  perfected  state  of  things  in  relation  to  the  po- 
litical, social  and  religious  affairs  of  men.  Governments 
will  be  formed  on  the  equitable  and  benevolent  basis  of  the 
gospel,  and  be  administered  fur  the  best  good  of  the  wliole. 


252  CHAPTER  XXI. 

Tlie  means  of  acquiring  useful  knowledge  will  be  superior 
in  kind,  and  will  be  accessible  to  all.  The  human  mind 
will  be  illuminated  with  truth  on  all  subjects,  and  thus  its 
powers  will  have  their  most  favorable  development.  Man- 
kind will  be  advanced  to  an  intellectual  and  moral  eleva- 
tion, to  which  as  a  mass  they  have  never  before  attained. 
The  chief  instrumentality  in  producing  this  elevation  will  be 
the  gospel.  Religion  will  then  have  a  controlling  influence 
over  the  minds  of  men,  and  over  their  customs  and  habits. 
The  knowledge  of  the  Lord  will  fill  the  earth,  and  holiness, 
its  appropriate  fruit,  will  give  a  new  aspect  to  society,  and 
make  this  appear  like  a  new  world.  On  the  ruins  of 
Satan's  empire  will  be  firmly  established  that  kingdom, 
which  consists  in  righteousness,  peace  and  joy  in  the  Holy 
Ghost.  This  will  be  the  period  when  '  the  kingdoms  of  this 
world  will  become  the  kingdoms  of  Christ,'  and  '  when  all 
nations  shall  serve  him.'  On  the  face  of  the  prophetic  re- 
cord it  is  manifest,  that  Satan's  kingdom  is  not  overthrown 
during  the  thousand  years.  There  is  to  be  then,  a  curtail- 
ment of  evil,  and  an  increase  of  all  that  is  good.  But,  it 
will  be  only  an  advance  toward  that  state  of  which  this 
chapter  treats.  The  period  of  the  new  heaven  and  new 
earth  will  so  far  exceed  all  that  has  gone  before  it,  as  to 
justify  the  terms  by  which  it  is  designated.  It  will  be  a 
glorious  completion  of  God's  wise  and  benevolent  designs 
concerning  this  world  and  its  inhabitants : — a  finale,  which 
will  give  the  kingdom  of  Christ  its  fullest  triumph,  and 
which  will  be  "  the  restitution  of  all  things  tvhich  God  hath 
spoken  hy  his  holy  prophets.'"'  Acts  3  :  21.  Jesus  must 
rci^n  till  he  hath  put  all  enemies  nndcr  his  feet,  and  this 
is  the  jjeriod  in  which  that  consummation  will  be  i-cacli- 
ed.  What  had  preceded  will  be  only  an  approximation 
to  it. 

And  there  was  no  more  sea;    or.  literally,  the  sea  is  no 


CHAPTER  XXI,  253 

more.  The  sea  is  an  emblem  of  a  multitude  of  people,  or 
nations  in  a  state  of  commotion,  anarchy,  and  alarm,  also 
of  the  invasion  of  hostile  armies.  13  :  1,  and  Jer.  51  :  42, 
The  idea  seems  to  Le,  that  contentions,  wars,  the  dashing 
of  nation  against  nation,  which  have  spread  devastation  and 
misery  through  the  earth,  wUl  cease  forever.  Then  Avill  be 
experienced  the  full  blessedness  of  the  reign  of  the  Prince 
of  Peace. 

2.  And  I  John  saio  the  holy  city.,  new  Jencsalem.,  coming 
down  from  God  out  of  heaven.,  prepared  as  a  bride  adorned 
for  her  husband. — We  have  had  a  prophetic  description  of 
the  character,  acts,  and  demolition  of  an  apostate  church., 
under  the  name  of  the  great  city.,  Babylon  ;  now,  in  con- 
trast, Ave  have  a  symbolic  description  of  the  tme  church  in 
its  purest  earthly  state,  under  the  name  of  the  holy  cit^'", 
new  Jerusalem.  That  it  is  the  church,  and  not  a  literal 
city,  nor  the  heavenly  state,  is  made  sufficiently  plain  by 
the  ninth  verse,  Avhere  one  of  the  seven  angels  having  the 
vials  of  the  last  plagues,  calls  it  the  bride,  the  Lamb''s  wife., 
which  all  admit  to  be  the  church  of  believers.  Jerasalem 
is  the  appropriate  emblem  of  this,  because  it  \vas  the  grand 
center  of  the  former  dispensation,  the  capital  of  God's 
chosen  people,  the  divinely  appointed  place  for  the  celebra- 
tion of  their  religious  solemnities.  Tliere  was  the  temple 
honored  Avith  a  manifestation  of  the  divine  presence ;  as 
saith  the  Psalmist ; — '  The  Lord  hath  chosen  Zion,  he  hath 
desired  it  for  his  habitation.  This  is  my  rest  farever,  here 
will  I  dw^elL'  There  Avas  given  the  first  great  baptism  of 
the  Spirit  on  the  day  of  Pentecost,  Avhen  the  Son  of  God 
came  in  his  kingdom  Avith  poAver.  It  is  a  halloAved  spot, 
around  Avhich  a  thousand  sacred  associations  gather. 

So  the  Christian  church  is  an  oljject  of  God's  peculiar 
favor.     He  dwells  in  it  by  his  Spirit.     It  is  the  repository 


254  CHAPTER  XXL 

of  his  truth,  and  hy  it  his  worship  and  ordinances  are 
maintained.  It  did  not  originate  in  Jniman  wisdom  and 
goodness,  nor  is  it  sustained  by  human  policy.  Therefore, 
John  says,  he  saw  itcominy  dowii  from  God  out  of  heaven. 
Its  author  and  builder  is  God.  Its  members  are  children 
of  God,  who  arc  '  born  not  of  blood,  nor  of  the  will  of  the 
flesh,  nor  of  the  will  of  man,  but  of  God.'  He  i^reserves 
it  by  his  own  power,  and  bestows  upon  it  all  its  gifts  and 
graces.  This  will  be  eminently  the  fact  in  that  bright 
period  of  its  existence  which  is  here  intended  ;  and  thus  it 
comes  doAvn  from  his  glorious  presence. 

If  this  city  be  heaven  itself,  as  is  generally  maintained, 
what  is  meant  by  its  coming  down  from  God  out  of  heaven? 
How  can  the  place  of  the  divine  abode  come  down  from 
the  divine  abode  ?  How  can  the  place  of  the  saints'  eter- 
nal blessedness,  be  transferred  to  some  other  place  1  The 
fact  is,  this  is  not  a  literal  city  in  this  world  or  any  other ; 
but  is  the  church  of  the  living  God,  in  its  highest  state  of 
earthly  perfection.  This  is  shown  by  the  next  expression  : 
prepared  as  a  bride  adorned  for  her  husband.  A  bride  ar- 
rays herself  in  her  beautiful  attire  to  please  and  honor  her 
husband.  So  the  church  at  that  period  will  be  prepared  by 
the  Holy  Spirit,  to  please  and  honor  her  Lord.  She  will 
have  the  -ornament  of  a  meek  and  heavenly  spirit,  the 
beauty  of  true  holiness.  When  the  church  is  thus  pre- 
pared, we  are  next  informed,  that  God  will  manifest  him- 
self to  his  people,  and  grant  them  liis  ]:)resence  as  he  did  in 
Jerusalem,  or  in  the  camp  of  the  Israelites  in  their  journey 
through  the  v^'ilderness. 

3.  A7id  I  heard  a  great  voice  out  of  heaven,  saying,  Be- 
hold, the  tabernacle  of  God  is  iviih  men,  and  he  will  dwell 
with  them,  and  they  shall  be  his  people,  and  God  him- 
self shall  be  with  them,  and  be  their  God. — The  remarkable 


CHAPTER  XXr,  255 

providences  of  God  will  make  it  notorious  that  his  gracious 
presence  is  with  his  j)eoplc.  This  will  be  as  evident,  as  it 
would  be,  if  a  voice  from  the  clouds  should  pioclaira  it, 
'  All  nations  shall  know  that  I  have  loved  thee,  saith  the 
Lord.' 

A  great  event  is  announced,  wonderful  in  its  nature,  and 
deserving  the  admiration  of  all.  Behold  the  tabernacle  of 
God  is  with  men,  and  he  will  dwell  loith  them.  The  taber- 
nacle, and  afterward  the  temple,  were  earthly  dwelling- 
places  of  the  Most  High.  In  the  time  of  the  new  heaven 
and  new  earth,  either  the  Theocracy  will  be  restored  ;  or, 
something  like  it  of  peculiar  excellence,  Avill  be  established 
among  men.  Whether  there  will  be  a  visible  manifesta- 
tion of  his  presence,  we  will  not  say  ;  but,  that  his  presence 
in  a  very  special  manner  will  be  with  his  people,  is  un- 
equivocably  asserted.  He  will  dwell  tvith  them,  not  tran- 
siently, but  permanently. 

And  they  shall  be  his  peojile  : — an  expression  often  used 
in  reference  to  the  Israelites,  In  this  place  its  meaning  is 
intensive.  They  will  be  his  truly  and  with  all  the  heart. 
They  will  serve  and  obey  him  as  he  requires,  and  nothing 
in  them  shall  alienate  them  from  him.  God  himself  shall 
be  with  them,  and  be  their  God.  This  reaffirms  his  2)resence 
v.'ith  them  with  strong  emphasis ;  and  conveys  the  idea, 
that  this  will  be  the  case  in  a  higher  degree  than  ever  be- 
fore. There  will  be  a  purity  of  character,  a  depth  of  piety, 
and  elevation  of  views,  that  will  bring  men  into  intimate 
companionship  with  God,  and  he  will  condescend  to  give 
them .  delightful  manifestations  of  himself  He  will  be 
their  God.  They  will  acknowledge  no  other,  they  will  love 
and  adore  no  other.  And  he  will  be  to  them  all  that  a 
being  of  infinite  perfections  may  be  expected  to  be.  See 
this  promise  in  Hcb.  8  :  10,  11. 


256  CHAPTER  XXI. 

4.  And  God  shall  w'qje  aivay  all  (ears  from  their  eyes  / 
and  there  shall  be  no  more  death,  neither  sorrow,  nor  crying, 
neither  shall  there  be  any  more  pain  :  for  the  former  things 
are  passed  aivay.- — Here  again  is  an  adoption  of  fhe  lan- 
guage of  the  ancient  prophet,  and  doubtless  with  a  similar 
meaning.  In  the  tvv^enty-fifth  chapter  of  Isaiah  it  is  said, 
'  The  Lord  of  hosts  will  destroy  on  this  mountain  the  face 
of  the  covering  cast  over  all  people.  He  will  swallow  t(p> 
death  in  victory  ;  and  the  Lord  God  will  wipe  away  tears 
from  off  all  faces  ;  and  the  rebuke  of  his  ^jcople  will  he  re- 
move from  all  the  earth.  And  it  shall  be  said  in  that  day, 
Lo,  this  is  our  God ;  we  have  waited  for  him,  and  he  will 
save  us.'  Tha  faces  (as  it  is  in  the  Hebrew)  of  the  covering 
cast  over  all  people,  I  understand  to  be  the  ignorance, 
superstition,  and  delusive  errors  under  whose  blighting  in- 
fluence they  have  lived.  The  death  which  is  to  be  swallow- 
ed up  in  victory,  is  not  the  cessation  of  natural  life,  or  liter- 
al death,  for  mankind  will  continue  to  die  in  lliat  period : 
but,  it  is  that  kind  of  death,  which  I  have  already  explain- 
ed, and  which  is  mentioned  in  the  very  next  clause,  viz., 
moral  and  political  death, — a  state  in  whioli  people  are  de- 
jirived  of  civil  and  religious  privileges,  degraded  and  op- 
pressed. The  wiping  away  of  all  tears  is  the  removal  of 
those  things  which  arc  occasions  of  himian  woe,  such  as 
war,  tyranny,  and  other  grievous  calamities.  When  the 
causes  of  sorrow  cease,  then  will  sorrow  itself  cease.  Both 
prophets  describe  what  was  to  take  place  in  this   world. 

And  there  shall  be  no  more  death.  A  commentator  re- 
marks, that  "  No  expression  equally  strong  on  this  particu- 
lar occurs  in  any  part  of  scripture,  except  where  the  heaven- 
ly state  is  evidently  intended."  But,  in  the  case  just 
quoted,  Isaiah  uses  the  term  death  in  a  manner  fully  as 
strong;  and,  beyond  question,  in  a  figurative  sense,  and  in 
relation  to  the  temporal  affairs  cf  the  people  concerned. 


CHAPTER  XXI.  257 

As  is  tisual,  the  key  to  the  explanation  of  the  passage  is 
Jaid  alongside  of  the  passage  itself,  >vhich  is  this  : — "'  For 
in  this  mountain  sliail  the  hand  of  the  Lord  rest,  and  Moab 
s/tall  be  trodden  down  binder  him^  even  as  straw  is  trodden 
down  for  tlie  duughilL"  The  error  of  the  above  commen- 
tator and  of  others,  is,  that  they  have  applied  to  the  word 
death,  a  literal  sense.  Matthew  says  the  prophecy  of 
Isaiah  Avas  fulfilled  in  the  coming  of  Christ  and  the  preach- 
ing of  the  gospel,  where  it  is  written,  '  The  people  who  sat 
in  darkness  saw  a  great  light ;  and  to  them  \^\\o  sat  in  the 
region  of  the  shadow  of  death,  light  is  sprung  up.'  See 
also  Luke  1  :  79.  These  are  instances  of  the  use  of  the 
term  death  in  a  figurative  sense,  meaning  a  state  of  igno- 
rance, moral,  and  civil  degradation.  The  expression,  there- 
fore, that  there  shall  be  no  more  death,  signifies,  that  man- 
kind will  no  more  be  subjected  to  such  an  unhappy  condi- 
tion,— a  deprivation  of  that  which  gives  to  life  its  highest 
value  and  enjoyment. 

Neither  sorroio,  nor  crying,  neither  shall  there  he  a.ny  more 
pain.  The  word  translated  sorroio  is  defined  to  mean 
'  grief,  melancholy  occurrence,  misfortune.'  The  word  for 
crying  does  not  have  the  signification  of  weeping  at  all,  but 
that  of  croaking  and  vociferation,  in  the  sense  of  complain- 
ing and  demanding  something  in  a  rude  and  clamorous 
manner.  And  the  word  translated  pain  signifies  '  labor, 
weariness,  distress,  affliction.'  The  sentiment  expressed, 
then,  is,  that  in  this  happy  period  of  the  new  heaven  and 
new  earth,  these  evils  now  so  common,  will  cease.  Thus, 
rightly  imderstood,  the  passage  indicates  an  earthly,  not 
a  heavenly  state. 

This  is  made  evident  by  the  reason  which  the  writer  has 
appended,  thus  : — For  the  former  things  have  passed  away. 
Can  it  be  said  in  truth,  that  these  things  have  passed  aAvay 
from  heaven  1     Is  that  great  change,  which  is  the  burden  of 


25S  CHAPTER  XXI. 

this  prophecy,  to  take  phice  there?  Undoiihteclly  the 
change  is  to  take  phice  where  it  is  needed,  and  where  those 
will  live,  who  receive  the  benefits  of  it.  The  change  cannot 
be  wrought  anywhere  else ;  for  there  can  be  no  occasion 
for  it  anywhere  else.  How  illogical,  nay,  senseless  it 
would  be  to  say,  that  there  will  be  no  7nore  death,  nor  sor- 
row, nor  crying,  nor  pain  in  heaven,  because  the  former 
things  tqyon  earth  have  come  to  an  end  !  I  am  constrained 
to  believe,  that  there  has  been  a  universal  misapplication 
of  what  is  contained  in  this  verse. 

5.  A7id  he  that  sat  i(po7i  the  throne  said,  Behold  I  make 
all  things  new.  And  he  said  unto  vie,  Write :  for  these 
words  are  true  and  faithful. — The  throne  is  the  great  shining 
throne  previously  mentioned,  and  its  occupant  is  the  same. 
The  fact  announced  by  him  is,  that  he  makes  all  things 
new.  This  is  evidently  an  explanation  of  what  is  meant 
by  the  new  heaven  and  the  new  earth.  But,  where  are  all 
things  to  be  made  new?  Most  certainly  in  this  world. 
No  wonder  that  the  commentators  in  common  use,  have 
passed  over  this  most  important  fact,  either  without  at- 
tempting to  show  its  meaning,  or  with  a  slight  notice. 
Having  brought  the  world  to  an  end  prematurely  at  the 
close  of  the  last  chapter  ;  and  having  there  passed  through 
the  scenes  of  the  resurrection  and  the  last  judgment,  and 
now  referring  all  in  this  chapter  to  the  eternal  world,  they 
had  nothing  to  say  about  making  all  things  new.  They 
have  no  place  or  occasion  for  this  great  operation  of  divine 
providence, — this  greatest  of  all  the  events  which  form  the 
grand,  subjects  of  prophecy  ; — this  magnificent  consumma- 
tion of  this  world's  affairs. 

Where  are  all  things  to  be  made  new  ?  To  say  that  this 
is  to  be  done  in  heaven,  is  a  libel  upon  heaven.  To  say, 
that  its  signification  is,  that  the  saints  will  find  themselves 


CHAPTER  XXI.  259 

in  a  new  and  happy  condition  in  heaven,  is  a  perversion  of 
the  text,  and  makes  it  most  insipid.  Scott  remarks,  'The 
Lord  Jesus  brings  sinners  into  a  new  state,  and  creates 
them  anew  to  holiness ;  and  he  will  make  all  things  new, 
respecting  their  situation  and  manner  of  living,  when  he 
hath  brought  them,  perfected  both  in  body  and  soul,  to  his 
glorious  felicity."  The  "  Comprehensive  Commentary  " 
says  nothing.  Adam  Clarke's  comment  is  only  this  : — 
"As  the  creation  of  the  world,  at  the  beginning,  was  the 
work  of  God  alone ;  so  this  new  creation."  Professor 
Stuart  has  the  followir.g,  "  He  who  sitteth  enthroned  as  the 
judge  of  all,  now  solemnly  declares,  that  all  his  promises 
to  the  saints,  as  to  their  future  reward,  may  be  relied  upon 
with  entire  confidence.  The  making  all  things  new,  means 
entirely  changing  the  old  state  of  things,  in  which  death, 
mourning,  sin,  and  sorrow,  so  much  prevailed.  Comp. 
Is.  43  :  19.     Jer.  31  :  32." 

How  much  of  an  explanation  the  above  quotations  are  of 
that  great  announcement  embracing  the  perfection  of  all 
God's  works  concerning  this  world  and  its  inhabitants,  the 
reader  can  judge.  If  he  gets  from  them  a  distinct  and  sat- 
isfactory understanding  of  what  is  meant,  it  is  well.  But,  is 
it  easy  to  perceive  in  what  sense  "  the  future  reward  of  the 
saints"  is  a  making  of  all  things  new  1  May  the  meaning 
of  the  revelator  be  so  stretched  as  to  extend  to  both  worlds, 
including  the  '  future  reward  of  the  saints,'  and  '  the  old 
state  of  things'  here?     I  think  not. 

What,  then,  is  implied  in  making  all  things  new  1  I 
would  say,  that  it  implies  an  entire  change  in  the  social, 
political,  and  religious  state  of  mankind ;  and  probably 
also,  a  change  in  the  physical  condition  of  the  earth,  so  that 
it  will  be  restored  to  its  original  state  of  beauty,  salubrity, 
and  productiveness.  It  will  be  such  a  change  as  we  may 
well  suppose,  when  fhe  tabernacle  of  God  will  be  with  men, 


260  CHAPTRR  XXI. 

and  he  will  dwell  with  them,  and  be  their  (^od,  and  they 
will  be  his  people.  It  will  he  the  time  when  the  earth 
will  be  full  ot"  the  knowledge  of  the  Lord,  and  his  name 
will  be  praised  from  the  rising  to  the  setting  of  the  sun  ; — 
when  that  kingdom  which  is  righteousness,  peace,  and  joy 
in  the  Holy  Ghost,  will  be  universal. 

When  God  said  to  his  people  by  Isaiah,  '  Behold  I  create 
new  heavens  and  a  new  earth, — for  I  create  Jerusalem  a 
rejoicing,'  &e.,  a  great  change  is  meant  in  the  condition  of 
that  2)eo2)le.  So  here,  the  making  of  all  things  new,  heaven 
and  earth,  and  the  introduction  of  a  ^^^e^v  Jerusalem,  is  a 
far  greater  change,  in  more  respects,  and  so  extensive,  as  to 
embrace  all  people. 

Mankind  will  doubtless  be  born  then,  as  they  now  are ; 
but  they  will  not  live  as  they  now  do.  They  will  die  then, 
but  not  as  most  of  them  die  now.  They  will  need  conver- 
sion then,  and  they  will  be  converted ;  and  this  will  not  be 
delayed,  till  they  have  spent  the  best  portion  of  their  lives 
in  the  service  of  the  devil.  God  will  then  have  the  best 
portion  of  himian  life  for  his  own  service.  Youth  will  no 
more  think  of  growing  up  in  the  practice  of  sin,  than  they 
now  think  of  growing  up  in  the  practice  of  holiness.  It 
will  be  a  "?ie?o"  world  indeed; — so  new,  that  a  visitor  to 
it  of  the  present  generation,  would  not  recognize  it  to  be 
the  world  in  which  he  had  lived  and  died. 

And  he  said  nnto  me,  Write ;  &ic.  Record  this  great 
announcement,  that  it  may  be  read  by  coming  generations ; 
that  they  may  know  what  God  will  do  for  his  church  and 
the  world.  Record  it,  that  it  may  stand  as  an  object  of 
faith  to  the  saints  till  the  glorious  fulfillment  shall  be  real- 
ized. Record  it,  that  it  may  be  a  subject  for  their  jiraycrs; 
and  that  it  may  animate  them  to  zealous  eftbrt  through  the 
many  years  of  trials  and  conflicts,  which  will  intervene. 
Write  these   words,  that  they  may  be  an  ever-enduring 


CHAPTER  XXr.  261 

motto,  never  to  be  forgotten, — always  to  shed  their  cheer- 
hig  infiiience  on  the  souls  of  my  people, — always  to  sustain 
their  hope,  even  in  the  darkest  times.  Write  them, /or  they 
are  true  and  faithful,  i.e.,  they  will  certainly  be  fulfilled, 
and  they  are  most  worthy  to  be  believed.  Behold,  I  make 
all  things  new.  So,  O  Lord,  let  thy  will  be  done  on  earth 
as  it  is  in  heaven. 

6.  And  he  said  unto  me,  It  is  done.  I  am  Alpha  and 
Omega,  the  beginning  and  the  end :  I  will  give  unto  him 
that  is  athirst  of  the  fountain  of  the  loater  of  life  freely. — 
It  is  done.  The  struggle  with  wickedness  for  dominion  in 
this  world  will  then  be  over ;  for  the  kingdoms  of  this 
world  will  then  become  the  kingdoms  of  our  Jehovah  and 
of  his  Christ.  The  designs  of  infinite  wisdom  and  goodness 
will  then  reach  their  highest  attainment.  Christ  '  was 
manifested  to  destroy  the  works  of  the  devil,'  says  an 
apostle.  We  have  seen,  that  this  Avill  not  be  done  in  the 
thousand  years,  nor  until  a  new  heaven  and  earth  are  pro- 
duced. Then,  and  not  till  then,  will  the  benevolent  pur- 
pose of  Christ's  mission  be  accomplished.  Then  will  be 
realized  the  bright  visions  of  the  prophets  concerning  the 
church;  and  Christ,  having  put  all  enemies  mider  his  feet, 
will  reign  king  over  all  the  eai'th. 

He  then  announced  himself  the  Al2:>ha  and  Omega,  the 
beginning  and  the  end,  i.e.,  the  Originator  and  Finisher 
of  all  these  things  pertaining  to  his  kingdom.  As  Isaiah 
said,  '  he  is  the  father  of  the  ages.''  He  founded  the  church, 
and  he  will  advance  it  to  universal  dominion.  The  gra- 
cious promise  is  added  :  Iivillgive  to  him  ivho  is  thirsty,  &c. 
The  water  of  life  signifies  those  spiritual  influences  and 
blessings  which  invigorate,  purify,  and  refresh  the  soul. 
Sec  John  7  :  37-39.     These  will  be  bestowed  as  free  gifts 


262  CHAPTER  XXI. 

on  those  who  thirst,  i.e.,  earnestly  admire  them.  In  him 
is  all  fullness,  and  he  gives  freely  and  liberally. 

For  the  encouragement  of  his  followers,  he  promises  also, 
to  the  overcoming  person,  that  he  shall  inherit  all  things  ; 
those  things  mentioned  in  the  preceding  verses ;  all  the 
best  blessings  of  his  reign,  and  these  will  be  succeeded  by 
a  glorious  inheritance  in  another  world.  Blessed,  said  he, 
are  the  meek,  for  they  shall  inherit  the  earth.  Paul  wrote 
to  the  Corinthians  thus  :  '  Let  no  man  glory  in  man ;  for 
aU  things  are  yours  ;  whether  Paul,  or  Apollos,  or  Cephas, 
or  the  world,  or  life,  or  death,  or  things  present,  or  things 
to  come;  all  are  yours.''  The  labors  of  Christ's  ministers, 
the  things  of  the  world  needful  for  you,  the  enjoyments 
and  the  trials  of  life,  even  the  event  of  death,  present  cir- 
cumstances, and  whatever  lies  in  futurity,  are  the  all  things 
designated  as  the  believers.  Macknight  says  of  the  things 
present  and  the  things  to  come,  "  that  by  the  direction  of  the 
providence  of  God,  all  things,  prosperous  or  adverse, 
whether  present  or  future,  will  be  made  subservient  to  the 
promoting  of  their  virtue  in  the  present  life,  and  of  their 
felicity  in  the  life  to  come."  To  inherit  all  things  is  to  be 
partakers  in  all  those  blessings  which  Christ  designs  to  be- 
stow on  his  people. 

And  I  ivill  be  to  him  a  God ;  to  do  for  him  what  God 
only  can  do  ;  and  he  shall  be  to  me  a  son,  adopted  and  loved 
as  such,  and  be  made  an  heir  of  my  kingdom. 

8.  Bnt  the  fearful,  and  unbelieving,  and  the  abominable, 
and  murderers,  and  ivhoremongers,  and  sorcerers,  and  idola- 
ters, and  all  liars,  shall  have  their  ^7f/?-i'  in  the  lake  which 
burnetii  with  Jire  and  brimstone  :  which  is  the  second  death. 
— Very  different  from  what  is  said  above  will  it  be  with 
such  as  the  following,  viz  :  the  cowardly,  who  shrink  fi-ora 
the  maintenance  of  the  truth  and  the  performance  of  duty ; 


CHAPTER  XXr.  263 

the  unhelieving,  who  have  no  true  confidence  in  the  word  of 
God,  or  gospel  of  his  grace  ;  the  abonunable^  those  who  are 
to  be  abhorred  for  their  vices  ;  murderers,  those  who  perse- 
cute and  destroy  their  fellow  men  ;  adulterers^  those  who 
violate  the  seventh  commandment,  particularly,  perhaps, 
those  who  do  this  in  connection  with  their  heathen  wor- 
ship ;  sorcerers,  who  practice  enchantments ;  idolaters,  all 
who  worship  images  and  heathen  gods  ;  all  liars,  those  who 
fabricate  what  is  false  ;  the  authors  and  supporters  of  false 
religions.  The  portion  of  these  is  in  the  lake,  &c.  They 
shall  suffer  inward  distress,  remorse,  and  fear ;  they  shall 
be  subjects  of  the  wrathful  visitations  of  God ;  the  inflic- 
tion of  those  evils,  which  they  have  merited  by  their 
iniquities.  The  endurance  of  those  evils  and  sufferings,  and 
the  destruction  consequent  upon  them,  will  be  the  second 
death. 

Here,  as  in  the  fourth  verse,  there  is  a  reference  to  the 
old  state  of  things,  previously  described  ;  and  the  same 
doom  is  pronounced  on  those  who  will  be  enemies  of  Christ 
and  his  church,  as  is  pronounced  on  the  beast  and  false  pro- 
phet, and  on  death  and  hades,  and  on  those  whose  charac- 
ters are  not  conformed  to  what  is  required  in  the  book  of 
life.  This  destruction  of  persecutors,  corrupters  of  the 
worship  of  God,  deceivers,  and  supporters  of  false  religion, 
under  his  displeasure,  carries  with  it,  as  a  consequence, 
their  future  destiaiction  in  another  world. 

To  suppose  that  such  persons,  as  are  here  described,  will 
be  cut  off  from  tlie  earth  by  the  wrathful  visitations  of 
God,  and  be  made  everlastingly  happy  as  his  people,  seems 
to  me  a  great  absurdity.  Though  John  may  not  in  any  of 
these  instances  have  intended  to  teach  the  fact  of  the  pun- 
ishment of  the  wicked  in  another  world,  because  foreign  to 
his  purpose  ;  yet,  this  does  not  at  all  discredit  that  fact. 
Just  as  in  the  Old  Testament,  we  have  God's  threatening  to 


234  CHAPTER  XX[. 

'  destroy  man  from  tlie  face  of  the  earth'  by  a  flood ;  yet 
nothing  is  said  al)out  punishment  in  another  world.  Shall 
we,  therefore,  conclude  there  is  no  such  punishment  1  So 
far  from  it,  we  would  say,  that  such  punishment  follows  as 
a  natural  and  necessary  consequence.  The  same  is  the 
case  in  the  record  of  the  destruction  of  the  cities  of  the 
plain.  The  angels  declared  to  Lot  that  they  were  sent  to 
destroy  those  cities  ;  hut  no  intimation  was  given  of  what 
would  become  of  the  inhabitants  in  another  state  of  exist- 
ence. So  in  other  similar  cases.  And  it  should  be 
observed,  that  this  is  the  st^'le  of  the  scriptures,  when  they 
speak  of  the  calamitous  visitations  of  God.  Of  Judas  it  is 
recorded,  that  "he  Avcnt  to  his  own  place;"  bttt  no  intimation 
is  given  of  what  became  of  Ananias  and  Sapphira  after  their 
death.  The  future  destinies  of  mankind  we  may  learn 
from  the  nature  of  God's  character  and  government,  and 
from  the  direct  teachings  of  Christ  and  his  apostles.  By 
them  we  are  assured,  that  "  we  must  all  appear  before  the 
judgment-seat  of  Christ,  that  ever^^  one  may  receive  the 
things  done  in  his  body,  according  to  that  he  hath  done, 
whether  it  be  good  or  bad."  And  I  have  only  to  say  again, 
that  John,  or  his  hicrophantic  teacher,  has  spoken  in  the 
style  of  the  ancient  scriptures. 


The  Holy  Jerusalem,  the  LamJPs   Wife. 

9.  And  there  came  unto  me  one  of  the  seven  angels  which 
had  the  seven  vials  full  of  the  seven  last  plar/ues,  and  talked 
v)ith  me,  saying^  Come  hither,  I  will  shew  thee  the  bride,  the 
Lamhi's  wife. — Having  given  a  general  vievv'  of  that  happy 
state  of  the  world  v/hen  all  things  v/ill  be  made  new,   a 


CHAPTER  XXI.  265 

particuLar  description  is  subjoined  of  the  holy  Jerusalem, 
a  symbol  of  the  Christian  church.  The  view  of  it  is  pre- 
sented by  one  of  the  seven  angels,  who  had  one  of  the 
vials  of  the  last  seven  plagues ;  a  plain  intimation  that 
these  tilings  are  to  take  place  under  the  last  of  those  vials, 
and  that  the  end  of  the  world  had  not  come,  or  will  not 
have  come  at  that  period.  The  last  era  of  the  church  is 
this  which  the  apostolic  seer  is  describing. 

Gome  hither,  said  the  angel,  and  /  will  show  thee  the  bride, 
the  LarnVs  wife.  And  what  does  he  show  1  That  great 
city,  the  holy  Jerusalem.  Manifestly  then,  that  city  is  not 
heaven,  for  where  is  heaven  ever  called  the  bride,  the  wife 
of  the  Lamb  1  As  so  much  has  been  very  beautifully 
written,  and  said  and  sung,  concerning  this  symbolic  city, 
as  being  heaven  itself,  it  may  seem  very  ungracious  to  say, 
that  it  is  all  founded  in  mistake.  But,  as  an  exjDOunder  of 
Christ's  word,  I  must  not  be  guided  by  the  fancies  of  men ; 
but  endeavor  to  show  what  is  the  true  meaning  of  that 
word.  All  agree,  that  the  bride,  the  wife  of  the  Lamb,  is 
the  church  of  believers.  They  should  have  perceived,  that 
the  holy  city  is  identical  with  it.  Both  figures,  the  wife 
and  the  city,  are  used  by  the  ancient  prophets  to  repre- 
sent the  church.  Isaiah  said  to  the  Jewish  church,  '  Thy 
Maker  is  thy  husband  ;'  of  course  the  church  was  his  wife. 
By  Jeremiah  the  Lord  said,  '  I  was  a  husband  unto  them.' 
Again,  '  Turn,  O  backsliding  children,  for  I  am  married  unto 
you,  saith  the  Lord.'  Ezekiel  also  gives  a  lengthened  descrip- 
tion of  the  holy  city,  with  its  temple  and  appurtenances. 

10.  And  he  carried  me  away  in  the  S2nrit  to  a  great  and 
high  mountain,  and  shoivedme  that  great  city ,  the  holy  Jeru- 
salem, descending  out  of  heaven  from  God. — John  was  then 
taken  in  the  spirit,  i.e.,  mentally,  to  a  very  high  mountain 
and  was  shown  the  holy  Jerusalem,  descending  out  of 
13 


2G6  CHAPTER  XXI. 

heaven  from  God.  Here  again  it  is  manifest,  that  the  city 
is  not  heaven,  for  it  descends  out  of  heaven.  To  say,  that 
it  is  "  the  church  triumphant  in  heaven,"  is  a  gratuitous  as- 
sumption, and  contrary  to  the  declaration  twice  repeated, 
that  it  descended  out  of  heaven.  Here,  as  elsewhere  in 
these  visions,  all  is  symbolical.  Tlie  disregard  of  this  fact, 
and  the  taking  of  a  part  literally  and  a  part  metaphorically 
just  as  suited  convenience,  has  been  the  occasion  of  many 
errors.  This  holy  city,  the  church,  comes  down  from 
heaven,  because,  as  already  exi^lained,  it  originated  in  the 
counsels  of  heaven ;  because  God  is  the  author  and  sus- 
tainer  of  it ;  because  Jesus  Christ  came  down  from  heaven 
to  redeem  it,  and  to  be  its  architect ;  and  because  its  per- 
petuation and  increase  depends  on  that  Holy  Spirit  which 
comes  down  from  above.  Everything  pertaining  to  the 
church  from  its  conception  in  the  mind  of  the  Eternal,  to 
its  last  hour  in  this  world,  is  from  heaven. 

11.  Having  the  glory  of  God ;  and  her  light  was  like 
iinto  a  stone  most  2^i'<^cious,  even  like  a  jasj)er-stone,  clear 
as  crystal. — This  city  apj^eared  resj^lendent  with  tlie  glory 
of  God,  showing,  that  the  church,  at  the  period  intended, 
will  be  purified,  and  will  reflect  the  divine  perfections  on 
the  world.  Its  light  is  compared  to  a  pellucid  jasper,  which 
is  of  a  seargreen  color,  transmitting  a  light,  which  is  agree- 
able to  the  eye,  indicating  that  the  church  will  be  attractive 
to  all,  and  shed  a  happy  influence  upon  all. 

12  and  13.  And  had  a  tvall  great  and  high,  and  had 
twelve  gates,  and  at  the  gates  iioelve  angels,  and  names  written 
thereon,  which  are  the  names  of  the  twelve  tribes  of  the  chil- 
dren of  Israel.  On  the  east,  three  gates  ;  on  the  north,  three 
gates  ;  on  the  south,  three  gates  ;  and  on  the  west,  three  gates. 
— The  city  was  surrounded  with  a  high  and  massive  wall, 


CHAPTER  XXI.  267 

denoting  that  it  is  well  protected  by  the  power  of  God ; 
inaccessible  to  its  enemies.  It  had  twelve  gates^  three  on 
each  side,  and  twelve  angels  as  guardians,  and  on  the  gates 
the  names  of  the  twelve  tribes  of  Israel,  as  though  the  city 
were  theirs,  and  for  their  use.  This  has  led  some  to  the  belief, 
that  all  this  is  prophetic  of  the  restoration  and  conversion 
of  the  Jews,  agreeably  to  what  Paul  says,  "  that  in  the 
dispensation  of  the  fullness  of  times  he  might  gather 
together  in  one  all  things  in  Christ."  Doubtless  at  this 
period  Jews  and  Gentiles  will  constitute  one  church. 

14.  And  the  toall  of  the  city  had  twelve  foundations^  and 
in  them  the  names  of  the  twelve  apostles  of  the  Lamb. — Tlie 
wall  of  the  city  had  twelve  foundations  or  courses  of  stones, 
and  on  these  were  inscribed  the  names  of  the  twelve  apos- 
tles, showing  that  Divine  protection  is  exercised  over  his 
church  according  to  what  he  has  taught  us  by  his  apostles. 
Paul  likens  the  church  to  a  temple,  and  says,  'it  is  built  on 
the  foundation  of  the  apostles  and  prophets.' 

15  and  16.  And  he  that  talked  7vith  tne  had  a  golden  reed 
to  measure  the  citij,  and  the  gates  thereof,  and  the  tvall  thereof. 
And  the  city  lieth  four-square,  and  the  length  is  as  large  as 
the  breadth.  And  he  measured  the  city  with  the  reed,  twelve 
thousand  furlongs ;  the  length,  and  the  breadth,  and  the 
height  of  it  are  equal. — ^The  angel  had  a  golden  measurmg 
rod  in  his  hand  to  ascertain  the  dimensions  of  the  city ; 
and  it  was  found  that  the  length,  breadth,  and  height  were 
equal,  each  being  twelve  thousand  furlongs,  or  fifteen  hun- 
dred miles,  making  the  form  of  it  an  exact  cube.  Now,  a 
literal  city  fifteen  hundred  miles  in  length,  and  the  same  in 
breadth,  and  the  same  in  height,  would  be  an  extraordinary 
thing  indeed  !     Though  all  this  is  so  evidently  symbolic, 


268  CHAPTER  XXI. 

there  are  many,  who  profess  to  believe  that  all  this  is  to  be 
literally  fiiliillcd. 

Ezekiel  was  also  transported  in  spirit  to  a  very  high 
mountain,  and  shown  the  city  :  and  he  saw  a  man  with  a 
line  of  flax  and  a  measuring  reed  in  his  hand.  Ezek.  40  : 
3.  Zcchariah  also,  just  at  the  close  of  the  captivity  in 
Babylon,  had  a  vision  of  Jerusalem,  and  saw  a  man  with  a 
measuring  line  in  his  hand,  going  to  measiu-e  the  city. 
Zeeh.  2:1,2.  By  these  visions  was  foreshadowed  the  res- 
toration of  the  Jews  to  their  own  land,  and  the  bestowment 
of  divine  favor  upon  them. 

17.  A7id  he  measured  the  ivall  thereof]  an  hundred  and 
forty  and  four  cubits,  according  to  the  measure  of  a  man,  that 

is,  of  the  angel. — The  wall  being  one  hundred  and  forty- 
four  cubits,  refers  probably  to  its  thickness.  This  is  two 
hundred  and  sixteen  feet,  allowing  one  foot  and  a  half  for 
a  cubit, 

18.  And  the  building  of  the  UHill  of  it  ivas  of  jasper  ;  and 
the  city  was  pure  gold,  like  unto  clear  glass. — The  wall  was 
built  of  jasper,  which  is  said  to  be  very  hard  and  durable. 
The  city  ^yq.?,  pure  gold,  and  withal  transparent,  rich,  costly 
and  pure.     Such  the  church  will  be. 

19  and  20.  And  the  foundations  of  the  ivall  of  the  city 
were  garnished  with  all  manner  of  precious  stones.  The  first 
foundation  was  jasper ;  the  second  sapjyhire  ;  the  third,  a. 
chalcedony;  the  fourth,  an  emerald;  the  fifth,  sardony.v  ; 
the  sixth,  sardius ;  the  seventh,  chrysolite ;  the  eighth, 
beryl;  the  ninth,  a  topaz;  the  tenth,  a  chrysoprasus ;  the 
eleventh,  a  jacinth  ;  the  tivelfth,  an  amethyst. — The  stones 
named  in  these  verses  are  nearly  the  same  as  those  used  in 
the  breastplate  of  Aaron,  the  high  priest.     Those  stones 


CHAPTER  XXI.  269 

were  t"svelve  in  number,  set  in  four  rows  incased  with  gold ; 
and  upon  them  were  inscribed  the  names  of  the  twelve 
tribes  of  Israel.  This  the  high  priest  always  wore  when  he 
was  officiating ;  and  was  called,  The  memorial.  It  was  a 
symbol  of  the  whole  Jewish  church  for  which  he  officiated, 
consisting  of  several  tribes,  but  making  one  body.  In  the 
fourteenth  verse  we  are  informed  that  the  twelve  foundations 
or  courses  had  the  names  of  the  twelve  apostles  upon  them. 
In  the  two  vei-ses  under  examination  we  are  informed  of 
the  kind  of  precious  stones  of  which  the  foundations  were 
made.  As  therefore,  the  city  denotes  the  church,  we  may 
suppose  that  these  precious  stones,  bearing  the  names  of 
the  apostles  in  their  several  courses,  mean  the  precious 
truths  and  doctrines  they  taught,  and  that  upon  these,  the 
church's  wall  of  defence  stands. 

21.  And  the  twelve  gates  were  twelve  ^jea?7.9 ;  every 
several  gate  tvas  of  one  pearl,  and  the  street  of  the  city  was 
pure  gold,  as  it  were  transp)arent  glass. — The  gates  of  the 
city,  each  made  of  one  pearl,  could  not  be  literally  a  fact ; 
nor  could  a  street  running  through  a  city  of  such  vast  mag- 
nitude, be  of  pure  gold,  and  that  gold  transparent  as  glass. 
There  is  no  such  metal,  and  never  was  any  such.  Newton 
says,  that  this  "  may  be  an  emblem  of  the  union  in  heaven 
of  those  excellencies,  which  seem  here  to  be  incompatible. 
They  will  be  splendid  and  durable  as  the  purest  gold; 
clear  and  transparent  as  the  purest  glass."  And  Scott  re- 
marks, "  The  twelve  gates  made  of  so  many  vast  pearls, 
denoted  that  everything  will  be  superlatively  glorious,  be- 
yond all  comparison  with  anything  seen  on  earth."  Both 
assume  that  the  city  is  heaven  itself,  or  the  church  in 
heaven.  I  would  only  say,  that  it  may  do  for  poets  to 
write  of  the  "pearly  gates"  and  "golden  streets  of 
heaven  ;"  but  for  a  commentator  seriously  to  teach,  that 


270  CHAPTER  XXL 

heaven  is  like  a  city  made  of  precious  stones  and  metals, 
is  quite  too  great  an  absurdity.  It  is  an  unjustifiable  secu- 
larizing and  materializing  of  that  holy  habitation  of  Jeho- 
vah, and  is  making  it  quite  too  much  an  object  of  the 
cupidity  of  sinful  mortals.  The  mistake  begins  in  apply- 
ing this  to  heaven  at  all.  There  is,  as  I  conceive,  no  allu- 
sion to  heaven  ;  but  it  is  wholly  a  descrij^tioii  of  the  cimrch 
on  earth  in  its  most  perfect  state. 

The  allusion  is  to  ancient  Jerusalem,  its  wall,  and  its 
gates.  There  vrere  nine  of  those  gates  covered  with  plates 
of  gold  and  silver.  Within  the  city,  however,  there  was 
one  gate  leading  into  the  sacred  inclosure  of  the  temple, 
and  directly  in  front  of  the  entrance  of  the  sanctuary, 
which  by  way  of  eminence  was  "  called  Beautiful."  This 
"  was  made  of  Corinthian  brass,  the  most  precious  metal 
in  ancient  times,"  and  was  most  richly  ornamented  with 
gold  and  silver.  Now,  John  was  shown  a  city  in  vision, 
not  in  reality,  of  which  Jerusalem  was  a  pattern ;  but  far 
exceeding  in  splendor  and  gorgeousness  the  great  capital  of 
Palestine.  Its  gates  were  more  costly,  for  each  one  was 
composed  of  a  single  massive  pearl,  a  very  precious  gem  ; 
which  may  be  designed  to  teach,'  that  as  gates  open  and 
close  to  entrances  to  a  city,  admission  to  the  enjoyment  of 
the  blessings  and  privileges  of  the  church,  have  been  ob- 
tained at  a  great  cost,  and  are  in  themselves  of  inestimable 
value.  Christ  likens  the  blessings  of  grace  and  salvation 
to  "  a  pearl  of  great  price,^''  to  obtain  which  a  man  went 
and  sold  all  that  he  had. 

The  street  being  of  gold,  having  the  transparency  of 
glass,  may  signify,  that  believers  at  that  period  will  be  so 
perfected  in  Christian  graces,  that  even  the  richest  treasures 
will  be  held  in  low  estimation  comparatively.  They  will, 
as  it  were,  tread  them  undci-  their  feet;  and  their  whole 
course  of  life  will  be  distingui^ihed  for  purity   and  upright- 


CHAPTER  XXI.  271 

ness.  A  street  kept  so  clean,  that  it  appears  as  if  made  of 
transparent  gold,  seems  to  indicate  the  great  moral  purity 
of  the  people.  The  prophet  Isaiah  referring  to  gospel  times, 
and  perhaps  to  this  very  period,  says,  "  An  highway  shall 
be  there, — and  it  shall  be  called  the  way  of  holiness  ;  the 
unclean  shall  not  pass  over  it;  but  the  redeemed  shall 
walk  there,  and  the  ransomed  of  the  Lord  shall  return  and 
come  to  Zion  with  songs  and  everlasting  joy  upon  their 
heads  ;  they  shall  obtain  joy  and  gladness,  and  sorrow  and 
sighing  shall  flee  away." 

22.  And  I  saio  no  temi^U  therein :  for  the  Lord  God 
Ahnighfy  and  the  Lamb  are  the  temple  of  it. — Scott  thinks 
that  this  "  is  demonstration  that  the  heavenly  state  is  ex- 
clusively meant."  Bearing  in  mind  that  the  city  is  the 
emblem  of  the  Christian  church  in  its  purest  earthly  state 
we  conclude  that  the  absence  of  the  temple  denotes  that 
God  will  not  again  manifest  himself  in  a  temple  there  as 
in  days  of  old  ;  for,  as  is  immediately  shown,  the  city  it- 
self, or  the  whole  church,  will  be  filled  with  his  presence 
and  glory.  And  further,  that  in  this  bright  era  of  spiritual- 
ity, the  cumbrous  system  of  Jewish  forms  will  not  be  prac- 
ticed. As  the  temple  was  the  grand  center  of  Jewish  wor- 
ship, where  only  their  sacrifices  were  to  be  oftered,  and  the 
national  feasts  to  be  observed  ;  its  absence  from  the  holy 
Jerusalem  teaches,  that  a  purer,  less  sensuous,  more  spirit- 
ual system  has  taken  its  place.  The  instruction  which 
Christ  gave  to  the  woman  of  Samaria  is  directly  to  this 
point.  "  Woman,  believe  me,  the  hour  cometh  when 
neither  in  this  mountain,  nor  yet  at  Jerusalem  shall  ye 
worship  the  Father ;"  but  "  the  true  worshipers  will  wor- 
ship the  Father  in  spirit  and  in  truth,  for  the  Father  seek- 
eth  such  to  worship  hhn."  As  if  he  had  said.  There  is  no 
necessity  for  the  Jews  and  Samaritans  to  dispute  about  the 


272  CHAPTER  XXI. 

proper  place  to  worshi]^  God  ;  for  the  time  will  come  when 
the  religious  forms  of  both  will  cease,  and  a  spiritual  reli- 
gion, Avhose  rites  may  he  performed  anywhere,  will  suc- 
ceed. As  Christ  often  promised,  and  his  apostles  taught, 
he  is  in  all  his  2^eople,  the  members  of  his  mystical  body ; 
the  Christian  church  is  his  temple,  composed  of  living 
stones ;  he  manifests  himself  in  it,  and  will  do  so  yet 
more  and  more.  Paul  declares  '  the  church  to  be  his 
body,  the  fullness  of  him  who  filleth  all  in  all.'  Eph.  1  : 
23.  And  again,  '  Ye  are  an  haljitation  of  God  through  the 
Spirit.'  2  :  22.  This,  as  I  conceive,  is  exactly  what  John 
expresses  by  the  holy  city  without  the  temple,  and  filled 
with  the  presence  and  glory,  and  the  Lord  God  Almighty 
and  the  Lamb.  Indeed,  this  is  precisely  what  he  asserts 
in  the  third  verse ;  '  Behold,  the  tabernacle  of  God  is  with 
men,  and  he  will  dwell  with  them,  and  tkez/  shall  be  his 
people,  and  God  himself  will  be  with  them,  and  be  their 
God.'  His  dwelling-place  will  be,  not  at  Jerusalem  in 
particulai",  but  with  men  everywhere  ;  and  his  'people  will 
be,  not  the  Jews  only,  but  believers  all  over  the  earth. 
And  as  the  divine  presence,  grace,  and  glory  will  be  pecu- 
liarly manifested,  God  and  the  Lamb  may  appropriately  be 
styled  the  temple  of  believers. 

23.  And  the  city  had  no  need  of  the  sun,  neither  of  the 
moon,  to  shine  in  it  j  for  the  (/lory  of  Ood  did  lighten  it,  and 
the  Lamb  is  the  light  thereof — Another  grand  peculiarity  is 
disclosed,  expanding  still  more  our  view  of  these  magnifi- 
cent scenes  ;  the  city  Avill  not  need  the  sw?i  or  the  moon  to 
shine  in  it,  because  the  glory  of  God  and  the  Lamb  will  he 
its  light.  Tlie  sixtieth  chapter  of  Isaiah,  which  predicts  the 
yet  future  restoration  and  conversion  of  the  Jews,  furnishes 
all  the  explanation,  perhajis,  which  is  needed  here.  With 
beautiful  sublimity  he  says,  '  Violence  shall  no  more  be 


CHAPTER  XXI.  273 

heard  in  thy  land,  wasting  nor  destruction  within  thy  bor- 
ders ;  but  thou  shalt  call  thy  walls  Salvation,  and  thy  gates 
Praise.  The  sun  shall  be  no  more  thy  light  by  day ; 
neither  for  brightness  shall  the  moon  give  light  unto  thee ; 
but  the  Lord  shall  l^e  to  thee  an  everlasting  light,  and  thy 
God,  thy  glory.  Thy  people  also  shall  be  all  righteous.  I 
the  Lord  will  hasten  it  in  his  time.' 

Whether  both  prophets  have  here  predicted  the  same 
scenes,  I  would  not  say ;  but  certain  it  is,  that  the  prophet 
of  Israel,  instructed  by  the  Spirit,  could  perceive  these  glo- 
ries of  the  latter  days  as  easily  and  as  clearly  as  the 
prophet  of  Patmos. 

The  woman  clothed  with  the  sun,  and  the  moon  under 
her  feet,  and  a  crown  of  stars  on  her  head,  will  yet  be  more 
gloriously  arrayed ;  for  the  glory  of  God  himself  will  in- 
vest her  round  about,  and  make  her  the  joy  of  the  whole 
earth.  The  pure  radiance  of  divine  truth,  and  the  sanctify- 
ing influence  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  proceeding  from  God  and 
the  Lamb,  will  give  her  a  moral  brightness,  infinitely 
transcendincr  the  light  of  the  sun  and  the  moon.  Christ 
declared  himself  to  be  '  The  Light  of  the  world.''  Such  he 
will  prove  himself  to  be  in  a  manner  for  more  impressive 
than  has  yet  been  seen.  The  full  realization  of  Isaiah's 
words  is  yet  to  be  experienced  ;  '  The  Lord  will  be  to  thee 
an  everlasting  light,  and  thy  God.,  thy  glory.''  I  add,  that 
Ezekiel  closes  his  vision  of  the  city  with  this  remarkable 
expression,  "  The  name  of  the  city  from  that  day  shall  be, 
The  Lord  is  there.''''  This  was  the  key  note  struck  in  the 
days  of  Israel's  captivity  in  Babylon  ;  and  John,  more  than 
six  hundred  years  afterward,  caused  it  to  vibrate  again, 
more  full,  more  sweet,  more  enchantingly. 

24.     And  the  nations  of  them  which  are  saved  shall  walk 
in  the  light  of  it :  and  the  kings  of  the  earth  do  bring  their 
12* 


274  CHAPTER  XXL 

glory  and  honor  into  it. — This  light  is  divine  truth  accom- 
panied with  the  teaching  and  influence  of  the  Holy  Spirit, 
all  proceeding  from  God,  through  Jesus  Christ,  as  has  just 
been  stated ;  and  believers  of  all  nations  -will  walk  accord- 
ing to  it.  They  will  live  in  obedience  to  those  heavenly 
teachings. 

And  the  kinr/s  of  the  earth  do  bring  their  glory  and  honor 
into  it.  This  I  regard  as  "  demonstration,"  that  this  is  not 
a  description  of  heaven.  Are  the  kings  of  the  earth  to  be 
known  and  acknowledged  as  such  in  heaven ;  and  bi'ing 
their  riches,  their  royal  magnificence,  their  blood-stained 
glory,  their  evanescent  honors  there  %  It  is  much  to  be 
feared,  that  earth's  kings  will  be  very  scarce  in  that  celes- 
tial world.  Not  one  particle  of  all  that  is  called  their 
glory  and  honor,  will  they  carry  with  them  there. 

Such  passages  as  these  give  the  true  explanation  ;  '  He 
shall  have  dominion  from  sea  to  sea,  and  from  the  river  to 
the  ends  of  the  earth.  They  who  dwell  in  the  wilderness 
shall  bow  before  him ;  and  his  enemies  shall  lick  the  dust. 
The  kings  of  Tarshish  and  of  the  Isles  shall  biing  presents  ; 
the  kings  of  Sheba  and  Selia  shall  offer  gifts.  Yea,  all 
kings  shall  fall  down  before  him;  all  nations  shall  serve 
him.'  Psalm  72  :  8-11.  Isaiah  presents  the  same  dis- 
tant future  scene  thus,  '  Rejoice  ye  with  Jerusalem,  and  be 
glad  with  her,  all  ye  who  love  her.  For  thus  saith  the 
Lord,  Behold,  I  will  extend  peace  to  her  like  a  river,  and 
the  glory  of  the  Gentiles,  like  a  flowing  stream.  For  as 
the  neio  heaven  and  the  neio  earth  which  I  ivill  make  shall 
remain  before  me,  so  shall  your  seed  and  your  name  re- 
main.' This  is  still  another  instance  of  the  use  of  the 
phrase,  new  heavens  and  neio  earth,  and  in  the  same  sense 
which  I  have  given  to  it,  viz.,  a  new  and  happy  state  of 
things  among  men.  Thus  will  the  believing  nations,  Jews 
and  Gentiles,  walk  in  the  light  of  the  church  ;  and  sover- 


CHAPTER  XXI.  275 

eigns  will  make  their  riches,  influence,  and  power  tributary 
to  its  Avclfare. 

25.  A7id  the  gates  of  it  shall  7ioi  be  shut  at  all  by  day  ; 
for  there  shall  be  no  night  there. — As  this  city  is  the  Chris- 
tian church  in  its  most  perfect  earthly  condition,  its  gates 
open  continually,  denotes,  that  its  blessings  and  privileges 
will  be  accessible  to  all ;  and  also,  that  such  a  state  of 
security  and  peacefulness  will  then  be  enjoyed,  that  there 
will  be  no  occasion  for  shutting  them  against  an  enemy. 

For  night  shall  not  be  there.  Night  and  darkness  are 
emblems  of  ignorance,  adversity,  affliction,  and  wretched- 
ness. The  church  illuminated  by  divine  truth, — cheered 
with  the  influences  of  the  Spirit,  and  the  manifestation  of 
divine  favor,  will  experience  no  such  night.  So  said  Isaiah, 
"  Thy  sun  shall  no  more  go  down  ;  neither  shall  thy  moon 
withdraw  itself:  for  the  Lord  shall  be  thuie  everlasting 
light,  and  the  days  of  thy  mourning  shall  be  ended."  See 
Isaiah,  sixtieth  chapter. 

26.  And  they  shall  bring  the  glory  and  honor  of  the  na- 
tions into  it. — In  the  same  chapter  Isaiah  says,  "  Thy  gates 
shall  be  open  continually  ;  they  shall  not  be  shut  day  nor 
night ;  that  men  may  bring  unto  thee  the  forces  of  the  Gen- 
tiles," or  as  it  is  in  the  Scptuagint,  'the  strength,  power,  or 
wealth  of  the  nations,  and  their  kings  leading.'  For  the  na- 
tion and  the  kingdom  that  will  not  serve  thee  shall  per- 
ish. Plainly,  the  meaning  of  the  two  prophets  is  the 
same.  The  wealth,  the  influence,  all  that  constitutes  the 
power  and  glory  of  nations,  will  in  this  last  dispensation,  be 
made  subservient  to  the  interests  of  the  church.  That  will 
be  considered  the  object  of  highest  importance  in  this  wor];], 
as  involving  the  present  and  eternal  welfare  of  men,  and  the 
glory  of  God. 


276  CHAPTER  XXI. 

27.  And  there  shall  in  no  wise  enter  into  it  anything  that 
deJiUth,  neither  whatsoever  worketh  abomination,  or  maketh  a 
lie;  but  they  ivliich  are  writte)i  in  the  Lamb^s  book  of  life. — 
Admission  to  this  holy  city  will  not  be  permitted  to  any- 
thing  unclean,  or  doeth  tuhatis  disgusting  and  abhorrent,  or 
maketh  a  falsehood.  This  embraces  what  is  opposed  to 
divine  precepts,  and  delusive  errors  of  every  sort.  Be- 
lievers will  be  so  elevated  in  character,  and  will  have  so 
much  resemblance  to  their  divine  pattern,  that  they  will 
make  correct  distinctions  of  what  is  right  and  wrong  in  sen- 
timent and  action ;  and  none  whose  j^i'actice  is  evil,  or 
whose  sentiments  are  contrary  to  the  gospel,  will  have  a 
place  in  the  church.  As  I  have  already  said,  mankind  will 
be  born  with  the  same  moral  nature  then,  as  now.  But,  as 
we  have  scriptural  reason  for  believing,  the  largest  portion 
of  them  will  be  early  converted ;  and  the  church  will  be  so 
advanced  in  knowledge  of  the  truth  and  in  spiritual  excel- 
lence, it  will  not  tolerate  in  its  bosom  error  and  sin. 

They  only  who  are  tvritten  in  the  Laml/s  book  of  life  will 
have  a  standing  in  it.  The  expression  is  not,  whose  names 
are  written  in  the  Lamb's  book,  as  though  it  were  a  mere 
catalogue  ;  as  is  generally  represented  ;  but,  as  in  the  pre- 
vious chapter,  they  who  are  written,  delineated,  described,  as 
the  word  signifies.  The  book  of  life  is  that  which  shows 
the  way  of  life, — whose  truths  are  the  means  of  enlighten- 
ing, converting,  and  saving  the  soul.  That  book,  as  1  con- 
ceive, is  the  inspired  volume.  And,  it  is  the  Lamb's  book, 
because  all  its  instructions  have  been  given  through  Jesus 
Christ.  God  has  'spoken  to  us  by  his  Son.'  A  voice  from 
the  bright  cloud  on  the  mount  of  transfiguration,  said,  '  This 
is  my  beloved  Son  in  whom  I  am  well  pleased,  hear  ye  him.^ 
Christ  gave,  as  he  promised,  the  Holy  Spirit  to  his  dis- 
ciples to  lead  them  into  all  tiulh  ;  toqualily  Ihcm  to  be  his 
witnesses  to  all  manlvind,  and  to  finish  out  ihc  revelation 


CHAPTER  XXI.  277 

of  things  necessary  for  them  to  know :  This  blessed  volume, 
then,  is  the  Lamb's  book  of  life,  for  he  is  the  author  of  it, 
and  of  the  life  which  it  promises.  Being  written  in  it  is  to 
have  the  character  therein  required^ — the  virtues  delineated 
hy  the  Spirit. 

In  that  book  are  the  promises  concerning  life,  and  direc- 
tions for  obtaining  it.  Those  who  follow  those  directions, 
who  believe  on  Christ,  and  obey  his  precepts,  are  written  in 
that  book.  Tlieir  title  to  eternal  life  is  inserted  there,  and 
the  deed  of  conveyance  is  sealed  with  the  blood  of  the  Re- 
deemer. 

We  perceive  now,  what  is  meant  by  '  the  ne%o  heaven  and 
new  earth  ;'  and  what  by  the  parallel  phrase,  '  making  all 
things  neio.''  It  is  not  the  destruction  of  the  physical  hea- 
ven and  earth,  and  the  creation  of  a  new  world  ;  but  the 
production  of  a  hapjiy  state  in  the  moral,  social,  political, 
and  religious  aflairs  of  mankind.  This  is  infinitely  more 
important, — more  for  the  honor  of  God,  and  the  good  of 
his  creatures  than  any  change  in  the  material  world.  It 
will  be  the  universal  application  of  the  great  remedy,  which 
he  has  provided  for  the  cure  of  the  evils  of  the  apostasy  ; 
and  it  will  be  the  period  for  making  that  remedy  wonder- ' 
fully  efficacious.  The  reforming  power  of  our  holy  religion, 
is  yet  but  slightly  and  partially  felt ;  but  the  voice  of  pro- 
phecy bids  us  look  forward  to  brighter  scenes.  We  may 
wonder,  that  those  scenes  lie  so  far  distant,  and  may  wish, 
that  they  were  nearer,  much  nearer.  But,  God  has  his  own 
plans,  and  these  are  formed  by  infinite  wisdom  and  good- 
ness. He  will  carry  them  out  in  full  accomplishment, 
and  at  the  right  time.  However  dark  and  tumultuous  may 
be  this  world's  affairs  at  the  present,  we  should  repose  un- 
wavering confidence  in  him.  The  eye  of  faith  was  directed 
for  many  long  ages  to  the  coming  of  Messiah,  and  in  the 
fullness  of  time,  he  appeared.     Our  faith  must  now  rest  on 


278  CHAPTER  XXI. 

the  same  sure  \voi\l  of  pi'ophccy  for  those  glorious  scenes, 
which  are  yet  to  be  spread  out  on  this  theater  of  liuman  ac- 
tion. There  is  a  regular  series  of  developments  in  divine 
providence,  each  showing  important  improvements,  and 
shedding  additional  light  on  our  sin-darkened  world.  The 
patriarchal  period  was  an  advance  on  what  had  preceded  it. 
The  Mosaic  period,  commencing  with  the  Levitical  econo- 
my, was  a  great  advance  upon  that.  The  coming  of  the 
Saviour,  and  the  estahlishment  of  the  Christian  dispensation, 
began  a  new  era  of  improvement  and  light.  The  reforma- 
tion in  the  sixteenth  century  was  another, — the  millennium 
will  be  another ;  and  the  period  designated  as  the  new 
heaven  and  new  earth,  and  the  new  Jerasalem  in  it,  will 
finish  the  series,  and  fill  the  earth  with  the  knowledge  and 
the  glory  of  the  Lord. 

With  that,  the  visions  of  the  prophets  close.  Our  minds 
are  cariied  onward  to  that  state,  and  we  are  told,  that  it 
will  continue  forever  and  ever;  or,  so  long  as  the  sun  and 
the  moon  shall  endure.  A  particular  designation  of  the 
number  of  years  is  not  given.  It  is  enough  for  us  to  know, 
that  these  vast  and  imspeakably  desirable  changes  will  be 
wrought  in  our  world  ; — that  the  long  dominant  cmjiire  of 
sin  and  Satan  will  be  destroyed  ;  and  that  there  will  be  a 
long,  very  long  reign  of  purity  and  peace. 

It  is  vrorthy  of  jiarticular  attention,  that  the  chief  of  the 
ancient  prophets  conclude  their  writings  with  predictions  of 
the  restoration  of  the  J  ews,  and  the  bestowment  of  very 
great  blessings  upon  them.  This  is  the  fact  with  the  book 
of  Isaiah,  Ezekicl,  Daniel,  Ilosca,  Amos,  Joel,  IMicah,  Ze- 
phaniah,  and  Zechariah.  I  have  no  doubt,  that  John,  in- 
structed by  the  prophet-angel,  does  the  same ;  and  that  he 
adds  to  this  the  universality  of  the  Redeemer's  reign,  and 
the  willing  subjection  to  him  of  the  other  nations  of  the 
earth. 


CHAPTER  XXII.  279 

We  should  notice  also  the  distinction  which  is  repeatedly 
made  between  those  -who  are  written  in  tlie  book  of  lite, 
and  those  who  are  not.  The  former  walk  in  the  light  w'ith 
which  the  holy  city,  the  Christian  church,  is  illuminated, 
and  share  in  all  its  blessings  and  privileges  ;  but  the  latter 
do  Hot.  They  are  aliens  from  the  commonwealth  of  Israel 
and  strangers  from  the  covenant  of  promise.  The  difi'er- 
ence  in  character  and  condition  between  these  is  very  great, 
and  unspeakably  important.  For,  as  Christ  hath  said,  'Ex- 
cept a  man  be  born  again,  he  cannot  see  the  kingdom  of 
God.' 


CHAPTER    XXII. 

The    Great    Consummation. 

We  have  had  the  future  prosperous  and  purified  state  of 
the  Christian  church  presented  under  the  emblem  of  a  vast 
and  splendid  city  most  brilliantly  illuminated,  having  at  its 
command  the  wealth  and  influence  of  nations  and  kings, 
and  having  all  that  is  erroneous  and  polluting  excluded 
from  it. 

The  visions  of  this  last  of  the  prophets  now  close  with  a 
symbolic  representation  of  the  abundant  blessings,  which 
will  be  enjoyed  in  this  truly  happy  and  glorious  dispensa- 
tion. It  may  be  called  the  comjyensatinff  ^^erz'oc?,  in  which 
God  will  make  up  amply  for  all  the  evils  and  miseries, 
which  sin  has  occasioned.  It  is  described  as  paradise  re- 
stored, with  God  in  Christ,  as  the  acknowledged  and  ador- 
ed Sovereign  of  all.  To  develop  these  scenes  fully  requires 
something  of  the  inspiration  given  to  the  seer  of  Patmos, 
and  the  aid  of  the  angel  who  caused  these  panoramic  views 


280  CHAPTER  XXII. 

to  pass  before  his  niiiicl.  I  feel,  therefore,  that  all  the  ex- 
planation I  have  given  or  can  give,  falls  far  below  the  sub- 
lime realities,  which  they  shadow  forth.  And  we  should 
bear  in  mind,  that  it  is  entirely  inadmissible  in  a  commen- 
tator on  the  word  of  God  to  give  scope  to  his  imagina- 
tion. His  work  is  simply  to  show  what  is  (he  truth  re- 
vealed. 

1.  A7id  he  shoiocd  me  a  pure  rivei'  of  tvater  of  life,  clear 
as  crystal,  2)roceedivff  out  of  the  flu-one  of  God  and  of  the 
Lamb. — A  river  is  an  emblem  of  an  abundance  of  what  is 
spoken  of.  Thus  in  Isa.  48  :  18,  we  have  this  address,  O 
that  thou  hadst  hearkened  to  my  commandments ;  then  had 
thy  peace  been  like  a  river,  i.e.,  abundant  and  unfoiling. 
David  said  concerning  those  who  trust  in  the  Lord, — '  Thou 
wilt  make  them  drink  of  the  river  of  thy  pleasures.  For 
with  thee  is  the  fountain  of  life.'  They  will  experience  an 
abundance  of  holy  enjoyment.  And  Christ  said,  that  out 
of  him  who  bclieveth  on  him,  there  should  flow  rivers  of 
living  water ;  that  is,  he  will  be  flivored  witli  the  gifts  and 
graces  of  the  Spirit  in  great  plenty,  which  shall  be  refresh- 
ing to  himself  and  to  others  also. 

This  is  a  river  of  tvater  of  life.  Water  is  an  emblem  of 
spiritual  blessings  and  privileges,  particularly  the  graces 
and  comforts  of  the  Spirit.  Isaiah  says,  of  the  prosperity 
of  Christ's  kingdom,  '  hi  the  wilderness  shall  Avaters  break 
out,  and  streams  in  the  desert.'  '  IIo  every  one  that  thirst- 
eth,  come  ye  to  the  waters.''  Come  and  partake  of  those 
blessings,  Avhich  the  immortal  soul  needs  and  desires. 

The  water  of  life  is  that  which  invigorates  and  sustains 
life, — that  on  which  not  only  the  comfort  of  life,  but  life 
itself  depends.  These  are  the  truths  and  ordinances  of  the 
ffospel  and  the  influences  of  the  Spirit.     With  these  the 


CHAPTER  XXII.  2S1 

soul  is  refreshed  and  strengthened,  and  withowt  them  it 
languishes  and  dies. 

This  water  is  very  pure,  dear  as  crystal,  signifying  that 
these  means  of  producing  and  sustaining  life  in  the  soul, 
are  holy  in  their  nature,  and  adapted  to  produce  holiness 
wherever  they  are  enjoyed.  The  spiritual  blessings  of  be- 
lievers, their  inward  peace,  their  communion  with  God, 
their  hope,  and  their  delight  in  his  truth,  are  the  effects  of 
the  Spirit's  influence,  and  are  pure  and  satisfying. 

This  river  proceedeth  from  the  throne  of  God  and  the 
Lamb.  As  in  every  other  part  of  these  visions,  the  figures 
are  such  as  plainly  to  show,  that  they  are  figures ;  so  it  is 
in  this  instance.  A  real  river  proceeding  from  such  a 
source,  would  be  literalizing  and  materializing  quite  too 
far.  A  throne  is  the  emblem  of  supreme  authority,  of 
governmental  rule.  In  this  rule  God  and  Christ  are  con- 
jointly associated;  showing  that  God  is  governing  the 
world  by  Jesus  Christ,  '  whom  he  hath  appointed  heir  of 
all  things.'  '  He  is  made  head  over  all  things  to  his 
church.'  As  himself  said,  '  All  power  in  heaven  and  in 
earth  is  given  unto  me.' 

What  then  is  the  import  of  this  river  issuing  from  such 
a  source  %  It  is,  that  at  this  corning  period,  under  the 
divine  government,  a  great  abundance  of  spiritual  blessings 
will  be  poured  forth  among  men.  Then  the  Christian 
world  will  be  lilve  '  a  well  watered  garden,'  beautiful  in  ar- 
rangement and  rich  in  jiroduction.  No  part  will  be  barren 
and  unsightly,  no  part  will  be  parched  with  drought, — no 
part  will  be  overrun  with  briars  and  thorns.  It  will  be  a 
blooming  Eden,  favored  again  with  the  presence  of  the 
Lord,  and  with  those  spiritual  blessings  which  will  signalize 
this  closing  period  of  Messiah's  reign. 

Here,  again  we  see,  that  John  was  taught  to  communi- 
cate his  predictions  by  the  use  of  the  same  emblems,  as 


2S2  CHAPTER  XXII. 

those  which  were  employed  by  the  ancient  prophets.  He 
seems  to  have  given  an  almost  exact  transcript  of  these 
verses  of  the  forty-sixth  psalm.  '  There  is  a  river,  the 
streams  whereof  shall  make  glad  the  city  of  God^  the  holy 
place  of  the  tabernacles  of  the  Most  High.  God  is  in  the 
midst  of  her ;  she  shall  not  he  moved.  God  shall  help  her 
and  that  right  early.' 

Ezekiel  was  shown  this  same  river,  six  himdred  years 
before  it  was  exhibited  to  John,  and  m  the  forty-seventh 
chapter  of  his  book  he  describes  it  thus :  '  He  brought  me 
again  to  the  door  of  the  house  of  the  Lord,  and  behold,  waters 
issued  out  from  under  the  threshold  of  the  house  eastward, 
— and  ran  down  beside  the  altar  of  sacrifice,  and  so  flowed 
away.  The  angel  then  led  him  out  of  the  city,  and  mea- 
sured the  stream,  for  one  thousand  cubits  in  length,  and  the 
waters  were  to  the  ankles.  Then  he  measured  another 
thousand,  and  the  waters  were  to  the  knees ;  then  another 
thousand,  and  they  were  to  the  loins,  and  then  another 
thousand,  and  it  was  a  river,  that  I  could  not  pass  over : 
for  the  waters  were  risen,  waters  to  swim  in,  a  river  that 
could  not  be  passed  over.' 

Oliserve  the  coincidences.  John's  river  proceeded  from 
the  throne  of  God  and  the  Lamb;  Ezekiel's  from  the 
threshold  of  the  sanctuary,  God's  dwelling  place.  It  flowed 
round  the  south  side  of  the  altar  on  which  the  sacrifices, 
typifying  Christ,  were  offered,  thus  nearly  encompassing  it; 
importing  that  all  the  blessings  prefigured  by  it,  proceed 
from  God  through  Jesus  Christ,  the  great  sacrifice  for  sin. 
And  then  it  flowed  on  rapidly  increasing  as  it  left  the  city, 
till  it  became  a  broad  deep  river;  indicating  that  the  gospel 
which  was  first  preached  at  Jerusalem  attended  with  the 
first  great  eflfusion  of  the  Spirit,  would  extend  its  bless- 
ings farther  and  farther,  and  with  constantly  increasing 
profusion,  liite  the  volume  of  water  in  a  majestic  river. 


CHAPTER  XXII.  283 

Furthermore  Ezekiel  says,  'the  river  shall  go  forth  mto  the 
desert  eastward,  and  to  the  sea  (meanuig  the  Dead  Sea), 
and  its  bitter  waters  shall  be  made  good.  A?id  everything 
shall  live  ivhither  the  river  comeih.''  The  import  of  this 
beautiful  figure  is  apparent.  The  blessings  of  the  gospel 
proceeding  from  God  through  Christ  will  flow  through  this 
desert  world,  and  convert  it  into  a  fruitful  field,  and  where 
they  come,  they  will  cause  everything  that  is  good,  and  ex- 
cellent, and  lovely,  to  live  and  flourish. 

Zechariah  also  employs  the  same  figure  of  a  perennial 
stream,  saying,  'It  shall  be  in  that  day,  that  living  tvalers 
shall  go  out  from  Jerusalem.  And  the  Lord  will  be  king 
over  all  the  earth ;  in  that  day  there  will  be  one  Lord,  and 
his  name  one.'  As  all  these  prophets  describe  an  earthly 
state  of  the  church.,  so,  doubtless,  does  John. 

2.  In  the  midst  of  the  street  of  it,  and  on  either  side  of 
the  river,  ivas  there  the  tree  of  life,  which  bare  twelve  manner 
of  fruits,  and  yielded  her  fruit  every  month  :  and  the  leaves 
of  the  tree  ivere  for  the  healing  of  the  nations. — We  have 
had  the  book  of  life,  and  the  water  of  life,  and  now  we  have 
the  tree  of  life.  It  is  evident  that  the  allusion  is  to  the  gar- 
den of  Eden,  and  to  the  tree  of  life  which  grew  there.  It 
is  so  called  because  its  fruit  preserves,  sustains,  and  invig- 
orates life.  The  tree  of  life  in  Eden,  was  different  from 
the  tree  of  knowledge  of  good  and  evil,  of  which  Adam  was 
forbidden  to  eat.  After  the  transgression  therefore,  God 
said.  Behold,  the  man  is  become  as  one  of  us  to  know  good 
and  evil ;  and  now  lest  he  put  forth  his  hand,  and  take  also 
of  the  tree  of  life,  and  eat,  and  live  forever.  That  tree, 
then,  was  a  diff*erent  one  from  that  of  whose  fruit  he  had 
eaten  ;  and  it  was  of  such  a  nature,  that  it  would  have  pre- 
served his  life  even  after  his  transgression,  had  he  been 


284  CHAPTER  XXII. 

permitted  to  cat  of  it.  To  prevent  him  from  doing  this,  he 
was  driven  from  the  garden. 

Now  Avhat  do  we  have  in  this  happy  period  which  John 
depicts  1  V/e  have  the  tree  of  life  restored,  yielding  its 
fruits  every  month  in  the  year,  -i.e.,  without  intermission, 
and  free  to  all.  The  returned  and  believing  children  of 
Adam  will  have  unrestricted  access  to  it,  and  its  fruits  will 
invigorate  the  life  of  their  souls.  Even  its  leaves,  instead 
of  falling  at  the  withering  touch  of  autumn,  and  being 
scattered  by  the  winds  as  worthless,  are  of  wholesome  me- 
dicinal properties,  and  will  be  for  the  healing  of  the  nations. 
It  should  be  noticed,  that  the  singular  number  is  used,  as 
though  there  was  but  one  tree,  and  yet  it  is  said  to  be  in 
the  street  which  ran  along  the  bank  of  the  river  and  on 
each  side  of  it,  which  shows,  that  one  species  is  meant,  but 
many  of  that  sj)ecies.  Ezekiel  speaks  of  the  same  in  this 
manner : — '  By  the  river  upon  the  bank  thereof,  on  this 
side  and  on  that  side,  shall  grow  all  trees  for  food,  whose 
leaf  shall  not  fade,  neither  shall  the  fruit  thereof  be  con- 
sumed :  it  shall  bring  forth  new  fruit  according  to  his 
months,  because  their  waters  they  issued  out  of  the  sanc- 
tuary ;  and  the  fruit  shall  be  for  food,  and  the  leaf  thereof 
for  medicine.' 

The  tree  of  life  in  Eden  seems  to  be  an  emblem  of 
Christ,  the  minister  of  the  covenant  of  grace,  and  the  Au- 
thor of  the  salvation  which  it  proposes.  The  trees  of  life 
in  the  case  before  us,  seem  to  be  the  multiplication  of 
himself  in  the  persons  of  his  people,  and  of  the  blessings 
included  in  the  covenant  of  grace. — Christ  declares  that  he 
is  the  vine  and  his  believing  people  are  the  branches,  and 
that  their  fruitfulness  depends  on  their  abiding  in  him.  So, 
the  tree  of  life  seems  in  certain  particulars  to  be  Christ 
himself,  and  in  other  particulars  it  seems  to  designate  his 
people.     Similar  in  this  respect,  is  the  figure,  which  repre- 


CHAPTER  XXII.  285 

sents  the  church  as  the  body  of  Christ,  and  believers  as  his 
naembers. 

These  trees  bear,  not  tvelve  manner  of  fruits,  which  ex- 
pression is  not  in  the  original,  but  twelve  fruits,  which  is 
immediately  explained  to  mean,  fruit  in  each  month  of  the 
year,  ahoays  fruitful.  The  leaves  were  for  the  healing  of 
the  nations, — the  truths  of  the  gospel,  which  proceed  from 
Christ,  and  the  influence  of  believers  whose  conduct  will  be 
conformed  to  those  truths,  will  have  a  healthful,  reforma- 
tive effect  on  mankind.  How  can  this  be  true  of  the  per- 
fect state  of  things  in  heaven  1  What  occasion  can  there 
be  for  curing  the  evils  and  maladies  of  the  nations  there  1 
See  Ps.  1  :  3,  and  Isa.  61  :  3. 

3.  And  there  shall  he  no  more  curse  :  hut  the  throne  of 
God  and  of  the  Lamb  shall  he  in  it ;  and  his  servants  shall 
serve  him. — This  too  has  commonly  been  applied  to  hea- 
ven. But,  has  that  world  of  purity  and  felicity  been  under 
a  curse  1  Has  there  been  a  curse  there  which  needs  to  be 
removed  ?  The  curse  is  here  in  this  world,  and  all  this  is  a 
description  of  what  is  to  take  place  in  this  world ;  and 
should  fill  our  hearts  with  hope,  and  confidence,  and  delight 
in  regard  to  the  developments  of  the  future. 

Ever  since  the  first  transgression,  the  earth  and  the  hu- 
man race  have  been  under  the  malediction  of  the  Creator. 
The  ground  was  cursed,  so  that,  as  we  suppose,  instead  of 
spontaneous  luxuriance  and  ever-expanding  beauty,  it  be- 
came comparatively  barren.  Thorns  and  briars  were  to 
take  the  place  of  what  was  good  and  useful,  and  have  ever 
since  made  the  laborious  hand  of  the  cultivator  continually 
necessary  to  obtain  the  means  of  subsistence,  and  to  pre- 
vent the  whole  surface  from  becoming  a  wilderness.  At 
that  future  period  we  may  suppose,  that  the  earth  will  be 
restored  to  its  original  fruitfulness ;    and  the   destructive 


286  CHAPTER  XXII. 

effects  of  the  elements  will  not  be  experienced,  as  they 
have  been.  This  may  be  taken  in  a  restricted  sense,  as  to 
locality,  as  referring  to  Palestine,  and  to  the  restoration  of 
the  Jews.  The  language  of  Zechariah,  if  applied  to  this 
period,  would  lead  us  so  to  understand  it. 

Instead  of  a  curse  or  malediction,  the  throne  of  God  and 
of  the  Lamb  shall  he  in  it,  as  it  has  been  before  declared; 
and  his  servants  shall  serve  him.  A  throne  is  the  emblem 
of  supreme  authority.  God  governs  the  world  and  the 
church  through  Jesus  Christ ;  and  therefore,  Ave  find  them 
often  conjoined  as  in  this  instance.  The  throne  being  in 
the  holy  city,  shows,  that  it  will  be  in  the  church,  that 
divine  power,  sovereignty,  and  grace  will  be  displayed ; — 
and  that  it  will  be  the  grand  center  of  that  holy  influence, 
which  will  govern  the  afiairs  of  men.  As  in  olden  time, 
the  law  of  the  Lord  went  forth  from  Zion,  and  the  word  of 
the  Lord  from  Jerusalem ;  so  will  it  be,  when  he  shall 
reign  gloriously  in  his  kingdom.  And  then  liis  servants 
will  serve  him  as  he  rQi\i\uQS,  fully, faithfdly,  and  with  all 
the  heart. 

4.  And  they  shall  see  his  face  ;  and  his  name  shall  be  in 
their  foreheads. —  They  shall  see  his  face,  that  is,  enjoy  his 
favor  ;  or  as  it  is  sometimes  expressed,  '  they  shall  walk  in 
the  light  of  his  countenance.'  So  in  the  petition,  '  Caiise 
thy  face  to  shine  v2J07i  ?/s,'  the  meaning  is.  Grant  to  us 
the  tokens  of  thy  favor. 

And  his  name  shall  be  in  their  foreheads.  Whose  name"? 
That  of  God,  who  through  Christ  exercises  the  goveinment. 
This  name  implies  the  moral  perfections  of  God.  We  have 
been  told  of  those  who  carried  the  mark  of  the  beast 
in  their  foreheads  and  on  their  hands ;  and  now  we  are  told 
of  those  who  bear  the  divine  name  imprinted  there ;  the 
meaning  of  which  is,  that  they  will  be  known  as  his  ; — they 


CHAPTER  XXII.  287 

will  exhibit  his  moral  excellencies, — they  will  bear  his 
image, — they  will  be  so  like  Christ  in  their  temper  and 
character,  that  it  will  be  as  manifest  that  they  are  his 
people,  as  if  they  wore  a  label  on  their  foreheads.  The 
purity  of  their  lives,  their  holiness,  and  fervor,  will  clearly 
designate  them  as  the  people  of  God,  and  he  will  claim 
them  as  liis, 

6.  And  there  shall  be  no  night  there ;  and  they  need  no 
candle,  neither  light  of  the  sun ;  for  the  Lord  God  giveth 
them  light:  and  they  shall  reign  forever  and  ever. — Night 
is  occasioned  by  the  absence  of  the  sun,  whose  light  makes 
the  day.  The  void  is  used  figuratively  to  signify  a  state 
of  ignorance  of  divine  things,  also  a  state  of  wretchedness, 
affliction,  and  sorrow.  These  will  not  be  experienced  by 
those  who  live  in  that  happy  period,  as  they  now  are.  Tlie 
knowledge  of  truth,  and  obedience  to  the  truth,  will  be  uni- 
versal, and  this  will  produce  universal  happiness.  As  a 
consequence,  they  ivill  need  no  candle,  &c.  The  ordinary 
means  of  producing  light  will  not  be  necessary,  because 
there  will  be  no  night,  and  because  also,  the  Lord  God  will 
give  them  light ;  i.e.,  knowledge  and  comfort  will  proceed 
directly  from  him.  His  Spirit  will  illuminate  the  minds, 
and  refresh  the  souls  of  his  people  in  a  high  degree. 

And  they  shall  reign  forever  and  ever.  The  social,  civil, 
and  religious  aftairs  of  men,  will  be  regulated  and  controlled 
by  them,  and  this  for  a  period  of  unlimited  extent,  or  to 
the  end  of  time.  So  say  the  ancient  prophets.  The  God 
of  heaven,  said  Daniel,  '  will  set  up  a  kingdom,  which  shall 
never  be  destroyed,  and  it  shall  not  be  left  to  other  people, 
but  it  shall  break  in  pieces  and  subdue  all  these  kingdoms, 
and  it  shall  stand  forever. 

6.     And  he  said  unto  me,  These  sayings  are  faithful  and 


238  CHAPTER  XXII. 

true :  and  the  Lord  God  of  the  holy  prophets  sent  his  angel 
to  shoiv  unto  his  servants  the  things  which  must  shortly  he 
done. — The  angel  assured  John,  that  the  things  which  liaJ 
been  shown  him  are  faithful  and  true.  Though  they  had 
been  presented  to  his  mind  under  various  emblems ; — 
though  they  were  far-reaching,  extending  over  distant  pe- 
riods of  time ;  and  though  they  embraced  the  greatest 
events  which  concern  the  church,  and  mankind,  they  would 
be  fulfilled  with  perfect  exactness.  That  glorious  Being, 
who  made  disclosures  of  his  designs  to  his  holy  prophets 
in  olden  time,  sent  his  angel  to  show  to  his  servants  of  the 
seven  churches  in  Asia  and  others,  the  things  which  must 
be  done  shortly,  or  with  speed. 

7.  Behold,  I  come  quickly  :  blessed  is  he  that  Icecpeth  the 
sayings  of  the  prophecy  of  this  book. — Behold  I  come  quickly. 
The  same  angel,  as  it  seems  to  me,  continues  to  be  the 
speaker  here,  and  gave  to  John  these  words  of  Christ  as  a 
part  of  this  visionary  representation.  The  coming  an- 
nounced, is  not,  as  many  understand  it,  a  literal  and  per- 
sonal coming  :  but  in  the  sense  which  is  common  in  scrip- 
ture, a  figurative  and  providential  coming ; — the  exercise 
of  his  agency  in  the  production  of  remarkable  events.  It 
is  probable  that  a  particular  event  is  referred  to  by  this 
declaration;  and  as  I  think,  it  is  the  destruction  of  Jerusa- 
lem, the  overthrow  of  the  Jewish  commonwealth,  and  the 
cessation  of  the  Levitical  economy,  called  the  end  of  the  age. 
Matt.  24  :  3.  That  momentous  event  is  represented  as  the 
darkening  of  the  sun, — the  obscuration  of  the  moon,  the 
falling  of  the  stars,  the  shaking  of  the  heavens  and  the 
earth,  and  the  removal  of  the  things  shaken. 

Blessed  or  happy  is  he  ivho  keepeth,  &c.  Those  would 
be  happy  who  understood,  and  firmly  believed  what  Christ 
has  made  known  to  the  churches  in   this  book.     His  own 


CHAPTER  XXII.  289 

oft  repeated  remark  in  the  messages  to  the  seven  churches, 
is,  '  He  that  hath  ears  to  hear,  let  him  huar  what  the  Spirit 
salth  to  the  churches.'  It  "was,  and  still  is  important,  that 
these  prophecies  should  he  understood  and  believed,  be- 
cause they  are  a  revelation  of  divine  purposes,  and  show, 
that  God  has  a  plan  of  operations  in  regard  to  this  world, 
which  he  will  not  fail  to  accomplish ;  because  also,  a  know- 
ledge of  this  fact  is  adapted  to  sustain  the  fjiith  and  pa- 
tience of  his  people  in  times  of  difficulty  and  trial.  Un- 
doubtedly the  teachings  of  this  enigmatical  book  were  un- 
derstood by  those  to  whom  they  were  addressed  ;  and  it 
is  reproachful  to  the  divine  Revelator  to  affirm,  that  they 
cannot  be  understood  now.  They  are  the  disclosures  of 
the  eternal  mind,  teaching  us,  that  the  affairs  of  our  world 
are  not  running  on  at  random ;  are  not  those  accidents  of 
time  and  circumstances,  which  many  suppose,  but  are  jjarts 
of  a  great  system,  which  is  working  out  intended  results  of 
vast  importance. 

This  world  is  not  a  worthless  toy,  to  be  misused  by 
mankind  awhile,  and  then  to, be  cast  away  by  its  Creator. 
Though  morally  and  physically,  it  is  not  what  it  once  was ; 
yet  it  has  innumerable  beauties  and  inestimable  worth. 
And  we  may  believe  on  inspired  testimony,  that  it  will  be 
adorned  with  beauty  again,  fully  equal  to  that  which  adorn- 
ed it  at  first.  The  new  Jerusalem  will  come  down  adorned 
with  shining  grace.  The  pure  waters  of  life  will  flow  forth, 
fertilizing  and  beautifying  wherever  they  go.  'The  ti'ees 
of  righteousness,  the  planting  of  the  Lord,'  will  grace  its 
banks,  and  yield  their  precious  fruits,  and  the  songs  of 
praise  will  swell  up  from  millions  of  our  ransomed  race. 
It  will  be  the  long  2>romised  and  long  continued  era  of 
light,  and  peace,  and  blessedness. 


13 


290  CHAPTER  XXII. 


Concluding  Attestatio7is  and  Instructions. 

8.  And  I  John  saw  these  things,  and  heard  them.  And 
tvhen  I  had  heard  and  seen,  I  fell  doivn  to  worship  before 
the  feet  of  the  angel  which  shotved  me  these  things. — The 
pi'eceding  visions  consisted,  in  part,  of  objects  presented  to 
the  mind  of  the  apostle,  and,  in  part,  of  verbal  instructions 
uttered  in  his  hearing,  and  he  affirms  the  verity  of  them,  as 
he  has  recorded  them.  Tliey  were  not  illusory  dreams  and 
fancies,  but  things  of  which  he  was  a  witness. 

Tlien,  as  in  a  former  instance,  he  fell  at  the  feet  of  the 
revealing  angel  to  worship  him  ;  so  filled  was  he  with  awe 
and  wonder  at  the  disclosures  which  had  been  made  to  him, 
and  so  profound  was  his  reverence  for  the  being  who  liad, 
caused  these  far-reaching  scenes  to  pass  before  his  mind. 

9.  Then  saith  he  unto  me,  See  thou  do  it  not :  for  I  am 
thy  fellow-servant,  and  of  thy  brethren  the  2Jrophets,  and  of 
them  which  kcc])  the  sayings  of  this  book  :  worshij)  God. — 
The  angel  instantly  interposed  to  prevent  an  act  of  homage 
of  which  he  was  not  worthy  ;  and  informed  John,  that  he 
was  a  fellow-servant  of  Jesus  Christ,  and  a  brother-prophet, 
and  one  of  those  who  observe  and  obediently  regard  the 
instructions  which  he  had  imparted.  The  command  to 
worship  God,  coupled  Avith  the  angel's  refusal  to  receive 
homage  from  the  apostle,  teaches  us,  that  God  is  the  only 
being  to  whom  religious  worship  may  be  paid.  All  pray- 
ing to  angels,  canonized  saints,  and  the  blessed  virgin,  is 
gross  idolatry.  Whoever  suffers  a  fellow  mortal  to  offer  to 
him  religious  homage,  is  guilty  of  infringing  the  preroga- 
tives of  Jehovah. 

It  is  natural  for  us  to  inquire,  who  was  the  angel  who 
declared  himself  to  be  a  fellow-servant  with  John,  and  of 


CHAPTER  XXII.  291 

his  brethren  the  prophets'?  He  could  not  have  been  one 
of  the  celestial  angels,  as  is  evident  from  what  he  says  of 
himself  He  must  have  been  one  of  the  old  prophets  com- 
missioned to  reveal  to  John  the  things  contained  in  these 
visions.  The  resemblances  between  the  prophecies  of 
Daniel,  and  these  which  we  have  been  examining;  the 
sameness  of  the  periods  to  which  they  refer ;  and  the  re- 
sults to  which  both  prophets  trace  this  world's  affairs, 
induce  me  to  think  that  Daniel  was  that  angel.  I  find  a 
special  reason  for  thinking  thus,  in  what  was  said  to  Daniel 
at  the  close  of  his  prophecy,  in  these  words : — '  Go  thy 
way,  Daniel ;  for  the  words  are  closed  up,  and  sealed  till 
the  time  of  the  end.'  This  was  an  assurance  that  nothing 
more  would  be  revealed  concerning  the  future,  until  the 
time  of  the  end,  which  implies,  that  then  other  revelations 
would  be  made.  The  end  cannot  mean  the  end  of  the 
world ;  but,  as  the  Saviour  often  used  the  word,  the  end  of 
the  age,  or  of  the  Jewish  dispensation.  A  partial  explana- 
tion is  then  subjoined  ;  and  an  intimation  given,  that  at  the 
period  designated,  his  services  as  a  prophet  would  again  be 
emploj'ed.  "  But  go  thou  thy  way  till  the  end  :  for  thou 
shalt  rest,  and  stand  in  thy  lot  at  the  end  of  the  days." 
The  literal  reading  of  the  Septuagint  is  this, —  Go  thoit,  and 
rest ;  for  there  are  yet  days  and  times  to  the  filling  vp  of 
the  accomplishment,  and  thou  shalt  be  raised  up  in  thy  lot 
at  the  completion  of  the  days.  This  makes  the  meaning 
much  more  evident.  From  the  giving  of  this  prophecy  to 
the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  and  the  Jewish  common- 
wealth, there  were  a  little  over  six  hundred  years.  Daniel 
would  cease  from  his  labors,  and  rest  in  the  world  of  spirits. 
He  was  informed,  that  at  the  specified  time,  he  should  be 
raised  up  again  in  his  station,  as  a  revealer  of  God's  pur- 
poses concerning  the  church.  Now,  let  it  be  observed, 
that  it  was  about  the  time  of  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem, 


292  CHAPTRR  XXI  I. 

and  the  termination  of  the  Jewish  dispensation,  that  John 
had  these  visions ;  and  he  had  them  from  one,  who  on  two 
occasions  declared  himself  to  be  a  fellow-servant,  and_  a 
brother  prophet.  Are  there  not,  then,  strong  reasons  for 
believing  that  the  angel  who  made  these  disclosures  to 
John,  was  Daniel  himself?  This  may  be  regarded  as  a 
novelty.  Be  it  so,  in  my  judgment  it  has  scriptural  author- 
ity for  its  truthfulness, 

10.  And  he  saith  unto  me.  Seal  not  the  sayinffs  of  the 
2)rophecy  of  this  booh  ;  for  the  time  is  at  hand. — The  prohi- 
bition to  seal  the  contents  of  this  book,  denotes  that  they 
were  to  be  made  known.  An  open  book  is  one  that  may 
be  perused,  studied,  known  to  all.  The  reason  f<_)r  not 
sealing  this  book  was,  that  the  time  was  near  at  hand  in 
which  these  pro2:)hecies  would  begin  to  be  accomjilished ; 
and  Christians  would  need  them  to  strengthen  their  faith, 
and  encourage  them  in  their  trials.  Daniel  was  command- 
ed to  "  shut  w\>  the  words,  and  seal  the  book  to  the  time  of 
the  end,"  which  imports  that  they  w^ere  not  then  to  be 
known,  but  that  they  would  be  kno-wn  and  explained  at  a 
future  i^eriod.  This  gives  additional  support  to  the  views 
just  expressed. 

This  verse  and  that  which  follows,  lead  me  to  think  that 
this  book  was  written  just  previous  to  the  destruction  of 
Jerusalem,  in  A.D.  71.  The  expression,  Behold,  I  come 
quickl}',  refers,  if  I  mistake  not,  to  that  event,  which  Daniel 
calls  the  time  of  the  end,  because  these  terminated  the 
Levitical  economy.  If  I  am  correct  in  this,  the  next  verse 
can  be  easily  understood. 

11.  He  that  is  unjust,  let  him  be  tmjust  still  :  and  he 
which  is  filthy,  let  him  be  filthy  still :  and  he  that  is  right- 
eous, let  him  he  rir/hicous  still  :  and  he  that  is  holy,  let  him 


CHAPTER  XXII.  293 

be  holy  still. — As  if  he  had  said,  The  time  for  inflicting 
divine  judgments  on  the  Jewish  nation  is  near  at  hand. 
Behold,  consider  attentively,  I  come  quickly  to  do  these 
things  unto  them.  Even  now  their  character  and  condi- 
tion is  determined  ;  therefore,  let  him  who  is  unjust,  be  un- 
just still,  &c.  The  time  for  effecting  a  saving  change,  and 
obtaining  pardon,  is  now  past.  When  Christ  was  among 
them,  he  said  to  them,  "  Yet  a  little  while  is  the  light  with 
you :  vralk  while  you  have  the  light,  lest  darkness  come 
upon  you."  This  timely  caution  was  not  heeded,  except 
by  a  few,  and  the  day  approached,  when  their  houses 
would  be  left  to  them  desolate,  and  the  things  of  their 
peace  would  be  hid  from  their  eyes.  They,  who  had  im- 
proved the  opportunity  to  become  righteous  and  holy,  would 
remain  so.  They,  who  had  continued  unbelieving  and  sin- 
ful, would  die  in  their  sins.  It  is  clear,  that  as  a  permis- 
sion or  threatening,  it  is  not  applicable  to  mankind  gener- 
ally and  in  succeeding  periods  of  time.  In  an  extended 
sense,  it  could  not  be  said,  let  the  unjust  and  the  filthy  con- 
tinue so  ;  for  that  would  be  a  universal  permission  for  the 
wicked  to  conthiue  in  their  wickedness.  But,  the  ancient 
prophets,  and  Christ,  and  the  apostles,  did  utter  judicial 
threatenings  of  blindness  and  insensibility  against  the  Jews 
to  be  executed  at  the  overthrow  of  their  commonwealth 
and  the  destruction  of  their  city.  This  interpretation  is 
strengthened  by  the  next  verse. 

12.  And,  behold,  I  come  qiiiclchj  ;  and  my  reward  is  wi/h 
me,  to  give  every  man  according  as  his  woi-k  shall  be. — Be- 
hold, I  come  quickly. — Now,  it  was  not  strictly  true,  that 
Christ  was  coming  quickly  for  the  general  judgment ;  and 
therefore,  that  coming  could  not  have  been  meant.  But,  it 
was  strictly  true  as  it  respected  the  Jews,  and  their  city, 
and  their  economy.  A  righteous  recompense  was  rendered 
1.3* 


294  CHAPTER  XXII. 

to  them  according  to  their  deeds.  It  is  understood,  that 
Christ  himself  is  the  speaker  in  this  instance,  or  that  he 
speaks  through  the  angel ;  and  the  coming  which  he  affirjiis 
to  be  near  at  hand,  is  that  which  relates  to  the  overthrow 
of  the  Jewish  commonwealth. 

13.  lam  Alpha  and  Omega,  the  beginning  and  the  end, 
the  first  and  the  last. — All  these  phrases  mean  one  and  the 
same  thing.  Alpha  is  the  name  of  the  first  letter  in  the 
Greek  alphabet,  and  Omega  is  the  name  of  the  last.  The 
idea  expressed  seems  to  be,  that  Christ  is  the  author  of  the 
ages,  the  originator  of  each  dispensation,  the  Jewish  and 
the  Christian,  and  he  will  bring  each  to  an  end  according  to 
his  own  will. 

14.  Blessed  are  they  that  do  his  commandments,  that  they 
may  have  right  to  the  tree  of  life,  and  may  enter  in  through  the 
gates  into  the  city. — The  angel  declared  them  to  be  blessed 
or  happy  who  keep  the  commandments  of  Christ,  and  by 
so  doing  they  have  the  privilege  of  partaking  of  the  tree 
of  life,  which  is  probably  an  emblem  of  Christ  himself. 
All  such  will  be  nourished  by  him  unto  eternal  life.  They 
will  be  delivered  from  the  penalty  of  the  violated  law, 
and  the  curse  of  God.  Not  only  this,  they  will  have  free 
access  to  all  privileges  of  the  holy  city  which  has  just  been 
described,  as  citizens  thereof.  They  will  partake  in  this 
life  of  all  the  blessings  of  the  Christian  church  ;  the  bless- 
ings of  the  reign  of  Immanucl.  This  privilege  should  be 
highly  prized,  for : 

15.  For  tvithout  are  dogs,  and  sorcerers,  andivhorcmong- 
ers,  and  imtrderers,  and  idolaters,  and  tohosoever  love th  and 
maketh  a  lie. —  Withont  are  dogs,  a  name  which  the  Jews 
gave  to  all  who  did  not   helong   («>  the-ir  nation,   meaning 


CHAPTER  XXII,  295 

here  the  unenlightened  and  unconverted.  With  them  are 
sorcerers,  those  who  practice  jugglery  and  pretend  to  super- 
natural works  :  and  luhoremongers,  the  lewd  and  sensual ;  and 
murderers,  those  who  by  persecution  and  otherwise  destroy 
the  lives  of  their  fellow  men ;  and  idolaters,  those  who 
worship  heathen  deities ;  and  whosoever  loveth  or  malceth  a 
lie,  those  who  advocate  false  religion  and  fatal  errors.  The 
manner  of  expression  here,  and  the  specification  of  these 
particular  classes  of  j^ersons,  shows  that  the  reference  is  to 
tliis  world,  and  not  to  the  eternal  world.  To  represent 
heaven  as  a  city  surrounded  by  a  wall  to  keep  out  persons 
of  such  vile  characters,  does  not  accord  with  the  dignity  of 
the  subject,  nor  the  current  teaching  of  the  holy  scriptures, 
and  the  expression  in  the  preceding  verse,  Hcqrpy  are  they 
who  do  his  commandments,  plainly  refers  to  duty  in  the 
present  life ;  and  the  privileges  connected  with  the  per- 
formance of  duty,  are  those  which  appertain  to  the  Chris- 
tian church. 

16.  I  Jesus  have  sent  mine  angel  to  testify  iinto  you  these 
things  in  the  churches.  J  am  the  root  and  the  ofsjjring  of 
David,  and  the  bright  and  morning  star. — Christ,  in  this  in- 
stance, either  speaks  in  person,  or  by  the  angel  who  was 
employed  like  the  prophets  of  old  to  utter  his  words.  The 
record  of  these  visions  was  transmitted  to  the  seven 
churches  in  Asia  IMinor. 

/  am  the  root  and  the  offsining  of  David.  All  things 
were  created  by  Christ.  From  him  as  Creator,  David  pro- 
ceeded, and  by  him  was  sustained,  as  a  tree  is  dependent 
on  its  root  for  its  life.  Long  after  David  had  gone  to  his 
rest,  Christ  became  his  offspring,  by  being  born  of  one  of 
his  descendants.  This  can  never  be  explained  on  the  sup- 
position, that  Christ  possessed  but  one  nature.  The  cap- 
tious unbelieving  pharisees  were  confounded  when  he  pre- 


296  CHAPTER  XXII. 

sented  this  fact  to  them  for  solution.  "  What  think  ye  ol 
Christ,  said  he  1  Whose  son  is  he  ?  They  said  unto  him 
The  son  of  David.  He  said  unto  them,  How  then  doth 
David  by  the  Spirit  call  him,  Lord  ?  If  David  call  him, 
Lord,  how  is  he  his  son  ?  And  no  man  was  able  to  answer 
him  a  word." 

The  bright  and  morning  star.  A  star  is  an  emblem  of 
an  eminent  person  ;  a  teacher  or  ruler.  The  morning  star 
apjiears  in  the  east  before  the  dawn,  and  is  regarded  as 
the  harbinger  of  the  day.  Balaam  uttered  this  prophecy, 
'  There  shall  come  a  star  out  of  Jacob,  and  a  scepter  shall 
arise  out  of  Israel.'  That  star  was  the  Son  of  God  ;  that 
scepter  was  the  symbol  of  his  government.  At  his  nativ- 
ity the  wise  men  in  the  east  saw  an  extraordinary  star  or 
meteor,  and  at  once  concluded,  that  it  betokened  the  birth 
of  the  promised  king,  and  they  followed  its  guidance  till  it 
brought  them  to  Bethlehem.  The  world  was  then  in  a  state  of 
deep  moral  darkness,  a  long  and  dreary  night  had  bi'ooded 
over  it.  The  bright  morning  star  arose,  announcing  the 
approach  of  a  new  day.  A  brighter  era  dawned,  and  men 
besian  to  awake  from  the  slumber  of  ages. 

17.  And  the  Spirit  and  the  bride  sag,  Come.  And  let 
him  that  heareth  sag,  Come.  And  let  him  that  is  athirst 
come.  And  ivhosoever  will,  let  him  take  the  water  of  life 
freely. — Just  at  the  close  of  the  sacred  canon  we  have  the 
renewal  of  the  gracious  invitation  of  the  Saviour  to  come  and 
participate  freely  in  the  blessings  he  has  to  bestow.  The 
Spirit  and  the  bride  sag,  come.  All  the  instructions  and 
the  influences  of  the  Spirit  are  for  convincing  us  of  sin,  and 
for  winning  us  to  Him,  who  gave  himself  a  ransom  for  us. 
The  church,  Avhich  is  the  bride,  animated  by  the  Spirit, 
gives  forth  the  same  invitation.  Those  who  truly  love  Christ 
desire  that  others  should  love  him.     Those  who  drink  of 


CHAPTER  XXII.  297 

the  fountain  of  life  desire,  that  others  should  partake  of  its 
refreshing  waters.  When  believers  feel  and  act  right,  they 
pray  and  labor  for  the  salvation  of  their  fellow  men. 

Let  liim  who  heareth,  say,,  come.  Those  who  are  favored 
with  the  glad  tidings  of  the  gospel,  should  publish  them  to 
others; — should  give  forth  the  invitation  to  their  fellow 
men,  and  urge  their  acceptance  of  the  profiered  blessings. 

And  let  him  who  is  athirst,  come.  All  who  feel  their  ne- 
cessities, and  desire  the  blessings  of  grace  and  salvation, 
are  made  welcome.  The  promise  to  those  who  hunger  and 
thirst  after  righteousness  is,  that  they  shall  be  filled.  The 
soul  that  earnestly. .desires  conformity  to  God,  and  the  en- 
joyment of  his  favor,  will  not  be  left  in  darkness  and  des- 
titution. Let  those  who  fear,  that  the  wished-for  blessings 
are  not  for  them,  cast  away  their  unbelief,  and  come  to  Him 
in  whom  is  all  fullness  for  the  supply  of  their  wants. 

And  whosoever  will,  let  him  take  the  water  of  life  freely. 
As  a  free  gift  it  is  oflered,  and  as  such  it  must  be  received. 
No  works  can  purchase  it ;  no  religious  performances  can 
merit  it.  Pardon,  justification  and  sanctification,  are  be- 
stowed freely  through  Jesus  Christ  on  condition  of  believing. 
Seven  hundred  years  before  Christ,  the  voice  of  Isaiah  gave 
forth  a  similar  invitation  in  these  words,  '  Ho,  every  one 
who  thirsteth,  come  ye  to  the  waters,  and  he  who  hath  no 
money;  come  ye  buy  and  eat ;  yea,  come,  buy  wine  and 
milk,  without  moneys  and  without  price.'  The  Christian 
seer  closes  the  last  of  prophetic  visions,  with  renewing  the 
gracious  invitation  of  the  Lord,  uttered  by  his  servant  in 
olden  time.  All  are  guilty  and  condemned  ;  and  all  are 
made  welcome  to  grace  and  life  through  the  Redeemer. 

18  and  19.  For  I  testify  unto  every  man  that  heareth  the 
words  of  llie  'prophecy  of  this  book,  if  any  man  shall  add  unto 
these  thinys,   God  shall  add  unto  him  the  jj/c/v/kcs  that  are 


298  CHAPTER  XXII. 

written  in  this  book.  And  if  ant/  7nan  shall  take  away  from 
the  words  of  the  hook  of  this  prophecy^  God  shall  take  away 
his  part  out  of  the  book  of  life,  and  out  of  the  holy  city,  and 
from  the  things  lohich  are  written  in  this  book. — A  solemn 
caution  is  given  against  making  any  alteration  in  these  pro- 
phetic announcements  either  by  addition  or  deduction. 
They  are  given  under  the  highest  sanction  of  divine  inspira- 
tion, and  no  one  may  presume  to  alter  them.  A  disregard 
of  this  prohibition  is  threatened  with  the  infliction  of  the 
plagues  written  herein,  or  with  the  deprivation  of  the  bless- 
ings proffered.  Wc  are  not  to  suppose,  that  this  was  in- 
tended to  prevent  a  careful  study  and  an  honest  explanation 
of  the  various  symbols  employed  in  these  predictions.  A 
sincere  endeavor  to  understand  the  things  revealed,  cannot  be 
regarded  as  a  sin.  While  we  should  be  careful  not  to  let 
loose  our  fancies  on  a  book  so  eminently  hieroglyphical ; 
we  should  not  be  deterred  from  efforts  to  know  what  is 
written  for  our  instruction. 

20.  He  which  testifieth  these  things  saith,  Surely  I  come 
quickly :  Amen.  Even  so,  come,  Lord  Jesus. — He  who  tes- 
tifieth is  Jesus  Christ,  as  is  shown  in  the  first  chapter.  Tlic 
closing  words  of  his  testimony  are.  Surely,  I  come  quickly  : 
Amen.  To  this  the  apostle  gave  his  hearty  assent, — Even 
so,  come.  Lord  Jesus.  It  is  not  necessary  to  repeat  the  in- 
terpretation already  given  conccrnii;ig  the  speedy  coming  of 
Christ.  The  expression  has  been  suborned  to  the  mainten- 
ance of  the  opinion,  that  he  Avill  shortly  come  and  reign  in 
person  with  his  saints  on  earth.  As  early  as  the  second  cen- 
tury this  theory  was  promulgated  and  extensively  received. 
In  the  third  century  it  fell  into  discredit,  and  has  since  been 
repeatedly  revived.  In  our  day  a  prodigious  excitement 
has  been  raised  by  literalists  and  pseudo-prophets,  affirming 
with  the  utmost  confidence,  that  the  personal  appearing  of 


CHAPTER  XXn.  299 

the  Son  of  God  is  to  be  daily  and  hourly  expected  to  raise 
and  judge  the  righteous,  and  reign  with  them  a  thousand 
years.  As  we  testified  at  the  time,  that  whole  theory  is  a 
chimera  based  upon  a  gross  misinterpretation  of  the  sacred 
writings. 

Extraordinary  events  in  divine  providence  are  called  a 
coming  of  the  Lord.  Thus,  the  effiision  of  the  Sj)irit  on  the 
day  of  Pentecost  is  called  by  Christ  himself  his  coming  in 
his  kingdom.  '  Verily,  I  say  unto  you,  There  are  some 
standing  here,  ivho  shall  not  taste  of  death  till  they  see  the  Son 
of  man  coming  in  his  kingdom.''  Matt.  16  :  28.  The  de- 
struction of  Jerusalem  and  the  Jewish  commonwealth,  he 
styles  his  '  coming  in  the  clouds  of  heaven  ivith  potver  and 
great  glory.''  Matt.  24  :  30.  To  this  very  event,  which 
was  just  at  hand  when  John  wrote  this  book,  the  expression 
probably  refers.  Behold,  I  come  quicldy.  A  providential 
coming  is  threatened  in  nearly  all  the  messages  to  the  seven 
churches,  to  which  this  revelation  was  addressed.  Thus  to 
one  he  said,  '  Repent,  and  do  the  first  works,  or  else  I  will 
come  to  thee  quickly  and  remove  thy  candlestick  out  of  its 
place.'  To  another,  '  If  thou  shalt  not  watch,  I  will  come  on 
thee  as  a  thief  And  to  another,  '  Behold,  I  come  quickly.' 
Every  one  perceives,  that  these  were  not  'jx^rsonal  comings, 
but  only  providential  dispensations.  This  mode  of  expres- 
sion is  common  in  the  Old  Testament,  as  any  one  can  sec 
with  the  help  of  a  concordance. 

The  response  which  the  apostle  gave,  affords  evidence  of 
the  correctness  of  this  interpretation.  Even  so,  come.  Lord 
Jesus.  The  idea,  that  John  desired  the  speedy  coming  of 
Christ  to  put  an  end  to  the  present  system,  to  raise  the 
dead,  and  judge  mankind,  is  utterly  inconsistent  with  the 
far-reaching  scope  of  the  prophecies,  which  he  had  just  writ- 
ten. A  long  scries  of  events,  stretching  far  beyond  our 
own  times,  was  to  transpire,  before  the  period  should  ar- 


300  CHAPTER  XXII. 

rive  at  which  many  have  fixed  the  second  Advent.  By  no 
fair  construction  can  it  be  made  out,  that  Christ  declared 
his  second  personal  Advent  to  be  just  at  hand, — to  take 
place  quickly.  The  lapse  of  time  has  jjroved  the  fallacy  of 
such  notions. 

But,  in  the  sense  of  a  providential  coming,  by  which  I 
mean  a  manifestation  of  his  wisdom  and  goodness,  his  power 
and  justice  in  bringing  to  pass  what  he  had  promised  or 
threatened ;  John  might  well  express  his  assent  ttf  it.  The 
term  quickly,  may  refer  either  to  the  events  which  were 
about  to  take  place  in  relation  to  the  Jewish  nation  ;  or, 
that  he  would  soon  begin  the  fulfillment  of  the  predictions 
of  this  book. 

21.  The  grace  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ  he  with  you  all. 
Amen. — The  apostolic  benediction  or  rather  prayer,  closes 
this  most  difficult  and  remarkable  portion  of  the  sacred  vol- 
ume. It  is  the  expression  of  his  earnest  desire,  that  the 
grace  or  favor  of  Christ  might  ever  be  with  his  Christian 
brethren  to  whom  these  recorded  visions  were  sent.  The 
benevolent  wish  of  his  heart  was,  that  they  might  ever  en- 
joy the  presence  and  love  of  the  risen  Eodecmer.  This 
would  give  them  comfort  and  inward  peace  amidst  the  trials, 
that  awaited  them.  This  would  make  them  strong  and  un- 
daunted in  the  time  of  op})Osition  and  persecution,  and  en- 
able them  to  obtain  the  crown  of  victoi-y. 

I  have  now  completed  the  examination  of  this  book  of 
symbols  and  hieroglyphics.  That  I  have  executed  the  task 
in  a  manner  that  will  be  satisfactory  to  every  mind,  is  more 
than  I  have  dared  to  expect ;  esj^ecially  as  I  have  deviated 
in  some  important  respects  from  the  interpretations  which 
are  common.  If  what  I  have  written  shall  awaken  a  love 
of  the  scriptures,  and  a  desire  to  know  more  of  their  im- 
[)ort ;  and  if  it  shall  strengthen  the  confidence  of  any  in  the 


CHAPTER  XXII.  301 

sure  word  of  prophecy  and  in  the  vrisdom  of  the  divine 
government,  my  labor  will  not  be  in  vain. 

If  I  have  given  a  just  interpretation,  then,  the  dogma  is 
refuted,  that  the  prophecies  cannot  be  understood.  A  reve- 
lation which  cannot  be  understood  is  no  revelation  at  all ; 
and  a  professed  explanation,  which  leaves  the  mind  as  much 
in  the  dark  at  the  close,  as  at  the  beginning,  is  no  explana- 
tion at  all.  A  fountain  sealed,  does  no  benefit  to  the  thirs- 
ty. It  is  useless  until  the  cover  be  removed,  and  its  Avaters 
be  made  accessible.  John  was  commanded  not  to  seal  up 
the  sayings  of  this  book,  which  is  a  plain  intimation,  that  its 
developments  and  teachings  were  intended  for  the  benefit 
of  all. 

Standing  at  the  commencement  of  the  Christian  era,  he 
was  shown  in  long  perspective,  the  principal  events  which 
were  to  affect  favorably  and  injuriously  the  interests  of  the 
church  through  the  millennium  onward  to  the  end  of  time. 
He  traces  its  progress  through  scenes  of  light  and  shade, — 
of  persecution  and  triumph  ;  till  the  mind  is  thrown  out  on 
a  period  of  unknown  extent,  when  the  tabernacle  of  God 
vriW  be  with  men  ;  and  the  light  of  truth,  and  the  beauty  of 
holiness  will  enrobe  the  new  Jerusalem, — the  extended  com- 
munity of  believers ;  and  the  vastly  improved  condition  of 
mankind  Avill  verify  that  strongest  of  metaphors, — "  a  new 
heaven  and  a  new  earth.'''' 

A  part  of  this  great  series,  thus  foreshown,  has  been  ful- 
filled ;  and  every  year  is  developing  its  destined  proportion 
of  what  remains.  It  is  not  according  to  the  analogy  of 
divine  providence  to  produce  great  moral  changes  in  a  sud- 
den manner ;  and  therefore  we  should  not  expect,  that  a 
world  so  entirely  overspread  with  wickedness, — so  thorough- 
ly estranged  from  holiness,  will  be  reformed  without  long- 
continued  efforts.  Ours  is  the  age  of  conflict,  of  commo- 
tion, of  experimenting,  of  discipline,  and  education.  Man- 
14 


302  CHAPTER  XXII. 

kind  are  pupils  in  this  great  school  of  divine  providence- 
The  causes  of  the  evils  which  have  afflicted  the  race,  are 
becoming  better  understood,  and  the  remedy  is  beginning 
to  be  perceived  and  applied.  It  is  a  pure  gospel  and  a  pure 
worship,  informing  men  of  their  rights,  and  leading  them  in 
the  way  of  peace  and  life,  which  under  God,  are  to  effect  the 
change.  May  we  so  learn  the  lessons  of  heavenly  Avisdom, 
that  those  who  come  after  us,  may  be  benefited ;  and  that 
there  may  be  an  advance  made  toward  that  bright  consum- 
mation, which  the  teachings  of  prophecy  have  placed  be- 
fore us. 

To  us  the  fountain  of  life  is  opened, — along  by  ua  flows 
the  pure  river  of  living  water,  and  whoever  will  may  take 
of  it  freely.  All  may  partake  of  the  blessings  of  which  it 
is  the  emblem.  Why,  then,  should  any  famish,  when 
Christ  says,  Whosoever  will,  let  him  take  the  water  of  life 
freely  ?  The  Sun  of  righteousness  has  risen,  and  sheds  his 
heavenly  light  around  us.  Awake  thou,  who  sleepcst,  and 
arise  from  the  dead,  and  Christ  will  give  thee  light. 

"  King  of  nations,  plant  thy  throne, 
Send  tlie  law  from  Zion  forth, 
Over  all  the  willing  earth  : 
Earth,  whose  Sabbath  beauties  liso 
Crown'd  with  more  than  paradise. 

"  Be  our  souls  in  peace  possest, 
While  Avc  seek  the  promisV!  rest, 
And  from  every  heart  and  iiome 
Breathe  the  prayer,  Lord  Jesus,  come! 
Haste  to  set  thy  people  free  ; 
Come,  creation  groans  for  thee." 


BS2825.M281 

An  exposition  of  the  Revelation  of  John 

Princeton  Theological  Seminary-Speer  Library 


1    1012  00070  0064 


